IN MEMORIAM-
BERNARD MOSES
(/ -J -^
ITALIAN
L I
> •
CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR..
y[jj^./r kAMAJUlL ^'^S^-^-iMLU>^^
By L. B, CUORE. -^-a' -^ -.
FIFTH EDITION, REVISED
BOSTON:
8. R. URBINO, 14 BROMFIELD STREET.
NEW YORK:
LEYPOLDT & HOLT ; F. W. CIIRISTERN.
1870.
B€RNARD MOSES
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1864, by
S. R. URBINO,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts.
Presswork by John Wilson and Son.
' )
rJ
PREFACE.
This Grammar, based on that of Robello and others,
claims to be all that is necessary for the study of the
elements of the Italian lano^uas^e.
Great pains have been taken to present the verbs in a
clear, concise manner ; and though, for the sake of easy
comparison, they are placed at the end of the book, the
student is requested to study a part of them with every
lesson.
It is hoped that this little work will fill the place for
which it is intended.
THE AUTHOR.
7749M
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Paob
Italian Gramimar 1
CHAPTER I.
Pronunciation 1
Etyimology 15
CHAPTER n.
The Article c . . 16
CHAPTER m.
Union of the Articles and Prepositions 21
CHAPTER IV.
The Noun 26
CHAPTER V.
The Plural of ITouns and Adjectives 32
CHAPTER VI.
The Cases of Nouns 40
CHAPTER Vn.
Pronouns 46
CHAPTER Vin.
Pronouns: Personal and Conjunctive 65
[y]
Vi TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IX. PAOB
The Adjective 61
CHAPTER X.
Adjectives : their Compahatives » • 67
CHAPTER XI.
The Adjectives : Superlatives • 72
CHAPTER Xn.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DiMHSfUTIVES 76
CHAPTER Xm.
The Numeral Adjectives • • • • 82
CHAPTER XIV.
Relatr^e Pronouns 89
CHAPTER XV.
Possessive Adjective Pronouns . • • 96
CHAPTER XVI.
Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns 103
CHAPTER XVII. •
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns •"•••109
CHAPTER XVHL
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns (continued) 115
CHAPTER XIX.
The Prepositions, Bi, A, Da 121
TABLE OF CONTENTS. viJ
CHAPTER XX. r^oH
The Prepositions Con, In, Per 129
CHAPTER XXI.
The PREPOgiTiONS (continued) 135
CHAPTER XXn.
The Verbs Essere and Avtre 141
CHAPTER XXm.
The Verbs aj^td their Syntax 146
CHAPTER XXIV.
The Verb: The Subjunctive Mood 153
CHAPTER XXV.
The Infinitive, Gerund, Present and Past Participles 159
CHAPTER XXVI.
The Verbs Anddre, Bare, Fare, and Stare 166
CHAPTER XXVn.
Adverbs 171
CHAPTER XXVm.
Conjunctions and Interjections 179
VERBS.
Auxiliary Verbs 186
Regular Verbs 188
Irregular Verbs 214
Defective Verbs 246
Proverbs 259
Idioms » 263
voc^vbulary 266
Index 275
• • t •■ •
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
Italian Gramihar teaches the principles of the ItaHan
language. These relate, —
1. To its written characters ;
2. To its pronunciation ;
3. To the classification and derivation of its words ;
4. To the construction of its sentences ;
5. To its versification.
The first part is called Orthography ; the second,
Orthoepy ; the third, Etymology ; the fourth. Syntax ;
and the fifth. Prosody.
CHAPTER I.
PEONUNCIATION.
The Italian alphabet consists of twenty-two letters : —
A, a ; B, b ; C, c ; D, d ; E, e ; F, f ; G, g ; H, h ; I, i ; J, j ;
L, 1; M, m; N, n ; O, o; P, p; Q, q; R, r; S, s ; T, t; U, u ;
V, V ; Z, z.
The letters Jc, iv, x, and y, sometimes occur, but only
in words derived from foreign sources.
SOUNDS OF THE ITALIAN LETTERS.
In Italian, every vowel must be distinctly sounded.
The five vowels, a, e, i, o, 7i, are thus pronounced : —
1
2
IT^O^IAN GKAIVIMAR.
SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS.
A, as
E, as
I, as
O, as
U, as
a
ee
o
ou
in father ;
in made ;
in eel;
in Rome ;
in sowp.
REMAllKS.
E has two different sounds, — open and close :
E close, as in grey, pain :
Tema, fear.
Venti, twenty.
Mela, apple.
E open, as in mate, name :
T'ema, subject.
Venti, winds.
Avena, oats.
O has likewise two sounds, — open and close :
0 open, as in cord :
Botta, blow.
Rosa, rose.
0 close, as in bone :
Botte, cask.
Ora. hour.
To become thoroughly acquainted with the open and
close sounds of E and O, three things are especially
necessary: 1. Practice ; 2. Peactice ; 3. PRACTICE.
sounds of the consonants.
The greater portion of the consonants in the Italian
language are pronounced as in English,
are the exceptions : —
The following
c and ff before e
of speech. It is
C, which takes the sound of ch before i or e: otherwise it
sounds like k.
H, which is used only to harden the sound of
and ^, and to distinguish different parts
never sounded.
J sounds like ee.
Q is never used without u, and is sounded like q in the English
word quire.
R, which is sounded as if rolled on the point of
Z, which is sounded like ts and ds.
L, M, N, and R are liquids, or semivowels.
the tongue.
PRONUNCIATION.
COMPOUND SOUNDS.
Ch i
sounds
Gh
»
Gn
jj
Gli
5)
Sci
))
SCE
J)
SCH
?)
like k in English.
hard as in English.
like 71 in the word onion.
like // in the word William.
like SHE.
like SHA.
like SK.
Cc, followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like tch in the
English word match.
Gg, followed by e, «', sounds like dg in the word lodge.
The exact sound of the letters can be obtained only by
hearing good pronunciation, and by repeating after the
teacher, as almost every language has some sounds which
can only be learned by practising with an experienced
teacher.
But, as an Italian teacher is not always to be found, we
shall endeavor to give a few concise and practical rules,
by which the student may make himself familiar with the
language of Dante, Alfieri, Boccaccio, Ariosto, Tasso,
Petrarca, MafFei, Manz6ni, and a host of other writers,
whose works will never cease to form part of the belles
lettres of every country.
Diphthongs, as we understand them in English, do not
exist in Italian. Dr. Bachi, in his excellent Grammar,
speaks gf diphthongs and triphthongs, by which he means
such a blending of the vowels that each is but faintly
lieard.
The apostrophe (') indicates that a vowel is omitted ;
as, Voro, instead of lo dro, the gold ; deW dnhna, instead
of della dnima, of the soul ; &c.
The_^ra\'e_accent (') i^s jused on the last vowels of
some words ; as, cittd (formerly cittade) : or as a termina-
tion which must be pronounced sharply; as, avrd, amoy
resso.
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION.
A Casa, musica, danza.
A Felicita, dara, sara.
E (close) Bene, pedone.
E (open) Tema, pena, erba.
J Principj, proverbj, compendj.
I Inimico, clbo, ripieno.
O (close) Corso, amore, fonte.
O (open) Povero, tolto, popolo.
U Duo, tiio, siio.
Ce Cento, cece, fellce.
Ci Pacifico, dieci, cibo.
Ch Chiodo, chi, che.
Ga, Go, Gu .... Gamba, pago, gusto.
Ge, Gi Germano, digito, legione.
Gn Campagna, magnetico.
Gli (liquid) .... Figlio, figlia, gli, meglio.
S (strong) Santo, studio, senso.
S (soft) Guisa, casa, cosa.
ScA, Sco, Scu . . . Scabro, scolare, scuola.
ScE, Sci Scena, scinto, fascia.
Zz {z like ts) ... Nozze, fazzoletto.
Zz {z like ds) . . . Azzurro, mezzo.
REMARKS.
Double consonants must be very flistinctly pronounced,
thus: im?nenso, im-ynen-so ; innocente, in-7io-cente ; &Q..
Jivery syllable must contain a vowel, and cannQt^cceiye
more than one consonant afler it in the same syllable,
but may be preceded by one, two, or three. All Italian
words end with a vowel, except z'Z, the ; con^ witli ; non,
not ; per^ for ; and a few others. The final vowel is,
however, very often dropped for euphony.
READING EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION.
To impress the following exercise on the memory of k
the pupil, many English words are omitted. The pupil
is required to fill them up : this can be done with the help
of the dictionary.
PEONUNCIATION. 5
LA FANCIULLA DI BUON i'nDOLE.
THE GIP.L OF GOOD DISPOSITION.
La Marchesa Giulia andava in carrettella a far visita alia
The went little carriage to make to the
sorella die stiiva in villa, e aveva con se solamente una
sister who was country, and had with her only a
cameriera e uno staffiere. Una ruota della carrettella si riippe,
chambermaid and a footman. wheel of the ^^ '' :^ broke,
e benche per budna sorte non rimanesse ferito nessuno,
although by good fortune remained wounded no one,
bisogno scendere, e adattarsi di andare a piedi ad un
it was necessary to descend (adapt) prepare to go on foot
villaggio lontano di li quasi tre miglia. La Marchesa
distant from there almost three miles.
mando innanzi il servitore per fare avvisare un carrozziere
sent before the servant for to make to give notice carriage-maker
clie venisse ad accomodare la carrettella ; il cocchiere rimase
which should come mend coachman stayed
con i cavc411i, e la signora prese a braccio la cameriera, e si
with the horses lady took arm
avvio.
set forward.
Era sul mezzogiorno, e il sole dava lore molta noja ;
It was mid-day sun gave to them much inconvenience;
dimodoche la signora, non avvezza a camminare a piedi, presto
so that accustomed walk on foot vciy soon
presto si stracco, e per riposarsi ebbe ad uscir di stnida, ed
was tired for to repose had leave street
entnire in un prato dove erano delle querce. La si mise a
enter meadow where there were of the oaks. There she put herself
sedere all' ombra sotto uno di quegli alberi, e guardo con
sit to the shade under one of those trees observed
piacere il bel prospetto die le era dinanzi. A un tratto clla
pleasure fine prospect which her was before. all at once she
vide passar pel prato una ragazzina con un fjistt'llo di legna
saw to pass through little girl faggot of wood
m capo,
ou head.
1»
6 ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR.
Ragazzina piu bella di quella non era mai passata sott'
Girl more beautiful than that was ever before
occhio alia Marchesa. Le sue carni parevano latte e r6se, i suoi
eye her cheeks appeared milk roses her
grand' occhi celesti erano pieni di dolcezza, e sotto una pezzuola
great eyes blue were full sweetness under handkerchief
di cotone giallo, annodata intorno al capo, venivan fuori le
cambric yellow, tied about the head, came out
ciocche de' suoi biondi capelli, e davan grazia vieppiu a quella
tufts fair hair gave grace much more that
bella fisonomia. La signora non aveva figli, e se ne
had children herself of it
addolorava. A veder dunque quella cara fanciullina, non pote
grieved. see then dear girl was able
a meno d'invidiarelamadresiia; e disse alia cameriera di andare
at least to envy said * go
a chiamar la bambina e condurgliela. Questa si avvicino con un
call child conduct her to her. advanced
contegno modesto ma franco, poso il suo fastello, fece un
countenance but put down made
inchino alia Marchesa, e le domando se avea qualcosa da
bow to her asked if she had something to
comandarle. Niente, rispose la dama ; voglio soltanto parlare
command of her. Nothing, answered lady ; I wish only to speak
un po' con te : mettiti a sedere qui sulF erba, e prima di tutto
little thee : put thyself sit here grass before all
dimmi come tu ti chiami ? Rosa Liici, al comando suo.
tell me how thou thyself callest? at 3^our.
II babbo e la mamma li hai vivi ? II mio babbo e morto ch' e
papa them hast thou alive ? my is dead
un pezzo ; la mia mamma ha me sola e si sta qui in un villaggio
has alone is here
vicino. M' immagino che non siate molto feli'ci. Oh, perche ?
near. I imagine maybe very happy. why?
Noi ci vogliamo bene, e siamo contente. Ma mi pare
We ourselves wish well are to me it seems
che voi siete molto povere !
you are very poor!
Noi ci guadagniamo il pane con le nostre fatiche:
We to ourselves gain the bread the our labors:
PRONUNCIATION. 7
abbiamo delle galline che ci fanno le uova ; e la mia mamma
we have some hens which make eggs
oggi e andata al paese a venderle, ed i quattrini si serbano
to-day is gone to the country to sell them the money serves
per la pigione di casa. E in che lavorate voi per guadagnarvi
rent house. work you gain
da mangiare ? Nell' estate noi andiamo a sarchiare, e dopo la
to eat ? In the summer we go to weed after
mietitiira andiamo a spigolare. Ma se durate tanta fatica,
harvest glean. But if endure so much fatigue,
mangiate male e andate mal vestite, come potete voi essere
you eat badly go ill dressed, how can you be
contente ? Noi a tutte queste cose non ci pensiamo
We (of all these things not ourselves think
nemmeno ; quando s' ha fame si ringrazia Iddio di avere di
at all ; when one has hunger one thanks God to have of
che satollarsi, e ogni cosa par buona. Se noi non abbiamo
what satisfy every thing seems good. If we not have
vestiti belli, siarao pure coperte e decenti ; sono solamente i
clothes fine we are yet covered are only
})igri che vanno sempre strappati e siidici ; la mamma pensa a
lazy who go always ragged dirty thinks
rassettare le nostre robicciole, ed io gia comincio ad aiutarla.
to repair our clothes I already begin to help her.
Rosa, vuoi venir meco a quel villaggio ? Volontieri : tanto la
wilt come with me to that Willingly whilst
mia mamma fino a stassera non torna; ma bisogna che
until this evening returns it is necessary
intanto io porti a casa mia questo fastello. E se lo comprassi
meanwhile carry house my if it should buy
.0 ? Allora poi ! ma costa sei soldi, veh ! Eccoti sei soldi
I? Then but costs six cents, hum! Behold
(I'ispose la Marchesa alzandosi), posa li il tuo fastello, e vieni
rising, put there como
con noi. Ma s' ella 1' ha comprato, bisogna ch' io gliclo porti
But if you have it bought, it is necessary tliat I it carry
(e voleva ripigliarlo), ma la Marchesa glielo impedi, e prcse
she wished to take it again prevented took
ia via del villaggio, dove arrivata, entro in un albergo {hotel)
way where entered
d' apparenza assai decente.
appearance enough
8 ITALI^^ GKAJiOIAR.
Lo staffiere venne a dirle clie per accomodare la sua
The footman came to tell her mend
carrozza gli bisognavano cinque ore. La Marchesa ordino il
needed five hours. - ordered
pranzo, V ostessa la condiisse in una stanza pulita ove essa entro
dinner hostess conducted room clean where she entered
insieme con le altre due; diede poi segretamente degll ordini
together other two; gave then secretly of the orders
alia cameriera che usci per eseguirli. In questo frattempo la
went out execute. meanwhile
Marchesa continuo a parlare con Rosina, e si trovo contenta
to speak found
sempre piu del candore delle sue risposte, e sopratiitto della sua
always more candor her answers above all
tenerezza per la propria madre.
tenderness own
La cameriera torno carica de' vestiti che aveva comprati nel
returned laden clothes she had bought
villaggio; spoglio, per drdine della padrona, la picclna, e le
imdressed, by order mistress little one
mlse indosso una camicia di cotone, un sottanino ricaraato, e
put upon her shirt cambric petticoat embroidered
una vestina di seta color verde chiaro, con un ornamento di
govra silk green light ornament
merletti color di rosa ; poi le acconcio i capelli, colle trecce le
lace then dressed hair braids
formo una specie di corona sul capo, e vi pose una ghirlanda di
formed sort crown head put garland
fiori. Rosa dapprima faceva la ritrosa, e si vergognava a
flowers. at first made shy was ashamed
vedersi vestire da signora ; ma poi, siccome era di naturale
to see to dress ' then, as she was by
molto compiacente, si sottomise a tutto. Quando fu assettata
very complaisant submitted all. When she was fitted out
per bene, la Marchesa la condiisse davanti alio specchio, e le
fully her conducted before her mirror and to her
disse che si guardasse. La picclna si guardo sott' occhio
said that herself she should look at. little one regarded
n^llo specchio, sorrise ed arrosi.
smiled and blushed.
PRONUNCIATION. 9
V
Che ne dici eh! disse la Marchesa ; non ci a^resti
What to it sayest thou -would have
gusto di star sempre vestita in questo modo? Si; ma come si
taste to be always dressed manner? Yes how
pu6 con questi abiti andar a tagliar 1' erba e sarchiare ? Vedi, se
can clothes to go cut grass to weed ? See if
tu fossi la mia figliuola, com' io lo desidererei, tu non faticheresti
thou wert daughter as I it should desire fatigue thyself
piu in questo modo ; tu impareresti a leggere, scrivere, e
more shouldst learn to read write
cantare ; e ti rimarrebbe anche tempo per divertirti ; io ti
to sing to thee would remain even time to amuse
menerei a spasso in carrozza, e ti farei giocare in tante
would lead would make to amuse so many
maniere. A me, la mia mamma ha detto sempre che Dio sa
manners (ways). To me has said always that God knows
quel che fa. Dio ha voluto che ella fosse Marchesa, ed io
what he does. wished you should be
lina contadina, ma io preghero Dio di darle una figliolina, ed
will pray to give you
ella e tanto buona che il signore la fara contenta.
vou are so lord you will make
La signora Giulia non si saziava di accarezzare Rosina:
satisfied to caress
faceva ammirare alia cameriera la gentilezza dei suoi modi, le
she made admire gentleness
grazie della persona ; e questa, per far la corte alia padrona la
she to please the her
lodava anche piii di lei, e la Rosina ascoltava queste Iddi tutta
praise than she heard
confusa. Vennero ad avvisare che il pranzo era all' ordine:
They came inform dinner was ready
la Marchesa passo in una piccola sala con Rosa per mano, e la
passed into a little parlor hand he
fece mettere a sedere a tavola accanto a se. La povera
caused to put sit table at the side
fanciuUina si vergognava talmente, che quasi piangeva ma
bashful so almost to weep
vedendosi trattatta con tanta bonta, comincio a rassiciirarsi un
seeing herself treated kindness began re-assure
poco.
10 ITALIAN GllAIUMAR.
La minestra le parve si buona, che ne maiigio assai;
soup to her seemed of it she eat enough
e il lesso c.lie venne dopo, le parve una vivanda sqnisita ; e si
boiled meat came after to her seemed food exquisite
sazio afFatto ; dimodoche, quando vennero in tavola gli altri
satiated so that when came the other
piatti per quanto la Signora la pregasse, non pote piu mangiare.
dishes begged was able to eat.
11 Vino poi non vi fu modo di farglielo bere ; appena Y ebbe
wine then there was to make to drink; hardly had
ella assaggiato si riscosse, e chiese che per carita le dessero
she tasted shuddered asked for charity her should give
deir acqua. Allorche ella vide venire le frutta e i dolci, mando
When saw to come fruit sweets uttered
un grido di sorpresa. Un altro pranzo ! eh ! Ella poteva
cry surprise. dinner could
chiamare tiitti i ragazzi del villaggio, v' era da sfaraarli tiitti
call children there was to satisfy
Ebbene Rosa, se tu viioi venire a star con me, tu sarai
Well if thou wishest to come to be shalt be
trattata tutti i giorni come oggi, e anche meglio. Per me,
treated days as to-day even better.
Signora mia, farei tutto per compiacerla; ma egli e
I would do to please j'ou
impossibile ch' io lasci la mia mamma, che non ha altro che
should leave has other than
me per ajutarla e vegliarla quand' e malata. Io paghero una
to help her to care for her when sick. will pay
donna perche la serva. Si, ma qu^sta donna non le vorra
woman for her serve (that she may serve her). would wish
bene come io gliene voglio e la servira solamente per
well as to her wish her would serve only
guadagnare. La mia mamma ha preso ciira di me quand' io
to gain. taken care
era piccina; ora ch' io sono grande, non voglio abbandonarla ;
I wish
quando ella sara vecchia, io lavorero per darle da mangiare
will be old will work to give her to eat
edme ella faceva per me quando io non mi poteva guadagnare il
as did was able to gain the
PRONUNCIATION. 11
pdne. La Marchesa era intenerita dai sentimenti di questa
bread. affected by the
fanciulla, e non ebbe piu il coraggio d' insistere : le permise di
had permitted
riprendere la sua vesticciola, e tornar dalla mamma, die doveva
to take again dress return ought
cominciare ad essere in pensiero per l^i. Innanzi di lasciarla
to begin to be thought for her. Before allowing her
partire, 1' abbraccio, ed empi le sue tasche di quei pasticcini
to depart, she embraced her filled pockets cakes
e di quelle pastine che essa non aveva neppure assaggiate.
that pastry had not even tasted.
La Rosina pareva un uccelletto scappato dalle mani di un
appeared like a bird escaped hands
ragdzzo che lo volesse ingabbiare : aveva pr^so i suoi zoccoli
boy who it wished • to cage : she had taken wooden shoes
in mano, e cosi scalza correva tanto lesta, che la cameriera, a
hand so barefooted ran so quickly to
cui la marchesa aveva comandato di tenerle dietro, duro fatica
whom keep found it difficult
a non la perder di vista. Essa nonostante arrive al casolare
her to lose from sight. notwithstanding arrived house
quasi subito dopo Rosa, la trovo nelle braccie della sua
soon after her she found in the arms
mamma, alia quale ella raccontava che una bella signora la
related
Toleva condurre con se, promettendole vestiti belli e tre
wished to take her with her, promising her clothes fine three
pranzi ogni giorno. lo nondimeno son venuta via (aggiungeva
dinners every day. nevertheless am come added
^lla), perche sebbene io voglia bene a quella signora, la* non e
although wish well
poi la mia mamma,
then
La cameriera disse a quella contadina che dlla sua padr6na
told
era piaciuto tanto il buon cuore della Rosina, che voleva
pleased wished
• La for eWa, she.
12 ITALIAN GRAMMAE.
assicurarle una pensione di dugento franchi, e al suo ritorno
to secure to her two hundred francs return
dlla citta ne avr^bbe segnato il contratto : le lascio 1' indirlzzo,
would have to sign she left her direction
e le raccomando di venirla a vedere la domenica prossima, e
advised to come to see Sunday next
menar con se la Rosina. La donna glielo promise,
to bring with her it to her promised.
La Marchesa Giiilia, benche non fosse avvezza a sentirsi
although accustomed to hear herself
contradire, sicc6me d' altra parte 411a era generosa e di cuor
contradicted, on other hand heart
buono riconobbe che non avea potesta di disporre di Rosa contro
recognized power dispose against
il suo volere, ne di obbligarla a preferir lei alia propria madre ;
will, nor oblige her to prefer her to her own
percio si determino a farle in altro modo tiitto quel bene ch'
therefore determined another manner all the good
ella poteva. Accolse dunque le contadine con m61ta alFabilita,
she could. She approached then
e ddpo cb' ella ebbe parlato con la madre, non si maraviglio piu
after had spoken was astonished
delle qualita buone della figliudla. Quella donna in fatti 4ra
daughter. That lady fact was
tutta probita e delicatezza : contenta del suo state, non invidiava
all delicacy state . envy
niente i riccbi, i quali diceva essa, son pur sottop(5sti, come tutti
any one rich who said she are exposed
gli altri uomini, dlle malattie ed ai dispiaceri, e dovrdnno rendere
diseases and to misfortunes ought to render
un gran conto delle loro ricchezze, dove non se ne servano in
account riches where serve (use) for
bene.
good.
La Marcbesa fece alia Rosina il regalo che le aveva
made present for her she had
destindto, ed erano ire vaccherelle, le quali ella fece consegndre
three young cows which she made to consign
jlUa madre perche le conducesse con se : ed aggiunse, essere
should conduct added to be (it was)
PRONUNCLVTION. 13
6U0 desidei'io che la piccina non antlasse piu a lavorare alia
her desire should go work
campagna, ma badasse soltanto a vendere il latte e le uova.
country should care only to sell milk eggs.
Siccome poi, diss' ella, non deve Rosina star mai disoccupata,
But then, said ought to he ever unoccupied,
andra alia scuola del vostro villaggio, il restante dclla giornata
shall go school day
lo passera da una maestra che le insegnera a far la trina : alle
pass teacher her will teach to make lace
spese che occorreranno per la sua istruzione pensero io. Rosa
expense shall incur I will think.
e la sua md,dre volevano ringraziare la Signora, ma vinte dalle
wished to thank
lacrime non poterono articolare parola.
tears were able word.
Questo 'benefizio non poteva essere fatto a persone piu degne :
was able made any one more worthy
r educazione sviluppo nella fanciullina tutte le buone qualita
developed
che tralucevano in lei fin dall' infanzia. Un anno dopo ella
shone her from A year after
porto in regalo alia Marchesa una trIna lavorata con somma
carried present lace made
finezza ed era tanta da guarnire un vestito. La Marchesa seppe
enough to trim dress. knew
che quella famiglia, resa da lei agiata, risparmiava per
rendered saved
•
soccorrere i bisogndsi, e spiava tutte le occasioni per beneficare.
succor needy spied (watched)
Rosa era entrata appena ne' quindici anni, quando la
entered scarcely fifteenth year
Marchesa cadde in una gravissima malattia: suo marito era
fell in very serious sickness husband
in viaggio : e non aveva altro che la sua gente di servizio che
absent she had no others than people service who
r assistesse. Lo seppe Rosina, e subito, lasciando una sua vicina
her could assist. knew left neighbor
a giuirdia della casa e delle vaccherelle, parti per la citta
guard cows, she set out
2
14 ITALIAN GRAlVniAR.
insi^me colla mamma. Arrivate che furono, andarono alia
together with Arrived they were, they went
camera della Marchesa. Essa era fuori di se, ne riconosc^va
chamber She was out of her mind, neither recognized
alcuno ; e da quelle stato di delirio, cadeva poi in un profondo
no one fell
letargo che pareva morta. Tiitta la gente di casa era costernata,
appeared dead. people confounded
la cameriera, sommamente affeziooata alia sua padrdna, non
greatly attached
sapeva far altro che piangere, e non era buona a nulla. La
knew to do than to weep she was for nothing.
buona Liici fece rizfare accanto al letto della signora un
made to be placed by the side bed
letticciuolo : ed ella e Rosina vegliavano la signora dna notte
little bed watched
per una.
I medici s' intendevano con loro per la ciira dell' ammalata ;
depended upon them care sick (lady)
e tutto era adempito con la massima puntualita. In capo a nove
fulfilled greatest At the end of nine
giorni la malattia piglio buona piega : la Marchesa ritorno in se e
days took turn recovered
conobbe. quanto doveva alio zelo e all' affetto delle sue amorose
knew owed loving
assistenti. La povera Rosina era scolorita dalle inquietezze e
pale
ddlle nottate perdute ; ma i suoi occhi abbattuti ripigliarono
nights lost (sleepless nights) languid took again
la loro vivacita appena ella comincio a sperare nella guarigione
as soon as began hope cure
della sua benefattrice. Ella con le sue premure rese meno
cares rendered
spiacevole alia signora il tempo della convalescenza ; ora le
disagreeable now
legg(^va un bel libro, ora le raccontava qualche fatto interessante
read then related fact
accaduto nel suo villaggio : voleva anche pensare a vegliarla,
happened wished-— also - to take care of her
ETOIOLOGY. 15
ne permetteva che altri le facesse i brodi e preparasse le
others should make broths
medicine. In questo tempo il marito della Marchesa torno,
returned
ed essa, ritornata in perfetta salute, gli mostro quanto doveva a
returned health showed she owed
Roslna ed alia madre di lei, e gli disse clie oramai non le dava
now gave (had)
piu il cuore di separarsi da loro. Concertarono dimque di
heart They agreed then
mettere la Liici alia direzione della casa, sicuri che non
put sure
potevano affidarla meglio: la figlia poi non doveva aver altro
were able should have
titolo che di compagna ed arnica della Marchesa. Voi vi potete
can
figurdre, figliuoli miei, quanto volontieri accettarono esse tale
children they accepted
proposizione.
ETYMOLOGY.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
There are nine parts of speech in the Italian language :
— 1. The Article; 2. The Noun; 3. The Adjec-
tive; 4. The Pronoun ; 5. The Verb ; 6. The Ad-
verb ; 7. The Preposition; 8. The Conjunction;
9. The Interjection.
The first five are variable ; the four last, invariable.
The change which the first four undergo by means of
terminations is called declension : it refers to gender,
number, and case.
There are two genders in Italian, — the^ masculine and
the feminine.
There are also two numbers, — the singular and the
plural : and five cases, expressing the different relations
of words to each other ; namely, the nominative, genitive,
cjative, accusative, and ablative.
16 ITALIAN GEAMMAR.
The nominative case, or the subject, answers to the
question who? or what? as. Who is reading? The hoy.
The genitive or possessive case answers to the question
whose? QY of which? as, Whose book? The hoifs book.
The dative answers to the question to whom? as, To
whom shall I give it? To the hoy.
The accusative or objective case marks the object of
an action, and answers to the question wliom ? or what ?
as. Whom or what do you see? I see the hoy, the
house.
The ablative answers to the question from or by whom ?
as, From whom did you receive it? From my father?
CHAPTER n.
THE ARTICLE— L' ARTICOLO.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
La domenica sento la messa . On Sunday I attend (the) mass.*
Il lunedl spmdo IL dandro . On Monday I spend the money.
Il martedl viene la serva . The servant comes on Tuesday.
Il mercoledi stiro la hiancheria On Wednesday I iron the linen.
Il giovedX pdgo il cameriere . On Thursday I pay the domestic.
Il venerdi riscuoto l' entrdte . On Friday I receive the rent.
It. sdbato aspetto il sdrto . . I expect ^/ie tailor on (the) Sat-
urday.f
The article is used much more frequently in _ Italian
than m iiinglisJi.
There are two articles, — Definite and Indefinite. J
The Definite has several variations for the sake of
eu
iphony.
* In the translation of the Italian examples, -words which cannot be expressed are
inserted within marks of parenthesis.
t The pupil is requested to commit to memory the Italian words occurring in Rules
or Examples, as their meaning will be seldom repeated. The conjugation of the verbs
will be found at the end of the book.
X The indefinite article, tot, loio, ^tna^ a or an, will be treated of in a subsequent
."■bapter. (See chapter on Nximeral Adjectives.)
THE ARTICLE. 17
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
Singular, ^7, lo^* masculine ; Ig^ feminine.
Plural, e, gli (/^'),t masculine ; J^ feminine.
REMARKS.
I. The article ii, plural i, is most generally used
as,
II tempermo, i temperini ; il sigillo, i sigilU.
The penknife, the penknives ; the seal, the seals.J
II. The article lo, plural gli, is 2)laced, — 1st, Before
' nouns beginning with s followed by another consonant ;
as, —
Lo specchio, gli specchi ; lo spirito, gli spiriti.
The mirror, the mirrors ; the spirit, the spirits.
2d, Before nouns commencing with a vow^el, eliding
the 0, aria replacing it by an apostrophe ; as, —
X' occhio, gli bcchi ; V amico, gli amici.
The ej^e, the eyes ; the friend, the friends.
in. Thejvord del, gods, takes the article ^li. We
say, II Dio di Ahrdnio, gli del del paganesimo ; the God
of Abraham, the gods of the heathen.
lY. Xo, or ^7, is written before masculine nouns com-
mencing with_g^; as, Lo zio, or il zio, the uncle ; and after
the'preposition pe?- : Per lo ai6re, or per il cu6re, for the
heart. But, in speaking, il is generally used, excej^t in
the phrases ^jer lo piu, at most ; per lo meno, at least.
V. La before a feminine noun takes le in the plural ;
as, — "^
La fenna, le penne ; la stanza, le stdnze.
The pen, the pens ; the room, the rooms.
* The Italians haye taken the articles il and lo from the first and last syllable of thq
ablative Latin lil'o. In their use, euphony alone is consulted : lo I'lbro, lo ■padre^ il tihro\
ilpadre.
t We find //, plural of 77, in classical works, especially in poetry ; but modoni writers
Qse i in preference.
t The article is given with every noun, so that the pupil may learn the gender of the
noun.
2*
18 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
The a of la is elided before a vowel, and replaced by
an aj[)Ostrophe. It, however, takes le in the plural; as, —
X' isola, le isole ; V dnima, le dnime.
The island, the islands ; the soul, the souls.
VI. The ai^ticle il may ioseJt]le_^ if preceded by the
words cAe7^r<z, fra^ e; as^ TraH si e Hno, between yes and
n^ Such elision is mostly confined to poetry.
VII. The article ^li loses the i before a noun commenc-
in^with i; as, 67' infermi, the infirm.
VIII. The article Ic loses the e before a noun be^'in-
nm^jwitli_£/as, Z/' elemdsine, the alms ; /' erbe, the herbs.
The above rules are purely euphonic.
IX. As there are only two o-enders in Italian, Ensrlish
neuter nouns take the gender of the noun into Avhich they
arejtranslated ; and the article naturally takes the gender
of the noun to which it belongs. '^
« — — — — ■' ^ — &—
X. They say in Italian, Vddo in chiesa^ in strdda^ etc.,
I go to church, into the street, etc. ; and do not use the
article, because tlie church or street is not designated.
Eut, in Vddo nella chiesa di San Carlo ^ vddo iieJla strdda
dove stdte di casa^ — I go into St. Charles' Church, I am
going into the street where you dwell, — the article is used
because the church and street are defined.
XL ^, likewise, they say, Vddo in cdsa^ in cdmcrn, a
letto^ in cncina; because it is understood that the person
speaks ot Ins own house, room, bed, kitehpT^ ; which
nouns are defined by the circumstances.
/ XII. It is necessary to use the article in such sentences
ks the following, where the signification of the noun is
limited : —
Vddo — I am going —
nella cdsa di mia mddre . . , into my mother's house.
(nella camera di mw padre . . into my father's chamber.
nel lelto di sua fratello ... in liis brother's bed.
neUa cucina del vicino ... in the neighbor's kitchen.
THE ARTICLE. 19
XIII. There are cases in which the article ma^be used
or not : as, —
Auddcia, fortuna, e virtv, gli Boldness, fortune, and merit
d'ettem trono e ipotenza ; or, gave him the sceptre and
U auddcia^ la fortiina, e la the power.
virtu, gli dettero it trono e la
'potenza.
In the first case, the nouns are considered independently,
without any subsequent idea : in the second case, the
article limits the signification of the noun by something
relative to each noun understood ; thus : —
i' auddcia che spiego in bgni The boldness which he mani-
impresa^ la fortuna che lo fested in all his enterprises,
secondo, la virtu che lo dis- the fortune wliich favored
tmse, gli dettero il trono della him, the merit which dis-
nazione e la potenza sovrdna,* tinguished him, gave him the
throne of the nation and the
sovereign power.
XIV. The nouns Mr., Mrs., Miss, take the article, thus :
il &ign6re^ il Signdr dottore^ la iSig-rK^ra, let SigiK^ra
principessa, la Slgnorina. These words do not take
an article when they are addressed to the person to whom
t^e are speaking. The word Signe^rn loses tlie final e
before a masculine noun.
XY. Pro^ijcr nouns do not take the article ; f as,
* "When several nouns come together before or after the verb, and the article is used
)r omitted before the first of them, this article must be repeated or omitted before evory
3ther noun in the sentence.
t Names of kingdoms, provinces, mountains, and rivers, take the article or not,
according to the extent of their signification ; as, Z,' Italia c bclla, Italy is beautiful ;
Stdva in Italia, he was in Italy.
Names of cities and villages, vmless qualified by an adjective, are used without the
article. The same rule applies to the names of a few islands: Malta, Cipro, CnHn, etc.
The names of abstract substances, and those of gems, metals, etc., when used in a ge-
neric sense, require the article before them : as, U oro e le pdrle, e i Jior vermigli e bidnchi,
;he gold and the pearls, and the red and white flowers.
A noun preceded by an adjective takes the article before the adjective ; as, II gran
'nile, the great evil ; Il gran pt-ccdto, the great sin.
All words used as nouns require the article before them ; as, II helln, il biiono, the
beautiful, the good; Soti ccrta del si, 1 am certain of the affirmative ; Ciascunn rispdse
li no. every one answered in the negative ; II suo parldre mi pidce, his conversation
ileases me.
When a noun is used in an Indeterminate .sense, the article is omitted ; as, Nan u6m.
i/imo gid fill, now I am not a man, formerly I was a man.
20 ITALIAN GRAMMAE.
Michelangelo, Raffaello. But it is generally placed before
family names, particularly of illustrious or renowned per-
sons, both male and female; as, II Buojiardtti, il Sdnzio,
la Mardtti (the poetess).
XYI. Possessive adjectives generally take the article ;
as, II mio, il tuo, il sao^ lanSstra., la vostra^ etc., my, thy,
his, our, your, etc. Possessive pronouns always do.
XVII. Verbs in the infinitive mood, and adverbs, take
the article when they are used substantively ; as, —
II halldre mi secca ; Non so ne il quando ne il come.
It tires me to dance ; I know neither when nor bow.
READING LESSON.
L' araore e la morte fdnno eguali i re ed i pastori.
Love and deatli make equal kings and shepherds.
La gloria e il solo bene cbe possa tentare gli upmini.
Glory is only good which is able (can) to tempt men.
II tempo, cbe fortifica 1' amicizia, indebolisce 1' amore.
Time fortifies friendship, weakens
Le calunnie sono come le ferite cbe lasciano sempre la margmu.
Calumnies are like wounds leave always scar.
La paura governa il mondo. ,
Fear governs world-
La prudenza e la guida e la padr6na della vita umana.
Prudence guide mistress life 2 human.i
EXERCISE UPON THE ARTICLES.
(The) fortune loves (the) youth.
^ fortuna(f.) ama . gioventu (f.).
The scholar cnltivates (the) memory.
scolare(m.) coltiva memoria (f.).
Tbe servant (f ) puts out the light.
serva smorza liime (m.).
Tbe evening I study the lesson.
sdra(f.) studio lezione (f.).
The shoemaker brings the shoes,
jtj calzolaio(m.) porta scarpe (f.).
UNION OF ARTICLES AND PREPOSITIONS.
21
WORDS.
II pane,
La came,
II vino,
Le friitta,
Le mele.
II fratello,
La pera.
La pesca,
11 fico,
II padre,
Lihro,
the bread,
the meat,
the Avine.
the fruits,
the apples,
the brother,
the pear,
the peach,
the fig.
tlie father,
book. aS?, yes.
lo ho,
Til lidi,
Egli ha,
Ella ha,
Non ho.
Ho io ?
Hdi tu ?
Ha egW?
Ha ella ?
Non ho io
Che, wliat.
I have,
thou hast,
he has.
she has.
I liave not.
have I?
hast tliou ?
has he ?
has she?
have I not?
CJd, who.
CONVERSATION.
Ho io la penna ?
Hdi tu il temperino ?
Che hd mio Jratello?
^ Ha lo zio del Signore il lihro ?
" Che spendi tu ? . ,
Chi ha co7}iprdfo la cdsa ? /rcicucc II Signor dottore.
Che cdsa ha egli comprdto ? ■ La cdsa di tmo pddre.
Che ha la Signbra ? Ella ha lo specchio,
Chi aspetto il Lunedi ? Asp'etto il sdrto.
Che camera hai ? Ho la cucina.
Si, tu hdi la penna.
No, non ho il temperino.
II fratello vostro ha la cdrta.
No, egli non ha il libra.
Spendo il dandro.
CHAPTER III.
UNION OF THE ARTICLES AND PREPOSITIONS.
K
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
T gibrni dell A settimdna
Le sfagibni dell' dnno .
Nelle strdde della citta .
II lapis e SULLA tdvola, .
Sidmo nel cubr della stdte
La penna e i^el calamdio
B(dldt£ CON li: ragdzze .
Lcggo corjLi occhidli
The clays of the week.
The seasons of the year.
In the streets of the city.
The pencil is upon the table.
We are in midsummer.
The pen is in the inkstand.
Dance witlt. the girls.
I read with {the) spectacles.
22
ITALIAN" GEAMMAR.
UNION OF THE ARTICLES AND PREPOSITIONS.
§ I. IfjLhe_ article is used with one of the prepositions,
di, of or for; a, to or at; da, from or by; in, in;
CG7l,^Yith.; sii, upon, — the two monosyllables are joined
for euphon^
Remark. — In connecting the preposition with the ar-
ticle, di is changed into de, in into ne, cun into co.
§ II. 1st, Contraction of the article lo, and its plural
gli, with a noun : —
SINGULAR.
XjO , ,
. sperpero,
sperpero,
the havoc.
Dilo .
. DELLO
of the havoc.
Alo .
. ALLO
sperpero,
to the havoc.
Da lo .
. DALLO
sperpero,
by the havoc.
In lo
. NELLO
sperpero.
in the havoc.
Con'lo .
. COLLO
sperpero.
with the havoc.
Su lo .
. SULLO
sperpero.
upon the havoc.
plural.
Gli . .
• • • •
sperperi,
the havocs.
Di gli .
. DEGLI
sperperi,
of the havocs.
A gli .
. AGLI
sperperi,
to the havocs.
Da gli .
. DAGLI
sperperi.
from or by the havocs.
In gli .
. NEGLI
sperperi,
in the havocs.
Con gli
. COGLI
sperperi.
with the havocs.
Su gli .
. SUGLI
sperperi,
upon the havocs.
This i
irticle, before a vowel
, is written delV, alV
delV dmic
:o, of the friend.
Lo . .
. . x> .
amico.
the friend.
Di lo .
. dell'
amico.
of the friend.
Alo .
. all'
amico.
to the friend.
Da lo .
. dale'
amico,
from the friend.
In lo
. nell'
amico.
in the friend.
Con lo .
. coll'
amico.
with the friend.
Su lo .
. sull'
amico,
upon the friend.
Before nouns in the plural commencing with an i, we
write degV, cugV, dagV , etc. ; as, CogV infelici, with the
unhappy.
UNION OF ARTICLES AND riiErOSIilOXS.
23
§ III. 2d, Contraction of the article il, and its plural i
11 . .
Dl il .
A il .
Da il ,
In il .
Con il
Sit il .
DEL
AL
DAL
NEL
COL
SUL
SINGULAR.
fazsolkto, the pocket-handkerchief.
fazzolkto, of the pocket-handkerchief
fazzolkto, to the pocket-handkerchief.
fazzoJetto, from or by the pocket-handk.
fazzolkto, in the pocket-handkerchief.
fazzolkto, with the pocket-handkerchief.
fazzolkto, upon the pocket-handkerchief.
Di i .
A i ,
Da i .
In i .
Con i .
Su i .
DEI or DE
Ai or a'
DAI or da'
NEI or ne'
COI or CO'
sui or su'
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti,
fazzolkti.
PLURAL.
the handkerchiefs,
of the handkerchiefs,
to the handkerchiefs,
from the handkerchiefs,
in the handkerchiefs,
with the handkerchiefs,
upon the handkerchiefs.
§ IV. 3d, Contraction of the article la, and its plural It
SINGULAR.
La,
Di la
A la
Da la
In la
Con la
Su la
DELLA
ALLA
DALLA
NELLA
COLLA
SULLA
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
saccoccia,
the pocket,
of the pocket,
to the pocket,
from the pocket,
in the pocket,
with the pocket,
upon the pocket.
Before a vowel, write delV, aW, dalP, neU\ etc.
PLURAL.
Le .
Dile
Ale
Da le
In le
Con le
Su^le
DELLE
ALLE
DALLE
NELLE
COLLE
SULLE
saccbcce, the pockets.
saccbcce, of the pockets.
saccbcce, to the pockets.
saccbcce, from or by the pockets.
saccbcce, in the pockets.
saccbcce, with the pockets.
saccbcce, upon the })Ockets.
Before nouns commencing with e, write dcW , alV , daU\
etc.
24
ITALIAN GRA3IMAR.
§ V. The contraction of co7i and of su with the articles
loo gli-, la-, and Ze. is used at discretion. We can say, Con
lo studio^ con la j)e7ina, or cdllo studio, colla penna, — with
the study, with the pen, — according to the harmony of
the phrase. Instead of su, we can say sopra with all the
articles, writing them separately ; as, Sul tetto, or sopra
il tetto ; sulla tdvola, or sop'a la tdvola, — upon the roof,
upon the table.
§ VI. The preposition pei' may be united with the arti;:-
cles_z7 and i, thus; pel, plural pei^ or pe[. In speaking,
we say, ordinarily, per il, to avoid affectation.
The pupil is required to supply the prepositions and
articles in the following declensions : —
// giardmo, the garden.
„ of the garden.
„ to the garden.
from the garden.
»
I giardmi, the gardens.
»
of the gardens,
to the gardens,
from the gardens.
Lo sptrito,
the spirit,
of the spirit,
to the spirit,
from the spirit.
Gil spiriti, the spirits.
of the spirits,
to the spirits,
from the spirits.
X' dlbero,
99
n
9}
the tree,
of the tree,
to the tree,
from the tree.
Gli dlberi,
the trees,
of the trees,
to the trees,
from the trees.
La rosa,
the rose,
of the rose,
to the rose,
from the rose.
Le rose,
the roses,
of the roses,
to the roses,
from the roses.
X' anima,
n
J)
the soul,
of the soul,
to the soul,
from the soul.
Le dnime,
»
the souls.
of the souls,
to the souls,
from the souls.
UNION OF ARTICLES AND rilEPOSITIONS. 25
READING LESSON.
Andiamo nolle stracle della citta. La donna e partita. Non
Let us go streets city. woman is departed. Not 2
andate colla cameriera. Prendo la chiave della camera. La
go 1 chambermaid. I take key room.
primavera della vita. Ella mori nel fior degli anni. Non dormite
spring-time life. Slie died flower years. Not 2 sleep i
air aria aperta. II gdtto e nella camera del padrone. II
air open. cat master.
lapis non e siilla tavola. Leggo con le ragazze. II calam{iio
pencil not is table. I read girls. inkstand
e sulla tavola. La cliiave e nell' iiscio. Si va alia caccia nell'
door. One goes chase
autunno. La penna e nel calamaio siilla tavola. La vita e
autumn.
breve, e 1' arte e liinga. La moderazione genera la felicita. L' oro
short long. generates happiness. gold
governa il mondo. La verita produce 1' odio. L' udmo propone,
governs world. truth produces hatred. man proposes
6 Dio dispone. La voce, gli occlii, il cdrpo, 1' anima delF uomo.
God disposes. voice eyes body soul
La voce del popolo e la voce di Dio. 1/^^ */v|ui((,\ l^.w 'x^^
people
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
Italy is the garden of Europe. The passions are the
Italia i/ /C giardino ? Europa. 6--£o passioni sono ^ '-^
elements of life. The voice of the people is the voice of God.
element! vita. -\:< , voce cUJ^ popolo L j'jl, uirCe^ /^. Dfo.
The whip (is) for the horse, the halter for the ass, and the stick
frusta (f.) <LtJ^' cavallo cav^zza asino c ; bastone
for the shoulders of the insolent (one). (The) pride is the
spalle impertinonte. supcrbia
daughter of (the) ignorance. An ancient phiIoso|)her said, that
ffglia ignoranza. Un anti'co^ fihjsoCoi iisse, che
(the) pride breakfasts with (the) abundance, dines with (the)
orgoglio fa colazione abbondanza, pranza
poverty, and sups with (tlie) shame,
poverta cena vergogna.
3
26
ITALIAN GRA^kOIAIt.
lo sono,
I am.
Til sei,
thou art.
Egli e,
lie is.
Noi sidmo, we are.
Voi sicte, you are.
Eglino sono, they are.
CONVERSATION.
Che £qsa avete ?
Dov' e ?
Son' 10 jpovero (poor) ?
Cosa e r Italia ?
Hdi tu la, penna del vicino ?
Qual lihro (book) hdi ?
Ha SIM padre un cavdllo ? , ,
Che cosa ho 10 '^ '^^'^'
Sei tu jilosofo ?
Hdi tu il mio tempermo ?
Siete il mio ainico ?
Nan liai un (a) giardmo ?
;,. /«'t«1 <l *<^X.^
Ho il fazzoletto. .
Nella mia saccoccia. ^^^<="-tXr
Tu non sei povero, sei ricco.
U Italia e il giardino delV Europa
No, Signbre, mwfratello I* ha.
Ho il libra del sdrto.
Non ha un cavdllo, ha un dsino.
Tu hdi il hasione di mio fratello. V-o^
Non sono Jilosofo. ^
No, e sopra la tdvola.
Sono il vostro (your) amico.
Si, ho un giardino ed (and) un
cavdllo.
CHAPTER IV.
THE NOUN* — IL NOME.
<
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
n TIMORE di Dio . . .
La CUPOLA di San Pietro
II DUOMO di FiRENZE
/fiori della primavera .
// COLORE della ROSA . .
// CAMMINETTO della CAMERA
The fear of God.
The cupola of St. Peter.
The cathedral of Florence.
The flowers of spring.
The color of the rose.
The small mantelpiece of the
chamber.
* There are some words in the Italian language which paint so well the character cf the
nation, that it is impossible to reproduce them in any other language by words strictly
analogous. For example, the words sfogo^ smdnia^ piint'iglio^ faria, orgasmo, cstro^ sbuf-
fdre, etc., representing ideas which are conceived only under a burning sky, cannot be
exactly rendered in the calm and misty Northern languages. Being purel}' euphonic,
the rules, on the article maj' be utterly disregarded whenever euphony requires it. The
same may also be said respecting the elision and contraction of words.
THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
27
La CARTA e nel cassetting
11 pozzo e nel corti'le . .
Lo STUDIO e un gqdimentq
Gli ANNI fiiggono rdpidi . .
La MiNESTRA e fredda . .
L'qzio e il padre di ogni vizio,
The paper is in the drawer.
The well is in the yard.
Study is a pleasure.
Years fly rapidly.
The soup is cold.
Idleness is the father of all
vices.
THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
There are only two genders in the Italian lanffua<ye, —
the masculine and the feminine.
I. All nouns belono; either to the masculine or feminine
gender.
II. youns endino' in a are feminine. Those express-
inty dignity, and professions of men, such as il papa, the
pope,
and the
S
followmg,
derived from the Greek, are
masculine : —
Anagrdmma,
Andiema,
Assioma,
Glhna,
Diadema^
Dilemma,
Diploma,
Dogma,
Drdmma,
DmUema,
Enigma,
Dpigrdmma,
Fantdsma^
anagram.
anathema.
axiom.
climate.
diadem.
dilemma.
diploma.
dogma.
drachm.
emblem.
enigma.
epigram.
spectre.
Idioma,
idiom.
Pianeta,
planet.
Po'ema,
poem.
Prisma,
prism.
Prohlema,
problem.
Frogrdm7na,
j)rogramme.
Scisma,
schism.
Sistema,
system.
Sofisma,
sophism.
iStemma,
coat of arras.
Strataghnma
, stratagem.
Tema,
theme.
Teorema.
theorem.
III. Of the nouns ending in e, some are masculine, and
others feminine. As no positive rules can be given to
indicate their gender, recourse must be had to the diction-
ary.
IV. Amono; the nouns ending in c, some are of both
genders;* as, —
* Snpie masculine nouns ending in e take a different termination for the feniiuiue
as, re^resmn.' " ' ~
28 ITALl:^ GRAJVOIAn.
Il or LA carcere, the prison.
Il or LA ceiiere,^ the cinders.
Il or LA fine, the end.
Il or LA folgore, the thunder.
Il or LA fonte, the fountain.
Il or LA fr67ite,'\ the forehead.
Il or LA gregge, the flock.
Il or LA fiine, the cord.
Il or LA lepre, the hare.
Il or LA mdrgine, the margin.
Il or LA serpe, the serpent.
Il or LA tigre, the tiger.
Y. There are some nouns endino; in a which can_end
in e, without chano'ino: the jj^ender ; as, Z/' drina or Z' dnne,
arms (heraldic) ; la sorta, or la sdrte, destiny.
VI. Very few nouns terminate in i, as this letter is
generally the characteristic sia^n of the pluraj. Of these
few, some are masculine, and some are feminine ; as, —
MASCULINE.
77 cavadenti, the dentist.
// lai'ctceci, the dunce.
II Tamigi, the Thames.
FEMININE.
La metropoU, the metropolis.
La sintdssi, the syntax.
La tesi, the thesis.
Remark. — The noun dl, day, and its compound^ ; as,
Buondi, good-day; mezzodi, noon; oggidi, now-a-days;
Lu7iedl, Monday; Martedi, Tuesday, etc., — are all mas-
culine. So are likewise nouns of dignity ; as, Ball,
bailiff; pdri, peer; guardasigiUi, keeper of the seals.
YII. Nouns endino' jn o are of the masculine gender,
except fa mdno, hand; and the words whose ending
dgine is contracted to dgo ; as, imyndgo for immdgine.
Eco, echo, is of either gender.
Remark. — Several nouns of animate heino's. endijQg in
o, change o into a for_the feminine ; as, II randcchio, m., la
rakdcc/na, i\ , frog ; il gdtto, m., la gdtta, f. , cat ; cavdllo,
horse ; cavdlla, mare ; colomho, coldmha, dove, etc.
VIII. The following nouns ending^ in o become femi-
nine by changing the o into a:t —
* II ccnere is used only in poetry. «
t La fronte is more usea than il fronte.
I % Fanr.iiMn. or ragazzo^ is said ot a cliild who has not yet reached the age of adoles-j
Icence. Fanciidla and ragazza, on the contrary, are used for a person of marriageable age ;>
(the fii'st particularly being employed to indicate unmarried women in general, if young, f
Obs. — Lapis, pencil ; rlbes, currants ; chermes, cochineal, and a few foreign uouns,
end with a consonant.
THE GENDEll OF iNOUNS. 29
II casdto, the family name.
// canestro, the basket.
II cioccoldto, the chocolate.
II frutto,* the fruit.
// leg7io,^ the wood.
11 mattino, the mornino;.
// nuvolo, tlie cloud.
X' omhrello, the umbrella.
X' orecchio^ the ear.
// ranbcchio, the frosf.
i>o scritto^ the writinn;.
// soffitto, the ceiling.
Feminine : La casdta, la canestra, la fruUa, la legna, etc.
IX. The names of fruit-trees, ending in o, become femi-
nine by changino- o into a : and then they serve to express
the fruit. Ex. : —
II pesco, the peach-tree ; La pesca, the peach.
// melo, the apple-tree ; La mela, the apple.
The words fico, p6mo, ardncio, fig-tree and fig, apple-
tree and apple, orange-tree and orange, are an exception.
X. Very few nouns end in u. These are alwjvys
marked with a <j,'rave accent, and are of the feminine o-en-
p . , 2 _ -Q
der; as. La gioventu, the youth; la grit, the crane,- —
except Peril, m., Peru, Behebu, Belzebub.
GENERAL REMARKS.
All words ending in ore, of which there are a great num
ber, arc masculine without any exception. Those endino^
in zione or sione are feminine without any exception.
]Nouns ending; in ^e, le, me, re, se, are s^enerally mascu-
line ; as, —
Rege, king.
Vidle, path.
Fiiime, river.
Cuore, heart.
Arnesej utensil.
* Of the words friitlo^ legno, and scntto, which are masculine, and become feminine
by changing: the o into a, it must be observed tlaat il friitto is the fruit in general, properly
and figuratively ; while la friuta or Le friuta means the dessert. L'-i^no means tlie wooda,
and la Irgna is the wood to burn. Scr'Uto is a writing ; aud la scr'itla, a contract.
Some names of animate beings denote the femininc.l/y u, dilfereut word ; as, Udmo, man •
ddnna, woman ; loro, bull ; vdcca, cow.
3*
30 ITALIAN GKAMJVIAR.
Nouns eiidino' in he, ce, ^e, te, ve, ie, ine, one, nte, are
generally feminine ; as, -^
Plehe, people.
Siepe, hedge.
Chiave, key.
Foce, entry.
Immdgine, image.
Ragiorie, reason.
Pace, peace.
Arte, art.
Mente, mind.
fSerie, series.
Incudine, anvil.
Cicatrice, scar.
Legione, lesson.
Crbce, cross.
Nouns ending in ^^ if not of Greek derivation, are
masculine. Those of Greek derivation are feminine, ex-
cepl^ Genesi and Apocalissi, which may be masculine
whenineaning the sacred books bearing' that title.
Analisi, analysis.
Genesi, Genesis.
Crisi, crisis.
Enfasi, emphasis.
Tesi, thesis.
Sintdssi, syntax.
READING LESSON.
11 rispetto per le donne e 1' indizio piu siciiro dell' incivilimento
respect women indication most sure civilization
di un popolo. La schiavitu e la vergogna degli uomini. L' eta
slavery shame men. age
e il sonno insegnano all' uomo la stnida della morte. Bisogna
sleep teach death. It is necessary
veder V Italia nella prhnp^vera e n^Ua state per poter meglio
to see ^*V*^^ smumer to be able better
ffiudicare della serenita del suo cielo e della calma del mare che
to judge sky sea
la circonda. L' arte di regnare e la massima di tutte le arti.
it 2 surrounds.i art to reign greatest all
La memoria dei benefizij e il debito della gratitiidine. Noi
memor}- benefits debt We
vediamo il lam])o prima di sentire lo scoppio del fiilmine. II
see lightning before to hear burst thunder.
filosofo cerca la sua felicita nello studio della natura.
seeks
THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
•' 1
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
(The) Study is useful to tjie health of the body. (The)
jj, studio vantaggioso >/{ 4- salute corpo.
Hatred is the want of vengeance. The loss of liberty is the
£. odio i- bisogno ^ vend(^'tta. -6*/ pdrdita .' liberta
greatest of misfortunes. The philosopher seeks his happiness
prfma disgrazie. /tc filosofo c^rca r- felicita
In the study of (the) nature. (The) Innocence of life
->t<X> ciUvCtvv -;.X.v'~^' natiira. innocenza > vfta
takes away the fear of death. (The) Tears are tl>e tacit
toglie spav(?nto .
lagrime
tacito 2
language of grief,
linguaggioi dolore.
Datemi dell' oro e dell' argento. L' aria della mattina e un
Give me gold silver. air morning
balsamo nella primavera. Non e arrivato oggi il padre del
balm spring. Not
Signor Duca?
arrived to-day
Noi ahhiamo, we have.
Voi avete, you have.
J^glino hdnno, m., they have.
Elleno hdnno, f., they have.
Abhidmo noi ?
Avete voi ?
Hdnno eglino ?
Hdnno elleno'^
have we ?
have you ?
have they ?
have they?
CONVERSATION.
Ohe avke nel canestro ? Ho deW uova net mio canestro.
QuaV e ilnome della lavanddia^ H suo nbme e Gatarma.
ivke veduto (seen) il cavdllo ? lo V (it) ho veduto.
2
Dove ?
Ahbldmo noi sigilli ? SxoJii
Dove sono inerti gli uomini ?
A vete veduto la carta ?
(yJd e quesC (this) Italidno'^
Chi e nel giardino ?
Chi e questa ragdzza'^
Avete veduta la mia cdsa ?
La cdsa nella strdda del Re ?
Nella strdda.
Voi 71071 avete sigilli, avete cdrta,
Dove il siiolo e molto feriile.
St, e nel cassettino.
E il cameriere del medico.
II cavadenti.
E mia sorella.
Qiidle cdsa ?
No, Slg7i6ra, non V ho veduta.
Avete frutta nel vostro giardino'^ No, ma (but) ahhidmo un pesco
ed un 7?ielo die 7ie dardnno
r d)ino ventiu'o
32 ITALIAN GRAIOIAK.
/ CHAPTER V.
THE PLURAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
t
Adjectives agree in g^ender and number with the nouns
tliey qualify.
After having learned the rules upon the formation of
the plural , the scholar will do well to change all the plural
nouns of the following exercise into the singular.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
I ciechi hdnno hiioiiY. orecchi^, The blind have good ears.
Le lenzuolA sono piditE, The sheets are clean.
Le bellE antichit\ di Roma, The beautiful antiquities of Rome.
Le hotteglm sono sotto ai-porlici, The shops are under the porticos.
X' ardtro fa i solchi jjrofondi, The plough makes deep furrows.
J^cco due pdiA. di stivah, Here are two pairs of boots.
I fungln ndscono nei hoschi, Mushrooms grow in the woods.
Mi dolgono le calcdgnx,^* My heels pain me.
Benejici sono i rdggi del sole, The rays of the sun are beneficent.
3Iipidce il giuoco d'egli scdcchi, I like the play of chess.
Le pioggE ristorano la terra, The rains refresh the earth.
Altri tempi, dltri costumi, Other times, other manners.
Imalvdgi non sono felici, The wicked are not happy.
GENERAL RULES.
I. The greater proportion of nouns and adjectives in
Italian, whatever be their gender, form their plural by
changing tiie last letter into i; as, —
MASC. SINGULAR. MASC. PLURAL.
// poeta celehre, the celebrated poet. I poeti celehj^i.
II letto morhido, the soft bed. Il'etti morhidi.
II mdre hurrascoso, the stormy sea. Imdri hurrascbsi.
FEM. FEM.
Lapassione infelice, the unhappy passion. Le piassibni infelici.
La mdno debole, the feeble hand. Le mdni d'eboli.
* The letter % indicates an idiomatic phrase.
PLLTvAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 33
The following are exceptions : —
n. Feminine nouns and adjectives endinp- in the singu-
lar in tf, make their plural in ef as, —
La Scarpa stretta, the narrow shoe. Le scdrpe strette.
La bella donna, the handsome woman. Le belle dbnne,
m. The nouns ending in 2, in ie, in an accented vowel,
and the monosyllables, do not changejtheir termination in
the plutali ^^•> ^^ crisi, the crisis ; le crisi, the crises : la
citld, the city ; le cittd, the cities : il re, the king ; i re,
the kings ; etc.
IV. Nouns are also invariable when they immediately
follow the ordinal numbers twenty-one, thirty-one, etc. ;
as, Ventuno sciido, twenty-one crowns ; trcntimo dolldro,
thirty- one dollars. But the noun takes the plural when
placed before the number ; as, ScUdi ventuno, dolldri
trentimo.
Y. The words addio, adieu ; Idro^ their, are invariable ;
as, Gli addio, i Idro amici.
EUPHONIC RULES.
YI. All the nouns, masculine or feminine, ending in
m or ga, insert an h in the plural to preserve the hard
sound of the c or a: as, —
II mondrca, the monarch ; i monarchi, the monarchs.
La mdnica, the sleeve ; le mdniche, the sleeves.
La Strega, the sorcerer ; le streghe, the sorcerers.
YII. Nouns of two syllables, ending in co or go, tal^
an h in the plural ; as, —
II bosco, the wood ; ^ bdscki, tlie woods.
// Idgo, the lake ; i Idghi, the lakes.
Except pdrco, greco, mdgo, — pig, Greek, magician,
— which make, in the plural, 2^drci, greci, mdgi. /
34
ITALIAN GR.\j\niAR.
VIII. Nouns of more than two syllables, ending in cc
or go, also take an h, when these terniiii-itions are preceded
by one or more consonants ; as, —
U albergo, the hotel. - Gil alheryhi.
n rinfresco, the refreshment. I rinfreschi.
IX. Nouns ending in co or go, preceded by a vowejj*
form their plural in ci ov^gij as, —
11 medico, the physician ; i medici, the physicians.
Lo spdrago, the asparagus ; gli sparagi, the asparagus.
X. Exception. — Several nouns talve an lb in the plu-
ral, though preceded by a vowel ; as. Audio go, analogous ;
antico, ancient ; decdlogo, decalogue ; demagdgo, dema-
gogue ; etc.
XI. Nouns ending in io lose the final o in all cases
where this termination is j)receded_by a vowel, or by two
or three consonants forming a syllable with io ; as, —
Fornaio,
Gnoio,
Fascia,
Mdschio,
Artiglio,
Astuccio,
Vidggio,
baker ;
leather ;
bundle ;
boy ;
claw ;
case ;
voyage ;
forndi,
ciioi,
fdsci,
nidscM,
artigli,
astucci,
vidggi,
bakers.
leathers.
bundles.
boys.
claws.
cases.
voyages.
XII. The following nouns, although comprehended m
the above class, form an exception ^ by changing the io final
into j : —
will.
vestibule.
doubt.
scratch.
Improprio, improper.
Pdtrio, of the country.
Arhitrio,
Atrio,
Duhhio,
Grdfjio^
Oerchio,
Doppio,
Prajprio,
Secchio,
So^, ^
Spicchio,
circle.
double.
proper.
milk-pail.
a blow.
a clove of garlic.
* Mend'ico, beggar; eqii'ivoco, eqiiivoke; dialogo, dmlogne; apdZogo, apologue, — are
written with or witliout the h: as, Mendici or ynendicln. beggars.
Obs. — Some nouns in the singular in ere also end in ero ; as, II pensicre, the
thought ; il pensiero : il destricre, the steed ; il destricro : lo scolire. the scholar ; lo scolaro :
it cdnsole, the consul; il cdnsolo. When said of bones cleared from the table, osso,
bone, makes dssi ; when of a skeleton, it makes ossa. File, thread, makes /"j/a, threads
Fill is used when speaking of the edge of cutting instruments.
PLURAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
Si
These nouns make, in the plural, arbitrj, dtrj, cerchjf
doppj, etc.
XIII. This same termination, io, is changed into j
whenever it is preceded by a single con.-^oiiaut, or two
consonants not formino; one syllable ; as, —
Giudicio^ judgment; giudicj, judgments.
Principio, beginning; principj, beginnings.
Proverhio^ proverb ; proverbj, proverbs.
XIV. Except the following nouns, which make their
plural by dropping the final o, because the i is used in the
singular only to soften the sound of the c or g : —
Pi^egio,
Grigio,
Indugio,
ease.
orange,
kiss.
Agio, _
Ardncio,
JBdcio,
Barhogio, dotard.
' ^g{o, gray.
Cctcio, cheese.
Cencioj rag.
Disdgio, disquiet.
Malvagio,
Paldgio,
Pertugio,
Pregio,
Soi^cio,
ornament.
gray.
delay.
wicked.
palace.
hole.
merit.
mouse.
Plural : Agi, ardnci, bdci, cenci, etc.
XV. The termination io, in the syllable quio, changes
int^_£; as, —
Ossequio, respect; osseqiij, respects.
Deliquio, fainting-fit; deliqvj, fainting-fits.
XVI. If. however, the a^lient falls on the i of the sylla-
ble zo, then JO jj changed into ii for the plural, ajid the
sound is a little longer tlian ;'; as, —
-rj. .' ,.' ..' /.' y pious, uncle, native, brook.
Ptt, zti, naht, rii, ) ^
XVII. Proper nouns ending in io likewise take ii iq
the ])lural ; * as, —
IDdrii imhii IGdudii h Darius, Tiberius, Claudius.
*
as proper
In Thilian, lis in otlier liingn.a{i;cs, some nouns are vised only in the sin.i^ular number;
per names; and the words ^sro/e, offspring; ??zane, morning ; ro6a, luggage ; rosol'ia^
36 ITALIAN GRAMIMAR.
XVIII. The terminations cia and gia drop the i of the
plural in the words in which this letter is but slightly pro-
nounced.; as, —
Z,a coscia, the thigh ; le cosce, the thighs.
La spidggia, the shore ; le spidgge, the shores.
La cdccia, the chase ; le cdcce, the chases.
XIX. But in the words proviJicia, cirieo^ia , franchigia ,
province, cherries, immunities, and some others, the i is
retained in the plural, because, being distinctly pronounced
in the singular, it is necessary that it should Ije heard in
the plural ; as, Proftncic, ciriegie, franchigie, etc.
XX. We must also preserve the i of cia and of gia
when it is accented, and the accent must be strongly
marked HBy the voice; as, —
La hugia, the lie ; le hugie, the lies.
La farmacia, the pharmacy ; le farmacie, the pharmacies.
IRREGULAR PLURALS.
XXI. The few nouns which have irregular plurals are :
man ; uomini, men.
oxen.
Womo,
LBue, ox ; buoi
y\I6glie, wife; mogli, wives.
vRfille, thousand ; onila^ thousands.
^L)io, God ; dei, gods.
XXH. The possessive adjective pronouns mio. tuo, s^.
my, thy, his, make miei, tudi, su6i, in the plural ; and tlie
adjectives tale or cotdle, such, and qudle, which, are in
the plural tali or tdi^ cotcili, or cotdi, qudli or qtiai,
XXIII. The following nouns form their plural in a,
and become feminine : —
measles. And some are used only in the plural; as, Icalzoni, the trowsers; le rent, the
kidnej'S ; i dolci, the sweetmeats ; le forbid, the scissors ; i invert, the victuals ; le tenebre,
darkness. Some nouns have a different signification in the plural ; as, II ccppo, the trunk
c-f a tree ; i c&ppi, the fetters : il fcrro, the iron ; i firri, the fetters : la gcnte, the people ;
le gcnti, the nations • la grcizia, the favor ; le grdzie, the thanks.
PLUR^VL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
37
Un miglidio,
Tin centinaio,
Un uovo,
Un miglio,
Un pdio,
Uno stdio,
j Un moggio,
a thousand.
a hundred.
an e^:":.
a mile,
a pair,
a bushel.
a bushel.
Le miglidia.
Le centindia,
Le uova.
Le miglia.
Le pdia.
Le stdia.
Le moggia.
XXIV. The followino^ masculine nouns have a mascU"
line plural in ?*, and a feminine plural in a. The last is
more frequently used.
\V anello,
II hrdccio,
^11 hudello,
' LI ccdcdgno,
LI castello,
)Ll ciglio,
LI coltello,
LI corno,
LI dito,
LI filo^
\Ll memhro,
LI 7nuro,
L' osso,
II porno,
II quadreUo,
the ring,
the arm.
the intestine,
the heel,
the castle,
the eyebrow,
the knife,
the horn,
the finger,
the thread,
the member,
the wall,
the bone,
the apple,
the dart.
LI fondamento,
II fridtOj
II fuso,
LI gesfo,
LI ginocchiOf
LI gomito,
LI grido,
II Idhhro,
II legno,
LI lenzuolo,
II riso,
LI sdcco,
Lo strido,
LI vesiigio,
LI vestimento,
the base,
the fruit,
the spindle,
the gesture,
the knee,
the elbow,
the cry.
the lip.
the wood,
the sheet,
the laugjh.
the sack,
the cry.
the vestige,
the garment.
Remark. — Coma, in the plural, sio^nifies horns ; cdr-
m, instruments i^esta, exploits ; ^esti, gestures ; gdmiia,
elbows; gomiti^GwhiU'. mem6ra, members of the body ;
memhri, members of an assembly^ mtiray rampartsx JMil>
walls .
READING LESSON.
Presso i Romani, i soldati erano agricoltori, e le casiite
Among houses -J
illustri conservavano sempre i cognomi dei friitti e dei legumi
illustrious! preserved always surnames pulse
che venivano, a preferenza, coltivati dai loro anten;iti ; t^i
came (were) ancestors
38 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
furono i Lentuli, i Fabii, i Pisoni. I regdli pMcano non solo gli
presents appease only
uomini ma pur anco gli dei. I pittori antichi non usavano nelle
even painters 2 ancient i used
lore pittnre che quattro colori. Le dohne sono fatte per essere
pictures four colors. women rnade to be
le compagne e non le schiave degli uomini. Un parroco disse
companions slaves curate said
alia predica, la Domenica delle palme : lo vi avverto, fratelli, die
sermon Palm: I you 2 inform 1
per isfuggire la calca, confessero Lunedi i bugiardi, Martedi
to avoid confusion, I shall confess liars
gli avari, Mercoledi i mormoratori, Giovedi i ladri, Venerdi
avaricious slanderers thieves
i discoli, e Sabato gli ubbriaclii. Non si sa s'egli ebbe molti
libertines ' drunkards. "We do not know had
penitenti. I fanciulli ed i pazzi si figurano che venti franchi e
fools imagine francs
venti anni abbiano a durar sempre. Ho veduto le dssa di tre
years have last always.
giovani elefanti.
EXERCISE
ON THE FORMATION OP THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.
\_Tlie singular only is given.']
The face comprehends the forehead, the eyebrows, the eyelids
volte eompr^nde palp^bre
the nose, the lips, the mouth, the cheeks, the chin, and the ears.
f. mdnto
X
(The) childi'en ought to obey their parents, scholars their
fanciullo d^bbono ubbidire genitore
teachers, and citizens (to) the laws. When we read certain
maestro cittacfefno l<^gge. Quando si l(^ggono c^rti
historians, we may say that the human species is composed
stdrico, si dir^bbe h umana specie (consists of) consfste
of only two or three hundreds of individuals decorated with
soltanto di due o tre individuo decorato
the title of emperors, kings, popes, generals, and ministers. Men
tltolo imperatore ministro.
PLURAI. OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 39
are generally idle in countries where the soil is very lertile.
sono per lo piu in^rte pa^se dove suolo molto fertile.
(The) stars, (the) animals, and even plants were (enumerated)
astro animale anche fiirono annoverate
among the Egyptian divinities. The walls of Thebes were
fra le egiziane Tebe
raised by the simple sound of the harp ; the walls of the city
fabbricate semplice suono c^tra
of Jericho fell down, on the contrary, at the sound of (the)
J^rico caddero, in v^ce
trumpet. The large sacks are filled with grain. My sisters
corno. empiuto grano.
have some silver spoons,
alcuno arg^nto
JVoi sidmo, we are.
Voi slete, you are.
J^glino sono, they are.
CONVERSATION.
Chi e questa donna ? ±jla madre del poeta celebre,
Avete veduto il re ? Abhidmo veduto il re.
E egli Fr anche ? No, e Tedesco (German).
Sono i poeti felwi (happy) ? Generalmente non sono felwi.
Che hdnno i ciechi'^ I ciechi hdnno huone orecchie
Dove ndscono i funahi ? '^fUiUot'tfKXtj I funghi ndscono nei hoschi.
Qiidnti cineJli avete ? /vmU*^^ Ne ho due.
Mangidte friitti ? Si, qudndo sono maturi.
Qudnti (how many) gibrni fa
una settimdna ? Sette.
Come si chidmano ? (How are Domenica, Lunedl, Ifartedi^
they called ?) Mercoledl, Giovedi, Venerdi,
Sdhato.
Ed i mesi qudnti sono ? Dodici.
Come si chidmano ? Genndjo, Fehhrdjo, Mdrzo,
Apiile, Mdggio, Giugno,
LugJio, Agosto, Setteuthre,
Ottohre, Novembre, Decern-
hre.
E le stagioni (seasons) ? Sono qudttro : Primavevd, Es-
tdte 0 (or) Stdte, Antunno,
Inverno o Verno.
40 ITALIAN GRAIklMAR.
/
tL CHAPTER yi.
THE CASES OF NOUNS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE UPON THE USE OF DI, A^ DA.
VI pidce la citta di Parigi ? Does the city of Paris please you ?
II fitto DELLE case e cdro, The rent of the houses is dear.
VI dico die non ho dandri, I tell you that I have no money.
Spoleto non e lontdno da Roma, Spoleto is not far from Rome.
Voglio scrivere delle Uttere, I wish to write some letters.
lo non voglio hrj£he^ I do not wish cares.
Voi non avete fratelU, You have no brothers.
Z' uo7no Vive delle sue fatiche, Man lives by (of) his labors.
lo non temo puntp di voi, I do not fear you at all.
Ecco un diziondrio da tdsca, Here is a pocket dictionary.
UAribsto e ilpittore dell A na- Ariosto is the painter of nature.
tura,
Z' occhio del padrone inqrdssg' The eye of the master fattens
il cavdllo, ^ the horse.
Mi e, sorella dal Igip del pddre, She is a sister on my father's
e non dal cqMq della md- side, but not on the side of
dre, my mother.
Egli ha posto della polvere da He has put (some) gunpowder
f^UiAJkJ^scjnoppo in una scdtola da in a tobacco-box.
tobacco,
The several relations of the Italian nmiTia ^rp expressed
by the prepositions di, of; a^ tox da. from, or by. The
nominative and obiective are distinguished by the place
they occupy in the sentence.
1. The nominative denotes the relation of a subject to
a finite verb ; as, Maria dma, Mary loves.
2. The genitive denotes origin, possession, and other re-
lations, which in English are expressed by the preposition
of, or by the possessive case ; as, I libri di "into fratello,
my brother's books.
THE CASES OF NOUNS. 41
3. The dative denotes that to or for which any thing is,
oris done; as, JEgli mi ddva il libro, he gave me the
book.
4. The accusative is either the object of an active verb
or of certain prepositions, or the subject of an infinitive.
5. The vocative is the form applied to the name of any
object addressed.
6. The ablative denotes privation and other relations,
expressed in English by the prepositions with, from, in^
or by.
Proper_nouns are varied with the prepositions only ;
common nouns, with the preposition and article^.
Variation of the proper noun Boston : —
Nominative Boston, Boston.
Relation of Possession . Di Boston, of Boston.
„ „ Attribution . A Boston, to Boston.
„ „ Derivation . Da Boston, from (or by) Boston.
Accusative Boston, Boston.
Variation of a common noun in the plural : —
Nominative Ilihri, the books.
Relation of Possession . Dei libri, of the books.
„ „ Attribution . Ai libri, to the books.
„ „ Derivation . Dai lihri, from (or by) the books.
Accusative I libri, the books.
I. Di, the sign of the genitive, is used, —
1st, When it denotes possession ; as, La cctsa di mio
pddre, my father's house ; di chi e questo cappello ?
whose hat is this? e del servitSre, it is the servant's.
2d, Whg^n the noun or verb that follows di expresses a
quality, limitation, or modification of the noun that pre-
cedes_it ; as, Qucchidio d' argento, a silver spoon; e
tempo di pranzdre, it is dinner-time.
II. The preposition di, with or without the definite
article, translates the words some ^nSTany when they do
not_express a determinate quantity^ of a certain thing ;
as, — /
42 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
Dcitemi del pane, Give me some bread.
Non hevete di quel vino. Do not drink any of that wine.
III. If some and any have the signification of a .f&w,
various, certain, a little, &>q.., they are rendered in Italian
h^qualche before a singular noun ;„ by tin poco di^ or tin
po' di, before a collective noun ; and by certi, divcrsij,
alcuni, and vdrii, or their feminine form, before pjui'al
nouns, according to their gender; as, —
Ho pranzato con qualche amico, I have dined with some friend
or con alcuni amici, or friends.
Prendete un poco di vmo. Take some wine.
IV. ^^en there is only a simple designation of the
object, without any idea of quantity, — that Fs to say,
when the word some or any is omitted in English, —
generally no article is used in Italian.
Bevete vino o hirra'^ Do you drink wine or beer?
Chi ha dandri ha amici. He who has money has friends.
V. The preposition di is often used after words requir-
ing a diit'erent preposition, and after verbs requiring a
direct object. In such cases, the word that governs di is
understood, and the phrase is elliptical, as may be seen in
tlie following sentences : —
Temere del popolo, for temere To fear the anger of the peo-
LO SDEGNO del popolo, pie.
Saper di musica, di algebra, etc., To know a little music, alge-
for sap ere UN Poco di, etc. bra, etc.
YI. Sometimes, especially in familiar conversation, the
preposition di takes the place of the article il or lo before
an infinitive, which, being the subject of a sentence, does
not come at the beginnino; of it ; as, —
E facile DI studidre, di parldre. It is easy to study, to speak,
for e fdcile lo studidre, IL
parldre.
When the preposition di is thus substituted for the arti-
cle, the phrase is elliptical, and stands for JS fdcile
l'azione di studidre. ~~~
4
THE CASES OF NOUNS. 43
YII. It is verj common in Italian to use di instead of
da whenever euphony requires it, particularly if the defi-
nite article can be omitted after the preposition^ This,
however, is never done unless fu6ri, via, or some such
word requh'ing di, is easily understood. Thus they say : —
Venire di casa ; that is, fuori To come out of the house.
or via di casa for ddlla casa,
or da casa.
VIII. The preposition di is also frequently translated
after verbs l3y/b/% meaning on account of', by in, when
it does not signify within ; by icith^ not expressing the
idea of company or union / and occasionally by on.
Ella vesfe di nero, She dresses in black.
JVon mi biasi7ndte di questo, ' Do not blame me for this.
Furono provveduti di tutto, or They were provided luith every
d' ogni cosa, thing.
Tl bambino fu nutrito di Idtte, The child was fed on milk.
IX. ^, or ad, the sign of the dative, expresses direc-
tion or aspiration towards some object, and corresponds
to the prepositionT to,
Andidmo a Ndpoli, Let us go to Naples.
Scinvete ad un amico. Write to a friend.
X. The preposition A is also translated in, for, from,
and of after a verb, when it represents an action done
against, towards, or to the damage of a person ; the direct
object of such a verb being easily understood ; * as, —
Non pdsso credere a quel che I cannot believe in what you
dite, say.
Pensdte a lui e provvedete ai suoi Think of him, and provide for
bisogni, his wants.
XI. JDa, the sign ofjhe_ablative, expresses derivation,
separation, or dependence, and corresponds principally to
the preposition from, which In most cases is translated;
as, —
* Remark. —The expressions, little BT little^ two BY two, etc., are rendered in Ital
ian, poco A poco^ due A due, etc.
44 ITALIAN GRAMVIAE.
Da un giorno alV ctltro, From one day to another.
Noji dipendo da nessuno, I do not depend on any one.
XII. Z)a is used before a noun which indicates use,
employment, or the destination of a thing; ; as , —
Cavdllo da sella, saddle-horse.
Carta da Uttere, letter-paper.
Xm. The English prepositions at and with, meaning
" at the house of;" and by, either expressing the relation
between a passive verb and its subject, or conveying the
idea of solitude and exclusion, — are translated by da,
Sta DA mio padre. He lives at my father's.
Lo fara da se, He will do it by himself.
XIV. Li]ce_ and as^ when thev signify^ in the manner
of," "as it becomes," and followed by a noun used in an
indefinite sense, are generally rendered by da; as, —
Portdtevi da udmo, Bear yourself like a man.
Fdtela da padrone, Act as a master.
Xz^e, followed by the pronouns himself, herself, our-
setves, etc., is thus translated in Italian: Like himself, DA
quel che e, or DA queW u6mo cK egli e, etc.
READING LESSON.
Molte commediole, compdste dall' Ariosto che le recitava in
Many little comedies, composed • them recited
compagnia de' sudi fratelli e delle siie sorelle, fiirono il preludio
brothers his sisters, were prelude
delle immortali sue dpere. Finalmente V elegante orazidne, che
his works.
pronuncio intdrno alle regole che si deggiono seguire, ed
he pronounced concerning rules one ought to follow
intdrno alio scdpo che ogniin propdrre si debbe nei prdpri stiidi,
scope every one proposes ought own
fece condscere alia citta di Ferrara, sua patria, ch' essa allevava
made to know country reared
THE CASES OF NOUNS. 15
un genio, il quale avrcbbela illustmta; ed il padre siio god(';va
genius who -would have (her) enjoyed
in segreto della consolazidne d' iidire da' suoi coiicittadini
hearing fellow-citizens
proporre il pioprio figliuolo ai loro, come un modello da imitarsi.
to propose own son as model imitate.
EXERCISE.
1. Ill Italy there are immense plains, majestic rivers, very
high mountains, lakes, cascades, forests, volcanoes, and beauty in
all varieties.
2. A lady, speaking of a preacher whom she had heard from
a great distance, said, " He spoke to me with* his hand, and. 1
listened with^ my eyes."
3. It is difficult to satisfy every one's desire in (the) great
enterprises.
4. May God send us good princes, and may the devil not give
them the fancy of wishing to be heroes !
5. (The) hypocrites cover themselves with the mask of (the)
devotion.
6. Never leave flowers in a sleeping-chamber.
7. The greater part of (the) men live like crazy people, and
die like fools.
8. One of the miseries of the rich is to be always deceived.
VOCABULARY.
1. There are, vi sono ; immense \Aams, pianura stermindta;
majestic rivers, Jiume maestoso.
2. A lady, una Signora ; speaking, parldndo ; a preacher
whom she had heard, un predicatbre cli ella avea inteso ; far off,
inolto distdnte ; said, disse ; he has spoken to me, egli mi ha
parldto (with the hands) ; I have listened to him, lo V ho aS'
coUdto (with the eyes).
3. Great enterprises, grdnd^ impresa ; it is difficult, e cb&a
difficile ; to satisfy, secondare ; desire, desiderio ; all, tutti.
4. May God send us, Dio ci mdndi ; good prince, huono
principe ; devil, didvolo ; not give them, non d'la loro,
6. Cover themselves, si c6p7^ono.
6. Never leave, non lascidte jndi.
7. Live, vivono ; die, mubiono.
8. Always deceived, sempre inganndti.
46
ITALIAN GRAMaiAR.
Dove ? where ?
Che ? what ?
a^?
who?
Sovente, often.
CONVERSATION.
Dove era la Signora ?
Molto distdnte dal predicatore.
Con che si coprono gV ipocriti ? Colla mdschera delta divozione. /hO:
Qudnti sensi avete ?
Come si ckidmano ?
Ahhidmo del vino ?
E tempo di pranzdre ?
Che cdne e quesfo?'
Che 7'ecitdva Aribsto in com-
pagn'ia cZe' suoi frateUi e delle
sue sorelle 2
Dove sono maraviglie in bgni
genere f
Che sono esse (tjiey) ?
Cinque.
Udito, vista, odordto, gusto, tdtto.
Avete una hotte di vino.
lo ho pranzdto con alciini amici,
E un cdne da cdccia.
Mblte commedible, che furono il
preliidio delle immortdli sue
op ere.
In Itdlia.
Fiumi maestbsi, cascdte, selves
volcdni, etc.
Egli mi ha parldto cblla mdno.
Che disse una Sigtibra dJ un
predicatore ?
Qiidli 'persbne sbno sovente in-
ganndte ?
Qudli ubmini vivono come La maggibr parte degli ubmini.
Le persbne ricche.
pazzi
r?
CHxiPTER yil.
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE.
lo, tu, egli, esso, ella, essa, nrji, voi, eglino and essi, cUeno and esse.
I, thou, he, he o;- it, she, she or it, we, you. they, m.,
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
they, f.
Chi hdtte ? Son lO,
Who knocks ? It is I.
Se non voictc cantdr vox, can- If you do not wish to sing, /
tero lO, will sing.
Non duUtdte : pejiseremo Noi ad Do not fear : we will think of
ogni cosa,
every thing.
PRONOUNS.
47
Cost diceva ancbr lO,
Vol farete quel die vorro lO,
lo voylio fare come fate voi,
Non ci va egli, e non ci andrete
nemmeno voi,
Avete voi roha'^ Avete quat-
trini ?
Che bella cosa il poter dire,
Co7iidndo lO !
Gli farete conoscere chi sono lO
e 'chi siete voi,
Siete vol il padrone di questo
albergo ?
Pqiche volete che dica lO, diro
10,
Vol avete miglior vista che non
ho 10,
/ also said so.
Tou will do what / wish.
/ wish to do as you do.
He will not go ; and you will
not go either.
Have you pro[)erty ? Have you
money ?
How beautiful it is to say, /
command !
Let him know Avho / am, and
who you are.
Are you the master of this ho-
tel?
As you wish that / say it, /
will say it.
You have better sight than L
PEONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS I.).
Me, te, Kii, lei, noi, vol, Idro ; se.*
iie, thee, him, her, us, you, tiiem ; "himself, herself, itself, themselves.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Che cosa volete da me ?
Ella, e fiiQri di se ddlla rdbbia,
Or ora sono a vox,
Fdtemi la jinezza di pranzdr
MECO,
lo dmo il mio amico quanta me
STESSO,
Si, fate voi, io mi rimetto in
VOI, mi confido in voi,
Egli non sa far niilla da SE,
Lascidte fare a me, non dubi-
tdte,
Degnate far colazibne con N(5i,
What do you wish of me ?
She is beside hei'self with anger.
I am with you in a moment.
Do me the pleasure to dine
with me.
I love my friend as much as
myself.
Yes, do what you will, I agree
with you, I confide in you.
He does not know how to do
any thing by himself
Let me do it: never fear (do
not doubt).
Have the kindness to breakfas;
with us.
* These pronouns are called disjunctive.
48
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
jEgli non domanda voi,
Non dlco a voi, Signor mio,
Verrd co7i voi se volete,
To non voglio partire da VOI,
Qudnto avete sj^eso per lei,
He does not ask for you.
I do not speak to you, deai' sir.
I will go with you, if yon w^ish.
I do not wish to leave you.
How much have you spent for
her.
PRONOUNS* m THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS II.).
Mi. ti, gli. lo
Me, thee, him, xncl.^ hii
la.
Li,
Them, m..
CI w ne, VI,
you,
him or it, her, ind., her or it, us^
le, loro : si.
them, f., them, ind. ; himself, herself, itself, themselves.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Voi VI siete dimenticdto di me,
Non MI dimenticherb DI VOI,
Gli e nolo un jiglio,
Che male vi lio jdtio io ?
Davvero, io non vi capiscOy
Mi place la 7nia libertd,'\
Fate pur quel che vi pare,
La fortuna (yi_vu6l bene,
Vi raccomdndo di far questo,
Che cosa yi ha egli detto Di me ?
Potete dir loro che entrino,
Io VI Idscio, perche ho fretta,
Ho scritto una lettera che mi
prenu
comdnda il Signor
Aiutaii che ti aiu-
Chc mi
Tizio"^
Dio dice
tero,
Domdni gli daro da prdnzo
Mi ricordo cid che mi avete detto,
Amico, CI rivedremo stasera,
Ti accerto che non le diro nidla,
You have forgotten me.
I will not forget you.
A son is born to him.
What ill have I done you ?
Truly, I do not understand yow.
I love my liberty.
Do as seems good to you.
Fortune wishes us well.
1 recommend you to do this.
What has he said to yon of rne f
You can tell them to come in.
I leave you, for I am in a hurry.
I have written a letter which
is important to me.
What does Mr. Tizio wish of
me?
God says, Help thyself, and I
will help thee.
T will give hifn dinner to-mor-
ro^\\
I remember what you have
said to me.
Friend, we shall see each other
this evening.
I assure you that I shall say
nothing to her.
* These pronouns are called coDJunctive.
t Mi place, it pleases me.
PRONOUNS.
49
PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE.
I.
lo,
Til,
JEgli, esso
a. essa.
N6U
Vol,
£!c/lino, essi,
Elleiio, esse,
lo dor mo,
Tii prdnzi,
Egli balla,
Ella ride,
Noi cantidmo,
Voi pens cite,
Essi scrivono,
Esse pdrlano,
I sleep.
Thou dinest.
He dances.
She laughs.
We sing.
You think.
They write.
/ ±JUeno, esse, j 'i'hey, f. ; Esse pdjiano, They speak.
Remark, — Of these pronouns only Esso in all its
forms, Ndi and ^di, can be used as o1)jcctive.
II. jSj^-Zz, with its feminine and plural forms, can only
be used for persons. It translates the subiective pronoun
U before verljs used impersonally ; and it is often, for
euphony, contracted to di, or e'. Very seldom it is ex-
pressed with really impersonal verbs. Ex. : Egli e difficile,
it is difficult ; Pidve e tudna, it rains and thunders.
III. Ella mayjbe used to translate it before the verbs
essere, jpdfere, e semhrdre when followed by a feminine
n^urT; as, Ella mi sembra disgrdzia inaudita, it seems
to me a misfortune unheard of. In every other case,
Esso and Essa with their plural must be used.^as they
can represent both persons and things, whilst Egli and
Ella only represent persons.
lY. The use of gli for egli, of gli diW^ egli for e^lino^
and of ia or le for ella or elleno^ is jusftfiedbj the_ex-
ample of good writers, ancient and modern, and by the
])ractice of good society. In addressing persons, the
Tuscans employ the contractions la and le for dlla and
elleno in the sense of you : as, La 7ni perddni, I beg
your pardon; Le mi dicano, (ladies or gentlemen),
tell me.
v. If_the number of the person is sufficiently indicated,
cither by the termmation ot the verb, or by any othcr_cir-
cumstance, tlie subjoctivc pronoun is gcncrally^omittcd.
5
50 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
But when there is antithesis or contrast implied between
two or more verbs in different persons, then the pronouns
representing the various subjects cannot be suppressed.
Ex. : JEssa uscird e voi sta?'ete in cdsa, she will go out
and you will stay at home.
VI. The preceding rule must be observed when the
stress of the voice is to belaid on the subject of a verb,
iiT which case the~i3ronoun is often put after j/t. Ex. :
J^ssa sola pud dir queste cose, or qiicste cose le pud dir
essa, she alone can say such things.
VII. Tlic eni})liasis often expressed in English hy do
or did, and the exclusive meaning given to a pronouja Jjy
the word self, are rendered in Italian, either by merely
placing the subject after the verb, or by the adjectives
stesso and medesimo,^ Ex. : Dite ora cid che pensdte v6i,
or dite cid che voi stesso pensdte, say now what you do
tliink ; Lo fard egli, or egli medesimo lo fard, he will
do it himself. This rule applies also to nouns, as may be
seen in the following examples : Aspettdte che venga il
padrSne, or che il padrone stesso venga, wait until the
master comes himself.
VIII. The words himself^ herself, itself, and themselves^
can always be translated by stesso and medesimol after a
noun or a pronoun, and must agree with it in 8;ender and
number. JbJx. : iSuo pddre stesso lo dice, his father him-
self says so. After the verbs essere and par ere, the same
pronouns can be translated by desso, dessa, dessi, aiid
desse, according to the gender of the noun to which they
are put in apposition. Ex. : Non e piil desso, he is no
longer himself ; Mi par dessa, it seems to me it is she,
or she herself.
IX. In interrogative phrases, implying the desire ainl
purpose of obtaining information about any thing, the
subjective pronoun is either placed after the verb; as,
Anderd egli domdni ? shall he go to-morrow ? — or it is
suppressed altogether, and the question marked by the
inflection of the voice, which is always very distinct in
Italian. But if the question is put by persons acquainted
already with tlie fact inquired about, the pronoun sliould
PRONOUNS. 51
be expressed and placed before the verb. Ex. : EHi
anderci domdni ? Tutti lo aspettano, he will go to-mor-
row ? Every one expects him.
X. The subjective pronouiis are replaced l)y the o23-
jectiye^ in the following cases: 1. After tlie adverbs
covie, siccdme, and qndnto^ when no verb follows them :
as, Erano maliziosi come lai, they were malicious as he
was ; Se cg-Ii fosse come te, if lie were like thee. 2.
VVhen they govern an infniitive: as, Sapendo me dmar lei,
knowing that I love her ; Udendo lui con gli dltri esser
morto, hearing that he died with the otliers. 3. After
the verb esse re preceded by its subject : as, S' io fossi l{d,
if I were he ; Credeva che Pietro fosse te, I thought
Peter was you.
XI. In addressing, the Italians employ either the second
person'or the third' Tlie second person singular, repre-i
sented by Tu, Thou, denotes affection and familiarity,
and always implies that the speaker is equal or superior
to tlie individual thus addressed. Great love can only
justify an inferior in using it towards a superior, —
children, for instance, towards their parents and grand-
parents. The second person plural corresponds to it
when several persons are spoken to ; and it is also used
generally with any class of society, correcting its apparent
familiarity with some expression of respect when address-,
ing a person entitled to some consideration, as, foi' in-
stance : Cchne state, Signore? How do you do, sir?
Che mi commanddte, Signdra ? What can I do for youJ
my lady ?" In poetry and elevated prose the rules are the'
same as in Enoiish.
o
s
XII. Thejhird person singular is used in addressing
any one that doe's not TjcTong to the low classes ; and it is
expressed by the feminine pronoun J5^/fe, repres-enting the
words Vdstra Signoria, or their contraction A^ossignorfa
(V.S.), which would sound too formal if used very fre-
quently in conversation. The same feminine pronoun
precedes the verb in the third person when the individual
addi'cssed is entitled to be treated as Eccellcnza, Altrzza,
Grand^zza, or witli some other feminine word. IT many
52 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
are to be addressed in this way, the third person plural
iis substituted for the singular.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE.
XIII. The pronouns of the first class may be used as
direct or indirect regimen ; that is, they may be governed
by the verb, or by a preposition, as the following exam-
ples will show : —
CerccHe me ? Are you looking; for me ?
PenscHe a 7ne ? Do you think of rae ?
When the pronouns me, te, and se are governed by tjie
preposition con, they may be prefixed and joined to it,
tTmsjijrriicQy teco, seco. JSfosco and vdsco, for con ndi and
con vol, are now entirely left to poetry.
XLY. The pronouns of the second class are employed
either as direct or indn-ect regimen of the verb ; but they
can never be governed by a preposition. They serve to
conjugate pronominal or reflective verbs, and in such case
mi, ti si, ci, vi, si, mean respectively myself, thyself, him-
self; or, herself, ourselves, yourself ; or, yourselves and
themselves. Ex. : —
lo mi ricordo, I remember.
Mi mando dei fori, He sent me some flowers.
TliS-Iironoun l6ro belono:s to both classes ; it can there-
fore be used for the direct or the indirect object, with
a preposition or witEbut, as the case may require.
XY. When the objective pronoun is emphatic, when
the preposition cannot be suppressed, and when there is
antithesis between two pronouns, a proiiomi of the first
class must be used ; in other cases, one of the sec.ond
class is to be preferred.
READING LESSON.
L' uomo scioperato e 1' uomo piu affaceendato. Egli ha
idle most occupied.
cinquanta amiei che si crede in obbligo di coltivare.
fifty friends whose (friendship) '^ believes obliged
PRONOUNS. 53
Vi dira il iiome di tiitti i ricamatori, di tutti gli spcziuli dclla
will give (tell) embroiderers apothecaries
citta. Egli vi provvedera il sarto, il calzolaio, la lavandaia ; se
will procure
siete ammalato, condurra da voi un medico ; siete addolorato,
sick, will conduct afflicted
egli non vi lascia, fintantoche non vi abbia veduto ridere.
leaves, until have seen to laugh.
S' incaricliera di tutte le vostre compre, e finira coll' andare a
will take charge purchases will finish going
letto stracco di aver lavorato tanto. L' allegrezza ci consola e
bed tired worked so much. joy
ci tiene in sanita ; le cure vane ci opprimono, distiirbano 1' animo
keeps health cares oppress
nostro e ci traggono tosto nella tomba.
drag quickly
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. When Paulus Emilius repudiated Papiria, his wife, some
persons were astonished that he should separate himself from so
modest and so handsome a w^oman ; but Emilius, showing them
his shoe, said, " You see that it is well made, but none of you
know where it hurts me."
2. It was reported to Frederick the Great, that some one had
spoken ill of him. He asked if this person had a hundred
thousand men. He was answered, "No." — "Ah! well," added
the kino-, " I can do nothinsj with him : if he had a hundred
thousand men, I would declare war against him."
3. A young man who passed for rich, but who was laden with
debts, sat very pensive, the evening before his betrothal, in his fu-
ture mother-in-law's parlor. Several times she said to him, " CJie
cosa avete ? " " What have you ? " (meaning, " What is the matter
with you ? ") To which he continually answered, " No7i ho nienfe"
" I have nothing, " (meaning, " Nothing is the matter with me.")
Eight days after his marriage, his mother-in-law, seeing a crowd
of creditors, said to him, " Sir, you have deceived me." — " Mad-
am," added he, "I well informed you that I had notliing; and T
repeated the same thing to you more than ten times in your
parlor before my betrothal."
5*
54 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
VOCABULARY.
1. Repudiated, ripudio ; some persons, alcuni ; were aston-
ished, si maraviglidvano ; should separate himself, si separasse ;
so pretty a woman, una donna cost vezzosa ; modest, modesta ;
showing, mostrcindo ; his, la sua ; said, disse ; you see, voi
vedke ; well made, hen fdtta ; however, ^e;'o ; no one, nessuno ;
knows where, sa dove ; hurts, offenda.
2. It was reported, yi6 riferito ; Frederick the Great, Fede/ico
i! Grande ; had spoken ill, sparldto ; if this person, se costiii ; a
hundred thousand, cento mila ; he was, gli fu ; no, di no ; well,
bene ; added, soggiunse ; I cannot, non posso ; nothing, nulla ;
had, avesse ; would declare war, inuoverei guerra.
3. A young man, un giovinotto ; who passed for, tenuto per ;
laden, cdrico ; debt, debito ; was pensive, stdva tutto pensieroso ;
evening before, vigilia ; of his betrothal, dei suoi spojisdli ; par-
lor, salotto ; of his future mother-in-law, della sua futura suocera ;
many times, parecchie volte ; sir,, signore ; always, sempre ; eight
tlays after, otto giorni dopo ; seeing arrive, vedendo capitdre ;
a crowd, una turba ; deceived, inganndta ; I well informed you,
vi feci pur avvertita ; repeated, ripetei ; more than, j^mrfi; ten,
died ; in your, nel vostro ; before, prima de\
CONVERSAZIONE.
CM bdtte ? Son io.
Che cdsa volete da me ? Voglio far colazione con voi,
Che cbsa mi avete detto ? Non me ne ricordo.
Pa gate voi il prdnzo ? Si, lo pdgo io.
3Ii aspettdte ? Non vi aspetto.
Di chi pdrla egli? Egli pdrla di noi.
Come si chidma questa ragdzza ? Ella si chidma Carolina,
A chi scrivero io? Al pddre di 3£aria.
Ti penti tu ? • Io mi pento.
Ci divertidmo noi ? Noi non ci divertidmo.
Chi vi dira il nome di tutti gli X' uomo scioperdto vi dira il
spezidli della cittd ? nome di tutti.
Siete voi il padrone di questa Sono il padrone di questo at-
cdsa ? bergo.
Avete il bastone di mio fratel- Io non ho il suo bastone, voi
lo ? V avete.
Volete ddrmi un anello ? Non voglio ddrvi un anello^ vi
darb (will give) un libra.
PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE.
55
CHAPTER VIII.
PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE.
[ Continuation of Preceding Lesson.']
To avoid several monosyllables, and for the sake of
e \ iphony, tlie Italians unite several words together. This
union constitutes one of the chief beauties of the Ian2;ua2:e.
For exainple : the imperative ddteinelo is composed of
date 'iiie loj^ give it to me ; and, because the accent falls
on the first syllable, the word has all the strength of the
imperative, the desire of prompt obedience.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
La riverisco divotamente^
In die pbsso servirLA ?
Come VE LA passdte ?
To ME LA pdsso benone,
Vi do la huona notte,
Non VI voglio incomoddre,
IhrudtevENK indietro,
Glielo posso dir lO,
AnddteQ.\.\YA.O a dir VOI,
L'evawi'^i dindnzi, temerdrio^
Non MI comparke piu dindnzi,
Ohe VE NE pdre ?
RagionidmoLA. qui fra di NOI,
Faccidmo'LA da hubni amici,
Foi non me la darete ad in-
tendere,
I have the honor to salute you.
How can I serve you ?
How do you do ?
I am very well.
I wish you good night.
I do not wisli to trouble you.
Turn back.
I can tell it to him myself.
Go tell it to him yourself.
Go out of my sight, insolent one.
Never appear before me again.
How does it seem to vou ?
Let us reason here together.
Let us act like good friends.
You will not make me believe it
I. A pronoun stands for a person or thing
Lo or iV,
Le,
Ne.
him, it; To lo ret/o,
her, it ; Tu la conosci,
them m. ; JVoi li vedidmo,
them, /. ; lo le aspelto,
of it ; Voi N E riderete,
I see it or him.
Thou kiiowest her.
We see them.
I expect them.
You will Uiu^h about
Oi or vi^ of it
it.
To CI or VI penso,l think of it.
r- ft
b ITALIAN GRAMMAR. •
II. Tliej)ronoun il or lo may be contracted and blouded
with the negative non into the monosyllable nol: as, JVol
so, I do not know it ; Nol vedo, I do not see him. When
not thus contracted, lo is used, as it always is before verbs
beginning with s impure, or a vowel. Before other verbs
lo is generally preferred to z7, unless euphony should
otherwise require. Ex. : Lo riconobbi siibito die 7 vidi,
I recognized him as soon as I saw him ; Nol vidi e per
conseguenza non lo salutdi, I did not see him, and conse-
quently I saluted him not ; 11 chiese e lo spedi a suo
fratello^ he asked for him and sent him to his brother.
III. It is also by euphony that we should be guided in
the elision of pronouns before verbs, whenever the nieaii-
ing allows it. The rules that govern the elision of the
article apply also to pronouns, with the exceptions__that
may result from the verbs having no gender. Lo vide e
V amo is properly said, because the gender of the pronoun
elided is already determined by the object of vide. U amo
qudnto una mddre pud amdr-e would not be correct, owing
to the double meaning that the pronoun thus elided as-
sumes ; vfz., She loved him or her as much as a mother
can love.
lY. Though the pronoun gli signifies tojiini^ it is also
used for^ie feminine le when prefixed to and blended
with lo, la, lih,J§: ^^' In sucli case, the letter e is in-
serted between the two pronouns ; thus : —
Glieio ; V6i glielo darete, You will give it to him or her.
Giiela ; lo (jU^U manderb, I will send them to her or him.
Glie'le; Glie'le vendera, He will sell them to liim or her.
Gliem; Vdi gliene comprerele, You will buy her or him some.
Lene^nstQSid of gliene is occasionally used forjthe
feminine.
Y. In a grea,t number of Italian phrases, the pronoun
la refers to a feminine noun which is not expressed, but
it is easily supplied bjjhe reader or listener. Ex. : —
lo ve LA dico schietta, I tell it to you frankly (the truth).
Voi ve LA godete, ITou enjoy it (life).
lo me LA bdtto, I beat it (retreat) ; I run away.
Tlie words veritd, vita, and ritirdta are understood.
PROJSOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. o7
VI. Eii]jhoiiy requires that the i of tlie^ pronouns mi,
tij^si, tu',_iii,_jihould -GhangeL the i into e when they are
followed by the pronouns /o, la, li, ne; as, —
Jlfe Zo, it to me ; Tu me lo ddi, Thou givest it to me.
Te la, it to thee ; lo te la do^ I give it to thee.
Se li, them to him ; Egli se li fard dare, lie will cause them to be given to himself.
Ce lie, us of it ; Noi ce ne occupidnio, We occupy ourselves with it.
Vele, them to you ; lo ve le presto, I lend them to you.
VII. Md, tel, selj^cel ,jvely are written befbrea word
which commences Avith a consonant , instead of me lo, teloj^
etc. ; as, EgTTTe I figura , "oY^seTo Jig ura , he iigures it to
himself; io vel diceva, or ve lo diceva, I said it to you.
VIII. Some ancient authors have often placgd_the pro-
nouns lo, la, li, le, before 7ni, ti, si, ci, vi^\\Q,u. euphony
permitted. Tlius7~instead of "saymg, Uio te lo perduni,
may God pardon you ; they have said, Dio il ti perdoni.
IX. All the_pron()uns mi, ti, si, ci, vi, lo, la, gli, le^
ne, me To^ telo^ se loTetc., whether simple^or compound,
are generally placed before the verb, except when used
with an infinitive, a gerund, the second person singular,
and the first and second plural of the imperative : in wliich
cases they are placed after the verb to which they ara
joined, so as to make one word ; thws, —
Parldr'n.i., To speak to me.
ParZdrMENE, To speak to me of it.
ScriveteL^, Writ« to her.
KicordidmoCl, Let us remember.
CotnprdteG'LlEL.O, Buy it for him.
GuarddteLO, Loolc at him.
Cercdndo'LO, Seeking him.
VendcndoGX,lBljA, Selling it to him.
ilfosiraZeCENE, Show us some.
DdfeMELO, Give it to me.
I-cmieGLlELA, Take it from her.
PensidMOCl, Let us think of it.
Observe that the infinitive loses the final e when the
pronoun is joinedjto^it ; ahd^TTlTie'infinitrve terminates in
ri'e, as cond'Orre, it loses the syllable_rej and we say,
Condurmi, conduct me.
X. To express " give it to me," "give it to us," etc., the
conjunctive pronoun is placed after the personal in this
way ; Ddte^iFJjk ddteCVA^O.
58 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
XI. The pronoun is likewise placed after the word ecco,
to which it is joined; ixs,' Eccomi, eccolo, behold me,
behold him.
XII. Withjthejie.2:ation non, these pronouns are^plagad
before the verb, except when the verb is in the infinitive ;
as, —
Non GLiELO domdndate, Do not ask it of him.
Non ME NE date, Do not give me any.
Non LO faccidmo, Let us not make it.
Non LO facendoj or non faceiidoh, Not making it.
Xm. These pronouns are also joined to the past par-
ticiple when' the auxiliary is understood; as, MaUegrdtosi^
having rejoiced!
Remark. — These pronouns admit of other transposi-
tions, and very much assist in expressing an energetic,
rapid, or gentle sentiment. For example, the phrase
" I say it " may be constructed thus : —
Lo dico, to express a grave sentiment.
11 dicOf to give a mild form to the phrase.
Dicolo, to impress with the rapidity of the thought.
Dicol, to join rapidity with sweetness.
The learner should, however, be careful not to place
the ^^ronoun after any other than the imperative, infixiitiye,
and o^erund..
XIY. The first consonant of the pronoun should be
doubled whenever it is joined to a verb of one syllable, or
one_which lias the grave accent upon the final vo\yel ;
as, Dillo, ddmini, fdllo, tell it, give me, do it^
XY. The position of thepronoun can be changed for
the sake of euphony ; as, —
To lo voglio vedere, or io vbglio I wish to see him.
ved'erlo,
lo gliene posso parldre, or to I can speak to him of it.
posso parldrgliene,
PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. 50
XVI. In certain cases, the personal pronoun is changed
into the possessive; as, Mio *wxilqrddo , in spite of me :
and, on the contrary, the possessive is sometimes changed
into the personal; as, Cavdtevi il vestito, take off your
coat.
READING LESSON.
Tra le varie nazloni del mondo la pulltezza lia introdotto
politeness introduced
infiniti iisi di salutare. Plauto parla di popoli che si salutavano
modes salutation. Plautus speaks
tirandosi forte 1' orecchia. I Franchi si strappavano un
pulling strong (hard) ear. pulled out
capello, e lo presentavano alia persona che volevano salutare.
hair presented they wished
Al Giappone un conoscente vi saliita togliendosi dal piede lina
Japan acquaintance taking foot
pantofola ; e nelle Indie, egli viene a prendervi per la barba ;
slipper comes to take beard ;
altri si salutano voltandosi la scliiena. Gl' isol;ini del grande
others turning back. islanders
oceano fregano il lore naso con quelle della persona salutata,
rub ~ ' nose that
oppiire gli soffiano nell' orecchio. GU abitanti di Horn si
or blow inhabitants
coricano col ventre a terra, e la maggior parte dei negri si
lie down belly greater negroes
prendouo a vicenda ledlta e le fanno schricchiolare. L' Inglese
take turn make crack. Englislnnan
■t)'
in un eccesso d' amicizia vi afferra per la mano e ve la scuote
fit friendship seizes shalces
vigorosaraente come se volesse strapparvi il braccio. Questa
if he wished to pull out arm. This
gentilezza fa la veci degli abbracci dei Frances! e degl' Italiani.
courtesy takes the place embraces
EXERCISE.
1. A thoughtless wag saw three blind peoj)lo in the street,
wliOj keeping together, went begging. " Stop," said lie to thcni ;
"take this crown, divide it between you, and [)ray God for me."
60 ITALIAN GllAJVIMAR.
As to the crown, he gave it to neither of them. The blind men
all thanked him at once, and ran quickly into a tavern, where
they ordered a breakfast. When they were well satisfied, one
said to the others, " Let him who has the crown pay the fare ; '*
but each one answered, "I have it not: thou hast it." From
hard words they came to blows ; and gave so many blows with
their sticks, that they broke every thing that was on the table, to
tJie great detriment of the host.
2. The authors of the century of Louis XIV. have expressed
great thoughts in simple words.
VOCABULARY.
1. Humorist, hurlone ; thoughtless, spensierato ; saw in, vide
per; keeping together, stretti insieme ; went begging, se ne
anddvano accattdndo ; stop, fermatevi ; take, togliete ; divide it,
spartitelo ; neither of them, nessuno ; thanked, ringraziarono ; all
at once, concordemente ; they ran, corsero ; a breakfast, da cola-
zione ; well satisfied, ben satolli ; let him who, dii ; pay, pdghi ;
but each one answered, al die ciascuno risjyondeudo ; thou hast
it. tu V hai ; they came, vennero ; they gave, diedero ; so many,
tcinte ; blows with a stick, bastoncHe ; everything that was, futto
cio die si trovdva ; to the great detriment, etc., con gran ddnno
deir oste.
2. Have expressed, hdnno espresso.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che e V Italia ? H giardmo d* Europa.
Che avete ? Ho una rbsa,
Avke il libro ? Non ho il libro, ho la penna.
E giovane la sorella del Signbre ? Si, ella e giovane.
Che fdnno gV isoldni del grdiide J^glino fregano il loro ndso con
oceano qudndo salutano ? quello della persona^ salutdta.
E gli ahitdnti di Horn ? Si coricano ventre a terra.
Che vide un burlone ? J^gli vide tre ciedii.
Che dfisse il burlone ? Pregdte D'lo per me.
A dii diede egli uno scudo ? Egli non lo diede a iiessuno.
Come saliitano gli Inglesi ? Vi afferrano per la mdno e ve
la scuotano.
QudV e la prima legge ? La legge di Dio e la prima
legge.
Tribnfa essa sempre ? Si, tosto o tdrdi.
THE ADJECTIVE. 61
CHAPTER IX.
THE ADJECTIVE — L' " ADDIETTIVO.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Godo di vedervi in hiiona salute, I am glad to see you well.
Passeremo per la piu corta, We will take the shortest.
Parlidinoci schietto, Let us speak clearly.
Perche avete tanta premura'^ Why are you so hurried?
Quanti rinni avete ? How old are you ?
I rtcchi hdnno molti amici, The rich have many friends.
II hello pidce a tutti, The beautiful pleases all.
3I6lfi pochi fdnno un assdi^ * A little repeated makes much.
GV ingrdti hdnno poca memoria, Ungrateful people have short
memories.
Chi perdona ai catiwi, nubce ai He who pardons the wicked,
huoni, injures the good.
Buon dl, hiiona sera, felice notte, Good day, good evening, good
night.
Per molti lafatica e poco sdna, Labor is not healthy for many
^ people.
E uno che ha pocJii pari, He is a man who has few
equals.
ADJECTIVES : THEIR NIBIBER, GEXDEE, ETC.
I. Italian adjectives all end in o or e. Those ending
in o change the o into a for the Feminine : those in_g
preserve the same form in both genders. "The plural of
adjectives is formed like that of iiouns ; as, —
SINGULAR.
Popolo libero ed indipendente, Free and independent people.
Nazione libera ed indipendente, Free and independent nation.
PLURAL.
Pbpoli liberi ed indipendenti, Free and independent peoples.
Nazibni lihere ed i7idipendenti , Free and independent nations.
* Idioms and proverbs are marked i
62 ITALIAN GRA31MAR.
II. Some adjectives end either in e or in o ; as, Via-
lente oFmoIenfo. In this case one might say, Uu uo'ino
violente, una ddnna viole7ite^ or un uomo violento, una
d6nna violSnta^ a violent man, a violent woman.
III. The only adjectives terminating in i are pdri^
equal, and dispdri or iini:)dri^ unequal. These are inva-
.'i'iable, whatever be the gender or the number of the noun
(to which they belong.
IV. The word 'pdi^i is^ often used as a noun. It then
has a possessive adjective after it ; as, Tin pdri mio^ un
l^dri vostro, del j)dri nostri, a man like me, like you,
persons like us; cosi si trdtta cdn un pdri mio? is it
thus that one acts with a person of my rank ?
V. Substantives used as adjectives, ending in t(^re,
change tpt'e into trice forme feminine ; as, A.ut6re, au-
thor; autince, authoress, — except dottdre, fattore, doc-
tor, farmer ; which make dottoressa^ fattoressa. Other
substantives used as adjectives form their feminine in essa.
Such are, Poeta, poet ; poetessa^ poetess ; bar one, baron ;
baronessa, etc.
YI. Adjectives of q riant ity, — as, Qudnto, how much;
tdnto, so much; altrettdnto, as much; tr6j)po, too
much; pdco, little; tnolto, much, — agree with their
TTpuns ; as, —
Tdnto orgoglio ; tdnta paura, So much pride; so much fear.
Tanti sciocchi ; tdnte volte, So many fools ; so many times.
Poco sdngue ; poca came, Little blood ; little meat.
Molti disgusti., Much (or many) chagrins.
Altrettanti solddti ; altrettdnte As many soldiers ; as many
donne, women.
Trdppo vento ; troppe ceremdme, Too much wind ; too many
ceremonies.
Qudnto vino ? qucinte honta ? How much wine ? how much
kindness ?
VII. '^e word " such " is sonietimes translated hj^^si
fdtto, a; si fdtto, a; as, —
TPIE ADJECTIVE.
63
Guardatevi da cosi fdtta rihal- Guard yourself against such a
ddglia, rabblti.
VIII. The adjective alqudnto( ^m^ul^r) signifies a lit-
Jle_; alqudnti (plural), some. ~Parecchi, jKirecchieJ^f^
m^y_ahojiULUJ^ ami c^\ be replaced by tlie word piu,
more; as, Vi erano pakecchie hallerine, or Piu bai-
ler ine, there were many dancers.
IX. Tlie adjective mezzo always precedes and ap^ees
w ith tlic noun which it limits ; but it may be invariable
wlien tiie Tioun is understood : as, ^Tna mezza bottisrHa,
half a bottle ; ilna botifg-lia e mezza or mezzo, a bottle
and a half. If the noun is not„£xpresscd, the adjective
mezzo takes no article.
X. The last syllable of the words hello ^ ^^jj:^£^gl^^j^«
must be suppressed before niasculine nouns commencing_
with a consonant. The adjective grdnde, great, is written
gran before masculine and feminine nouns, both in the
singular and plural ; as7
SINGULAR.
Bel giardhio,
Quel pcddzzo,
San Pietro,
fine garden,
this palace.
Saint Peter.
Gran hirhone,
Gran regma,
great villain.
PLUKAL.
JBei or he'' giardini.
Quel or que' paldzzi,
Sdnti Pietri.
Gran birboni.
Gran regine.
great queen.
XL Biiono^ g^Qod, loses the o before a consonajit ; as,
II huoh vino fcTTudn sdiigue, good wine makes good
blood.
XII. To avoid the union of too many consonants, the
last syllable of these adjectives is not retrenched before
(nouns commencing with 5, when followed by another con-
sonant; as, —
SINGULAR.
Bello sposo,
Quello straniero,
Grande strepito,
Grande spdda,
Son to Stefano,
Bnnno snolare.
handsome spouse,
that stranger,
great noise,
great sword.
Saint Stephen,
good scliolar.
PLURAL.
Begli sposi.
Quelli stranieri.
Grdndi strep'iii.
Grdndi spade.
Sd?iti Stefau'L
Budni scoldri.
64
ITALIAN GllAMMAR.
XIII. The final vowel o.f the preceding: adjectives ia
retrenclied before a vowel, and replaced by an apostrophe ;
as, BelV ucchio, fine eye ; quelV dsino, that ass ; grdnd'
^w^^9(??'c>, great emph-e ; etc.
/ XIV. No fixed rules can be given to determine the
place of the adjective, the Italians being guided by the
ear. Usage generally places the adjectives expressive of
form, color, and savor, after the noun; as, —
Tavola quadrdta,
Ahito turchmo,
Color giallo,
Un Signore italidno,
Acqua inzuccherata,
Una rosa hidnca,
square table.
blue coat.
yellow color.
an Italian gentleman.
sugared water.
a white rose.
REMARKS.
The following observations will assist the student : —
The Italian adjective can be placed before or after the
noun, andmust^ a^ree with it in gender and nuiniBer:
euphony determines its positipirr~' Adjectives denoting
materials, nations, dignity, color, taste, etc., are placed
afteFlhe nouns ; as, (Jajppello bianco, white hat ; un
udmo cieco, a blind man.
Participles and adjectives, preceded by an adverb, may
be ])laced after the noun ; as, Una cdsa trdppo piccola,
too sniiill a house.
The position of some adjectives alters their signification ;
as, —
a certain (that is any) thing.
a certain (sure) thing.
something important.
a great thing.
an honest man.
a polite man.
my only daughter.
my daughter alone.
Una certa cosa,
Una cosa certa,
Gran cosa,
Una cdsa grdnde,
Un galantudmo,
Un udmo galdnte,
La sola mia ftglia,
Mia figlia sola,
Un jier udmo,
Un udmo Jiero,
Un pdvero udmo,
Un uomo povero,
a savage man.
a proud man.
an unhappy man.
a poor man.
THE ADJECTIVE. 65
READING LESSON.
Giambattista Pigna, scrittore celebre del fortunato secolo
writer century
decimo sesto ci ha tramandato il ritratto seguente dell' Ariosto.
sixteenth transmitted portrait following
L' Ariosto,* in quanto alia forma e all' aspetto del corpo avea la
had
statura alta, la testa calva, i capelli neri e crespi, la fronte
tall bald black ciu-ly
spaziosa, le ciglia alte e sottili, gli occlii in dentro, neri, vivaci,
thin
e giocondi, il naso aquilino grande e curvo, le labbra raccolte,
lively lips contracted
i denti bianchi ed equali, le guance scarne e di colore quasi
cheeks hollow almost
olivastro, la barba un pdco rara cbe non cingea il mento iuf ino
olive-colored thin covered chin
alle orecchie, il collo ben proporzionato, le spalle larghe e
neck well shoulders
alquanto piegate, quali sdgliono avere quasi tutti quelli che,
somewhat curved, as are accustomed to have those
da fanciulli, hanno cominciato a stare inchiodati in sui libri : Le
nailed
mdni asciutte, i fianchi stretti. Egli dipinto dalla mano dell'
thin hips narrow. painted
eccellente Tiziano, pare che ancor sia vivo. Un popolo fanatico
seems still alive.
e superstizioso e un arma terribile nelle mani d' un ddspota.
Ove la pdlle del leone non basta bisogna aggiiingervi quella
When skin sufficient to add
della volpe.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. Osley, a famous beggar of London, made a fortune by using
the following stratagem. He placed himself in streets -where
there was the greatest concourse of fashionable people ; and, when
he saw elegant ladies, he asked charity of them. If they refused,
* A few proper nouns of very remarkable people take the definite article in Italian ;
as, II Dante, VAridstOj etc.
6*
Q6 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
" Madam," said he to one, " in the name of your beautiful black
eyes ; " to another, " in the name of your fine hair ; " to this one,
" in the name of your rosy lips ; " and, to that one, " in the name
of your admirable figure." Finally came the divine legs, the
charming feet, the majestic carriage : nothing was forgotten, and
he returned home with his purse well filled.
2. A drunkard, who wished to excuse himself to his confessor
for his too great love of wine, reasoned thus singularly : " My
father, good wine makes good blood, good blood produces good
humor, good humor creates good thoughts, good thoughts produce
good works, and good works conduct man to heaven : then (the)
good wine leads man to heaven."
VOCABULARY.
1. Made, fece ; following, seguente ; he placed himself, egli si
appostava ; where there was, ove era; fashionable people, hel
mondo ; when he saw, allorche vedeva ; refused, ricusavano ;
admirable, mirdbile ; came, venivano ; forgotten, dimenticato.
2. Drunkard, hevitore ; wished, voUa ; too great love of wine,
troppo grdnde amore del vino ; reasoned thus singularly, facea
questo curioso arg omenta ; makes, fa; produces, produce;
creates, y*a ndscere ; conduct, menano.
C ON VERS AZI6nE.
Sono gli Americdni Viberi ? Si sono liheri ed indipendenti.
Che proclamazione e quella di Si parla molto deW eniancipa'
cid si pariah zione dei poveri* neri.
Che predicatore avete ? Ahhidmo un hrdvo predicatore.
Come si chidma (called) ? Z' amico dei pbveri.
Dov* e la rostra Signora mddre'? E nella chiesa di San Paolo, '
Cosa e il V astro Signor pddre'^ E autdre.
E sua mdglie (wife) ? E dottaressa.
Qudnti dnni ha Maria? Ha ndve dnni.
Che statura ha ella ? Ha la statura piccola.
Di che colore e il sua dhito ? H sua nudvo dbito e turchino.
Che hudna cdsa ha egli fdtto f Nan pdsso (I cannot) dtrvelo
(tell you).
Chi € questa cdra Janciidlina? Luisina. Ella e mia nipdte.
Che dcchi celesti / Si, ella ha V ciria d' un angio-
letta.
* The repetition of the objective strengthens its expression ; as, Povero^ poor ; pdverc
pdvero, very poor
ADJECTIVES : THEIR COMPARATIVES. 67
CHAPTER X.
ADJECTIVES: THEIR COMPARATIVES.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Vi sono piu poveri die ricchi^ There are more poor than rich.
Le donne sono piii compassio- Women are more compassion-
nevoli degli uommi, ate than men.
E meglio morire die temer sem- It is better to die than always
pi'e, to fear.
Quanto piit vi 2)6)iso, tdnto piii The more I think of it, the
mi vien rdhhia, more I am enraged.
Tali dohhidmo essere qudli vo- We ought to be such as we
glidmo comparire, wish to appear.
11 sole e piii grdnde della terra,, The sun is larger than the earth.
La terra non e cost piccola The earth is not as small as the
come la lima, moon.
La fdma di sua hellezza e mi- The renown of her beauty is
nore assdi della verifd, much below the truth.
/ creditori m.iglior 7nem6ria Creditors have a better memo-
hdnno die i debitori, ry than debtors.
E meglio fare invidia die pieta, It is better to cause envy than
pity-
V usurdio e peggiore del Iddro, The usurer is worse than the
thief.
II vmo e il mio maggior ne- Wine is my greatest enemy.
mico,
THE COMPARISONS OF ADJECTIVES.
I. A comparison can only be made between two objects.
An object may be more beautiful, less beautiful, and as
j beautiful as another. There are, therefore, tlu-ec degrees
': of comparison, — the degrees of superiority, of inferiority,
I and of equality.
II. The comparative^ of_superiority is indicated by the
'Words pill, more; molto piit or assdi piii ov vie piii,
much more"; miglidre, better (a.) ; maggidre, greater;
\ meglio, better (ad.).
QS ITiy:.IAN GRAJNOIAR.
III. The comparative of inferiority is expressed by the
words mefio or mdnco^ less ; molto meno or assdi 7neno
or vie meno, much less ; pe^^zore, worse (a.) ; mindre^
smaller; peggio, worse (ad.).
lY. The conjunction than, which joins the two terms
of comparison, is jbranslated by di when it is followed by
a pronoun or a possessive or dernonstratis^Ljadjeiitiv
He is much happier than you, E molto piii felice di voi.
Your sister is prettier than Vostra sorella e piu hella delhi
mine, mta.
There are no people more cred- No7i v' e gente piii creduJe di
ulous than those who have an quella die ha interesse di es-
interest in being deceived, sere inganndta.
V. Than is_sometimes translated by che, especially
if the pTirase is elliptical. Di, however, may always be
used.
YI. If thayi is followed by any other word, and there
is a complement of the phrase understood, it can be trans-
lated by di or .by che; as in the following examples : —
Is man more happy than wo- E V uomo piiu felice della don-
man (is happy ) ? na'^ or che la donna ?
The stomach digests water more Lo stomaco diger'isce piii facil-
easily than wine, mente V dcqua che il vino.
YII. It is better to use che for than, when the compari-
son is made between two verbs, twoadiectiyes. or two
adverbs ; as, — ""'^
There are more poor than rich, Y^' sono piib poveri che ricchi.
It is better late than never, E meglio tdrdi che mai^
It is better to save a culpable E meglio salvdre un colpevole,
person, than to condemn an che condanndre un Innocent e
innocent one,
YIIL. If the natural order of the words is inverted,—
that is to say, if the verb is placed before the subject.
— it^ is better to use che. This rule may be applied to
phrases where than is~Tollowed by a demonstrative ad-
jective ; as, —
ADJECTIVES : THEIR COMrAIlATIVES. 69
He who attacks, always has Piu cinimo ha scmpre colui ^he
more courage than he who assdlta, che coliti che si di-
delends himself, fende,
IX. To translate " more than three years," " more than
j twenty thousand men," etc., we say, Three years and
I more, twenty thousand men and more, t7'e dnni e pin;
' venti mila udmini e piit, or j^'^u di tre anni, qIq., piil
che tre anni.
X. The comparative of equality is indicated by cosi or
tdnto: and the conjunction than is translated by cdme^i
cosi has been used; and by qudnto, if ja2?/_Q_has been
used r~as, —
The eye of the domestic never Z' occhio del servitore non vede
sees as well as the eye of the mdi cosi bene come V occhio
master, del padrone; or, non vede 7nui
tdtito bene qudnto V occhio, etc.
XL Sometimes the word cosz or tdnto is suppressed;
as, — ~
A skin as white as snow, Una p'elle bidnca come or qudn-
to la neve.
XII. When the words as many and as refer to a noun,
as many mustl5e rendered by tdnto, and as by qudnto^
makino' them agree in gender and number with the noun ;
as, —
He has as many debts as there £gli ha tdnti ; or, altrettanti
are stars in the sky, debiti qudnte sdno le stelle
net cielo.
See_ the strawberries. Take as Ecco delle frdgole. Prendetene
many as you wdsli, qudnte volete.
XIII. In English we say (with the complement under-
stood) , —
I have as much money as you Naples is not as populous as
(have). Paris (is).
In Italian, the complement is generally expressed in
similar phrases ; as, —
lo ho tdnti danciri qudnti ne Ndpoli non ha tdnta jmpola-
avete voi, zione qudnta ne ha Par'iyi.
70 ITALIAN GRA^BLiR.
XIV. Sometimes tdnto or qudnto is placed before
moi'c or less, so as to gi\Q more enero\y to the expression ;
as in the followino- phrases : —
Qudnto j^/w uno e ignordnte, The more ignorant a person
tdnto piu egli e pronto nel is, the more ready he is to
giudicdre, " judge.
X' aria e tdnto piu densa qudn- The air is much more dense as
to e piii propinqua dlla terra, it is nearer the earth.
XV. As well as, and as much as, signifying as, are
translated by cosi, cdtne, or qudnto, and are invariable ;
as, I know him as well as you, io lo condsco cdme or
qudnto vdi. One can say, also, lo lo condsco al 'par di
vdi,
READING LESSON.
I Romani, nei loro stravizzi, bevevano tanti bicchieri di vino
banquets, drank
quante erano le lettere del nome dei loro amici ai quali face-
they
vano brindisi. Catone, il censore, che vedea (sorgere)
made (drank) honor (health). saw to come
la pompa della mensa, disse, che era assai malagevole il salvare
difficult save
una citta dove un pesce si vendeva piu caro di un bue. Di
fish was sold
due negoziatori in polltica vince sempre il piu scaltro ; cioe chi
conquers alwaj^s sharp ; that is
sa meglio ingannare 1' altro. II diavolo non e cosi briitto come
to cheat
si dipinge. Non e cosa nel mondo piu preziosa del tempo. La
painted.
noja e forse il maggior male che sia uscito dal vasello di Pan-
ennui went
dora. I sogni sono le immagini del di, gUc4ste e corrotte. L' dro,
spoiled corrupted.
come il fuoco, e buon servitore ma cattivo padrone. Gli deste una
gave
llbbra, datemene altrettanto.
ADJECTIVES : THEIK COMPARATIVES. 71
EXERCISE FOR TRA*NSLATION.
1. It is difficult to decide if irresolution renders man more
unhappy than despicable, and if it is more inconvenient to take a
bad part than not to take any.
2. Usage is always introduced by the ignorant, who form the
greatest number (in society).
3. Two consolations solace the heart of the unhappy : one is,
to recall the time when he lived more happily ; and the other, to
see that there are some in the world more unhappy than he.
4. The city of Naples is more beautiful in darkness than
London is when the sun shines.
5. The fatter the kitchen, the leaner the testament.
6. Since we cannot make men what we would have them, it
is necessary to bear with them as they are, and make the best of
them.
VOCABULARY.
1. Man, se; renders, ya; unhappy, infelice ; despicable, dis-
jpregevole; if there are, se vi sono ; to take a bad part, appigli-
drsi ad un cattivo -partito ; not to take any, non appiglidrsi ad
alcimo.
2. Usage, iiso ; introduced by, introdotto da.
o. Solace, sollevano ; is to recall, il rimemh-arsi ; when (in
which), in cm ; he lived, visse ; to see (to think), i^e/isc^re; more
unhappy, con ynaggior doglia.
6. Since, poiche ; we can, possidmo ; we would, vorremmo ;
we must, conviene ; bear with, tollerdre.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Chi e pill feltce, V udmo o la 1/ uno non e piii felice che V
donna ? dltra.
Qudl e meglio per lo stdmaco, Per i giovani V dcqua e 7neglio
V dcqua o il vmo ? che il vino.
Vi sono molti ricclii in Lon- Si^ ma vi sono piii poveri che
dra ? ricchi.
Pensdte (do you think) che io Siete molto piii infelice di me.
^ sono infelice?
E hella la Signorina Rosa ? Si, ma vdsfra sorella e piii
hella ancora.
E hrutta la Ibro zia ? Non e cdsi hrutta come si dice
(they say).
72 ITALIAN GRAMMAK.
Hdnno i creditori huona memO' JEssi hdnno mvglior memoria
ria'^ die % dehitori.
Avete nemici ? II vino e il m'lo maggior nemtco.
Qucd e la cosa piil preziosa net Nel mondo non e cosa piu pre-
mondo ? ziosa del tempo.
Qudnte hrdccia (yards) di ques- Ne ho quante ne voglio (I W'ish).
to pdnno volete ?
Luigi, siete studioso ? ' Si, ma qudnto piil studio (I
study) tdnto meno impdro
(I learn).
CHAPTER XI.
THE ADJECTnrES: SUPERLATIVES.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Parigi e una bellissirna cittd, Paris is a most beautiful city.
Avete pochissimi rigudrdi, You have very little regard.
Fu ubmo integerrimo, He was an upright man.
Di cattivo egli diventb pessimo, From bad he has become worse.
Godo mH ottima salute, I enjoy excellent health.
E uomo di pochissime parole, He is a man of very few words.
Ho veduto una helVissima ragdz- I have seen a very beautiful
za, girl.
Vi serviro puntualissimamen- I will serve you most punctu-
re, ally.
Infelicissimo e V uomo die non Very unhappy is the man who
ha amici, has no friends.
Mi rincresce assaissimo dH egli I am very sorry that he is
porta, goiiig away.
Quella gente e di ottimo cuore, These people have an excel-
lent heart.
Notdte dgni minima cosa, Take notice of the smallest
thing.
A tutti il riso e gratissimo, A smile is very agreeable to
everybody.
Venne una dirottissima pidg- There was a pouring rain.
THE ADJECTIVES : SUrEKLATIVES.
7a
THE SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
1. Cattivissi?no,
2. Savissimo,
3. Fresclmsimo,
4. Larghissimo,
7n6lto cattivo,
molto sdvio,
7n6Ito fresco,
molto Icirgo,
asscd caitivOf
asscH sdvio,
assdi fresco,
assdi Idrgo,
very bad.
very wise,
very fresh,
very large.
I. We see, by the above examples, that the superla-
tive is formed by issimo, molto, or assdi. Issimo, taken
from the Latin, is united to the adjective, the final vowel
of which is retrenched. When the adjective ends in to,
both vowels are dropped. If the adjective ends in co or
go, the letter h is placed after the c or g, to preserve the
hard sound of these letters. The words amwo and nemico,
friend and enemy, are exceptions : they make ainicissi'
tno, nemicissimo.
II. Verii, before a past participle, is rendered by mdlto
or assdij as. He is very much esteemed by every one,
egli e nidlto stimdto da tfdti. We cannot say, Egli e
stiniaf issimo da tutti. But, if the past participle is used
simply as a qualificative adjective, then it receives the
superlative issimo; and we say, Mlo sti')natissi7no si-
giidre,
III. The following words express the superlative of
themselves : —
Ottimo, very good. Infimo,
Pessimo, very bad. Egregio,
Sommo, highest. Mdssimo,
Estremo, extreme. Miserrimo,
Acerrimo,
Integerrimo,
Stupendo.
Insigae,
very good.
very bad.
highest.
extreme.
wonderful.
renowned.
very low.
very noble,
supreme,
very unhappy,
very bitter,
entirely honest.
rV. The particle s^ra (extra) is prefixed to a few-
words, giving them a superlative signification ; as, Stra-
i'icco, very rich ; stincdtto, very much cooked.
Y. The adverbs terminating in meiite (corresponding
to ly in English), from tlie Latin mens, which is femi-
nine, form their superlative missima; as, grandissima-
Mirnte.
74 ITALIAN GRAjVOIAR.
Remark. — The termination issmio serves in Italian
for the superlative absolute, and can never be translated in
English by those superlatives ending in st or est, which
are of the relative kind. The latter must be rendered
by the adjective, preceded by il pih, la piii, etc. ; as, H
jnu cdrto p)oema (not cortissimo poe'ma), the shortest
poem.
THE SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE.
VI. This superlative is formed by the words il piil
or il nieno, suppressing the article when jdiu or me no
comes after the noun ; as, Demdstene fu V oratdre jnil
eloquhite della Grecia, Demosthenes was the most elo-
quent orator of Greece. But, if the adjective is placed
before the noun, then the article is used ; as, Demdstene
fu il pih eloquente oratore della Grecia.
The words mdssimo, injimo, are also superlative rela-
tives, and signify the gi^eatest, the lowest; as, —
To lo vedro col mdssimo pia- I shall see him with the great-
cere, est pleasure.
READING LESSON.
D Duca d' Epernon, prima di morire, scrisse al cardinale di
before dying, wrote
Richelieu, e termino la lettera col " vostro umilissimo ed obbidi-
entissimo servo," ma ricordandosi che il cardinale non gli avea
remembermg
dato die dell' affezionatissimo, mando lino apposta per
given sent on purpose (an express)
trattenere la lettera che era gia partita, la principio da 6apo,
to retain recommenced
sottoscrisse affezionatissimo, e mori contento.
subscribed died
Un cattivissimo autore diede in luce un libro, che avea
gave (brought) light
per titolo, " dell' anima delle bestie : " Voltaire, avendolo letto,
disse ad un amico che gliene chiedeva il suo parere, 1' autore e un
asked
t.
THE ADJECTIVES : SUPEIILATIVES. 75
ottimo cittadino, ma non e abbastanza informtito della storia del
sufficiently informed
siio paese.
lo non conosco miglior preservativo contro la noja che di
know against ennui
adempire esattissimamente i proprj doveri.
to fulfil own duties.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. Louis XI. and Ferdinand of Arragon were both cruel and
perfidious, notwithstanding the first took the title of Very Chris-
tian, and the second that of Catholic.
2. The study of languages is very useful and very agreeable.
3. It has been said, that a nation of wise men would be the
most foolish people in the world, as an army of captains would
be the worst army.
4. When there was an eclipse of the moon, the Romans were
accustomed to recall its light by beating upon copper vases in a
very noisy manner, and by raising towards heaven a great num-
ber of fiambeaus and lighted firebrands.
5. A three days' ftist would make a coward of the bravest
man on earth.
6. The language of a people is the most important monument
of its history.
VOCABULARY.
1. Louis XL, Ludovico undecimo ; Ferdinand of Arragon,
Ferdindndo d' Arragona ; notwithstanding, nonostdnte ; took,
prese ; that, qiiello.
2. Agreeable, piacevole.
3. It has been smd, fit detto ; foolish, pdzzo ; as, come; worst,
il jnu cattivo.
4. There was, succedeva (succeeded) ; were accustomed, sole-
vano ; recall, richiamdre ; light, cldarbre ; by beating, col hat-
fere; very noisy, strepitosamente ; copper, 7'dme; to raise, sollevdre;
flambeau, face ; lighted, acceso.
5. Three, <re ; would make, /«/-eZ»ie ; co\v ri\\, polfrdne ; brave,
valor o so.
n
G ITALIA^^ GKAM31AR.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Come avete dormito ? Ho dormito saporitissimamerUe,
E il Sig. D. huon cittadino ? E un ottimo cittadmo.
I! avete veduto ? .SV, sptssissime volte.
Fu crudele Ludovico XL ? Si, crudele e perjido.
Prese egli un titolo ? Prese il titolo di cristiamssimo,
Siete contento ? Sono contentissimo.
Non e quest elefdnte mblto Egli e grandissimo e fortissi-
grande ? mo.
Qiialmese e il piu freddo (cold) // mese di Fehhrdio e ordinari'
dell anno ? amente freddissimo.
Ghe studio e utilissimo ? Lo studio delle lingue e utilis-
sijno e piacevolissimo.
E il vostro generdle valoroso ? Si, e V ubmo piu valorbso della
terra.
Qudli sono i metdlli piit pesdnti? Il pldtino e V oro sbno i piu
pesdnti metdlli.
Qual animdle e il piii crudele ? La tigre e un animdle crudelis
simo ; e piii crudele di tutti
gli altri animdli.
CHAPTER Xn.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
The signification of many words, both nouns and ad-
jectives, may be either increased or diminished by the
addition of certain syllables to their termination.
I. The augmentatives, reducible to rules, are formed
in 6ne (m.), 6na (f. ), <jtto (ni.), 6tta (f.), to signify
bigness and stoutness, in a good sense.
Likewise in dccio (m.), dccia (f. ), to signify some-
thing of a disii'usting or contemptible bulk.
The addition dme expresses a great abundance of any I
thing of the same species, but diifering in form and
qualities ; sometimes for things not very agreeable.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 77
EXAMPLES.
JAhro^ book ; librone, a very large book.
Ragdzza, a girl ; ragazzona, a stout jolly girl.
Casa, a house ; casotto, casotta, a good roomy house.
Sdla, a hall ; salone, a large hall.
Cavdllo, a horse ; cavalldccio, a great ugly horse.
Cdsa, a house ; casdccia, an ugly large house.
Bestia, beast ; hestidme, cattle.
Observe that many nouns have a natural ending in
dccia, dccio, and dme, without being augmentatives. Ob-
serve, also, that masculine augmentatives often come from
feminine nouns, as cdsone (m.), from cdsa (f.).
II. The diminutives reducible to rules are formed in ino,
ello, efto, with the variations incident to adjectives and
substantives in o; as, —
Carmo (ra. s.), carina (f. s.), carini (m. p.), carme (f. p.), dear
pretty little creature, or creatures ; from cdro.
Poverello, poverella, poverelli, poverelle, poor little creature, or
creatures ; from pdvero.
Libretto, a pretty little book ; from libra. Acquetta, a clear small
stream ; from dcqua. Such diminutives generally denote eii'
dearment and smallness.
Other diminutives, ending chiefly in Hccio, -dccia^ and
Hzzo, Hzza., indicate something small or contemptible; as,
Casuccia, a small mean-looking house ; from cdsa, house.
Uomuzzo, a puny little fellow ; from udmo, man.
Yet all these rules are liable to exceptions, which nothing
but practice can teach ; for, besides the terminations which
we have just given for augmentatives and diminutives,
many others are freely used in familiar conversation, and
in books on trivial subjects. Thus, from dunna, a woman,
cdsa, house, libro, a book, may be formed the following
augmentatives and diminutives : —
Donnone, a tall, stout, masculine woman . . . from donna.
JDonnona, a tall, strong, healthful woman . . . „ „
Donndccia, an impudent, shameful virago . . . „ „
7*
78 ITALIAN GRAJVOIAR.
Donnetta, a pretty little, smart woman .... from donna.
Donniciuola, a mean-looking woman „ „
Donnina^ a pretty little woman „ „
Donnckcia, a vulgar woman ........"„ „
Donnaccione, a bold, impudent, stout woman . . „ „
Casone, a very large house ; a mansion .... from cdsa.
Casdccia, a large, ill-contrived house „ „
CasamentOy a well-built, roomy house „ „
Casvpola and casupoJa, a small, despicable house . „ „
Casuccidccia, a small, wretched house .... „ „
Castle, a poor, thatched cottage „ „
Casella, a small, low-built house „ ,,
Casotta, a snug, comfortable house „ „
Casetta, a snug house ; also, a neat kennel . . . „ „
Casellina, a very little but genteel house . . . . „ „
Casettmo (m.), casettina (f.), a neat, pretty cottage, „ „
Casina, a very small house „ „
Casino, a small, neat, summer house „ „
Librone, a bulky, heavy book from libro,
Lihrdccio, an ugly, large book „ j^
Lihricolo and lihercolo, a small^ contemptible book . „ ,,
Lih^etto, a pretty, neat, little book „ „
Lihrettino, a very little and pretty book .... „ ,,
Libriccino, a very small pamphlet „ ,,
And so on, with thousands of other words, In all the range
of humoi' and wdiiras. But few augmentatives and dimin-
utives are admitted in a style strictly correct, beyond those
in one, dine, dccio, for increasing ; and those in ino, ettOy
ello, for diminishing.
«
The termination dglia indicates an indeterminate num-
ber, and can be applied only to individuals, and ahvays in
a bad sense ; as, Ragdzza, child ; ragazzdglia, a great
number of wicked children ; i^lehdglia, gentdglia, from
'plehe, gente, meaning a great number of low people, vul-
gar persons. This termination Is feminine.
Astro gives a bad qualification, and is applicable only
to professions; as, Medico, a physician; medicdstro, a bad
physician ; filosofdstro, i:)oetdstro, a bad philosopher,
a bad poet. However, we can say giovindstro, for a
AUG3IENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 79
naughty boy; verddstro, olivdstro, hiancdstvo^ etc., of
a greeniyh, olive, whitish color, etc.
Besides this quantity of augmentatives and diminutives
which modify the nouns in so many different ways, there
are still several others which are called irregular, because
they only belong to a few words. Such are —
Mediconzolo, a bad physician ; from inedico and onzolo,
Lepratto, small hare ; from lepre and cHto.
Cagmiolino, little dog ; from cane, nolo, mo.
Omicidtto, poor little man ; from uomo, iccio, dtto.
TristoMzuoJo, unwholesome ; from tristo and anzuolo.
A diminutive syllable may also be added to some verbs,
such as vivacchidre, to live poorly; from vivere: leggi-
chidre, to read carelessly; from leggere: innamoracchi-
drsi, to be slightly in love ; from innamordrsi.
We can join together the augmentative terminations,
and thus form a double augmentative; as, Omdccio, bad
man ; omaccidne, a very bad man : from iidmo, dccio,
6ne.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Mangidte un hocconcino di pane, Eat a little mouthful of bread.
Dckegli un' occhiatina. Give him a slight glance.
E una fanciidletta semplicina, She is a very simple little girl.
fjffli ha un poco del goffotto, He is a little foolish.
Slke un cattiveUo, You are a naughty little one.
Che ventareUo che trde ! What a pleasant little wind !
jihhidte un tantino di giudizio, Have a little sense.
E un pezzo di volpone,^ He is a sly-boots.
^gli e un hello zerUiidtto, He is an elegant young man.
Co7n 'e hellina e leggiadretta ! How pretty she is ! how grace-
ful!
Vorrei dirvi due paroUne, I wish to say two brief words
to you.
Fla una hriitta lingudccia, He has a very wicked tongue.
j^gli ha cera d'' uno scimiottino, ^ He has the face of* a little mon-
E un ragazzciccio ignorantone. He is a very ignorant ugly
child.
80
ITAJLIAN GEAJiI:MAR.
State zitta, sfacciatella I
Che visino graziosetto !
Intrattenetevi un momentmo,
Vol state henone,
Fa con tutti il dottorello^^
Ma guardate die amormo !
Quel gonnellino e gentile,
Dov' e il mio herrettino da notte ?
E nel cassettino della tdvola,
Ml rispose con una scroUatma
di cdpo^
Qicella vostra nipotina e un
angioletta,
Bella facciotta ha questa ra-
gdzza !
Va vi'a, asi7idccw, senza cre-
dnza I
Quel pasticcetti mi consolano il
cuore,
In Lbndra le case nan hdnno
portoni^
Ddtemi una spazzolatina al
tahdrro,
Ho gid fdtto un migliarelloy
E ricciiito, biondetto, e bassotto,
Mi vuoi tufdre un servigetto ?
Ho fdtto alcime speserelle^
Aspettdtemi un quarticello d'dra,
Quel hirhantello me V ha fdtta,
Le serdte d' inverno son limghette,
Ha un hocchmo che innamora,
Guarddtevi da quella rihaldd-
glia,
Be quiet, impudent little one !
What a pretty little face !
Stop only a little moment.
You are very well.
He plays the wise man.
See the little darling !
That little skirt is very nice.
Where is my small night-cap ?
It is in the little drawer of the
table.
He answered me by a little
shake of the head.
Your little niece is a little an-
gel-
What a beautiful face this girl
has!
Go away, great ass, without
education !
These little cakes rejoice my
heart.
In London the houses have not
coach-doors.
Give a little stroke of the brush
to my cloak.
I have already gone a short
mile.
He is little curly-headed, pret-
ty blonde, and rather small.
Will you do me a little ser-
vice ?
I have made some trifling ex-
penses.
Wait for me a brief quarter of
an hour.
This little rogue has tricked
me.
Winter evenings are rather
long.
She has a ravishing small
mouth.
Mistrust that rabble.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
81
Gli ho tirdto una sassdta,
Le mattindte son freschette.
Si e fdtta una corpaccidta,
Siete nn hel rlhaldonaccio^
11 poveretto e magricciublo,
Venite nel mio salottino,
Ella ha un bel bracciotto,
Che tempdccio fa quest' oggi !
Che spalldcce da facchino !
Oh ! cdra la mia gioietta I
I have tlirowii a stone at him
The mornings are a little cool.
He has eaten to satiety.
You are a p-eat villain.
The poor fellow is rather thin.
Come into my little parlor.
She has a plump fine arm.
What bad weatlier it is to-day !
What great shoulders for a
porter !
O my dear little jewel of a
ivoman I
E.EMAEK. — It will be seen by the above examples, that
the Italian language admits of the frequent use of augmen-
tative and diminutive terminations. These last modify the
signification of words in much the same way as the ter-
minations Icin^ ling, ing, oclc, en, el, in English; as,
lamh-hin, duck-ling, hill-ocZ;, chick-e??-, cock-ereZ, etc.
Augmentative terminations have no corresponding meaning
in Enolish.
Augmentatives and diminutives form one of the striking
beauties of the Italian language ; but, as no strict rules can
be given concerning them, the student is caiitioned not to
venture upon their use until familiar with the language.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Clii e fanciidlino f
Dove dimbra (fives) egli'i
Che avete ?
])i che colore ?
(Jie uomo e egli?
Chi e questo cattivello'^
Mio fratello e fanciidlino.
In un casino.
Ho un canino.
Biancdstro.
E una cattwa Ungudccia,
E figlio del medicbnzolo.
Avete veduto (seen) mm cugina? Si I ConH e hellhia e leggiadret-
ta!
Ddtemi una canzbne, se vi pidce. Non ho che questa ca^izoncina,
prendetela (take it).
AhUdte un tantino di giudizio V ho, non vi pdre, qudndo vi
nelparldre'? dico (I say) che siete un
hel zerhinotto ?
82 ITALIAN GKAMMAR.
CHAPTER Xm.
THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Vo a letto dlle undid in punto, I go to bed precisely at eleven.
Mi dlzo dlle dieci precise, I rise precisely at ten.
Vi andremo una volta per uno. We will each go there once.
Vi son torti d^ dmho le pdrti. There are wrongs on both sides.
Gli ho detto a qudttr'' occhi le I told him my way of thinking,
mie ragioni,^ face to face.
II capitdle mi frutta il sei per The capital yields me six per
cento, cent.
Qudnto impbrtano due dnni di What is the interest of one
frutti, at cinque per cento, di thousand seven hundred and
un capitdle di mille sette cento ninety - two francs for two
novdnta due frdnchi ? years, at five per cent ?
Cdrlo ottdvo scese iri Itdlia nel Charles VIII. went into Italy
mille qudttro cento novdnta in one thousand four hun-
qudttro, dred and ninety-four.
Mi par iiiille dnni di rivedere I am impatient to see my coun-
la mia pdtria,^ try again.
Egli non sa nemmeno che dice He does not even know that
via due fan qudttro, twice two make four.
NIBIERAL ADJECTIVES.
The numeral adjectives * are divided into cardinal and
ordinal.
I. CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Uno,
one.
Cinque,
five.
Due,
two.
Sei,
six.
Tre,
three.
Sette,
seven.
Qudttro,
four.
Otto,
eight.
* Numbers may be divided into cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, and propot-
tional.
THE NmiERAL ADJECTIVES.
83
Nove,
Died,
XJndici^
Do did,
Tredid,
Quattordid,
Qmndidy
Sedici,
Didassette,
Didotto,
Didannove,
Venti,
Ve^it'imo, or )
Ventuno,* )
Ventidue,
Ventitre,
Ventiqudttro,
Venticinque,
Ventisei,
Ventisette,
Venfotto, or
Veritotto,
Ventinove,
Trenta,
Treniujio,*
■}
nine.
ten.
eleven.
twelve.
thirteen.
fourteen.
fifteen.
sixteen.
seventeen.
eisrhteen.
nineteen.
twenty.
twenty-one.
twenty-two.
twenty-three.
twenty-four.
twenty-five.
twenty-six.
twenty-seven.
twenty-eight.
twenty-nine.
thirty.
thirty-one.
Trentotto, thirty-eight.
Quardnta, forty.
Oinqudnta,
fifty.
Sessdnta,
sixty.
Settdnta,
seventy.
Ottdnta,
eighty.
Novdnta,
ninety.
Cento,^
Duecento,
Ducento, or
Dugento,
Tj'ccento,
Quattrocento,
hundred.
two hundred.
three hundred,
four hundred.
Duemila, or
Dumila,
Tremila,
thousand,
two thousand,
three thousand.
Millecento, or ) , , , ,
i\m '\ r eleven hundred.
Mule e cento, \
Diecimila,
Centomila,
Milibne,
ten thousand,
hundred thousand
million. \
* Wlien a noun follows the numbers twentA'-one, thirty-one, forty-one, etc., it remains
In the singular ; as, Ycnt' iuio I'tbro, twenty-one books. But, when the noun precedes the
uumber, it is put in the plural ; as, L'tbri trcnV uno.
t The numerals cr7ito and m'llle are never accompanied by the indefinite article as in
English, — a hundred, or a thousand. Cento is invariable.
t When the numerals are used to indicate the hour of the day, they are preceded by
the feminine article la, le: but then the word ora, hour, ore, hours, is not expressed.
ITALIANISMS.
Verso le set, at about six o'clock.
iSuona tin'' ora, it has struck one.
E P una^ or c iin ora, it is one o'clock.
Ad un' 6ra ,0V al tocco 1 at one o'clock.
Bi due ffiorni V I'tnn. every other day.
Q,rhulicigionii_fa, or j. .^ f^.t^, j^t q.
Sono quindici gioriii, \ -^ ''
Domdni a quindici, to-morrow fortnight.
84 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
II. ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primo first.
Secondo _ second.
Terzo third.
Quarto fourth.
Qmnto fifth.
Sesto sixth.
Sktimo seventh.
Oticwo eighth.
Nbno ninth.
Decimo . tenth.
Undecimo, or decimo primo . . eleventh.
Duodecimo, or decimo secondo . twelfth.
Tvedecimo, or decimo terzo . ; thirteenth.
Decimo quarto fourteenth.
Decimo quinto fifteenth.
Decimo sesto sixteenth.
Decimo s'ettimo seventeenth.
Decimo ottdvo eighteenth.
Decimo nbno nineteenth.
Ventesimo, or vigesimo . . . twentieth.
Ventesimo prwio, etc twenty-first.
Trentesimo thirtieth.
Quarantesimo fortieth.
Cinquantesimo fiftieth.
, Sessantesimo sixtieth.
Settantesimo seventieth.
Ottantesimo eightieth.
Novantesimo ninetieth.
Centesimo one hundredth.
Millesimo one thousandth.
These adjectives agree with their nouns. (See Chap-
ter IX.)
III. Fractional and collective numbers are —
Mezzo, half
Una meta, a half (moiety).
Thi terzo, a third.
Un quarto, a fourth.
Una decima, a ten (half-score).
Una dozzma, a dozen.
Una quindicina, a fifteenth.
Una ventina, a score.
Un centindio, a hundred.
Un miglidio, a thousand.
THE NUIklERAL ADJECTIVES. 85
IV. ^20, numeral adjective, like the indefinite article
un, agrees with its noun; but the final o is suppressed,
unless the noun begins with s followed by another conso-
nant; as, JJn c/dllo, one or a cock ; 2m autoi^e, one or
an author; uno spillo, a pin. The feminine is una; as,
^na donna, a woman. We write un^ before a feminine
noun beginning with a vowel; as, Ui'C dnitra, a duck.
Y. There are a great many phrases in Italian in which
the noun after ixno is suppressed ; as, ^ mio die dice
mdle di tdtti, he is a man (one) wdio speaks ill of
everybody.
YI. On the contrary, uno is often suppressed before
nouns which express an indefinite sense; as, _£^ uomo di
huona fdma, he is a man of good repute.
YII. Pel' uno signifies per head ; as, II prdiizo ci e
costdto cinque frdnchi per Uno, the dinner cost us five
francs per head.
YIII. The expression ^?^ U7i, often employed by the
poets, is an abridgment, signifying in un solo moinento,
in un medesimo tempo, in a single moment, in an even
time ; and the expression ad una voce, signifies unani-
mously.
IX. To translate "one by one," "tw^o by two," "three
by three," etc., the preposition is repeated; and we say,
ad uno ad uno, a due a due, a tre a tre. "Both," " all
three," etc., are translated tutti e due, tidti e tre,
X. "Firstly" and "secondly" are expressed \yj premier a-
mente, secondariamente : afterwards Ave say, iii terzo
luSgo, in qudrto ludgo, for "in the third place," "in the
fourth place," etc.
XI. In multiplication, via expresses times; as, Twice
or two times two are four, due via due fan qudttro ; or,
by abbreviation, due via dUe qudttro.
8
86 ITALIAN GR.\JMMAK.
XII,. In dating letters, the article may be used either in
the singular or plural; as, The 21st May, li 21 Mdg-
gio, or ai 21 di Mdggio^ or il 21^ Mdggio, etc.
XIII. In speaking of years,* in Italian we use in the;
as, mi 1500, nel 1862.
XIV. For the knowledge of epochs, it Is important to
know that the Italians sometimes call the thirteenth cen-
tury il 200, because it goes from 1200 to 1299 ; and, for
the same reason, tliey say il 300, il 400, il 500, etc.,
for the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth centuries : hence
the words un trecentista, cinqiiecentista, un seicentista,
etc., for "an author of the fourteenth, sixteenth, seven-
teenth centuries." Generally, however, they say, as in
English, il dSchno terzo secolo, il decimo ndno secolo,
the thirteenth century, the nineteenth century.
XV. "Both" is translated by dmho or ambedue; as,
Amho i piedi, dr}ibe le gdmhe, ambedue le famiglie,
Both feet, both legs, both families.
XVI. In speaking of sovereigns, the ordinal number
is used, as in English ; as, Enrico qudrto, Henry the
Fourth ; Gregorio decimo sesto, Gregory the Sixteenth.
READING LESSON.
Ludovico Ariosto nacque addi otto di Settembre, dell' anno
mille quattrocento settanta quattro.
Dante nacque in Firenze nel Marzo dell' anno mille ducento
sessanta cinque da Alighiero e da Bella. II siio primiero nome
di Durante fu cangiato per vezzo in quelle di Dante. Nell' anno
mille trecento ventuno, nel mese di Settembre, raori il grande e
valente poeta Dante Alighieri nella citta di Ravenna.
Petrarca nacque addi venti di Liiglio nelF anno mille trecento
quattro nella citta d'Arezzo. Mori d' apo])lessia nella notte del
diciotto di Liiglio dell' anno mille trecento settanta tre.
* I am twenty, thirty, fifty years old, cannot be rendered literally ; but is expressed
thus : I have twenty, thirty, fifty years, lo ho venf dnni, trent^ dnni, cinquanV dnni.
THE NUMEEAL ADJECTIVES. 87
Torquato Tasso nacqiie in Sorrento agli undici Marzo dell'
anno raille cinquecento qiuininta quattro. Spiro ai venticinque
d'Aprile mille cinquecento novanta cinque.
Giovanni Boccaccio nacque nell' anno 1313 ; e mori add! 21
di Dicembre, 1374.
Machiavello venne alia luce in Firenze ai 3 di Maofgio delF
anno 1467, e mori ai 22 di Giugno 1527.
Leonardo Salviati il piii illustre grammdtico di Firenze vide
il gidruo nel 1540.
Leonardo da Vinci nacque nel 1452.
Michelagnolo Buonarroti ebbe vita nel 1475 ; e mori in eta di
qnasi 89 anni.
Benveniito Cellini venne al mondo il di d' ognissanti 1500.
Nacque il Galileo nel 1564, nello stesso gidrno e quasi alia
stessa ora, in ciii mori Michelangelo.
Francesco Soave, autore delle " Novelle Morali," vide la luce
nel 1743 e mori in eta di 63.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. It is more difficult to make five francs with six sous than
to gain a million with ten thousand francs.
2. An inhabitant of Padua invented paper in the twelfth cen-
tury, and a Florentine invented spectacles at the commence-
ment of the fourteenth.
3. Man has commonly but twenty-two years to live : during
these twenty-two years, he is subject to twenty-two sicknesses,
of which many are incurable. In this horrible state, man still
struts : he loves (makes love), he v^-ars (makes war), he forms
projects, as if he would live a thousand centuries in his delights.
4. A regimen to be followed by every man who wishes to live
a hundred years : first repast, — a glass of pure water at nine
o'clock in the morning ; second repast, — soup, roast meat,
stewed fruit, a glass of old wine, at two o'clock in the afternoon ;
third repast, — a walk, without fatigue, at four o'clock; fourth
repast, — a glass of sugared water at nine o'clock at night, on
going to bed.
5. A very brave soldier had lost both liis arms in battle. His
colonel offered him a crown. " You think, without doubt," said
tlie grenadier, with vivacity, " that I have lost only a pair of
gloves."
88
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
VOCABULARY.
1. Sou, soldo ; franc, franco.
2. Padua, Pddova ; Florentine, Fiorentino ; at the com-
mencement, nel principio.
3. During these, nel decorso di questi ; is subject, va soggetto;
would, dovesse.
4. To follow by every one who would wish, da tenersi da
chiunque vorra ; stewed fruits, conserva ; afternoon, dopo mezzo-
giorno ; walk, passeggicda ; i'atigiii^, stancarsi ; sugared, zucche-
rdto ; on going to bed, nelV anddre a Utto.
5. Lost, perduto ; offered him, gli offerse ; you think, credeie.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Qudnti dnni avete ?
E vostro fratello f
Avete dandro in tdsca ?
In che cldsse e Luigi ?
In che anno ndcque Galileo ?
Qiumti djini visse Adchno ?
Che ora e ?
A che ora pranzidmo dggi?
Qudnti ne ahhidmo del mese ?
Qudnti occhi hdi ?
Adesso (now) ho trenfotto dnni.
Diciotto dnni.
Si, ho cento cinqudnta scudi,
E nella seconda cldsse.
Ml 1564.
Egli visse ndve cento trenta.
E un quarto dopo mezzodl,
Pranzeremo cdle due.
Ne ahhidmo venticinque.
Due.
Qudnte dita (fingers) ahhidmo Ne ahhidmo cinque.
a ciascuna mano i
E le dita dei piedi (feet) qudnte Died.
S0710
E le dita delle mdni e dei piedi Sbno venti.
qudnte sono ?
Qudnti ahitdnti ha la citta di Londra ha tre millioni dH obi-
Londra ?
Che eta ha il Signor S ?
Qudnti sensi avete ?
Qudndo mori Napoleone ?
In che pdsso servirvi ?
tcmti.
E nel suo sessantesimo secondo
dnno.
Ginque : udito, vista, odordto,
gusto, tdtto.
Nel mdggio del mille ottocento
ventuno.
Nel prestdnni cinquemila frcin-
chi.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
SJ
CHAPTER XIV.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
CM e che hdtte ? or chi hdtte ?
Chi e ? CM chiouma ?
Che cosa e successo ?
Ohe nuove ahhidmo ?
Sapete voi chi sono ?
Che rdzza di pensdre ?
Non so che dire, davvero,
Che male vi ho fdtto to?
Che (jibrno e bggi ?
Di chi e la colpa ?
Che eta avete ?
Che cosa siete venuto a fdre ?
Che vdle avere ricchezze senza
salute ?
Che hella cosa e il girdre il
mondo 1
Che cosa mi darete da man-
gidre ?
Qudl e la minestra che piu vi
pidce ?
Che cosa sento ? che cosa vedo ?
Che cosa fate di hello, amico ?
Che? Comef Che dite?
In qudl concetto mdi mi tenete ?
Sapete qudl sia V ammo suo ?
Qudnti pdzzi vi sono nel mbndo !
E un ubmo cui niuno pidce,
Who knocks ?
Who is it? Who calls?
What has happened ?
What news have we ?
Do you know who I am?
What manner of thinking; ?
Truly, I know not what to say.
What harm have I done you ?
What day is it to-day ?
Whose fault is it ?
How old are you ?
What are you come to do ?
What are riches worth without
health ?
What a pleasure to travel over
the world !
What will you give me to eat ?
What soup do you like best ?
What do I hear? what do I
see?
What good thing are you do-
ing, friend ?
What? How? What do you
say?
What opinion have you, then,
of me?
Do you know what is his in-
tention ?
How many fools there are in
the world !
He is a man who likes no one.
8*
90 ITALIAN GRAaijVIAR.
EELATIVE PRONOUNS.
I. These pronouns are cA^, cAe, quale, cin, who, which,
what.*
II . " Who," chi, when it has no antecedent expressed ;
as, —
Who loves, fears, CM dma, feme.
Of whom do you speak ? Z^i chi parldte f
See who knocks, Guarddte chi picchia.
III. "He who," "some one who," "no one who,"
"those who," or "the one," "the other," may be trans-
lated by chi, whenever they do not relate to an antecedent;
as, —
Distrust those who flatter you, Dirffiddtevi di chi vi adula.
Those who live on hope will Chi vive di spei'dnza morrd di
die of hunger, fdme.
In the world, some are rich, Nel mondo, chi e ricco, chi e
others poor, povero.
The word chi,'\ used only for persons, and representing
an individual in the singular, requires the A-erb of which it
is the subject to agree with it in the singular.
IV. "Who," relating to an antecedent expressed, is trans-
lated by che when it is the subject, and by c i when it is
the object ; :j: as-, —
The woman to whom I speak, La donna a cui pdrlo.
The master for whom I labor, // padrone § per cui lavoro.
Man is the only animal who L' ubmo e il solo animdle che
weeps and who laughs, pidnge e che ride.
* Oii, not interrogative, is always singular ; clie^ cid, which, singular and plural ;
iiudle, who, which, singular ; qudli, plural.
t Chi refers to persons only : che, cui, quale, refi^'" both to persons and things.
4. Che is chiefly used in the uomiuative ; ciii, in all other relations ; chi, quale, are used
in all their relations. Che, when it relates to a jierson, must be translated in English by
who or ivhom ; when it relates to an animal, by which. In English, the relative pronouns,
though understood, are often left out after the noun. In Italian, they must always be
expressed: as, Chi si ininlia, si esalta, who humbles himself, etc. ; qw'i giovani che vol i-t-
dete, those young men whom you see ; il cane die ved-He, the dog which \ ou see : la IcWra
che avcte scntta, the letter you have written ; il ragdzzo cii' io ho vediUo, the boy I have
seen.
§ The master who teaches Ls maestro ; the master who commands is padrdne.
RELATIVE PEOXOUNS. 01
V. The preposition a, to, can be understood before ciii;
and we may say, La donna ciii pdrlo,
yi. "I who write," "thou who writest," etc., are
translated, lo che scrivo, tu che scrtvl, etc. In similar
phrases, the verb agrees with the personal pronoun, as in
English.
yil. " Which," as the regimen of a verb, is translated by
che or by ciii; as, —
The bread which you eat, II pane che ^nangidte.
The wall which the house con- II muro ciii nasconde la cdsa.
ceals,
In the last phrase, cut (nasconde) is better than che,
because che serves either for subject or object. Petrarch
says, Quella ddnna gentil cui pidnge anidre.
Vni. Che, ov qudle (qudli, qudi, in the plural), is
used in exclamatory phrases ; as, —
What a misfortune ! Che disgrdzia !
What a pity ! Che peccdto !
What beauties ! Qudi (or die) helUzze !
IX. Qudle is used in doubtful phrases, or when fol-
lowed by a verb ; as. Which of these two books do you
wish? qudl volete di questi due Uhri?
X. Che is generally used in interrogative phrases ;
as, —
What book is this ? Ohe Uhro e ?
What man is that ? Che ubmo e ?
What house is that ? iJhe cdsa e ?
What business have you ? Che affdri avete ?
XI. "Which "in the genitive, signifying "of which,"
"for which," is rendered in Italian by di cui, or del
qudle, etc. ; as, It is a favor for which I thank you, e
un favdre di cui, or del qudle io vi ringrdzio.
02 ITALIAN GEA3^IMAR.
XII. When the noun following which designates some-
thin o- belonging to that which precedes it, then cid
(whose) is used with the article ; as, The hero whose
exploits have astonished the world, V eroe le cui gesta
hdnno fdtto maraviglidre il mdndo,
Xin. The word "which" in the ablative case, signify-
ing "by which," "from which," indicating the origin, the
derivation, the point of departure of an action or thing, is
rendered in Italian by da cui, or dal qudle, etc. ; as, —
There is no evil from which N'on c' e male da cui non ndsca
good does not arise, un bene,
The army by which the city is L' armata da cid e assedidta la
besieged, cittci.
XrV. "What," interrogative, is translated by che or che
c6sa; as, —
Upon what shall we dine ? Con che pranzeremo ?
"What is the use of merit with- A che giova il merito senza
out fortune ? fortuna ?
XY. "To which," relating to an entire phrase, is trans-
lated by al che; relating to a single word, by a cui, or
al qudle, or dlla qudle; as, —
To which I answered, Al che rispdsi.
That of which the miser thinks La cosa a cid meno pensa V avd-
the least is to succor the poor, ro, e il sovvemre i miseri,
XYI. We translate such phrases as the following,
thus : —
What are politics ? Che cosa e, or cos' e la politica ?
What do you say ? Che cosa dite ? che dite ?
What is it? Che cos' e?
What is there ? Che cosa d ef che d e?
What do I hear ? Che cosa sento ? che sento ?
What are you doing ? Che cosa fate ? che fate ?
Who is going? Chi parte "^
In what manner ? In che modo ? in qudl inbdo ?
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 93
OBSERVATIONS.
XYII. The word onde is often used in Italian poetry
in lien of di ciii, or del quale, dal quale, either in the
singular or plural, masculine or feminine ; as, Di quel
sospivi oiuV io nudriva il c6re (Petrarca) , those sighs
with which I nourished my heart. In this line the word
6nde is in place of c6i qudli, with which.
XVIII. In poetry particularly, the word die, relative,
is sometimes employed as an indirect object, in place of
cin or qudli ; as, Qli dcchi di ch^ io parldi si calda-
tnente (Petrarca), the eyes of which I spoke so warmly.
Here the word che is in place of cid.
XIX. In using che as an indirect object, the Italian
authors sometimes omit the preposition which ought to
precede it, and which is the sign of the regimen ; as, Ed
io s6n un di quei cheH 'pidnger giova (Petrarca), and
I am one of those to whom weeping helps. Here the
preposition a (to) before die is understood.
XX. It often happens that die is used in Italian in
place of nCdla, nothing ; as, j& un duro peso il non aver
die fare, it is a heavy burden to have nothing to do.
XXI. Non die is elegantly used for "not only." But,
in this case, the non die is placed in the second part
of the phrase ; as in the line from Petrarca, — Spero
trovdr pietd, non die perdono, I hope to find, not only
pardon, but pity.
XXII. Finally, de is often connected with other words ;
thus forming adverl^s and conjunctions at pleasure. In
these cases, the final letter is accented, which renders the
sound more striking, as in the v^ords j)Timadie , hendie^
fuordie, perciocdie , avvegnache , contuttodie , etc.
XXIII. In the subjunctive mood of the verb, die may
be understood; as, Vogiio mi diddle, I wish that you
would say it to me.
94 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
READING LESSON.
I Roinani avendo scelti per mandcdre in Bitinia tre ambascia-
chosen to send
t(5ri, uno dei qiiali pativa di podagra, 1- altro era stato trapanato
suffered trapanned
6 r ultimo era teniito per uomo scempio, Catone disse ridendo,
laughing
che i Romani maiidavano un' ambasceria che non aveva ne
sent neither
piedi, ne capo, ne mente. Dio ci dia buoni principi, perche,
nor May God send us
una volta cbe s' lianno, e forza soifrirli tali quali sono. L*
to bear with them
egolsta e un uomo che appicclierebbe fuoco ad una casa per far
would set to make
cuocere un novo. Ogni lingua e piacevole all orecchio del
to cook
popolo per cui e fatta. Cicerone fu assassinato da Popelio Lena,
made.
a cui aveva gia salvato la vita in una causa in cui era accusato
saved
d' aver ucclso il proprio padre. Sibari era una citta della
killed
Magna Grecia, i cui abitanti erano mdlto dati all' effeminatezza ;
given
donde viene il nome di sibarlta per dinotare un uomo efFeminato.
comes denote
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. I have seen this Italy which Corinne calls "the empire of
the sun." What a fertile soil ! What a delightful climate ! What
superb cities ! What noble antiquities ! AVhat more sublime than
the genius of the man who emulates nature, and erects eternal
monuments everywliere (in all parts) !
2. Who can love repose before having experienced the pain
of weariness ? Who is he that finds pleasure in eating, drinking,
and sleeping, before having suffered from hunger, thirst, and
sleepiness ?
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Of)
3. '' I have three sorts of friends," said Voltaire ; " the friends
who love me, the friends to whom I am indifferent, and the
friends wdio detest me."
4. It is a very glorious thing for Italy, that the three powers
between whom almost all America was divided, owed their first
conquests to the Italians : the Spaniards, to Christopher Colum-
bus ; the English, to the two Cabots of Venice ; and the French,
to Florentine Verazzani.
VOCABULARY.
1. Calls, chidma ; what, die dltro v' ha ; genius, ingegno ;
erects, innalza; in all parts, da ogni parte.
2. Can love, pud aver caro ; before, etc., se prima non ha sen-
tito.
3. Detest, detestano.
4. Divided, diviso ; almost, quasi : owed, dovessero ; their first
conquests, le prime Ibro conquiste ; Spagnuoli ; Cristbforo Go}67n-
bo ; Inglesi ; Cahbtti Venezidni,
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che avete veduto ? Ho veduto la hella Italia.
Gome e ella chiamdta'^ E chiamdta V impero del sole,
E del clima die dite ? Che e delizioso /
JE die ? Siete vbi ? lo, in persona.
Che cercdte ? II mio lihro.
Dov' era ? Sopra la tdvola.
Che diceva Voltaire d'ei subi Egli diceva, " io ho tre specie
amici ? d^ amici."
Qiidl differenza v* e fra dggi e Oggi non e tdnto cdldo.
ieri ?
A dii pidce una lingua qua- Al pbpolo per cui e fdtta.
lunque ?
Che si (one) dice delle citta Che son superhe.
d^ Itcdia ?
Che abbidmo per prdnzo ? Avremo (we shall have) ubva e
frutti.
Che disse Catdne dei tre amba- Che era uiH ambasceria die non
sciatori mandcdi in Bitinia ? aveva ne piedi, ne capo, 7ie
mente.
Cdsa t assdi gloridso per Vltci- Che le potenza d' Eurdpa deb'
lia? bono dgl' Italidni le Idro
prhne conquiste in America.
96
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
CHAPTEE Xy.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Che intenzione e la vostra ?
Voglio la roha mia,^
Partirete con vostro coinodo,
Mio padre ha da v'lvere^
jEgli e un pd' scdrso del suo,
Ai^ddtemi lontdno ddgli occhi,
Ho gettdto via il mio dandro,
Non ho dandri in tdsca,
Ho qudlche cosetta del mio^
Vi son servo,
So che mi siete aimco,
Ogni mia cdsa e vostra,
Anddtevi in mia vece,
lo attendo di fdtti miei,
Voglio far a modo mio,
Egli ha posto in sicuro la vita,
Voi siete del mio par ere,
Sentiamo il suo parere,
lo aspettero il vostro padrone,
Ognitno vuol hene di siioi,
lo non ci voglio anddr di mezzo
per causa vostra,
Vi riiigrcizio di tdnte vostre
hontci,
Oggi mettero il mio hel vestito,
Se siete cieco, vostro ddnno,
Che vi dice il cuore di tiitto cid ?
Ognuno amdr dee la p atria,
What is your intention ?
I wish my property.
You will depart at your ease.
My father has enough to live upon.
He is a little short of money.
Go far from my sight,
I have thrown my money away.
I have no money in my pocket.
I possess soruething.
I am your servant.
I know that you are my friend.
All I have is yours.
Go in my stead.
I attend to my affairs.
I wish to do as I please.
He has put his life in security.
You are of my opinion.
Let us listen to his advice.
I expect your master.
Every one loves his own.
I do not wish to be compro-
mised on your account,
I thank you for so much kind-
ness. -
To-day I shall put on my best
coat.
If you are blind, so much the
worse for you.
What says your heart to all
that?
Every man should love his
country.
POSSESSIVi: ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 97
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
I. The possessive pronouns* are —
M'lo,
Tuo,
Suo,
mia,
tua,
sua.
my or mme.
thy or thine,
his, her or hers, its.
Nostra,
nostra,
our or ours.
Vostro,
Loro,
vostra,
loro,
your or yours,
their or theirs.
Mio, tuo, suo, ndsti'o, vSstro, are masculine ; and are
changed in the plural into —
Miei,
my or mine.
Tubi,
thy or thine.
Suoi,
his, her or hers, its.
Nostri,
our or ours.
Vostri,
your or yours.
Mia, tua, s{ia, ndsti^a, vSsira, are feminine ; and form
their plural thus : —
Mie,
Tue,
Sue,
my or mine,
thy or thine,
his, her or hers, its.
Nostre,
our or ours.
Vostre,
your or yours.
n. Ldro, their or theirs, is of both genders, and of
both numbers, and takes the article agreeing with the
noun to which it belongs.
III. Possessive pronouns are generally varied with the
prepositions and articles.
* Remark. — Galignani divides the possessive pronouns into th:Be classes; viz., con-
junctive, disjunctive, and relative.
The conjunctive are those which are united to nouns; as, 11 m'lo libra, my book;
t miei parentis my relations.
The disjunctive are those v/hich are not united to nouns ; as, Im, vostra ccisa, e la in'ia^
your house and mine; i inici cavdlli, e i vostri, mj' horses and yours. La m'la and t
vdstri are disjunctive, as they stand in place of the noun.
The relative are those which have relation to a person or a thing already spoken of ;
as. ii mio or mm, it is mine ; sono tuoi or /we, they are thine.
9
98 ITALL\N GRA31:M.^II.
Yariation of a masculine possessive i ronoun : —
SINGULAR.
Subjective
II mio,
mj or mine.
Relation of Possession .
Del mio,
X)f my or mine.
„ „ Attribution
, Al mio,
to my or mine.
„ „ Derivation
Dal mio.
from or by my or mine.
Objective ....
. II mio.
my or mine, etc.
IV. ilffo, ttio, si(0, 7i6stro, vdstro, and loro are some-
times used with the article substantively, — il mio, il tuo,
suo, etc. In this case, the word avere, property, is under-
stood ; and the pronouns are equivalent to "my property,"
"thy property," etc. ; as, —
3Idngi del suo. Let him eat of his own [property],
Non mangerd del nostro. He will not eat of ours.
V. Miei, tu6i, ndstri, and loro, are also used sub-
stantively, — i miei, i tuoi, i su6i, i ndstri, i l6ro.
Then the word jjarenti, relations, amici, friends, com-
pdgni, comj^anions, familidri, domestics, solddti, sol-
diers, or segudci, followers, is understood; and these
pronouns are equivalent to " my relations," "thy friends,"
"his companions," "our domestics," "your soldiers," "their
followers ; " as , —
Incontra a! miei. Against my relations.
Pregdto da' suoi, Requested by his friends.
YI. To avoid the ambiguity which in many instances
would arise, in Italian,* from the indiscriminate use of
* Remark. — The English language, for want of a sufficient variety of personal pro-
nouns of the third person and their possessives, often labors under an ambiguity which is
unknown in Italian. Obsei-Te the example, "He sent him to kill his own father."
Nothing but the sense of that which precedes can determine whose father is meant ;
whereas, in Italian, the pronouns siia and di h'li mark the sense.
Observation. — Propria adds emphasis to the possessive pronoun, as own in Eng-
lish : it is considered by some grammarians a real possessive pronoun.
In Italian, the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and number with the thinff
possessed, and not with the possessor as in English ; as, —
POSSESSOR (sing.). POSSESSED OBJECT (/. sing.).
II padre ama (loves) si'ia Jiglia (h ts daughter).
La madre ama (loves) sua figlin (lier daughter).
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE rEONOU:f^S. 99
the possessive pronouns suo, sua, suoi, sue, when these
pronouns do not rehite to the subject of the proposition,
they are changed for the personal pronouns di Ifii, di lei,
of him, of her. Thus, in the phrase "John loves Peter
and his chiklren," if the pronoun " his" relates to "John,"
the subject of the proposition, it is expressed by i sxioi;
as, Giovanni dma Ptetro ed i sttoi Jigliuoli, Jolm loves
Peter and liis [Jolni's] children ; but if " liis " does not
relate to "John," but to "Peter," the object of the proposi-
tion, then it is expressed by i di lid ; as, Giovdiini dma
Pietro ed i di ltd Jigliuoli, John loves Peter and his
[Peter's] children.
Mandb ad uccidere suo padre, He sent to kill his father [the
father of him who sent].
Sua sorella e i f'lgli di I'd, Her sister and her cliildren [the
children of her sister].
Vn. The article is used, first, when titles, or the names
of relationship, are in the plural ; as. My brothers, i
miei fratelli ; your majesties, le vdstre Maestd : second,
when the possessive is placed after them ; as, // fratello
tnio, la Maestd sita: third, when they are accompanied
by another adjective ; as, II mio cdro j)ddre, or il cdro
pddre mio, my dear father : fourth, when the name of
the relation is a diminutive ; as. My little sister, la mia
sor^ellina, or la sorelllna mia,
YTII. There are a number of expressions where the
possessive pronoun does not receive an article ; as, Ij mio
parere, a suo seniio, di sua testa, etc., it is my advice,
at his pleasure, of his head. Such phrases are easily
learned by practice.
IX. Politeness requires the Italians to say, II vSstro
Signur pddre, la vostra iSigiidra zia, your father, your
aunt, etc.
X. To translate "it is one of my cousins," "there are
three of our domestics," " there are many of our friends,"
the Italians say, witliout the article, IJ un mio ciigino,
100 ITALIAN GRAMMAR."
sdno tre nostri servitori, s6no parecchi nostri amici,
or e un del miei cugini, son tre del 7i6stri servitdin, sSno
parecchi dei ndsti^i amici. The same is the case in such
phi-ases as, It is my fault, e ^m mioerrore.
XI. To translate " these are my children," "these are
my sisters," "these are my parents," etc., we say, SSno
miei f^gli^ sdno onie sorelle, s6no miei parenti,
XII. The possessive forms an Italianism in many
phrases ; as, —
Mio ddnno, So much the worse for me.
Ogni mio pensiere, My every thought.
XIII. The possessive pronouns, referring to parts of
the body or dress, are rendered by the pronouns mi, ti,
si, gli, ci, and vi, particularly when they follow the
verb.
Take off your hat, Levatevi il cappeUo.
"We shall put it in our pocket, Oe lo metteremo in tdsca.
He put it upon his knees, Se lo pose sidle ginocchia,
I put it upon his head, lo glielo post in capo,
XIV. We say in the same manner, —
He is not my father, Egli non mi e padre,
I am not his friend, lo non gli sono amico.
Remember that he is thy son, Ricbrdati cK egli ti e figlio.
Call my domestic, Ghiamdtemi il cameriere.
READING LESSON.
IL CAViLLO RUbItO.
STOLEN.
II piu bel cavallo d' un contadino venne di notte rubato nella
came
sua stalla. Alcuni giorni dopo il paesano si reco al mercato de*
went
cavalli che si tenne nella citta vicina, per comprarne un altro.
one held to buy
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.' 101
Quale fu la sua sorpresa allorche tra i cavalli in vendita egli
when sale
riconobbe il siio. Subito lo prese per la briglia, sclamando :
recognized Immediately took bridle
" Questo cavallo e mio. Sono tre giorni die mi fu rubcito." —
" Voi v' ingannate, galantuomo," rispose tranquillamente il
You deceive, gentleman, replied
padrone del cavallo, " e piu d' un anno che questo cavallo mi
appartiene ; diinque non e il vostro : puo essere, pero, che gli
belongs ; then it may be
rassomigli qualche poco."
resembles
II contadino coperse subito gli occhi del cavallo colle sue mani,
covered quickly
6 disse : " Ebbene, se 1' animale vi appartiene da tanto tempo,
said: Well, if to you
ditemi un poco, di qual occhio egli e cieco ? "
tell me
L' altro, il quale infatti aveva rubato il cavallo senza esami-
in fact examin-
narlo da presso, rimase sbigottito un memento. Dovendo
ing him closely, i-emained frightened Having
pero dire qualche c(5sa, egli rispose all' avventura : " Dell'
however to say at a venture :
(Scchio sinistro ! "
left!
" V ingannate," rispose il contadino, " il cavallo non e cieco
deir occhio sinistro !" — " Eh ! " sclamo il furbo, "ho fatto lino
rogue
sbaglio di lingua ; il cavallo e cieco dell' occhio destro."
slip right.
Allora il contadino scoperse gli occhi del cavallo e disse : " E
Then imcovered
evidente ora che sei ladro e bugiardo. Guardate tutti ! II
now thou art thief liar. Look all !
cavallo non e cieco ne poco ne punto. Gli ho fatto le domande
(not at all.) To him made
Boltanto per iscoprire il furto."
oulv discover theft.
9*
102 • ' ' ■ ^ • ' ITALIAJ^ GRAMMAR.
Tiitti gli astanti si misero a ridere ed a battere le maaii,
bystanders put laugh clap
gridando : " E colto, il fiirbo, e colto."
crying: caught
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. If the best man was oblI<2;ed to wear his fa.ults written on
his forehead, he would never dare to raise his hat.
2. A woman of Sparta said to her son, who had returned lame
from battle, " At every step which you take, you will now
remember your valor and your glory."
3. A man, who had dissipated his property, complained of the
injury the hail had caused to his farms. A person, who knew
the boaster well, said, " It is your own fault ; for, if you had had
the precaution to open your umbrella when it hailed, your farms
would not have been injured.
4. The great Conde — tired of hearing a certain fop continually
speak of monsieur, his father ; madam, his mother ; misses, his
sisters — called one of his servants, and said to him, " Mister, my
lackey, tell mister my coachman to harness messrs. my horses
to madam my carriage."
5. A superstitious prince once dreamed that he saw three
mice, — a fat one, a poor one, and a blind one. The prince
consulted a sibyl, who said to him, " My prince, the fat mouse
is your minister, the poor mouse is your people, and the blind
mouse is your portrait."
VOCABULARY.
1. If he was obliged, se dovesse ; written, scritti ; upon, in ;
to dare, ardire.
2. Of Sparta, Spartdna ; return from, torndre da ; at every
step, ad ogni pdsso ; you will remember, rammenterete.
3. A man (a spendthrift), uno spiantdto ; complained, lag-
ndvasi ; caused, fdtto ; farms, podere ; boaster, millantatore ; it
is }'our own fault, la coJpa e vostra ; it hailed, si mise a grandi-
ndre ; irjured, danneggidti.
4. Tired of hearing, annojdto d' intendere ; fop, scidcco vana-
rello ; Miss, Signorina ; called, chiamava ; lackey, staffiere ; tell,
iite ; harness, attaccdre.
5. Once, una volta ; that he saw, che vide; consulted, consulto.
DEMONSTrtATIVE ADJECTIVE PKONOUNS.
103
CONVERSAZIONE.
CM e questa donna'^
Dov^ e ilcUUiriti'iitio (picture) ?
Chi avefe veduto ?
A chi scrivete (write) voi'^
Di chi e queslo cavdllo ?
Come vidggia il Conte ?
Maria dorme ancora'^
Perche tiene ella gli occhi chi-
usi
Si dice cliG il Sigjior E., e mor-
to, ha fdtto un testamenio ?
Avete veduto le mie sorelle ?
Che volete da me ?
Signdr Maestro, desidererei (I
should like) di avere da lei
qudlche lezione di hallo,
Una certa mia arnica.
To lo posi nella sua camera.
Ho veduto la sorellma vdsfra.
A.lla mia ccira figlia.
Del mm staffiere.
Colla propria carrozza.
Non dorme, no.
Tien (she keeps) gli occhi chiusi
(closed) per c'elia (sport).
Si , ha fdtto di gran Idsciti alio
spedale ; resta per 6 al figlio
un hel pafrimonio.
No Signore, ho veduto sola-
mente (only) vostro fratello.
Non voglio (wish) niente (no-
thing) da voi.
Sono pronto a servirla.
CHAPTER XVI.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Servo di questi, Signori,
E capitdto quest'' dggi,
Dite qiidnto vi pare,
Che maniere son queste f
Non e tiut" bro quel che luce,
Comprdte questo mio cavdllo,
Questo ])dnno e troppo euro,
II mko dehole parere e questo,
Che vuol dir questo ?'
Questo si sa da tutti,
Your servant, gentlemen.
He has arrived to-day.
Say all that you please.
What manners are these ?
All is not gold that glitters.
Buy my horse.
This cloth is too dear.
Tliat is my weak advice.
What does this mean ?
Everybody knows that.
104 ITAI.IAN GE^ijMMAR.
E un seccatore costui, This man is importunate.
Mandate via coldro, Send those people away.
Scuotetevi da cotesta tristezza, Shake off this sadness.
Questo e qudnto mi disse, This is all he said to me.
CM e costui ? Who is he ?
Z' u6?no ascolta volentieri quel A man willingly listens to 'what
che gli pidce, pleases him.
Questo e quello che piii di tutto This is what afflicts me the
m' affitgge, most.
Mi renderete ragione di cotesti You shall account for having
ingdnnij thus deceived me.
Qudnti vivono in questo viondo How many people in this Avorld
dlle spese di questo e di quel- live at the expense of this
lol one and that!
N^oji mi parldte j)iu di colui, Speak no more to me of this
man.
Costui v' ingannera di certo^ This man will certainly cheat
you.
Stasera vi aspettero a cdsa, This evening I shall expect
you.
Maladetta sia questa mia curi- Cursed be my curiosity !
osita !
Questa cdsa non e piii vdstra, This house no longer belongs
to you.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
I. Questo and questa, with their plurals questi and
queste, signify this and these, or this here and these here,
and indicate an object near to the person who speaks.
Cotesto, cotesta, with their plurals cotesti, coteste, this,
these, are used to point out an object near the person to
whom we speak.
Quello, quella, with their plurals quelli, quelle, that,
those, that there, those there, indicate an object distant
from the person who speaks;* as, —
* In English, we use the personal pronoun before the relative "who," "whom," or
" that ; " and, in Italian, we use tlie demonstrative instead ; as, Quella die mi pidcque
tdnlo, she whom I so much admired ; coliii che ar.catdva pclle stride, he that begged in
the streets. Questo, cotesto, quello, are frequently represented by cid ; as, Cid e vera.
that is true.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 105
Take this book, and give me Piglidte qiiesto Uhro, e ddtemi
that, quello,
I iee that thief who has stolen Vedo quel Iddro che nrC ha ru-
from me, huto.
This dress becomes you very Gotesto vestito vi sta henone.
well,
I prefer this room to that, Preferisco questa camera a
quella.
n. Questo refers to the object last named in a phrase,
and quello to that first mentioned ; as, —
Riches and poverty are alike La ricchezza e la poverfa son
injurious: the former creates del pari nocevoli : quella fa
too many wants ; the latter ndscere troppi bisogni ; ques-
hardly permits the knowledge ta non permette di conoscerne
of them, quasi alcuno.
III. "In the mean while," "dming this time," is expressed
by in questo mentre, in questo mezzo, or, abridged, in
questo, in questa; and in the same sense, but referring
to a more distant epoch, the Italians say, in quel mezzo,
in quel mentre, or in quello,
IV. " That which " is translated by cid che or quel che;
i as, —
I He will do what (that which) I Egli fara quel che gli dirb io
tell him, or cib che gli dirb io.
\ All that (that which) pleases Tutto cib che pidce, or qudnto
\ the eyes pleases the heart, pidce dgli occhi, pidce al
cuoi^e,
V. The demonstrative adjective may be added to the
possessive pronoun in Italian ; as, Lascidte stdre questa
mia pcnna, e scrivete con cotesta vdsti^a. This, literally
translated, signifies, " Leave this pen which is near me,
and which belonos to me, and write with that which is
near you, and which belongs to you."
VI. Instead of saying questa mattina, questa sera,
questa ndtte, this morning, this evening, this night, the
Italians say, for abbreviation, stamattina or stamdne, sta^
sera, standtte.
106 ITALIAN GilAMMAF..
VI. Tale, such, often replaces the demonstrative pro-
noun questo or quello. Thus we can say, tale consider-
azidne, instead of questa consiclerazidiie, provided that
the idea has been specified in the anterior phrase.
VIII. Speaking of persons in an absolute sense, the
Italians say, —
Costui, this man here ; Golm, that man there.
Gostei, this woman here ; Colei, that woman there.
Gostoro, these men or women here ; Goloro, those women there.
Sometimes these pronouns are transposed, and the
preposition omitted.
Per lo coUd consiglio. By the advice of that man.
Per la costui dappocdggine, By the stupidity of this man.
Instead of Pel consiglio di colui, per la dappocdggine
di costiii.
IX. Questi, quegli, qiiei, cotesti, are also used in
speaking of a man; as, Questi fu ddtto; quegli, ignordn-
te, this man was learned ; that, ignorant. These words are
used only in the singular, and may likewise be applied to
animals and inanimate things personified ; as in this quo-
tation from Boccaccio : DdlV una parte mi trde V am6re,
e ddlV dltra, mi trde giustissimo sdegno; quegli vu6le
dC io ti p)erd6ni, e questi vuole, che cSntro a mia natura
in te incrudelisca. On one side, love influences me ; and,
on the other, a just anger : that wishes that I would par-
don thee ; and this, that I, contrary to my nature, should f
be cruel to thee.
READING LESSON.
La politica di un prIncipe e 1' arte di conservare quello che ha,
0 di usurpare quello che non ha.
Diogene un giorno vide un giovinetto che arrosiva : " animo,
youth blushed :
figliuolo mio," diss'egh, " cotesto e il colore della viUiu.'*
Non v' e popolo colto che creda di cedere agli altri in genere
cultivated to cede
DEMONSTKATIVE ADJECTIVE TilONOUNS. 107
di lingua, benche tutti convengano nelle qualita clie ne fdrmano
although ■ agree-
la perfezidne, il che e iin segno che ognuno ha quel che gli
basta, ne sente quel che gli manca.
is sufficient feels is wanting.
Un contadino tagliava un albero alia riva cl' un fiurae ; per
was cutting margin river
mala sorte la scure gli cadde nell' acqua, ne pote ritrovarla.
ill luck axe fell could he
Merciirio gli apparve : " E questa la tua scure, galantuomo ? "
appeared
mostrandosliene una d' oro. " No, cotesta scure non e la mia." —
showing him
" E forse questa," porgendogliene una d' argento. " No, cotesta
presenting
non e ancora quella che mi appartiene." — " E questa dunque ? "
belongs.
mostrandogliene una di ferro, che era veramente quella che avea
iron
perduta. " Ecco veramente quella scure la cui perdita mi affiig-
ge." — " Prendi questa e ancora le due prime che ti ho mostrate ;
take
ricevile in premio della tua sincerita. La probita e la migliore
receive them honesty
politica.'
policy.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. Merit depends on neither titles nor manners : these depend
on ourselves ; those, on chance.
2< An English banker was accused of having plotted a con-
spiracy to cany off George III., and conduct him to Philadel-
phia. " I know very well," said he to the judges, " what a king
can make of a banker ; but I do not know Avhat a banker can
[ make of a king."
3. A considerable sum of money had been stolen from a lord.
, ije, suspecting tliat it was one of his domestics, called them all
j one morning, and said to them, " My friends, the Angel Gabriel
I appeared to me la.<t night, and told me that the tliief should
[ have a parrot's feather on the end of his nose." At these words,
108 ITALIiiN GEAJNEMAR.
the guilty man immediately put his hand to his nose. " It is
"■ you, villain, who have stolen from me ! " said the master : " the
Ano;el Gabriel came to tell me of it." In this manner he re-
covered his money.
4. Lent is never long to him who is obliged to pay at Easter.
VOCABULARY.
1. Depends on, dipende da.
2. Was accused, z;ew?2e accusdto; plotted, tramdto ; to carry
off, rapire ; Giorgio ; a Filadeljia ; I know, so ; can, pud ; I do
not know, 7ion so.
3. Considerable, ragguardevole ; suspecting, sospettdndo ; do-
mestic, servitdre ; called, chiamo ; end, punta ; guilty, reo ; put
his hand on his nose, s^ tbcca il ndso ; villain, mariudlo ; re-
covered, riebhe.
4. Is obliged (has) to pay, ha da pagcire ; Easter, pdsqua.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che vide Didgene un gidrno ? Un giovinetto che arrosiva.
Cdsa diss' egli ? " Ammo, Jigliudlo mio."
Ddve taglidva un contadmo un Alia riva d' un jiume.
dlhero ?
Avea egli due scuri ? ^o, non ne avea che una.
Che gli accddde ? Per mcda sdrte gli ccidde la
scure nelV dcqua.
La ritrovo ? Non poteva ritrovcirla.
Chi gli appdrve ? Me/r curio.
Che disse egli? " ^ questa la tua?" mostrcindo-
gli una scure d' dro.
Che rispdse il contadmo ? " No, cotesta scure non e la 7ma."
" Forse e questa d' argento ? " " No, cotesta non e ancdra quella
che mi appartiene."
" E dunque questa di ferro ? " " Ve7-amente, questa e la mia."
Che disse Mercurio alldra ? " La prohita e la miglidre poll-
tica."
QuaV e la poUtica di un prin- E V arte di conservdre quello che
cipe? ha, 0 di usurp are quello che
non ha.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PEONOUNS. 109
CHAPTER XVII.
. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE. .
Ogni rosa ha la sua spina, Every rose has its thorns.
Andcite con tutta fretta, Go with all haste.
La fortima governa oGNi cosa, Fortune governs every thing.
Vengo da parte di tutti loro, I come from them all.
QuALUNQUE fatica merita pre- Every exertion deserves re-
mio, ward.
La posta parte ogni dl per V The mail leaves every day for
Italia, Italy.
Mi VI trattenni alcune setti- I stopped there some weeks.
mane,
Spendete il tempo in quXlche Spend your time in some useful
utile occiqjazione, occupation.
La morte e il fine di tutte le Death is the end of all our
sciagure, misfortunes.
QuALUNQUE siano le mie ra- Whatsoever be my reasons.
gioni,
Staro in cdsa per tutto quesf I shall be at home all day.
f99h , , ,
TuTTO ilmdle non vienpernuo- All is for the best.
cere,
E pazzta il voler sapere TUTTO, It is a folly to wish to knov7
(^all) every thing.
La saprete in tutt' Iltra guisa, You will know it in a very dif-
ferent way.
I. Of indefinite pronouns, the following are used only
in the singular, and cannot be put before nouns in the plu-
ral number : —
Qudlche, m. and f. some, any.
Ogni^ m. and f. all, every.
Chiunque, m. and f. whoever, whosoever.
* With dgni are formed the words ognidi, every day ; ognora, always ; ogm'ino, evory
one. Ogni, before numeral adjectives, as in the phrases, ogni di'ie 7?iesi, evei-y two months ;
6gni sci pdgijie, every six pages ; ogni died soiddti, every ten soldiers ; and in the word
ognissdnti, the day of All-saints, — is used with nouns in the plural.
10
no
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
Ghisivoglia, m. and f.
Chi che^ m. and f. .
Chicchessia, m. and f.
Che che, m. and f. .
CJiecchessia^ m. and f.
Qualunque^ m. and f.
Quahivoglia, m. and f.
Qualsisia, m. and f.
NiiUa, in. and f. . .
Niente, m. and f. .
ima, f.
Uno, m.
Uii'altro, m. un'dltra, f.
QiLolcuno, m. qualcuna, f.
Qiialchediino^ m. qualcheduna, f.
Ognuno, m. ognuna, f. ,
Ciascuno, m. ciascuna^ f.
Ciascheduno^ m. ciascheduna, f.
Veruno, m. veruna, f. .
Nessmio, m. nessuna, f. .
or Nissuno, m. nissima, f. .
Neimo, m.
or Niuno, m.
Niillo, m.
neuna, f.
niuna, f.
whoever, whosoever.
)>
w
whatever, whatsoever.
7)
5>
whosoever, whatsoever.
nothing.
one.
another.
some, some one, somebody.
every one, everybody.
j> J) »
no one, nobody.
J)
3J
J)
3>
II. The following are used in both numbers : —
SINGULAR.
Tale, m. and f.
Gotdle, m. and f.
Alcuno, m.
Taluno, m.
Oer^o, m.
Stesso, m.
Medesimo, m.
Altro, m.
Tutto^ m.
Alqudnto, m.
Tdnto, m.
Cotcmto, m.
Altrettdnto, m.
Molto, m.
Troppo, m.
alcwia, f.
taluna, f.
certo, f.
stessa, f.
medesima, f.
a^i^ra, f, .
<w^to, f. .
alqudnta, f.
tdnta, f.
cotdnta, f.
altrettdnta, f.
poca, f.
molta, f.
troppa, f.
such.
such, such a one.
some, some one, somebody.
certain,
same.
other.
all.
a little, somewhat.
so much.
as much, as much more,
a little, a few.
much,
too much.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
Ill
PLURAL
Tali, m. and f. . . .
Cotali, m. and f. . . .
Alcmii, in. alcune, f.
Tdlum, m. taUme, f.
Certi, m. cer^e, f. .
Stessi, m. stesse, f.
Medesimi, m. medesime, f.
Altri, m. <://^re, f. .
7'ii/i'?*, m. ^ii^ife, f. .
Alqudnti, m. alquante, f.
Tanti, m. ^a?z^e, f.
Cotcmti, m. cotante, f.
Altrettdnti, m. aUrettdnte,
Pochi, m. poche, f.
Molti, m.
molte, f.
f.
such.
such, such ones.
some, some ones.
certain,
same.
others.
all, every one, everybody.
a few, not many.
as many.
as many, as many more.
few.
many.
too many.
Troppi, m. troppe, f.
.m. Ohiunque, chisivdglia, chi die, chicchessia^
qualcuno, qualcheduno , ognitno, taluno, are applied to
persons only : the others may be applied both to persona
and things.
IV. "Every," and the word "all" meaning "every," are
translated by 6gni or qualunque, which are always in the
singular, and serve for the masculine and feminine ; as, —
! Every king, every queen.
Every merit, every pain.
Ogni re, ogni regma,
Ogni merito, ogni pena.
Or qualunque re, qualunque regina, qualunque merito,
qualunque pena, etc. We can also say, ciascimo re,
ciasciina regina, etc. ; ciascuno agreeing in gender with
I its noun.
i
I y. "All," and "the whole," expressing a collective sense,
I are rendered by tutto, and agree with the noun ; as, —
All the people, the whole city, Tutto il popoJo, tutta la cittd.
All hearts, all nations, Tutti i cuori, tiitte le nazionL
The inversion, il popdlo tutto, la cittd tiitta, etc., is
I much used, and is very pretty.
112 ITALIAN GliAMMAR.
VI. The Itallanisms tiitto qudnto^ tutta quanta, with
their plurals, express collectively all the parts of a whole ;
as, —
La ccha e hruccidta tiitta quanta, The entire house is burned.
Og<ii VI asjjetto a 2?rdnzo tutti To-day I expect you all (a<
qudnti, many as you are) to dinnei-.
Trenio tutto qudnto, I tremble all over (from head
to foot).
VII. "All," when it means "every thing," may be
translated by tiitto, or by ogni cdsa, according to eupho-
ny ; as, —
Idleness renders all (everything) La pignzia fa parer cliff tcih
difficult, dgni cdsa, or fa par it- tdtto
difficile.
VIII. "All," used as an adverb, and sionifvino- "en-
tirely," is often rendered thus : La faccenda. e hella e
Jinita, la cdsa e hella e fdtta, le ndvi sdno belle e ap-
pavecchidte, the affiiir is entirely finished, the thing is all
done, the vessels are all ready.
IX. "No," "no one," is translated by nessuiio, niuno,
'Verdno, or by alcuno employed only as the object {alcdno
as the subject signifies "someone"). Any of these Ita-
lian words, when put after the verb, requires non before
it ; as, —
No country is more beautiful Verun paese e piu hello della
than Tuscany, Toscdna.
I never saw that anywhere, Non ho.veduto questo in alcuna
pdrte.
X. " Some " is translated by qudlche or alcdno (plural
alcuni or alqudnti^, and not by qitdlchi; as, —
He has been gone some time, Epartitogia da qudlche tempo, j
We have some books, Abhicmio alcuni Ubri.
I have some of them, JSfe ho alqucinti.
XL " Such " is rendered by idle or cotdle; as, —
I have seen such a person, Lfo veduto quel idle.
He has such a face as does not LJgli ha una tdl cera che non
please me, mi picice.
1
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 113
READING- LESSON.
Ogni secolo, 6gm epoca, ogni eta, dgni paese, divien celebre
becomes
per qualche nuova scoperta ; e il tempo presente aggiunge
discovery adds
sempre qualche cosa al tempo passato.
Se la pazzia fosse un dolore, si sentirebbero lament! in tutte
were should hear
le case.
Ogni lingua, per se stessa, e intraducibile, per motivo del siio
untranslatable
carattere particolare, die e il friitto del clima, del governo, del
genio, degli studj e delle occupazioni dei popoli..
Pope asserisce francamente che dopo la lingua greca, veruna
declares
lingua ha un' armonia cosi imitativa cdme la lingua inglese :
comunque sia, nessuno e obbligato a credergli.
however that may be
L' educazione varia quasi in ogni paese ; ogni uomo assennato
procura di adattarsi alle usanze esistenti nel site in cui si
endeavors adapt existuig
trdva.
finds himself.
Senza una buona educazione, il dotto non e altri che un pe-
dante, il filosofo un cinico, il soldato un bruto, e ogni uomo
qualsisia sara spiacevolissimo.
Non v' e pazzia la quale, per quanto stravagante essere possa,
it may be
non sia c6rsa per la mente a qualche filosofo.
may be passed
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION,
1. No farmer is pleased to have grain cheap, no soldier is
pleased with peace in his country, nor an architect with the
solidity of houses, nor a doctor with the health of his friends.
10*
114 ITALIAN GRAMMAll.
2. After the defeat of Perseus, king of Macedon, Paiilus
Emilius poured such a quantity of silver into the public treasury,
that the people were not obliged to pay any tribute during the
space of a hundred and five years. Useful and glorious vic-
tories !
3. Newton was born on the same day that Galileo died ; as if
Nature had not wished to have any interval between these two
philosophers.
4. A jDhilosopher, who had the misfortune to live under a
tyrant, was in the habit of feeling his neck every morning on
awaking, to see if his body was still attached to it.
VOCABULARY.
1. Is pleased, si compidce di; nor, ne.
2. Perseo ; Macedonia ; Pablo Emilio ; poured, verso ; such,
tdnta ; during, per.
3. As if, quasi ; had not wished to have, non avesse voluto
lascidre.
4. To live, vivere ; under, sotto ; was in the habit, soleva ;
of feeling, di tastdrsi ; on awaking, destdndosi ; was still at-
tached, VI stdva ancora attaccdto.
CONVERSAZIONE.
E ogni lingua traducibile '. No, per se stessa e intraducibile,
Che disse Pope della lingua in- Veruna lingua ha un' armonia
glese ? cosl imitativa.
Come i diversi paesi diventano Diventdno celehri per qudlche
celehri ? nuova scoperta.
Aggiunge il tempo presente at II tempo presente vi aggiunge
tempo passdto ? senipre qudlche cdsa.
Che e il dotto senza una budna Egli non e dltro che un pedcinte.
educazidne ? ^
Cosa e il Jilosofo senza educa- E un cinico.
zione i
Perche ? Per che. ha un cardttere partico-
Idre.
In che gidrno ndcque Newton ? Nello stesso 'gibrno in cui mori
il Galileo.
Di che efrutto il cardttere d' una E il friitto del cVima., del go-
lingua ? verno, degli stiidj e delle occn^
fazioni dei pbpoli.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 115
CHAPTER XYIII.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS
( Continued.)
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Non bisogna rubdre C altrui, We must not rob the property
of others.
NiENTE facendo, s' impura a Doing nothing, one learns to
far male, do evil.
Dopo il fcitto, OGNUNO e huon After the deed, every one is a
consigliere, good adviser.
Schidvo ALTRUi si fa chi dice il He who reveals his secret be-
suo segreto, comes the slave of others.
Ha da esser privo di ogni dif- He Avho wishes to criticise the
fetto chi vuol censurdre gli defects of others should him-
^ ALTRUi, self be free from them.
E padrone delta vHa altrui He is master of the lives of
chi sprezza la sua, others who despises his own.
Gli faro parldre da qualche- I will have him spoken to by
DUNO, some one.
Ognuno e V amico deW uomo Every one is the friend of the
che regdla, man who makes presents.
V e in CIASCUN di ndi qualche In eveiy one of us there is some
seme di pazzia, germ of folly.
NiUNO e prof eta nella sua pa- No one is a prophet in his own
tria, country.
Un malvdgio feJice non fa in- Nobody envies a happy wicked
. vidia a NESSUNO, person.
// peggio che pdssa fdrsi e il The worst thing that one can
non far nulla, do, is to do nothing.
II pane d' ^ltri sempre sa di The bread of others is always
sdle,^ bitter.
Non mi sento niente affdtto I do not feel well at all.-
bene,
Non conviene beffdrsi di nessu- We should make fun of no one,
NO,
Nonfdte tngiurie a chicciies- Injure no one whosoever,
SIA,
116 ITALI^iJs^ GRAimVlAR.
I. Altr{ii, with the article, signifies "the property of
others ; " as, —
E un ladroneccio V usurp are V It is a theft to usurp the goods
altrui, of others.
II. " One " and "another" are transLated hy gli uni, gli
dltri;- as. Fortune humbles one, and exalts another, la
fortuna ahhdssa gli uni, e inndlza gli dltri.
III. The above sentence may be differently constructed ;
as. Some ascend, others descend : thus go the wheels of
fortune, Glii sdle, chi scende, or dltri sdle, dltri scende,
or qudl sdle, qudl scende, or questi sdle, quegli scende:
cost va la ru6ta della fortuna.
IV. For the correct use of all these forms, the choice
of which depends on taste guided by the ear, we must
remember, first, that chi, and sometimes quale, may be
repeated many times; second, that the word dltri^ and
quegli, without an article, are pronouns in tlie singular,
indicating a person.
Y. " Nothing " is rendered by niente or nUlla. The
negation non is used when one of these words comes after
the verb ; as, —
It is better to labor without an E 7neglio lavordre senza scopo
object than to do nothing, che il non far nidla.
He who observes nothing, learns Chi nidla osserva, nidla impd-
nothing, ra ; or, chi non osshva nulla,
non impdra nidla.
YI. Niente or ml Z/^j without 7^07^,' expressed or under-
stood, means " something," " any thing : " in which case
it is generally placed after the verb, if governed by it ; as,
aS^ io posso far nidla per vdi, If I can do any thing for you,
cojnanddtemi, command me.
* Altri is a word verj' much used in elegant style, and must not be confounded with
gli altri, which means " the others."
This word, as well as chi, belongs to persons : quale refers to persons and things ; as in
this verse of Petrarca: " Qudl si posava in terra, e qudl su V onde,'''' some (tiowers) were
■>n the earth, others upon the waves. These words all require the verb in the singular.
INDEFIJSITE ADJECTIVE PliONOUNS. 117
VII. The word " nothing," employed negatively, may
sometimes be translated by che; the verb being preceded
by non, and sometimes by c6sa.
The idle have nothing to do, I pigri non hdnno che fare.
He who is innocent has nothing Chi e innocente non ha che
to fear, temere.
VIII. Nulla and niente are sometimes used with an
article ; as, Sempronio rose from nothing, Seawprdnio ^
sdrto dal nulla. The following phrases are thus trans-*
lated : —
He is a man of nothing, E un iiomo di niente.
A man good for nothing, Un uomo da niente.
He has quarrelled with us for a S^e corrucciato con noi perim
trifle, mdla, or per una hngatteUa.
This man is nothing to me, Non ho alcana ajjinita, or re-
lazione con lid.
IX. Si is generally considered as an indefinite pro-
noun, and is used both for the masculine and feminine
gender, singular and plural : it is equivalent to the Eng-
lish words " one," " we," " people," " they ; " as, —
Come si e detto, As we have said.
Si parldva di guerra^ People talked of war.
Si loderd molto il suo co7^dggio, They will praise his courage
very much.
Si vede che'siete un galantuomo, One sees that you are a gentle-
man.
But, in these and similar phrases, si holds the place of a
passive proposition, and may be equally well rendered in
English by " it is," " it was," " it will be ; " as, —
Si cred'evi cosi general nieiite. It was genei-ally so believed.
Si dice che la pace e gia fer- It is said that the peace is
mdta, already (oncluded.
X. JSFon, when need in a sentence expressing an in-
definite meaning, is always placed at the commencement ;
as, Non si jmo far mdla, one can do nothing.
118 ITALIAN GkAJ^LMzVR.
XI. "To US," "to you," is rendered by c^, vi, and is
placed before the indefinite pronoun si; but "of it,"
"of him," "of her," ^*of them," is translated by we, and
is placed after si, which is changed into se; as, —
They do not speak to you, Non vi si p aria.
They do not speak of it, Non se ne pdrla.
Xn. The indefinite pronoun cannot be translated by
si when it is followed by the reflective pronoun si, as si si
would not be euphonious. It is then necessary to adopt
another form, according to the sense of the phrase. Thus,
to translate "Man believes himself happy when he lives
in opulence, but he deceives himself," we can say, Uno
or tale or dltri or V u6mo si crede felice qudndo vive
nelV opulenza, ma s^ ingdnna; or gli udmini, or alcimi
si credono felici qudndo essi vivono nelV opidenza; or
n6i ci credidmo felici qudndo vividmo nelV opidenza,
inia g' ingannidmo.
READING LESSON.
0 voi, chiunque slate, poveri o ricchi, pdpoli o principi,
you may be
ricordatevi che la falce della morte miete nell' iimile capanna
remember harvests
come nei superbi palagi.
Un gentiluomo era travagliato dalla podagra. Tutti gli
tormented
consigliavano di lasciar 1' uso delle carni salate, ma egli rispon-
advised leave off salted
deva che nei dolori della sua malattia era assai contento di
potersela pigliare con qiialche cosa, e che arrabbiandosi quando
to be able to blame getting angry
col presciutto e quando col salame si sentiva bello e confortato.
felt
Nei paesi dispotici si sofFre m61to e si grida poco ; nei paesi
suffers complains
liberi, si softre poco e si grida molto.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 119
I grandl sono cdme quel mullni eretti siille montagne, i quali
erected
non danno farina se non quando si da loro del vento.
give gives
Alcuni si divertivano in casa di una sigiiora a troviire delle
differenze ingegnose da un oggetto ad un altro. " Qual difFe-
renza," disse la Signora, " si potrebbe fare fra me ed un oriuolo." —
could make
" Signora," egli le rispose, " un oriu61o indica le ore, e appresso
near
di v6i, si dimenticano."
forgets.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. There is not a man who can say, I have need of no one.
2. There is nothing more dangerous than to have for enemies
those whom we have laden with benefits.
3. Every man may presume with reason, that no one can ever
attain to a perfect knowledge of all the secrets and all the riches
of nature.
4. The same deed, the same word, awakens remembrances
agreeable to some, and sad to others. Whosoever looked at Ca-
ligula's forehead, excited in him sudden anger, because this action
reminded him of his baldness, which he wished to conceal from
everybody ; but he who looked at the forehead of Scipio Afri-
canus, gave him great pleasure, because he had a warlike wound
there, — a witness of liis valor and his glory.
5. Some one, in speaking of a tyrant who enjoyed the reputa-
tion of liberality, said, "Judge how much liberality dominates
in this man ; Avho gives not only his own spoils, but even those of
others."
6. Envy is certainly the basest and the most cruel of all the
passions, since there is hardly any person who may not have in
himself something to excite the passion of the envious.
7. Never do to others that which you would not wisli others
should do to you.
8. One day a lady wrote to her husband this letter, which
may serve for a perfect model of laconism : " Having nothing to
do, I write to you : leaving nothing to say to you, I finish."
120 ITALTAN GRAMMAR.
VOCABULARY.
1. There is not, non v* e ; can, possa ; need, hisogno.
2. Laden with benefits, henejicdto.
3. May, puo ; presume, presumere ; attain, pervemre.
4. Same deed, stesso,fdtto ; awakens, svecjUa ; looked at, guar-
ddva ; excited in him sudden anger, suscitdva in lui suhito
sdegno ; reminded him of, gli rammentdva ; to conceal, nas-
condere ; Scipione V Africdno ; great pleasure, inagndnimo pia-
cere ; warlike, marzidle.
5. Judge, pensdte ; dominsites, regna ; not on\j, non solamente ;
gives, dona ; his own spoils, la roba sua ; even, a7ic6ra.
6. There is hardly, v' e quasi ; to excite, da suscitdre ; envious,
invidioso.
7. Never do, non fdte ; wish, vorreste,
8. Wrote, scrisse ; may serve, pud servire ; I write, scrwo.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Con cM siete venuto ? Con nessuno.
Avete dltre amiche ? Non ne ho dltre.
Chi ha detto cid ? Ognuno lo dice.
Sdno le vdstt^e dice sorelle ricche ? U ima e ricca, V dltra e pdvera.
Come sdno i commanddnti ? Geldsi gli uni degli dltri.
Volete (will you) aver qudlche No, vi ringrdzio (thank you),
cdsa ? ^ non vdglio niente.
Qualcuno picchia, anddte a ve- E la Signora K.
dere chi e ?
Non credesi die avremo (shall Non e prohdhile,
have) la pdce'^
Avete ritrovdtolelettere per dute? Ne ho ritrovdte alcHne, ma la
maggidr parte sd7io perdute.
Sdno fratelli que sti due uomini'^ Non so (I do not know); si
rassoraigliano (resemble) V
uno air dltro.
Che si dice (say) di nudvo ? Non ho letto (read) nessun
giorndle dggi, ma si dice che
ci sdno cattive nuove.
Dove V avete inteso ? In cdsa d' un amico e per via
d' una lettera privdta.
PREPOSITIONS. 121
CHAPTER XIX.
THE PREPOSITIONS DI, A, DA.
A thorough acquaintance with these prepositions is abso-
lutely necessary, and therefore requires the attention of the
pupil : first, because the English and Italians differ some-
what in the use of them ; and, second, because they are the
signs which establish the connection between our ideas,
and the slightest error in their interpretation would en-
tirely change the sense of a phrase/
*
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
10 son DEL vostro parere, I am of your opinion.
• Vol J7ii pagdte Bi cattiva^noneta/ You pay me with ingratitude.
11 mondo va da se stesso, The world goes by itself.
Si e caccidto a ridere^ He burst out laughing.
Le Alpi sepdrano V Italia dIl- The Alps separate Italy from
LA Frmicia, France.
Lapolvere da ccinnone fu inven- Gunpowder was invented by a
tdta DA un frdte, friar.
Voi non avete ragione da far You have no good reason to
valere, give.
Anddte A vedere die cosa c' e, Go, see what it is.
Voi mi trattdte per da piu die You do me more honor than I
sono., deserve.
lo ho ditto da scherzo e voi fdte I said it in joke, and you took
davvero, it in earnest.
Dutemi la mia veste da camera Give me my night-gown and
e il herrettmo da notte^ night-cap.
D All.' opera si condsce il tnaes- We know the master by the
tro, work.
Sieie voi maritdta o da mari- Are you married, or to be
tdre ? married ?
E venuto nessuno a domanddre Has no one come to ask for me ?
di me ?
* Observe that some of the prepositions govern one, two, or three cases.
11
122
ITALIAN GEAMIklAR.
PKEPOSITIONS IN COMMON USE.
Di,*
of.
Accdnto,
aside, about, near, by.
A,\
to, in, at.
Alldto,
5' 55 JJ J>
Da,X
from, by, on.
at.
Attorno,
about, around.
I^h^
in, on, upon.
Dattorno,
55 55
Oo?i,
with.
Addosso,
on, upon, about.
Per,
through, by.
on
ac-
Presso,
near, almost.
count of,
in 0
rder
Appresso,
55 55
to, for.
Vic (no.
55 55
Su,
on, upon.
Lungi,
far, from.
Sopra,
JJ 55
Lontdno,
55 55
Sotto,
under.
Appo,
at, with, in compari
Fra,
amongst, within.
son with.
Tra,
55 5
5
Verso, ^
towards.
Infra,
in, in about.
Oltra,
beyond, besides.
Intra,
55 55 55
Oltre,
55 W
Prima,
before.
Lungo,
along.
Dopp,
after.
Fino,
till, until, as far as.
Anzi,
before, in presence of.
Sino,
55 55 55 V 55
Inncmzi,
55 55
55
55
Infino,
55 55 55 55 »
Dindnzi
5 55 55
55
55
Insino,
55 55 55 J> »
Avdnti,
55 55
55
55
Contra,**
against.
Davdnti
5 55^ 55
55
55
Contro,
55
Dikro,
behind.
A-frbnte,^\
■ opposite.
Didietro
' . " .
Rimpetto,
55
Entro,
in, within.
Dlrimpetto, „
Dentro,
55 55
Senza, ' \
without.
Fuora,
out of, without, besides.
^dlvo.
except, excepted.
Fuori,
55 55 55
55
Fccetto,
55 55
Infuori,
except, excepted.
Tranne,
55 J5
The pupil is requested to commit to memory the phrases
given under the various prepositions.
* From the Celtic rfe, a sign of qualification.
t Prom the Celtic a, near, joining with.
i From the Celtic da, at.
§ From tlie Celtic en, in.
II From the Latin apud, Celtic ap, joint, attached.
IT From the Latin versus, Celtic gicero, to turn.
** From the Celtic con, a sign of opposition ; and track, side.
tt From the Latin frons, Celtic fron, hefore.
%% And sanza and san (used by old writers). From the Latin st»e, Celtic sy, "want
priyation. — Bac/ii.
PREPOSITIONS. 123
DI.*
I. Domanddre di iino, donianddi'e la presenza di
iino, to ask the presence of some one ; fdr d' occhio, fare
un cenno d^ occhio, to make a sign of the eye ; far di
cajopello, fare un saldto di capj)ello, to salute with the
liat ; dare di penna^ dare un colpo di penna^ to eiface
with the pen ; dare del hriccdne, ddre il titolo di bric-
cone, to treat as a viHain ; pimire di mdi^te, punire cdlla
pena di mSrte, to punish with penalty of death ; accu-
mre di furto, accusdre per delitto di fdrto^ to accuse
of theft.
n. Many adverbial phrases are formed with the prepo-
sition di; such as di rdro^ rarely; di soppidtto, di nas-
c<jsto, in secret; di certo, certainly ; di fresco, di nudvo,
newly; etc.
A.
III. The preposition a, in Italian, is a sign of the da-
tive : it is used to mark the object towards which the action
or the intention of the subject is directed. It expresses
the idea of tendency of action, of attribution, or of prox-
imity to a place or person ; as, —
£gli venne A trovdrmi, He came to me.
Manddre A vedere, a cercdre, To send to see, to find.
Avvicindrsi ad uno, To approach some one.
Appoggidrsi ad uno, To lean upon some one.
Appoggidrsi al inuro^ To lean against the wall.
Vic'ino AL fuoco^ AL Utto, Near the fire, the bed.
Al tempo di Noe, At the time of Noah.
Voltdrsi AD uno^ To turn to a person.
Anddre iLLA volta di Mildno, To go towards Milan.
Porre inente ad ogni cosa, To pay attention to every thing.
Passdi^e all' ditra parte della To go on the other side of thf>
strdda, street.
It w^ill be seen that all the verbs of motion, which ex-
press a direction towards some object, are followed by the
preposition a,
* The preposition di may express a relation of possession, of extraction, or of qxialifl-
cation, as in English.
124 ITALIAN GRAiMMAU.
IV. There are many other expressions in Italian in
which the preposition a is likewise employed ; such as —
Taglidre a fette, To cut in slices.
Anddre A due a due, To go two by two.
Morivano A miglidia, They died by thousands.
Impardre A mente, To learn by heart.
Stare all' erta,* To be upon one's guard.
Anddre, parldre AL huio, To walk, to speak in the dark.
Tenete le rndni a voi, Keep your hands off.
Stare A capo chino, A hocca To be with the head down,
aperta, and mouth open.
V. The Italians say, adverbially, dlla sfuggita, by
stealth ; alV impyazzdta, foolishly ; alV hnjjensdta, sud-
denly ; dlla rinfusa, pell-mell ; dlla pteggio, at the worst ;
dlla meglio, at the best ; dlla grSssa, nearly.
DA.
YI. Da is the sign of the ablative : it is used to express
the point from which persons or things depart ; as, —
Allontandrsi da Parigi, To go from Paris.
Liherdrsi da un impegno, To get out of a difficulty.
I piaceri ndscono dai bi'sogm, Pleasures spring from wants.
Separdrsi d^lla fam'iglia, To separate from one's family.
Astenersi dal rulere, dal par- To abstain from laughing, from
Idre, talking.
Ripardrsi dal vento, d^lla To shelter one's self from the
piioggia, wind and from the rain.
Dall' anno or sin dXll' dnno Since last year.
scorso,
La carita comincia da se me- Charity begins at home.
desimo,
La moglie dipende dal marito, The wife depends on her hus-
band.
Staccdre una cosa da un dltra, To detach one thing from
another.
Venire dal tedtro, da cdsa, To come from the theatre,
from the house.
* AlP erta. This aW erta has given rise tn the English word " alert."
!
PEEPOSITIONS. 125
Essere incalzato dal nemico, To be pursued by the enemy.
Giudicdre dXlle cqyparenze, To judge by appearances.
Anddte da quella parte, Go on that side.
Che voUte da me ? What do you wish of me ?
Fare una cosa da se, or da per To do a thing aloue, or by one's
se, self.
Guarddrsi da uno, To be on one's guard against
one.
Distinguere il vero dal fdlso, To distinguish the true from
the false.
Cader da cavdllo, dIll' dlbero, To fall from a horse, from a
tree.
Difendersi Dj(gli ipocriti, Dii To defend one's self against
Iddri, DAL nemico, hypocrites, thieves, and ene-
mies.
VII. The verbs usctre, venire, nntovere, levdrsi, to
go out, to come, to move, to rise, etc., sometimes take di
for the sake of euphony, particularly when the article is
not used ; as, Esgo di chiesa, si leva di tdvola, I go
out of church, he rose from the table. With the verb ca-
der e, the Italians say, Cader di mdno,* di bdcca, to fall
from the hand, from the mouth ; but with the article, and,
above all, in the plural, they say, Uscir ddlla chiesa,
cader ddlle Tndni, to go out of the church, to let fall
from the hands.
VIII. "Out of" is translated \>j fuor di, because it
sounds better than fuor da; as, Fuori di pericolo, out
of danger.
IX. Da is likewise used before words marking the use,
employment, or distinction of a thing ; as, —
Carta DA scrivere, writing-paper.
Carta da lettere, letter-paper.
A.cqua DA here, water to drink.
Casa DA vendere, house to sell.
Sotte DA olio, oil-cask.
Camera da letto, bed-chamber.
Ragdzza da maritdre, a marriageable girl.
* Mano admits of various significations in idiomatic phrases. (See list of idiomfl.)
11*
J26
ITALIAN GRAJVOIAR.
X. Da is employed to express the idea of aptitude,
etc. J as ) —
A.r7ni da difendersi, Arms proper for defence.
Non sono cose da dirsi, They are not things to be said.
Z/' err are e da uomo, It is human to err.
U6}7io DA molto, DA pdco, DA A man fit for many things, for
few things, for nothing, for
fatigue.
They are things to cause laugh-
7iiente, da stento,
Son cose da ridere,
Non e cosa da un pari vostro,
E una ragdzza da marito,
ter.
It is not proper for such a man
as you.
A young lady of marriageable
age.
XI. Da may be used in various other ways ; as, —
Avke DA fare ?
Datemi da lavordre,
Venite qua da me,
Dite DA hurla ?
Dtte DA vero, or DAVi^ero ?
Uomo DA bene, or DABbene,
Anddte dal fornaio,
Andrb da mia madre,
Vive DA Signore,
Ha trattdto DA birhdnte,
Egli fa da dottdre, da medi-
co,
Vi giuro da galantuomo,
Have you something to do ?
Give me something to do.
Come here near me.
Do you say it in jest ?
Do you speak seriously ?
An honest man.
Go to the baker's.
I shall go to my mother's.
He lives like a lord.
He has behaved like a rogue.
He plays the doctor, the phy-
sician.
I swear to you upon the faith
of a gentleman.
READING LESSON.
Napoleone andato a Milano a farsi iucoronare re d' Italia,
goiae
visito r Universita di Pavia. Egli si fece presentare i professori.
made
e domando di Scarpa. Gli fu detto che era state depdsto
was said was (had) been deposed
dalla sua cdttedra per non aver voliito prestare giuramento
to have wished to take
PREPOSITIONS. 127
al nuovo governo. Eh ! clie importa, riprese Buonaparte, il
replied
giuramento e le opinidni politlche ! Scarpa onora 1' Universita
ed il mio stato.
II nome solo di Roma e una storia di maraviglie che scalda il
warms
petto ad ogni mortale. Terra degli eroi, capo del mondo ;
innanzi a lei sparlrono nazioni, popoli e citta famose, ed ella
l)efore disappeared
stette e sta onore e gloria d' Italia, aspettando che suoni 1' dra
stood stands aAvaiting may sound
d' una nuova grandezza.
Un gidrno Brasidas trovo tra alcuni f ichi secchi un sdrcio, cho
found
lo mdrse si fattamente che lo lascio andar via. Voi vedete,
bit let see
disse a chi gli stava intorno, che non v' e animaletto, il quale,
stood
per piccolo che sia, non possa scampar la vita dve abbia il
may be can save may have
cudre di difendersi da chi I'assale.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. If you wish to have a faithful servant, serve yourself.
2. " Deliver me from my friends," said a philosopher ; " be-
cause I can defend myself against my enemies."
3. We should abstain from such truths as have the appearance
of falsehood.
4. Amerigo Vespucci, of Florence, made many discoveries in
the New World in the year one thousand four hundred ninety-
seven. Hence it was called America, from this navigator.
5. Princes ought to punish as princes, and not as executioners.
6. The knowledge of foreign languages serves to correct and
perfect our own.
7. The changes of states, far from injuring, often aid in the
rapid progress of civilization and the arts.
8. " Fi'om the evils which the barbarians brought into Italy,"
said Varchi, " two good things have come forth, — our Italian
language, and the c;ity of Venice."
128
ITALIAN GllAAIMAK.
VOCABULARY.
1. If you wish, se volete ; serve yourself, servitevi da voi.
2. Deliver me, liheratemi ; I can (shall) defend, difenderb.
3. We should abstain, conviene astenersi ; appearance, fdccia.
4. Made, fece ; hence it was called, che venne qutndi chiamdto,
5. Ought, dehhono.
6. Our own, la propria.
7. Injuring (to injure), nuocere ; aid, giovano.
8. Brought, j)ortdti ; have come fortli, ndcquero.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Vddo al tecitro.
Con mio marito (husband).
Non ho niente da fdre.
jEgli va in campdgna.
Ho del caffe e una focdccia.
Sara dedicdto a Mozart.
Dove andcite ?
Con chi anddte ?
Che avete da fdre,
Dove va il Dottore ? >
Che avete"}
A chi sara dedicdto quesfo mon'
umento ?
Dove trovdste voi (did you find) lo li trovdi sulla tdvola.
i lihri ?
Come anddvano (went) i fanci- A due a due.
ulli?
Sdno le tdvole e le sedie nella Si, sdno nella camera,
cdmera ?
Venite da me oggi ?
Che cdsa avete ?
Ddtemi di grdzia due ubva.
Ha egli delpepe'^
Che volete fdre%
Non pdsso ; non esco (go out)
di cdsa.
Una huona cdsa a tre pidni
(floors). ^
Non ne ahbidmo, ma dbhidmo
pane e hutirro.
Si, Signore, ha del pepe, e del
sale.
Ho intenzibne di anddre al haJ~
lo, ma andrb prima da m/i/i
mddre.
PKEPOSITIONS. 129
CHAPTER XX.
THE PKEPOSITIONS CON, IN, PER.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
lo lo vidi co' miei proprj occhi, I saw him with my own eyes,
Assistetemi coi vdsiri consigli, Assist me with your counsels.
La Senna mette foce in mare, The Seine flows into the sea.
Leggo per divertirmi, I read (for) to amuse myself.
lo appu7ito ho manddto per voi, I have just sent for you.
Egll ha ddto in luce uiH opera, He has published a work.
E famoso PER le sue i7nprese, _ He is famous b^ his exploits.
Tutti parldvano in una vdlta, They all spoke at once.
Diede urC occhidta in giro, He cast a glance around him.
lo vengo a bella posta per vbi, I come expressly for you.
Lo farete con vdstro cdmodo, You will do it at your leisure.
E virtiX il dir molto IN pdchi It is a talent to say much in
detti, few words.
E cdsa che non gli pud capir in It is something which he can-
testa, not understand.
Le selle non son fdtte per gli Saddles are not made /or asses.
dsi7ii.
Vice qu'ello che gliviene in hocca, He says what comes into his
head.
Quella donna si adira CON tutti, This woman gets angry loith
everybody.
VY.'2i caritd, non mi precipitate! For pity's sake, do not ruin
me !
E un ubmo chidro per nohilita. He is a man illustrious hy his
nobility.
Vddo ad aspettdrvi in giardino, I shall wait for you in the gar-
den.
Voi cercdfe d' ingarhuglidrmi You try to confuse me ivith
COIS! parole che non intendo, words which I do not under-
stand.
Ognun per se e Dio per tutti. Every one for himself, and God
for us all.
180
ITAI.IAN GRAMMAR.
CON {with).
I. Oon is used as in English in such sentences as the
followino' : —
Strignere amicizia CON alcuno,
Egli pcirla cogli occhi chiusi,
Donne c6lla hbcca aperta,
Parldrsi Cogli occhi,
Percuotere col piede,
Far cenno cox la memo, COL
capo,
Dire CON voce hdssa, CON voce
sonora,
Lavordre COL pennello, collo
scalpeUo,
Fare {ma cosa CON piacere, CON
facilitd, CON dffficoltd, con
destrezza,
Parldre col ciiore in mdno,
k
uscito COL servitor e,
To make friends with some one.
He speaks with his eyes shut.
He sleeps ivith his mouth open.
To speak ivith the eyes.
To stamp witli the feet.
To make a sign with the hand,
with the head.
To speak in a low voice, in a
sonorous voice.
To work with pincers, with a
chisel.
To do a thing tvith pleasure,
with facility, with difficulty,
ivith dexterity.
To speak in an open-hearted
manner.
He has gone out with his ser-
vant.
II. In some phrases, the Italians use con where the
English use by ; as, Illustrdrsi COL suo merito^ to make
himself illustrious hy his merit.
EST {in).
III. In follows a verb when it expresses the existence
of an object in or upon another ; as will be seen by the
followino- : —
II prdnzo e in tdvola,
Ponete vino in tdvola,
Anddre in villeggiatura,
Essere in mcire,
Gadere in terra.
Nan ho dendri mdosso,*
lo non entro nei fdtti vostri,
Alzdrsi IN punta di piede.
The dinner is upon the table.
Put the wine upon the table.
To go iiito the country.
To be 2ipon the sea.
To fall to the earth.
I have no money about me.
I do not meddle in your affairs.
To stand on tiptoe.
* Indosso is from in and dosso, back.
PREPOSITIONS. 131
In mia^ in sua vece, In my, in his place.
Essere in potere di, essere nel- To be at the power of, to be in
LA cuna, the cradle.
Stare in piedi in mezzo alia To stand up in the middle of
piazza, the place.
Tutti gli sguardi erano fissi in Every look was fixed upon him.
lid.
Stare in cittd, in ^;^Z/cf, in cdsa, To live ^?^ the city, in the town,
in the house.
To Z' ho gettdto in mare, I have thrown him «?ito the
sea.
Morire in e^a c/i cento dnni, To die <2^ the age of one hun-
dred.
IV. In elegant style, in is sometimes used instead of
cdntro (against) ; as, Vendicdrsi in uno, to avenge one's
self against another ; incrudelire ne' sHoi schidvi^ to be
cruel to (against) his slaves.
V. It is difficult to know when to use the article with
in, and when to suppress it ; and there can be no positive
rules given on this point. We must, however, observe
that in is generally used without an article for any thing
which is, or seems to be, on the surface; as, II vascello
che era IN tndre si e rotto negli scogli, the vessel which
was upon the sea is broken on the rocks ; i pesci vivono
NEL mare, fish live in the sea.
PER {for, by, through, etc.).
YI. The preposition per indicates two distinct connec-
tions : —
1. It denotes the idea of passage ; as, —
Scrivere per la posta. To write hy post.
.Essere crudele per natura, To be cruel by nature.
Operdre per interesse, To work for interest.
Prendere pel h^dccio. To take hy the arm.
Pagdi^e cmque frdnchi VY.^ gior- To pay five francs a day.
no,
Per padre egli e nohile, Tlirough his fatlier, he is of no-
ble birth.
132 ITALIAN GKA^IMAR.
Per un secolo, per un anno, During (for) a year, a century.
Una voce corre per la citta, A rumor runs through the city.
Viaggidre per la Frdncia, To travel through France.
Passdre per la Frdncia, per la To pass through France, through
camera, per la porta, the chamber, through the
door.
2. Per serves also to mark the aim or object of a per-
son ; as, —
Egli e morto per la p atria, He died for his country.
lo lavoro per ^ miei scoldri, I work for my pupils.
Fiirono lascidti per morti. They were left ybr dead.
VII. We can also say, nella cittd, nella strdda, in
Frdncia; but the idea of motion is better expressed by
the word ^jer, rendering the phrase more forcible.
VIII. We also say, —
Per veritd, io non lo credo. In truth, I do not believe it.
Egli e venuto per pdrte di uno. He came from some one.
Essere per, or stdre per, To be about to.
Per me vi assicuro che, As for me, I assure you that.
Io ho quel che dite piii che per I perfectly believe all that you
vero, say.
Anddte T'E.' fdtti vdstri,* Let me alone ; or, mind your
business.
Per qudnto si affatichi, tutto git He may tire himself as much
va a voto, as he will, nothing succeeds
with him.
reading lesson.
Un giovindtto avdva i capelli neri e la barba bianca. Tiitti
domandavano la causa di un tal fenomeno. Un motteggiatore
rispose : " Perche forse quel Signore ha lavorato piii colla ma-
labored
scella che col cervello.
Giulio secondo, in eta di 70 anni, con un elmo in capo monto,
air assalto della mirandola. Si dice che un giorno questo papa
guerriero buttasse nel Tevere le chiavi di San Pietro, per non
threw
aver piii ad usare, diceva egli, che la spada di San Paolo.
PREPOSITIONS. 133
Un buoii veccliio pcirroco di villa, die era debole di vista, e
avea le dita poco elastiche, stava leggendo in pulpito an capo
"was reading
della genesi. A queste parole: "II Signore diede ad Adamo
gave
una moglie," volto due pagine in una volta, e senza abbadarvi
he turned perceiving it
lesse tuttavia con voce forte e cliiara : " Ed ella era incatramata
read pitched
per di dentro e per di fudri." Quel bu6n piovano si era
without. parson
diso;riizIatamente imbattuto nella descrizione dell' area di Noe.
unfortunately lighted upon
Bisogna che 1' udmo abbia tanto senno da sapersi accomodare
alle costumanze delle nazioni nelle quali si trova. Per mancanza
is. want
di un chiddo si pdrde il ferro ad un cavallo ; per mancanza di
lost shoe (iron)
un ferro si perde il cavallo, e per mancanza di un cavallo, anche
il cavaliere e perduto, perche il nemico lo sopraggivinge, 1'
succeeded
ammazza, e tutto questo per non aver pdsto mente ad un chiodo
killed put
d' un fdrro del suo cavallo.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. It is a great misfortune not to have wit enough to speak
well, nor judgment enough to keep silent.
2. In this world, we ought to be born either a king or a fool :
a king, to be able to avenge injuries, and punish the vices of
;i men ; a fool, so as not to perceive injuries, or be troubled by any
j thing.
j 3. A caricature represented George III. with a very large
, sleeve, from which Napoleon wished to come out ; but, as soon as
, he put out his nose, George gave him a push to force him back
' into the sleeve.
4. We shall be measured by the same measure as we measure
others.
12
134 ITALIAN GEAMMAR
^ti •
5. We should be careful not to lose time and words in refuting
things evidently false. Zeno denied motion, and Diogenes began
to walk without saying a word : Zeno persisted in his paradox,
and Diogenes continued to w^alk.
VOCABULARY.
1. To speak, joarMre ; to keep silent, stare zttto.
2. We ought to be born, converrehhe nascere ; to be able, po-
tere ; to avenge, vendicdre ; to punish, castigcire ; to perceive
(to know), conoscere ; or to be troubled, ne ddrsi pensi&ro.
3. Represented, Jigurdva ; Giorgio ; wished to come out, voU-
va uscire ; put out, sporgeva ; gave, ddva ; to force him back,
per fdrlo torndr dentro.
4. Measured, misui'dti ; we measure, minvriamo.
0. We should be, etc., hisogna guarddrsi dal perdere ; in re-
futing, nel confutdre ; denied, negdva ; began to walk, si mise a
passeggidre ; persisted, persistette ; continued, continub.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che fa il vostro servo ? JEgli fa un cenno col capo.
Che vuol (wishes) dire'^ Che il prdnzo e in tdvola.
Dov' e la vostra arnica ? E uscita col servitore.
Glie e cadibto in terra ? Lo scalpello con cwi lavoro.
Per die e il Signor M. famoso'^ Per le sue dpere letter drie.
Che cdsa ha egli fdtto ? Ha ddto in luce mdlte dpere.
H avete lette ? Si^ le ho lette con piacere.
Come ha egli parldto ? Ha parldto col cudre.
Dove stdte bra ? Sto in cittd.
Prestdtemi un dbllaro. Non ne ho in ddsso.
Che si dice delfii Capitdno'^ Che egli e mortoper la p atria.
Perche, lavdra il Signor B. ? Lavdra pei sudi scoldri.
Volete andcire in vece' mia ? Si, andrd in vece vostra.
Qhe chiedete (demand) voi ? Chiedo dandro in jJrestito.
E criidele quest^ animdle ? Per natura non e crudele.
Ha egli comprdto una carrozza ? No, e troppo avdro per far queS'
ta spesa.
PREPOSITIONS. 135
CHAPTER XXI.
THE PREPOSITIONS.
C Continued.)
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Cid sia ditto era di not, That may be said among us.
Egli verra era dieci giorni, He will arrive in ten days.
Che c' e qui dentro ? What is that within ?
Facciamocegli incontro Let us go to meet him.
lo le sedeva acc^nto, I was seated beside her.
J^gli stette alquanto sopra di se,^ He stopped some time to reflect.
Noe ndcque prima del diluvlo, Noali was born before the flood,
e mori dopo il diluvio, and died after it.
Venni questa mcme a cdsa vds- This morning I went to your
tra, house.
N^on v' e cosa nudva S(5tto il There is nothing new under the
sole, sun.
J^lla ha trovdto un marito se- She has fovind a husband ac-
CONDO il suo genio, cording to her taste.
Neir inverno si sta bene ACCiN- In winter, one is well near the
TO alfuoco. fireside.
Bisdgna vivere second o le leggi We ought to live according to
della natura, the laws of Nature.
Non vo mdi a letto prkia deW I never go to bed before day-
dlha, • break.
// sdnno in stjl mattmo e salute- Sleep in the morning is healthy.
^ vole,
Animo^ Signorma ; vien tdrdi : Come, miss ; it is late : get up.
levatevi su,
Che avete fcdto infino ad dra'^ What have you doi.u up to the
present moment ?
Ciascuno e padrdne in cdsa sua, Every one is master in his own
house.
Qudndo avrb cisA mia, invitero When I have a house of my
tiuti i miei amici, own, I will invito all my
friends
13(3 ITALIAN GRAMJVIAH.
UPON.
I. "Upon" is often translated by in; as, —
1 will wait for you on the piazza, Vi aspettero in piazza.
Ungrateful people write benefits GV ingrdti scrivono i henefizi
upon the sand, nell' arena.
To have no money upon (or Non avere dandri IN dosso.
about) you,
BETWEEN, AMONiG.
II. These prepositions are rendered by fra or tra, and
occasionally by infra or intra; as, —
Among the people, Fra (or tra) il popolo.
Among men, Fra (or tra) gli uomini.
Between these two cities you Fra queste diie cittd s' incon-
find three villages, trano tre paesetti.
III. Fra (or tra) soiftetimes expresses " in " or " with-
in ; " as, —
I said within myself, To diceva fra me.
God has created the world in Dio ha credto il mondo in sei
six days, giorni.
He will arrive within two Bgli arrivera fra due mesi.
months.
To live in pleasure, in pain, Vivere fra i piaceri, fra le
pene.
UNTIL.
IV. "Until" is translated hj fino or sino; also insino
or infino.
TO or AT.
V. " To " or " at " is rendered by da when it signifies
going to some one ; as, —
I go to my banker's, lo vo dal mio hanchiere.
You go to your uncle's, Voi anddte da vostro zio.
He will send to the baker, Mandera dal forndio.
Yesterday I went to your house leri venni da vol per pregdrvi
to beg you to call upon me di passdre dggi da me.
to-day.
PREPOSITIONS.
137
A cdsa di, a cdsa rnia, a cdsa vdstra^ etc., are also
used wlien we refer more particularly to the house ; as,
Vdi anddte a cdsa di vdsti^o zio ; ieri venni a cdsa v6s-
tra per pregdrvi di passdre oggi a cdsa mia.
VI. The following examples illustrate the use of va-
rious prepositions : —
At the fireside,
After dinner,
After me,
About the table.
Against me, him,
Against the enemy,
About 3,000 francs.
About three feet high.
Along the river,
AcCjCnto al fiioco.
Dopo iwdnzo.
Dopo di me.
Intorno alia tdvola.
CoNTRO di me, di lui.
CoNTRO al nemico.
Circa a tre mila frdnchi.
A.Uo circa, or alto intorno a trepiedi.
LuNGO il jiume.
According to youropinion, Secondo, or giusta il vostro parere.
Before all, before me,
Before speaking,
Before daylight,
Beyond the sea.
Behind the door,
Before the chimney,
Beyond the Rhine,
Beside that.
Far from the truth.
In the middle of the street,
In fiice of, or opposite to.
Near the bed,
Near the sea,
Outside,
Out of the house,
Towards me, thee,
Towards spring,
Without money.
Within him.
Prima di tiitto, prima di me.
Prima di, or av^nti di pdrlare.
InnInzi V dlha, or prima deW alba.
Al di lX dal mare.
DiETRO la porta, or cdla porta.
Dav^nti ^7, or al cammino.
Di la dal Reno.
Oltre a cib.
LuNGi, or lontXno dal vera.
In mezzo alia, or della strdda.
DiRIMPETTO A, or IN FiOCIA A.
AccXnto, or viciNO al Utto.
ViciNO, or PRESSO al or del mare.
Per di fuori, or al di fuori.
FuoRi or FUORA di cdsa.
Verso or inverso a me, a te, or di me.
Verso primavera.
Senza dandro.
Dentro, or PER di dentro, di lui-
VII. When the above prepositions are followed by a
personal pronoun, the pronoun is often placed before the
verb, and the preposition terminates the phrase ; as, JSTon
mi comparite pih dindnzi^ appear no more before me.
12*
188 ITALIAN GKAJMMAK.
READING LESSON.
Tasso^s last Letter
Che dira il mio Signor Antonio, quando udira la mdrte del
will say will hear
sue Tasso ? e per mio avviso non tardera molto la novella, perclie
will not delay
io mi sento al fine della mia vita, non ess^ndosi potuto trovar
feel being able
mai rimedio a qu(^sta mia fastidiosa indisposizione sopravvenuta
alle molte altre mie solite, quasi rapido torr(^nte, dal quale senza
accustomed
pot^re aver alciin ritegno vedo chiarara^nte ^sser rapito. Non e
defence taken away.
tempo che io parli della mia ostinata fortuna, per non dire dell
speak
ingratitudine del mondo, la quale ha pur voluto aver la vittoria
di condurmi alia sepoltura mendico ; quand'io pensava, che quella
gloria, che, mal grade di chi non vuole, avra qu^sto secolo da mi^i
scritti, non fosse per lasciarmi in alcun modo s^nza guiderdone.
Mi son fatto condurre in questo Monastero di Sant' Onofrio, non
to conduct
solo perche T aria e lodata da' m^dici, piu che d' alcun' dltra
praised
parte di Roma, ma quasi per cominciare da questo luogo emi-
n^nte, e colla conversazione di questi div6ti Padri, la mia con-
versazione in Cielo. Pregate Iddio per me : e siate sicuro che
siccome vi ho amato, ed onorato sempre nella presente vita, cosi
faro per voi nell' altra piu v^ra, cio che alia non f inta, ma ve-
wilf do feigned
race carita s' appartiene ; ed alia Divina grazia raccomando v6i
^ belongs
e me stesso. Di Roma in Sant' Onofrio.
PREPOSITIONS. 139
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. The tears of an inheritor are smiles concealed under a mask.
2. Distrust those wlio love you very much on short acquaint-
ance.
3. Private thieves spend their lives in chains and prisons;
public thieves, in the midst of purple and gold.
4. With many people, love of country is none other than to
kill and despoil other men.
0. There are some country towns in France where societies
meet at six o'clock in the evening, in winter. They seat them-
selves around the fireplace ; and, after the usual compliments,
each one goes to sleep. At eight o'clock, one of them sneezes.
Then, there is a general movement of surprise. " What is it ? "
— " Nothing." One of the company takes out his watch, and
announces that it is eight o'clock. " Ah ! it is not late : we can
amuse ourselves a little longer." They sleep again till nine
o'clock, when the mistress of the house gives a signal. They
rise ; they congratulate each other at having been much amused ^
and each one goes to his own home.
6. " Wit and judgment," says Pope, " are always in opposition
to each other, as the husband and wife ; although made to live
together, and mutually help each other."
7. A preacher displayed all his eloquence in a panegyric upon
St. Antonio ; and, among the figures of rhetoric with which he
embellished his style, there was one wherein he said, " Among
what inhabitants of heaven shall I place our saint ? Shall it be
I with angels or archangels ? shall it be with cherubims or sera-
phims ? No ! Shall T place him among patriarchs, among prophets ?
] No ! Neither shall I place him among apostles, nor doctors, nor
evangelists." One of his auditors, who was tired of this long
declamation, said to him, in rising, " My father, if you do not
'' know where to place your saint, you can put him here ; because
I am going away."
VOCABULARY.
1. Concealed, nascosti.
2. Distrust, dijidotevi ; love very much, vogliono gran bene.
3. Private, /jm-a^o ; spend (pass), />«5S(:m<9.
4. Is none other than, non e dltro che ; kill, ammazzdre ;
despoil, spoglidre.
5. There are, vi sono ; societies meet, siva in conversazione;
at six o'clock, p.m., dlle sei pomerididne ; usual, sbliti ; there is
140 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
a general movement, i7is6rge un mbto generale ; takes out, cava ;
it is not late, 7i07i e tm^di ; to amuse, trattenere ; they sleep
again, ognuno torna ad adormentarsi ; they rise tiitti si dlzaiio ;
they congratulate each other, si rallegrano.
6. Although made, henche fdtti; to live together, tenersi coni-
pagma ; to help, ajutdre.
7. Displayed, sfoggidva ; to embellish, orndre ; to place, col-
locdre ; neither, neppure ; declamation, jilastrocca ; if you do not
know, se non sap'ete ; you can put him here, ponetelo pur qui ;
because, che ; I am going away, io vddo via.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che cdsa avete ? una hottiglia di vino.
Dite da vero, o dite da hicrla ? Da vero ; non ischerzo.
Dov' e il mio pdne (roll) imhu- Non so, vddo nella cucina per
tirrdto (buttered) ? cerccirlo.
Che fecero (do) quel povermi Chiesero aiuto col pidnto e cblle
colle Idgrime in sugli dcchi? strida.
Fra qiidli dei celesti abitatori fa Amico mio, non e importdnte
collocdto Sanf Antonio f di saperlo.
Ho io lascidto (left) il mio has- Voi lo lascidste da mia sorella.
tone qui ?
Chi e felice ? Voi ed io, per che non ci mdnca
^ (fails) un amico sincero.
Qual e qu'elV animdle, che va E- V ubmo, che da bambino va
(goes) con qucdtro piedi, poi carponi con le mdni e cdi
con diie, ed in ultimo con tre ? piedi, e cbsi con qucittro pie-
di, pbi ritto su due piedi, ed
in ■ vecchidja con tre, perche
va col bastone.
VEEBS. 141
CHj^PTER XXII.
THE VERBS ESSERE AM) AV^RE.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Non c' e tempo da jyerdere^ There is no time to lose.
Non c' e came sen£ ossa, There is no meat without bones.
Avete voi m proiifo la jnoneta? Have you tlie money ready?
No7i hisogna aversela a male^ You must not take it ill.
lo v' ho cara qudnto sorella, I cherish you as a sister.
Perche avete cosi fretta'^ Why are you in such a hurry?
Comprdte dellaUgna; perchein Buy more wood; for there is
cantina non ce rC e piu, no more in the cellar.
Se non avete die fare, venite If you have nothing to do, come
meco, with me.
Tocca a voi a coprire i miei It is for you to conceal my
difettiy faults.
Ora toccherd a me a raccon- Now it is my turn to adjust the
ciarla^ affair.
Non ho piacere di viaggidre di I feel no pleasure travelling by
notte,' night.
Con chi V avete'? lo non V ho With whom are you displeased?
con nessuno, I am displeased with no one.
Vi sdno gran rihdldi in questo There are great villains in this
moiido, world.
Non si pud dare un cuore piu There cannot be a more per-
perfido, fidious heart.
Ahhidmo a discdrrere a qudttro We must speak of that to-
occhi^ gether tete-a-tete.
Ho incontrdto due giorni fa Two days ago I met your cous-
vostro cugino, in.
Theni del mbndo sono in mdno The riches of tliis woi'ld are in
delJa sdrtcj the hands of fate.
A voi tocca il dir prima il vds- It is for you to give your ad-
tro jyarere,^ vice first.
Egli non e in grddo di fur questa He is not in a position to iu-
spesa^ cur this expense.
142 ITALIAN GRAl>OIAR.
ESSERE, TO BE.
I. This verb is very much used in Italian, by its form-"
ing the passive, which predominates in that language. 1st,
It is its own auxiliary in compound tenses ; as, /o s6no
stdto, I have been: 2d, The past participle ^.s^a^o agrees
in gender and number with its subject ; as, Ella e STATA,
she has been ; ndi sidmo stati, we have been.
II. When essere is used impersonally, it agrees with
the subject which follows it ; as, JE un 6ra, it is one
o'clock ; s6no le {mdici, it is eleven o'clock.
III. The verb ve7iire is very often used for essere,
IV. The Italian expression essere per, or stdre per,
signifies "to be upon the point of;" as, /o sdiio, or io
sto per ammoglidrmi, I am about to marry.
V. In the phrases "there is," "there are," "there was,"
etc., the Italians use ci and vi (there), abridged from
qmnci and quivi. Oi denotes proximity, and vi a more
distant place ; as, —
There is, was, etc., V e, or c' e ; v' era, or c' era, etc.
There are many people who Vi sono mold die vorrebhero
wish to learn much without impardre molto senza studi-
study, are.
VI. Ci and vi are chano-ed into ce and ve when it is
necessary to use the indefinite pronoun 7ie (of it, of them),
J^on ce n^ e piii, or 7ion ve n^ epm, There are no more of them.
Non ce n' e piii, etc., There is no more of it.
VII. To express "it is ten years since," etc., the Ital-
ians say, ^^Dieci dnni fa, or dieci dnni s6no ; and for
"it is an hour," " a week," "a month," "two centuries,"
etc., they say ui-C 6ra fa, una settimdna fa, un tnese fa,
due secoli fa. "There is," "there are," is occasionally
rendered by vi ha, or lidvvi.
VERBS.
143
VIII. Avere (to have),
active verbs as in English,
lowing phrases : —
To be judicious,
To be ready,
To be thirsty,
To be hunsfr
Jj
To be hot,
To be satisfied with.
To cherish some one,
To remember.
To be in a hurry,
To be cold.
To be ill,
To be ashamed.
To take a thing ill,
To be afraid,
To be charmed.
To be in possession of.
To have knowledge of,
besides being the auxiliary of
is used idiomatically in the fol-
Ave?' giudtzio ; aver cervello.
Avere in pronto ; avere a mdno.
Aver sete.
Aver fame.
Aver cdldo.
Aver cdro di.
Aver cdro una,
Avere a mmte.
Aver fretta.
Aver freddo.
Aver mdle.
Aver vergdgna.
Aver per 7ndle.
Aver paura.
Aver gusto ; aver piacere,
Avere in memo.
Avere conoscenza.
READING- LESSON.
Seduta un po' in disparte, coUa fronte bassa e le mani intrecci^-
te sulle ginocchia, stava piangendo cheta, la povera Laudomia.
Le sue guance in questi mesi s' eran affilate e ftitte pallide, che
quel viver sempre in agitazione, quel dover ad ogni ora temere
le giungesse 1' avviso che Lamberto era rimasto ucciso, esauriva
in lei a poco a poco la vita. Ed ora, dopo questa rotta, della
quale s' ignoravano i particolari, ed in cui si sapeva pero quasi
3,000 persone aver perduta la vita, rimaner col tremendo dubbio
s' egli fosse vivo o morto ! Non aver mode di uscirne, non sapere
a chi domandarne ! " Oh ! pensiamo," diceva, " s' egli non si
sara gettato nel maggior pericolo ! s' ^gli avra voluto staccarsi
dal fianco del Ferruccio ! Oime ! Oime ! ch' io non abbia pro-
prio a vederlo raai pi u ? "
Le cognate, le nipoti e gli altri tutti di quelle tre case che
forma vano una sola famiglia, la veneriivano piu che sorella e zia,
e la chiamavano V Ameda, nome antico, venuto dal latino Amita
I'che viiol dir zia), e tuttora vivo nel contado della Brianza.
144 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. There was in Athens a very opulent miser, who troubled
himself very little about being the talk of his fellow-citizens.
" People may hiss me," said he ; " but I am not angry : for, when
I am at home, I rejoice at the sight of my crowns."
2. Whei-ever there are tears to be dried up, you w^ill be sure
to meet a woman.'
3. There are men on whom is imprinted the whole character
of their nation.
4. Unhappily, it is but too true, that no nation can flourish
without vices. If it were not for ambition or cupidity, there
would not be a single man who w^ould wish to take charge of the
government of others. Take vanity away from women, and
the fine manufactures of silk and lace, which furnish labor (cause
to live) to so many thousands of artisans, would cease (would be
no more). If there were no thieves, lock-makers would die of
huno-er. Thus sood and evil are always found together.
5. Always live as if you were old, in order that you may
never repent having been young.
6. There are men who know neither how to speak nor to be
silent.
7. An old woman asked Mahomet what it was necessary to do
so as to go to Paradise. " My dear," said he, " Paradise is not
for old women." The good woman began to weep ; and the
prophet said, to console her, " There are no old w^omen there,
because they all become young again."
8. Dolabella said to Cicero, " Do you know that I am only
thirty years old ? " — "I ought to know it," said Cicero ; " because
you have been telling it to me these ten years."
9. If princes were obliged to combat hand to hand, there would
be no more wars.
VOCABULARY.
1. Atene ; who troubled himself very little, che si ddva poca
briga; hiss, fa le fschidte ; I rejoice, nn r allegro.
2. Wherever, dovunque ; to dry, asciugdre.
3. Imprinted, i7npresso.
4. Unhappily, etc., e cosa disgraziatamente pur vera ; can
flourish, pud esser Jiorida ; if it were not, se non fosse ; would
wish, avesse voglia di ; to take charge, incaricarsi ; take away,
togUete via; manufacture, fdhhica ; cause to live, danno da
vwere a ; would die, morirebbero.
VERBS. 145
5. If you were, se foste ; may never repent, ?^o^^ vi ahhiute a
jientire mdi.
6. To be silent, stch^e zitti,
7. Old woman, vecchia ; asked, domanddva ; Maometto ; it
was necessary, convenisse ; to go, per anddre ; paradiso ; my
dear, c«rrt 7nia ; began to weep, si caccio a 'pidngere ; to console,
racconsoh'ire ; become young, ritornercmno giovani.
8. DolabeUa ; Cicerone ; only, solamente ; I ought to know it,
lo debho sapere ; because, perche ; telling, anddte dicendo.
9. Were obliged to, dovessero ; combat, pugndre ; hand to
hand, cdrpo a cdrpo,
CONVERSAZIONE.
Dov^ e la Luisa ? £J rimdsta a casa.
Perche ? Perche e un poco infredddtcu
Louisa, che hai ? La mamma stu (is) mdle,
Che cosa ha% Ha una grossa febhre,
Bevete (drink). E dolce abhas- Si, e buonissimo.
tdjiza ?
Che cos' e questa nostra vita! Un sogno, sognidmo in pace.
Qadnti dnni sono che siete fuori Sono ormdi qumdici dnni?
di pdtria ?
Figliuoli miei, avete appetite ? No, cdra mddre.
Volete (will you) bere (di'ink) ? Prenderemo (we will take) una
limondta.
E morta la Signora ? Si, la Signora Maria e mdrta.
E la Giulietta f E desoldta. II suo vivo dolore
mi Idcera (pierces) V dnimo.
Avete studidto la vdstra lezidne Mi son levcito questa mattina
di musical X' avete prati- dlle sette, e nan mi sono jjiii
cdta perbene ? mbssa (moved) dot piano-
forte.
Potrei (could I) vederla ? Si; se volete entrdre un mo-
mento, ma non le dite (say)
nulla.
13
146 ITALIAN GKAJVIIVIAE.
CHAPTER XXm.
THE VEEBS AND THEIR SYNTAX.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Gome ve la passdte, carina ? ' How goes it with you, dear ?
lo sto ascoltdndo: non mimuovo, I listen : I do not move.
Amico^ gettdte via la fatica, Friend, you lose your labor.
Venite pure avdnti, You can likewise enter.
CUie cosa dite ? What do you say ?
Tirdte via, gocciolone ! Go away, great fool !
lo stdva scriv'endo una lettera, I was writins: a letter.
Gomportdtevi bene, e sarete ben Behave well, and everybody
voluto da tutti, will love you.
Da alcuni jilbsoji si crede che Some philosophers believe that
la vita sta un sdgno, life is a dream.
Vi sbno taliini che vdnno sempre There are people who are al-
macchindndo delle novita^ ways thinking of something
new.
Ghe cbsa impedisce aW uomo di What prevents man from being
esser felice ? l^appy ?
Piove^ tuona, e balma, in un It rains, thunders, and lightens,
punto, nil at once.
Mentre state pranzdndo scrivero While you dine, I will write to
alio zio, my uncle.
Ghe anddte facendo cost per What are you doing so early ?
tempo ?
Non parldr mdi senza aver Never speak without reflection.
^ pensdto,
E cosa che si dice da alcuni, There are some persons who
speak of it.
Mubve piu V interesse propria One's own interest is always
che V altrui, jpore touching than that of
others.
Non ho goduto un' ora di bene, I have never enjoyed a mo-
ment's happiness.
Appena mi vide tiro via subito^ He no sooner saw me than he
ran away.
VERBS AND THElll SYNTAX. 147
The verbs in the infinitive are easily recognized in Ital-
ian by their terminations, namely, in aee, eee, ire ; as,
amdre* to love ; vedere, to see ; jinire^ to finish. Many
verbs have two terminations for the infinitive : some end in
ere or ire.
In Italian, the infinitive, when preceded by the definite
article, has the nature of a noun ; as, ^ proibito il far
male, it is forbidden to do evil.
GENERAL RULES.
I. The word via (which signifies " way," " street " ) is
placed after certain verbs of motion ; as, —
Levdr via, to take away.
Portdr via, to carry away.
A7iddr via, to go away, etc.
II. The passive form of the verb, as we have already
stated, is much used in Italian ; particularly in didactic,
poetic, and historic styles. The active form becomes pas-
sive by changing the construction of the phrase : the
subject becomes the regimen, and takes the preposition
da : the verb takes the addition of si, which is a sio-n of
the passive ; or it is conjugated through all its tenses with
the verbs essere or venire; as, Everybody says, si dice
da Udti, e detto da iutti, or vien detto da tidti ; the
people fear war, la giierra e temida dal ]j6j)oIo.
III. There are many impersonal verbs | in Italian ;
amono* which are the followinof : —
Alheggia, the clay appears.
RaggiSrna, ,,^ „ ^ „
Annotta, it is growing dark.
Pioviggina, ^ it drizzles: it
Ldmica, > rains in small
Sjjruzzola, ) drops.
* The verbs of the first conjugation^ which ends in ARE — amount to more than four
thousand: among them, only about tliirty are irregular.
t The impersonal verbs may be divided into proper and improper. The proper are
those which have only the third person singular throughout all their moods and tenses ;
as, Si fa osriiro, it grows dark ; tempiJsta^ it hails. The improper arc those wliich are not
impersonal by themselves, but only occasionally used in an impersonal siguilication ; as,
Convicnf. it is proper ; hisdgna, it must.
148
ITALIAN GRAJVOIAR.
Balena,
it lightens.
Accdde,
it happens.
Lampeggia,
" . "
Avvietie,
5) J)
Piove^
it rains.
Interviene,
?5 ?J
N^evica,
it snows.
Pare,
it appears.
Tuona,
it thunders.
Semhra,
it seems.
Graudina,
it liails.
Disdice,
it does not become.
Gela,
it freezes.
Bisogna,
it is necessary.
lY. Impersonal A'erbs are used in the plural when the
noun which follows them is plural ; as, —
Accddono strdne cose,
Sono le set,
Strange things happen.
It is six o'clock.
V. All the impersonal verbs are conjugated in their
compound tenses with essere; as, tl tondto, e pioviito.
VI. Many of these verbs are conjugated with the per-
sonal pronouns ; as. Mi pare, it seems to me ; mi dis-
place, I am sorry.
Remaek. — In most languages, many verbs are used
with an idiomatic turn very different from their proper
signification.
VII. The verbs venire and volere, for instance, do not
always answer to the English verbs " to come " and " to be
willing : " but the former is sometimes used instead of the
verb essere (to be) ; and the latter, being preceded by
the particles ci, vi, and unipersonally employed, has the
same meaning as the verb bisogndre (must or to be
necessary) ; as, —
Mi vihi detto cosi, I am told so.
Gi vuol pazienza, We must have patience.
VIII. The verb dovere is expressed in English by the
verb '^' to owe " when it means to be a debtor, and by
the verb " to be obliged " when it signifies duty or the
necessity of doing an action. It is also used instead of
the verb bisogndre, in the signification of "must;" as
^' gli doveva trecento fiorini, he owed him three hun-
dred florins.
VERBS AND THE[R SYNTAX. 149
IX. The English verb " to be," used in the sense of
"to be one's turn," "business," or "duty," is rendered in
Italian by the verb toccdre^ in the signification of " to
belong ; " as, —
Tocca a me a giuocdre, It is for me to play.
Tocca a lui a leggere, It is for him to read.
X. The verb " to think," used in English in the sense
of "to believe "i)r "to suppose," is translated into Italian
by the verb credere; and, when in the sense of "to re-
flect" or "meditate," by the YQvh pensdre.
XL The verb "to know" is translated by the verb
sapere when intellectual knowledge is meant, and by the
verb condscere when personal knowledge derived from
the evidence of one of our senses is intended.
XII. The pronouns ?7^^, ti, ci, ne, etc., are often use^*
as expletives* with certain verbs ; as, ib mi son pre sa la
lihertd di scrivervi, 1 have taken the liberty to write to
you.
XIII. The verbs dovei^e, potere^ sapere, volere,
sometimes form their compound tenses with essere when
followed by an infinitive ; as, io non son potuto venire.
XIV. The verb suondre, or sondre, is used in the sense
of to play on an instrument; as, Sudna il violino, suoyia
il c6rno da cdccia.
XV. The verbs avvertire and haddre (to take care) are
followed by a negation ; as, Avvertite or haddte di non
inganndrvi, take care not to deceive yourself.
XVI. The verb may be placed before or after the sub-
ject, according to the dominant idea of either verb or
* Expletives are particles which give strength and energy. They are bene, si bdne,
pure, tutto, mi, ti, poi, altrimenti, ci, gid, via, vi, mai, cgli, si, bello, non, ne ; as, —
Il vdstro vest'ito e bcW e fcitto, Your suit of clothes is finished.
Son tiUto stnnco, I am quite tired.
Oie tempo fa, rgli ? What is the weather ?
ti^gli (■ pill ddtto c/P 'w non crecleva, Ue is more learned than I thought.
13*
150 ITALIAj^ geaimjmak.
subject. This inversion sometimes gives great effect,
particularly to poetry. We may see it in Tasso : —
GilCE. r aha Cartdgo; appena i segni
DeW alte sice ruine il lido serha,
MuoiONO le citta ; muoiono i regni, etc.
REMARKS.
1. The verbs ending in care and gare, as predicdre,
Hpiegdre, take h in those tenses in which c and g would
precede e or i, so as to preserve the hard sound of the
infinitive. (See conjugation of cercdre.^
2. Students should be careful to notice the difference
between the imperfect and perfect-definite tenses of Ital-
ian ^verbs. The mipey^fect expresses an action not accom-
plished during the time of another past action, or the
repetition of an action, and may be known by its making
sense with the auxiliary was. The perfect-definite ex-
presses an action entirely past; as, I was going to your
sister when I sato you, %o me ne (imp.) andava da v6s-
tra sorella^ qudndo lo vi (perfect) viDi ; I went almost
every night to pay a visit to the famous Schiller, io an-
dava qudsi 6gni sera a far visita al celehre Schiller,
•READING LESSON.
Era intanto comparsa la Caterina con qualche cosarella per
cena*: e chi non avesse saputo che la casa era andata a sacco, 1'
avrebbe indovinato vedendo quell' imbandigione, che tutta con-
feisteva in un' iiisalata, un pezzo di cacio, e due pan neri, che 1'
lino neppiir era intero. La povera donna, sciira e macilenta in
viso, cogli ocehi sonfi e rossi, apparecchiava senza parlare, e
metteva ogni tanto, Mnghi sospiri ; e dopo quelle prime e brevi
j)ar61e, nessuno apri piu bocca, e rimaser pensosi, sedendo su una
panca che era tiitt' in giro conf itta nel muro : e questo silenzio
parea tanto piu mesto, che nessuna voce, nessvino strepito s' udiva
neppure, al di fuori, benche fossero nel cuor della terra, pdco
lontani di piazza. II canto d' un gallo o F abbaiar d' un cane
avrebber almeno dato segno di cosa viva ; ma quel desolate borgo
aveva- aspetto di cimitero. — D'Azelio.
VERBS AND THEIK SYNTAX. 151
t
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
The Stranger and the Guide {seated on the top of the Coliseum).
1. S. — As I just now observed, as we climbed up here, the
name of Rome awakens the most agreeable sensations.
2. G. — It is because you have read so much, sir : besides,
you know Latin, and then you have travelled much.
3. S. — Two years of travel have profited me much more
than eight years of Latin. I have studied nature : I have
freed myself from my prejudices, and from the false national love
which makes us so unjust towards our fellow-creatures.
4. G. — What think you, then, of Italy ?
5. S. — Italy has conquered the world by her arms ; she has
enlightened it by her sciences ; civilized us by her fine arts ;
governed by her genius ; and, far from succumbing under the
redoubtable blows of barbarians, she has triumphed over them,
forcing them to lay down their ensanguined arms at her feet.
6. G. — Very true ; and you cannot mention another nation
which has held its conquests so long as Italy.
VOCABULARY.
1. We climbed, salivdmo ; awakens, desta.
2. Read, letto ; travelled, viaggidto.
3. Profited, giovdto ; studied, studidto ; have (am) freed, sono
spoglidto ; fellow-creatures, simile.
4. Think, pensate.
5. Conquered, conqidstato ; enlightened, illumindto ; civilized,
ingentilito ; governed, governdto ; far from succumbing, non che
soggiacere ; triumphed, trionfdto ; foi'cing (constraining them),
costringendoli ; ensanguined, insanguindti.
6. You cannot mention {Qxtei)^vossignoria non pud citdre.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Avke cdmere da affiUdt^e (to Si, Signore, ne ho vdrie.
let)?
Vorrei un appartamento. Con tnohili o senza mobili ?
Lo vorrei (should like) smohig- Pensdte di trattenervi (to re-
lidto. main) mdlto'^
Non pill che r inverno. E al pcirtire'^
Al partire rivenderb (I will sell Non ne caverete un terzo del
again) la moMglia, cdsto. •
152
ITALIAN GRA:MMAR.
Allora e meglio trovdre una
huona padrona ed un helV
appartamento.
Andidmo a vedere.
Che mohili ha ella ?
II letfo e la cosa principalissi-
ma. -
La camera risponde sidla strd-
da'^
Desidera vedere urC dltra stdn-
za'^
Che si dice delV ostinazione ?
Che ci vuole in tutte le cose ?
Qudndo e il sole piu risplen-
dente ?
Che volete amico mio f
Che hisogna fare per godere
budna salute ?
Che sta facendo quesf udmo ?
Che cdsa e pazzia ?
Vi condurrb io ddlla Signora
Bidnca ; ella e persona gen-
tilissi7na e discrefa.
La situazidne e hellissima.
Ha mohili di 7ndgano (mahog-
any), e tapjpeti di lusso.
Nonpotete desiderdrne un migli-
bre.
No Signdre, da nel giardino.
No, credo che il letto sia hudno.
Non si trdtta adesso che del
prezzo.
Si dice che V ostinazidne e peg-
gibr di tutti i peccdti.
In tutte le cdse ci vuole la mo-
derazidne.
Ddpo una burrdsca e sempre
piu risplendente il sdle.
Vdglio pile che vdi potete dcir-
mi.
Sisdgna vivere parcamente.
Sta ragiondndo per passdre il
tempo.
Lo sperdr sempve nelV avvenrre
e pazzia.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 153
CHAPTER XXIV.
THE VERB: THE SUBJmTCTIVE MOOD.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Gil comandd che parldsse, He ordered liim to speak.
Dicbito che V ora sia tarda, I fear that it is late.
DiteglicH egli fdcciacbmevuole. Tell him to do as he likes.
Non so se to debha dir di si o I do not know if I ought to
di no, say yes or no.
Qudnd^ dnche to lo sapessi, non Even if I knew it, I would not
ve lo direi, tell you.
Si da per siciiro che la pace sia We are assured that peace is
fdtta, made.
Bisogna che gli scrividte voi It is necessary that you write
stesso, to him yourself.
JS il piu bravo uomo cK to dbbia He is the most honest man that
mdi co7iosciuto, I have ever known.
Benche sia difficile, bisogncLpero Although it is difficult, we
vincere se stesso, must conquer ourselves.
JEgli lo dice perche non didte a He says it that you may not
me la colpa, blame me.
To gli dtssi che come gli piacesse I told him that he might an-
le rispondesse, swer her as he pleased.
Pcire cli ella si fdccia ognor She seems to be continually
pill bella, growing handsomer.
Gli dtssi che facesse come vo- 1 told him to do as he pleased.
lesse,
Se to avessi studidto, sarei ddtto, If I had studied, I should be
learned.
Ptcd essere cli' to porta domdni, It is possible that I may leave
to-morrow.
Se tu sapessi qudnto to fdmo I If thou knewest how much I
love thee !
Venne da me e mi domandb chi He came to me, and asked me
fossi, e dove anddssi, who I was, and where I was
going.
154 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Every proposition is either positive or doubtful.
I. The positive indicates that the thing positively exists ;
that the action is done in an absolute manner. This propo-
sition is expressed by the indicative mood ; as, Jo pdrlo,
I speak ; io par^ldva, I was speaking.
II. The doubtful proposition, on the contrary, is ex-
pressed by the subjunctive mood, and serves to indicate
the possibility or doubt of a thing existing : it shows that
the existence of the action is conditional and relative, be-
cause it depends on an antecedent proposition, expressed
or understood ; as, I wish to write, io voglio scrivere, is
positive, and in the indicative mood ; I wish that you
would write, io vSglio die v6i scrividte^ is doubtful, de-
pending on the will of another, and therefore put in the
subjunctive.
III. The verb is used in the subjunctive after all verbs
that signify ashing, entreating , suspecting , wondering,
rejoicing , grudging, supposing, hoping, imagining,
conjecturing, intimating; after all verbs expressive of
desire, will, command, permission, prohibition, fear,
belief; after all verbs implying doubt, ignorance, uncer-
tainty, or future action; and after all verbs used with a
negative ; as, —
Per amor di te ti prego (eke) For your sake, I beseech you
te ne rimdnghi, to desist.
Che vuoi tu chU lo sdppia ? What do you tliink that I
know ?
TV. Some of these verbs, however, appear sometimes
to be used indiscriminately, either in the indicative or in
the subjunctive mood : but it is not so in fact ; for, when
they are so used, each mood expresses the action in a
diiferent manner, as may be seen in tlie following exam-
ples : —
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 155
Voglio sposare una donna die I wish to marry a woman whom
mi pi dee, I Hke.
Voglio sposch'e una donna die I wish to marry a woman whom
mi pidccia, I may hke.
Vddo cercdndo uno die mi vuol I am seeking one who is fond
bene, of me.
Vddo cercdndo uno die mi vo- I am seeking one who may be
glia bene. fond of me.
In which, in the first instance, being certain of the exist-
ence of the action expressed, we use the indicative ; and,
in the second, we use the subjunctive, because the existence
of the action is not certain, but doubted or desired.
V. After semlyi'di'e, jparere^ hisogndre, or any other
impersonal verb, the subjunctive is always used; as, —
Bisbgna die voi jpartidte domdni, You must go away to-morrow.
Mi sembrdva die avesse voglia He appeared as if he had a
di ridere, wish to laugh.
Parevami die ella fosse piu hi- She appeared to me to be
dnca die la neiie, whiter than snow.
VI. The verb is also used in the subjunctive after the
relative pronoun che, following a comparative or a super-
lative ; as, —
Bella quant'' dltra donna {che) As handsome as any other lady
^ fosse mdi in Firenze, in Florence ever was.
E la miglibre opera che sia com- It is the best work which ever
pdrsa, appeared.
VII. And after the relative quale, not used in an inter-
rogative manner ; as, —
una parte qudle volesse ne reg- He might govern such a part
gerehhe, as he should wish.
OF THE TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT VERBS IN A COM-
POUND SENTENCE.
VIII. T\'hcn, in a compound sentence, the principal
verb is in the present of the indicative, or in the future,
the dependent verb must be put in the irresent of the
156 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
subjunctive, if we mean to imply the present or future
time ; and in the hrfperfect of the subjunctive, if we
mean to imply the past ; as, — '
Qredo mi portdsse amore, I believe that he loved me.
£) credo omdi die 7n6nti e pidg- I believe, that, by this time,
ge sdppian di die tempra sia mountains and plains know
la mia vita, what is the condition of my
life.
IX. When the dependent verb expresses an action
which may be done at all times, it may be put either in
the imperfect or the prese?2^ of the subjunctive, although
the principal verb be in the perfect-indefinite of the indica-
tive ; as, —
Iddio ci a ddto la ragione qffin- God gave us reason in order
die ci distinguidmo, OY ci dis- that we might distinguish
tinguessimo, ddgli animdli, ourselves from animals.
X. In suppositive or conditional phrases, the hnperfect
of the indicative in English — had, %uas, or %i^ere — is
rendered in Italian by the imperfect of the subjunctive ;
as, —
Se io avessi qiiesti dendri, glieli If I had this money, I would
presterei iiicontanente, lend it to you immediately.
Chi starehhe meglio di me, se Who would be more happy than
quei dendri fosser miei ? I, if that money was mine ?
Remark. — Some conjunctions require the subjunctive
mood; as, Affinche, in order that; benche, though;
senza che, without ; d!'ato che, suppose.
READING LESSON.
E cosa rara che s' incontri un giureconsulto che litighi, un
medico che prenda medicina, e un teologo die sia buon cristiano.
Flechier era figlio d' un droghiere. DIcono che in un momento
di malavoglia, un vescovo gh rimproverasse la vilta dei suoi na-
tali, e che Flechier gli rispondesse : Monsignore, v' e questa
differenza fra vdi e me, che se voi foste nato nella bottega di mlo
padre vi sareste ancora.
Tre giorni dopo la morte di Caterina di Frc4ncia, il predica-
tore Lini^estre cosi dalF alto del pergamo la raccomandava agh
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 157
astanti : " La Regina mddre e mdrta, la quale, vivendo, fece
molto male, e per me credo molto piii mjile clie bene. In quest'
oggi si presenta una difficolta, che consiste in sapere se la chiesa
cattolica deva pregare j^er lei che visse tanto male, e cosi spesso
sostenne la eresia, quantunque si dica die in I'lltimo sia stata con
noi, e non abbia acconsentito alia morte dei nostri prlncipi. Su
di che io devo dirvi, che se volete recitarle un pater ed ave cosi
a casaccio, fate vdi ; varra per qudllo che puo valere : e lo rimet-
to alia vostra liberta."
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. As a countryman was one day walking in the streets of
Paris, he passed by a broker's shop ; and, not seeing any thing but
a man occupied in writing, he was anxious to know what busi-
ness he did. He entered, and asked what they sold. " Asses'
heads," answered the money-changer. " You must do good busi-
ness," immediately replied the countryman, " since you have only
your own left." ^
2. Semiramis ordered the following inscription to be engraved
upon her tomb : " Let the king who has need of money demol-
ish this tomb, and he will find a treasure." Darius caused the
tomb to be opened : instead of money, he found this other in-
scription : " If thou hadst not been a bad man, and of insatiable
avarice, thou wouldst not have disturbed tlie ashes of the dead."
3. A Turkish ambassador asked Lore'nzo de Medecis why they
did not see as many fools in Florence as in Cairo. Lorenzo
pointed to a monastery, and said, " See where we shut them up."
4. A man having consulted the philosopher Bias, to knov\^ if
he should marry, or lead a life of celibacy, he answered, " The
woman you marry will be pretty or homely : if she is pretty, you
will marry a Helen ; if she is homely, you will marry a Fury :
so you would do better not to marry.
VOCABULARY.
L As a countryman was walking in, girando un paesdno per ;
was anxious to know, ebbe voglia di, etc.; did, /"wcesse ; entered,
entro ; sold, vendesse ; you must do, etc., ne abhidte un gran con-
sumo ; you have left, rimdne.
2. Demolish (make to demolish), y«ma demoJire ; will find,
trovera.
3. Did see, vedessero ; pointed, addito ; we shut, rincJiiudidmo.
4. Should marry (if he had to take a wife) ; will marry, mene-^
rete.
14
158 ITALIAN GEAlVmAR.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che cosa domando egW^ Se w avevo hen studidto,
Che diceste voi ? Non so s' io dehha dir di si o di no,
Che voUte sapere ? Voglio sapere clii ella sia.
Qudndo ritornerete ? Pud essere ch' io ritorni domdni,
Chi sarehhe stdto genei'oso se fos- II povero die si mostra riconos-
se ndto ricco ? cente di un benefizio.
Che disse Maria ? Se w fossi ricca^ so hen lo quel
che avrei a fare.
Ghe cosa e rdra ? J^ cosa vara che s' incbntri un
medico che prenda medicina.
Perche vi maraviglidte voi? Perche voi avete venduto quel
cavdllo.
Eseioavessihisdgnodidandro? Se sajjeste qudnt' to v' dmo, nC
avreste domanddto di prestdr-
vene.
THE INFINITIVE, GERUND, ETC. 159
^ CHAPTER XXV.
THE INFINITIVE, GEEUND, PRESENT AND PAST PAR-
TICIPLES.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Spesso la veritd sta occidta, Truth is often concealed.
Che cosa avete sentito dire ? What have you heard said ?
Ho sempre odidto V adidazione, I have always hated flattery.
II fuoco e spcirso in tuttalana- Fire is spread throughout all
tura^ nature.
Bisogna anddre cduto nel par- It is necessary to be careful in
Idre, speaking.
Giunto alia porta, la frdvai "When I arrived at the door, I
chiusa, found it shut.
/ Toscdni sono acutissimi nel The Tuscans are very sharp at
motteggidre, raillery.
Al primo vederla la sorpresa mi Surprise betrayed me when I
ha tradito, first saw her.
Lo sperdre nelV avvenire e paz- It is foolish to place one's hopes
zia, on the future.
La folia crescente shoccdva da The sweUing crowd poured in
ogni parte, from all parts.
II farldr poco, il fare assdi, e 7 To speak little, to do much,
non lauddre se stesso, sono and not to praise one's self,
virtii rare, are rare virtues.
Guarddti dal vantdre le cose Abstain from praising what be-
tiie, longs to thee.
Una hurla per essere detta fiiori An untimely joke may become
di tempo pub diventdre un an offence.
offesa,
Si 'pud dire quella essere vera It may be said, that true art is
arte che non appdrc essere arte, that which does not appear
to be so.
Non il comincidre, ma il perse- It is not the commencing, but
verdre, e degno di lode, the persevering, which mer-
its praise.
](iO ITALIAN GKAMIVIAR.
I. The infinitive takes the place of the third person
when the phrase is composed of a principal proposition
and a subordinate one, connected by the conjunction
"that;" as, He said that the people ought not to be de-
ceived, egli dice il 'p6'polo non dover essere ingayi-
Qidto; it is said that time is the father of all truth, dicono
il tem'po ESSERE padre di ogni veritd. This style,
though very elegant and much used, is not adapted for
common conversation. The above phrases may be trans-
lated word for word ; as, tlgli dice che il j^dpolo non dee
essere inganndto,
II. The pronouns lui and lei are used instead of egli
and ella with the infinitive ; as, Sa ogniino ltd essere
stdto maestro di hel dire, everybody knows that he was a
model of eloquence.
III. The infinitive is used for the second person singu-
lar of the imperative mood, when preceded by the negative
particle 710 ?i; as, —
Non fare strepito, Do not make a noise.
Non ti lusingdre, Do not flatter thyself.
Cid 7ion temere, Do not fear that.
Non mi toccdre, rihdldo I Do not touch me, rascal !
IV. The infinitive may be used as a noun in the nomi-
native case, or as regimen of the verb ; as, —
Mi pidce mblto il siw fare, His manners please me much.
Nel danzdre, ella non ha pari In dancing, she has no equal
nel mondo, anywhere.
Dal parldre si conosce V interno We know the hearts of men by
degli uomini, their speech.
V. The infinitive is used as follows by an able his-
torian, in describing the movements of a camp preparing
for an assault : Quindi era nel cdinpo un anddre,* un
* The Italians make ft-equent use of andare^ venire, and stare: the first two conyey an
idea of movement ; the latter, that of rest.
PARTICIPLES. 161
venire, un urtdrsi c?' uSmini e di cdrri un jorhir cU
drmi, un apparecchidre di mdcchine murdli, die V dere
ne era a 7ii6lta distdnza introndto.
VI. Many English phrases may be translated literally ;
as,
It is a great folly to live poor, E gran pazzia il viver povero,
in order to die rich, ^ per morir ricco.
It is a virtue to say much in JE virtu di dir molto in pdchi
few words, detii.
THE PARTICIPLES.
VII. When the past participle * is joined to the verb
Sssere (to be), or to such verbs as venire, restdre or rima-
nere, vedersi, etc., used in the signification of "to be," it
should agree with the subject of the verb with which it is
joined, in gender and number; as, —
JEssi eran di frondi di quercia They were garlanded with oak-
ingJdrlanddti, leaves.
Ne erano le fdlte de* Vitellidni Nor w^ere the faults of Vitel-
punite, ma ben pagdle, lius' troops punished, but
well paid.
VIII. But when the past participle is joined to the verb
avere (to have), — if this verb is used, instead of essere,
in the sis^nification of "to be," or is used in the sionifica-
tion of "to hold," "to possess," etc., as an active and not
an auxiliary verb, — the participle agrees with the object
of the verb in gender and number ; as, —
aS* avea (for s' era) messe alcune He had put some small stones
petruzze in hocca, in his mouth.
Per non poterti vedere f avresti Thou wouldst have torn out
(for ti saresti) cavciti gli occhi, thy eyes, not to see thyself.
Uno che fordta avea (for tenea, One who had his throat pierced.
possedea) la gdia,
* There are many participles ia dto, dta, which are contracted by suppressing the at:
these are —
Accetto — a for accettdto — a, accepted.
Addtto — a for adattdto — a, adapted.
Cdrico — a for caricdto — a, loaded, etc.
14*
162 ITALIAN GRAMi\L4R.
IX. If the verb avere^ to which the past participle is
joined, is used as an auxiliary verb in order to represent
the idea of past time, which could be equally expressed by
a single form of the verb to which the participle belongs,
then this participle remains invariable ; as, —
Come iq avrb dcito (or daro) As soon as I shall have given
loro ogni cosa, every thing to them.
Cercdto ho (or cercdi) sempre I have always sought a solitary
solitdria via., way.
Chi queste cose ha manifestato "Who has told these things to
(or manifesto) al ?naestro ? the master ?
X. When the past participle is preceded by one of the
pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, il, lo, la, li, gli, le, ne, che,
aui, qudle, qudli, qudnti, as objects of the verb, the
participle agrees with the pronouns, or the objects repre-
sented by them, in gender and number ; as, —
JElla medcsima me le ha dette She herself has told them to
(or mi ha dette queste cose), me.
II liherto diceva averla esso uc- The freedman said that he had
cisa (or avere esso uccisa la killed her himself.
dojina),
XI. The English present participle may be expressed
in Italian, —
1. By the gerund of the corresponding verb ; as, —
Veggendolo consumdre come la Seeing him waste away like
neve al sole, snow in the sun.
Dormendo gli pdrve di vedere la (Sleeping, or) whilst he was
donna sua, asleep, it seemed to him that
he saw his lady.
2. By the conjunction che, or the adverb qudndo, and
a tense of the indicative mood ; as, —
Poi cK ebhi riposdto il cojpo Having rested my weary body.
lc(SSO,
Qudnd' ebbe detto cid, riprese il Having said this, he took up
teschio misero c6' denti, once more that miserable
skull with his teeth.
PARTICIPLES. 163
3. By a preposition and the verb in the infinitive ; as, —
Consiuno quella mattina in cer- He spent that morning in look-
ccirli, ing after them.
Credo die le snore sien tutte a I beheve that the nuns are all
dormire^ (sleeping or^ asleep.
XII. When the English present participle has before it
a preposition, such as "of," "from," "on," "in," etc., it is
always rendered in Italian by the corresponding verb in
the infinitive with a preposition.
XIII. If the participle is preceded by the prepositions
"of," "from," "with," they are expressed in Italian^by the
preposition di^ attended by the infinitive; as, l^hhi il
piacere di vederlo, I had the pleasure of seeing him.
Xiy. The preposition " on," before the participle, may
be expressed by the prepositions di or in; as, - —
Si vdnta d^ aver la loro cono- He values himself on being ac-
scenza, quainted with them.
Nel partire gli sovvenne di lei. On his leaving, he recollected
her.
The preposition " in " is relidered by a or in; as, —
Avea nel quetdr popolo autorita In appeasing the people, he had
ed arte, both authority and art.
Che a far cid volesse aitdrlo, That he would assist him in
doing that.
XV. The prepositions "for," "without," "before,"
"after," etc., are literally translated.
XVI. If the participle is preceded by the preposition
" by," this preposition is generally omitted in Italian, and
the participle rendered by the gerund of the correspond-
ing verb ; as, —
Gli scoldri impdrano le regole Scholars learn the rules of a
di una lingua studiundole^ language by studying them»
164 ITALIAN GKAJNIMAR.
XVII. But if we wish to express the preposition, then
the verb must be put in the infinitive, and "by" rendered
by con; as, —
II divino Giulio rintuzzb la se- The divine JuHus checked the
dizione del suo esercito col dir sedition of his army by only
solo, " Ah, Quiriti 1 " saying, " Ah, Romans ! "
READING LESSON.
Dio mi creo per aniare ; io mi ricordo di un fanciiillo sensitive,
vago di solitudine, abbandonare il trambusto deha citta, e lontano
nei campi voharsi indietro a contemphirla, come I'Alghieri des-
crive il naufrago che uscito fiiori dal pelago alia riva, si volgc all'
acqua perigliosa, e guata ; egli si avvolgeva pei boschi, udiva la
voce arcana che par che mandi la natura al siio Creatore, ascol-
tava commosso 1' armonia degli uccelli, ed invidiava la voce loro
per cantare anch' egli un inno di gloria, e le ali per accostarsi al
firmamento, perche gli avevano detto il Padre del creato abitfire
nei cieli : quanto tesoro di affetto era nell' anima di quel fan-
ciullo ! Appena la campana della sera indicava 1' ora dei morti,
prosternato davanti alia immagine di Gesu Cristo non senza
lacrime la supplicava per le anime dei suoi defiinti . . . per tutti
quelli che purgandosi aspettano di sollevarsi alle gioie divine: egli
aveva una parola di conforto per qualunque sconsohito. Ah!
quel fanciiillo fui io. — GuerrXzzi.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. The ancients pretended that the greatest happiness was not
to be born ; and the next, to die young.
2. The Epicureans denied the existence of the soul, and rec-
ognized only physical principles : they said the gods did not en-
ter into worldly things.
8. The philosopher Cleante earned his living by drawing
water during the night, so that he might study by day (to attend
to study).
4. Apelles painted a bunch of grapes so natural, that several
birds, seeing it, came to peck at it.
5. At Rome, a father emancipated his son by giving him a box
on the ear.
6. In Paris, various academies are seen aiming at very differ-
ent ends. There is the Academy of Music, which excites (moves)
PARTICIPLES. 165
the passions ; and the School of Philosophy, to quiet them : the
Fencing Academy, which teaches how to kill men ; and the Medi-
cal Academy, to preserve life.
7. The painter Caracci, having been despoiled by certain
thieves, knew^ so well hoAv to delineate their physiognomy, and
paint their faces, that they were discovered and arrested,
VOCABULARY.
1. Pretended, pretendevano ; to be born, ndscere ; to die,
mo7^ire.
2. To deny, negdre ; recognized, riconohhero ; they said, dice'
vaiio.
3. Earned, guadagnava.
4. Painted, dipinse ; came, vennero.
5. To emancipate, emancipare ; box on the ear, schidffo.
6. Are seen, vedonsi ; moves, muove ; to quiet, acchetdre ; to
teach, insegndre ; to kill, cwijnazzdre.
7. To despoil, spoglidre ; to designate, disegndre ; discovered,
scoperti,
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che negd7'ono gli epicurei ? X' esistenza deW dnima.
Che riconohhero essi ? Soltdnio i prmcipj fisici.
Che dicevano ? Dicevano gli dei non entrdre
nelle cose di questo mbndo.
Di chi era Bellini r^iaestro ? Di Tizidno.
Che fece il pittdre Bellmi per JEgli dipinse la decollazidne di
Maonietto secondo ? San Giovdnni Battista.
Ne fu coniento il sidtdno ? Loddndo la pittura, avverti V
artista d' un errore.
Come giiadagndva la vita il Col cavcir dcqua in tempo di
jilbsofo Clednte ? notte per attendei^e dllo studio
di gidrno.
A chi somigliano gli udmini in A un miserdhile prmcipe do-
generate ? mindnte sidle cdste delta Gui-
nea.
Perche ? Perche, diceva ad alcuni Fran-
cesi : " Si parla mblto di me
in Frdncia ? "
Che fretendevano gli antichi ? Pretetidevano, la prima felicita
essere il non ndscere, la, se-
cdnda, il morir presto.
166 ITALIAN GEAMMAR.
CHAPTER XXVI.
THE VERBS AND ARE, DARE, FARE, AND STARE*
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Mi rincresce di ddrvi disturbo, I am soriy to disturb you.
Fece vista di non intendere, He pretended not to hear.
Venite a stare con noi, Come to live with us.
Gome state c?' appetito ? How is your appetite ?
A che bra siete sblito far colazio- At what hour do you generally
ne ? breakfast ?
jcJ un ragdzzo che non puo star He is a child who cannot keep
fermo, still.
Sidmo cosi stdnche che non pos- We are so tired that we can no
sidmo piii stare in piedi, longer stand.
Ditegli cK egli fdccia come vuo- Tell him that he may do as he
Ze, likes.
II gusto degli ubmini va sogget- The taste of men is liable to
to a mblte vicende, many changes.
JSgli non pose gran fcitto cura He did not \my much attention
a quello ch' w dtssi, to what I said.
To scelsi una moglie secbndo il I took a wife after my own
cubr mio^ heart.
Non fate capitdle della sua pa- Do not depend upon his word.
Da ndi si da in tdvola dlle cm- We dine at five at our house.
qnCy
Vi darb contezza del suo stdto, I will inform you of his situa*
tion.
To r inddco qiidnto so e pbsso, a I will induce him, as much as I
stare allegro e a fdrsi dniino, can, to drive away melan-
choly, and take courage.
* Andare, diirr, stare, are the only irregular verbs of the first conjugation. In some
of their compoundf5, they become regular; asria7iddre, trasandctre, etc., Avhich are varied
like amare. FJre is a "contraction of faccre (now obsolete), of which it retains many
forms. It is considered by some grammarians as belonging to the second conjugation, and
is irregular in its compounds.
VERBS.
167
ITALIANISMS WITH AND ARE (TO GO).
kjuesta cosa non va fdtta,
Anddr dietro ad uno,
Andai'e a voto, in vdno,
Anddre alia ventura,
Anddre in collera,
Andch- sicuj'o,
Lascidmo anddre questo,
A Idtigo anddre,
Anddre altera,
To so quel che va detto,
II sole va sotto,
Anddre bene,
Anddrne la vita,
II merito va congiunto colla mo-
destia,
Le ddnne vdnno trattdte con
gentilezza.
This thing ought not to be done.
To follow some one.
Not to succeed.
To go at random.
To get angry.
To be sure.
Do not speak of that.
In the long-run.
To be proud.
I know what I must say.
The sun sets.
To succeed.
To have one's life at stake.
Merit is accompanied by mod-
esty.
Women ought to be treated
with courtesy.
WITH DARE (TO GIVE).
Dare a cdmhio,
Ddre cojnpiniento,
Dar da dormire,
Dar da ridere,
Ddre de' cdlci,
Dar fede,
Dar luogo,
Dar le vele a^ venti,
Dar il huon dnno,
Ddre il motto,
Dar la mdno,
Avere a ddre,
Ddrsi budn tempo,
Ddrsi V acqiia ai piedi,
Ddrsi a gdinhe,
Ddrsi pejisiere,
Dar che dire,
Dar giu,
Ddre una voce ad uno,
Ddre in tdvola,
Ddre voce.
To put out money at interest.
To finish.
To lodge.
To give cause for laughter.
To kick.
To believe.
To give an opportunity.
To set sail.
To wish a merry new-year.
To give the word.
To marry, to shake hands.
To be in debt.
To live a merry life.
To praise one's self.
To run away.
To care for.
To give occasion to talk.
To subside, to decline.
To call some one.
To serve the dinner.
To spread a report.
168
ITALIAN GRAjVIMAR.
WITH FARE (TO DO),
Fate che venga da me.
Fare le carte,
Questo non fa per me,
Aver molto a fare,
Non ne ho a fare,
Fatevi a me,
Far si alia finestra,
Tre me si fa,
Una settimdna fa,
Al far del giorno,
Far hello,
Non fa forza.
Far certo,
Fatevi indietro,
Far capo ad una,
Far del grdnde.
Far stare uno.
Fare una predica,
Far vita stretta,
Far sua vbglia,
Che vi fa egli che venga o non
venga 9
Bid him come to ma.
To deal at cards.
This will not do for me.
To be very busy.
I have no need of it.
Come near me.
To look out of the window.
Three months ago.
A week ago.
At the break of day.
To set off.
It is no matter.
To assure.
Go back.
To address some one.
To be self-important.
To restrain some one.
To admonish.
To live niggardly.
To do as one pleases.
What is it to you if he cornea
or not?
WITH STARE (TO BE).
Sto per partire.
Qui sta il punto,
State qudnto vi pidce,
Dove state di cdsa ?
H tutto sta, s' egli sia hudno a no,
La cdsa sta come vi dico,
Stare a pane ed dcqua,
Gome state vpi ?
Egli sta bene,
Star cheto,
Stdndo alia finestra lo vidi pas-
sdre,
Sta come una stdtua di mdrmo
senza parldre,
Ditemi in che inddo sta che egli
sia vostro fratelW^
I am on the point of leaving.
This is the question.
Stay as long as you please.
Where do you live ?
The point is, if it be good or not.
The thing is as I tell you.
To live upon bread and water.
How do you do ?
He is well.
To be quiet.
Whilst I was at the window, I
saw him going by.
He stands like a marble statue,
without speaking.
Tell me, how comes it that he
is your brother ?
VEKBS. 169
READING LESSON.
II fuoco, V dcqua e V ondre.
II fuoco, r acqua e 1' onore, fecero un tempo comunella insieme.
II fuoco non puo mai stare in un luogo, e 1' acqua anche sempre
si muove ; onde tratti dalla loro inclinazione, indussero 1' ondre a
far viaggio in compagnia. Prima dunque di partirsi, tutti e tre
dissero cbe bisognava darsi fra loro un segno da potersi ritrovare,
se mai si fdssero scostati e smarriti 1' uno dalF altro. DIsse ii
fuoco : " E se mi avvenlsse mai questo caso che io mi segre-
gassi da voi, ponete ben mente cola dove voi vedete fumo ;
questo e il mio segnale e quivi mi troverete certamente." — " E
me,'-' disse 1' acqua," se voi non mi vedete, non mi cercate cola
dove vedrete secciira o spaccature di terra, ma dove vedrete
salci, ontani, canmicce o erba molto alta e verde ; andate costa in
traccia di me, e quivi saro io." — " Quanto a me," disse 1' onore,
" spalancate ben gli occlii, e ficcatemegli bene addosso e tenetemi
saldo, perche se la mala ventiira ini guida fuori di cammino,
fliccbe io mi perda una volta, non mi trovereste piu."
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. A drop of water complained of remaining unknown in the
ocean. Moved to compassion, a genius caused an oyster to
swallow it. It became the most beautiful pearl of the East, and
was the most splendid ornament of the Great Mogul's throne.
2. Milton, after he became blind, married, for his third wife, a
woman who was very beautiful, but of a furious temper. A
friend once said to him, tliat his wife w\as like a rose. "I can-
not judge so by its color," he replied. " but I do by the thorns."
3. Who would believe that smoking tobacco was in fashion
with the English ladies in the sixteenth century ? Every day,
when Queen Elizabeth rose, there were (one saw) thirty ladies
seated in a circle around her, smoking pi])es. The queen set
(gave) them the example ; but one day she broke the pipe, say-
ing, " We will renounce a pleasure that evaporates in smoke."
4. A doctor was translating a work. They came to tell him
that his wife was very sick, and desired to speak with him. " 1
have only one page to translate," said he ; ." when I will come im-
mediately." A second messenger came, and informed him that
she was dying. " Two words more, and I have done," said the
translator. " Go, return to her." A moment after, they came to
tell him that she was dead. " I am very sorry for it," said he ;
" she was a good woman : " and he continued his work.
15
170 ITALIAN GKAMINIAE.
VOCABULARY.
1. Complained, si dolse ; moved, mdsso ; causeil, fece che ;
became, divenne.
2. Become, divenuto ; furious, furibbndo ; can, 'pbsso ; judge,
giudicdre.
3. Would believe, crederehhe ; one saw, si vedevano ; seated,
seduto ; smoking pipes, pipdvano ; gave, dciva ; broke, spezzo ;
we will renounce, rinunzieremo ; evaporates, svapora.
4. Was translating, stdva traducendo ; they came, vennero ;
will come, verro ; came, venne ; she was dying, era dgli estremi ;
go, anddte ; return, torndte ; I am sorry, me ne rincresce ; con-
tinued, continuo.
C ON VERS AZIONE.
A chi sono cdri i ndmi del Sdr- Son tdnto cdri alV Eurdpa
pi, del Paruta e delV AlgardUi? qudnto alV Italia.
Che hisdgna fare per V infortu- Bisdgna compidngerlo e soccor-
nio ? rerlo se si pud.
Per reggere aW ingiustizia degli Un gran cordggio.
udmini che e necessdrio ?
Chi fu Aldo Manuzio ? H primo celehre stampatore che
sia stdto in Europa.
E il Zeno ed il Goldoni f Sdno i pcidri del drdmma e
della commedia iialidna.
Chi fu Bemho ? II primo legislatdre della lin-
gua italidna.
Cdme si chiamdva anticamenfe Partenope, nome di una Sirena
Ndpoli ? che credesi dhhia fonddia la
citta.
Che si dice della potenza Vene- Ella ha arricchita V Italia e V
zidna? ha difesa gran tempo ddi
Bdrbari,
ADVEEBS.
171
CHAPTER XXVII.
ADVERBS.
aiNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Vi raccontero la cosa per minuto,
Osservate minutamente ognicosa,
Per ora non posso dirvi di piu,
Dove andate cost per tempo ?
Dite da vero, oppure hurlcite ?
Dove si va cost in fretta ?
Cattiva erha ndsce dappertuttOy
II tempo pdssa presto,
Mi preme assdi di parldrgli,
Venke qiianto piii presto potete,
l^ ing anil ate di gran lung a*
Questa non e gia colpa vostra,
Gli uomini imitano molto, e ri-
jlettono poco,
Chi ohhedisce alia cieca, spesso
si pente,
Cki sempre ride, spesso ingdn-
na,
Le sue cose vdnno di bene in
meglio,
lo non vi voglio neppur guar-
ddre 1
Gli ho reso cbnto appimtino di
ogni cosa,
Di rdro il medico piglia medi-
cine^
Non hisbgna mdi parldre a ca-
se,
Me ne ricorderb per un pezzo,
Donde venite ? Dove andate ?
I will relate the affair minutely.
Observe every thing minutely.
I cannot tell you any more now.
Where do you go so early ?
Are you in earnest, or joking?
Where are you going so quickly ?
Weeds grow everywhere.
Time passes quickly.
I much need to speak to him.
Come as soon as possible.
You are greatly mistaken.
This is not your fault.
Men imitate much, and reflect
little.
He who obeys blindly, often
repents.
He who always laughs, often
deceives.
His affairs become better and
better.
I do not wish even to look at
you!
I have rendered an exact ac-
count of every thing.
The physician rarely takes
medicine.
We should never speak at ran-
dom.
I shall remember it for a long
time.
Whence do you come ? Where
are you going
•?.
172
ITALIAN GRAilMAR.
ADVERBS.
I. The greater portion of the Italian adverbs are formed
of a feminine adjective and the noun onente, manner (from
the Latin me7is) ; as, .Dotta, learned ; dotta-mente, learn-
edly ; sdvia^ wise ; savia-mente, wisely ; dolce, sweet ;
dolce-mente, sweetly.
If the adjective ends in le or re, the final e is dropped^
for the sake of euphony, in the formation of the adverb :
as, Fedele, faithful; fedel-mente, faithfully; maggidre,
greater ; niaggior-mente, greatly.
II. These adverbs have their comparatives and super-
latives formed from the comparatives and superlatives of
the adjectives ; as, Piil sincera, more sincere ; ^9Z2> sincer-
amente, more sincerely ; 'nieno felice, less happy ; nieno
felicemente, less happily; j^'^'udentisshjia, very prudent;
prudentissrniamente, very prudently.
III. Some adverbs are mere adjectives, and are used
also in their comparatives and superlatives ; as, Chidro
{chiaramente) , clearly; piu chidro, more clearly; schi-
etta (^schiettamente) , candidly; ineno schietta, less
candidly; trlste (tristameiite) , sadly; tristissimo, very
sadly.
IV. The followino- are the other adverbs most in use
in Italian : —
Adesso,
now.
m,
yy
Ora,
}3
Alldra,
then.
Ancdra,
still.
Tuttdraj
})
Taldra,
sometimes, {ta
Ogndra,
always.
Sempre,
»
Sove'nte,
often, {spesso, )
Tesfeso,
just now.
TesU,
J J
leri,
yesferday.
ADVERBS OF TIME.
Avanti€n,
l€r V dltro,
U altrieri,
lermattina,
lers&a,
Oggidi,
Stamdne,
Stascra,
Standtte,
Domattina,
Dimdni,
Donidne,
the day before yester-
the other day. [day.
}f yt jj
yesterday morning.
last evening.
to-day.
in our days.
this morning.
this evening.
to-night.
to-morrow morning
to-morrow.
i\DVEKBS.
1
Posdimdni
, the day after to-morrow.
Non mai.
never.
Posdomdne
) )> » }> >y
Omdi,
now.
Inndnzi,
before.
Oramdi,
a
Didnzi,
»
Oggimdi,
j>
Prima,
yj
Qudsi,
almost.
Didro,
afterward.
Circa,
about.
Ddpo,
»
Incirca,
»
Pdi,
then, smce, afterward.
Intdrno,
>,
Dipdi,
» >y )t
Tdrdi,
late.
Dappdi,
» » »>
Pertempo,
soon.
Pdscia,
>> j> »
Presto,
quick.
Indi,
then, afterward.
Addgio,
slow.
Quindi,
)) >f
Mentre,
whilst.
Apprdsso,
}y f>
Intdnto,
in the mean time.
Infine,
in fine.
Fraitdnto,
)> » » i*
Da cdpo.
once more.
Trattdnto,
" )> )i »*
Gia,
ahready.
Dacche,
since.
Di gia.
>>
Finche,
until.
Mdi,
never.
Qudndo,
when.
Giammdi,
>f
Tuttavia,
still.
OF PL
ACE.
Qui,
here, hither.
Ovunque,
wherever.
Qua,
j> »
Dovunque,
>)
Li,
there, thither.
6gni ddve.
everywhere.
La,
yy >y
Altrdve,
elsewhere.
Costi,
there near you.
Altrdnde,
>j
Costa,
>> j> j>
Avdnti,
before.
Coh,
there, thither.
Davdnli,
jj
Cola,
jy yy
Dietro,
behind.
Sh,
up.
Didietro,
yy
Gill,
down.
Indietro,
back.
Qnivi,
there.
Addidtro,
j>
GCi,
>>
Sdpra,
upon, above.
Ivi,
y9
Sdtto,
under, below.
Indi,
thence.
Abbdsso,
below.
Quinci,
from hence.
JEntro,
within.
Quindi,
from thence.
Dentro,
>>
Quassu,
here above.
Fudri, .
without.
Quaqqiu,
here below.
Fudra,
yy
Insu,
upward.
Difudri,
from without.
Ingiu,
downward.
Difu6ra,
j> »>
Lassu,
tliere above.
Alldto,
aside.
Laggiu,
there below.
Accdnto,
yy
Colasm,
there above.
Attdrno,
around.
Colaggiu,
there below.
Dattdrno,
j>
Costa ggiu.
there below near you.
Rimpetto,
opposite.
Costinci,
from thence.
Dirimpetto,
jj
6ve,
where.
Lungi,
far.
Ddae,
yy
Oltre,
beyond.
Ddnde,
whence.
173
15*
174
ITALIAN GKAMMAR.
OP ORDER.
Prima,
DipcH,
Quindiy
Infine,
In giro,
Alia fila,
first,
then.
afterward,
finally,
by turns.
in a row.
Assi^me,
Insi€me,
A vic€nda,
Al tutto,
Al rov€scio,
Sossdpra,
together.
>>
by turns,
altogether,
the reverse,
topsy-turvy.
OF QUANTITY.
Piu,
M^no,
Mdnco,
Assdi,
Abbastdnza, enough,
A suffici€nza,
more,
less.
much.
»
Ni^nte,
Non giidri,
Davantdggio,
Alpiu,
Ahn^no,
Almdnco,
nothing,
not much,
more.
at the most,
at least.
» »
OF QUALITY.
B€ne,
Mdle,
App€na,
Appdsta,
A gdra,
A cdso,
A tdrto,
well.
badly.
hardly.
purposely.
emulously.
by chance.
wrongly.
Brancoldne,
Inginocchidne,
Carpdne,
A cavalcidne,
Tentdne,
Boccdne,
crawlingly.
on one's knees,
upon all fours,
astride over,
gropingly,
with one's face
downward.
OF AFFIRMATION.
SI,
Gih,
Bene,
Invdro,
Davvdro,
Da dovdro,
In verita,
yes.
yes, certainly.
well.
indeed, truly, in truth.
»
»
»
Maisl,
Si, bdne,
AffK
Appunto,
Volenti eri,
Benvolentidri,
yes, indeed,
yes, truly,
in faith,
just.
willingly,
very willingly.
Malvolentidri, unwillingly.
OF NEGATION.
No,
Mai,
Mainh,
Cdrto no,
Nongia,
no, not.
never,
no, indeed,
certainly not.
not, not at all.
Nonmdi,
Mica,
Nonmica,
Per nulla.
never.
not.
not at all.
by no means.
Nidnte affdtto, nothing at all.
F<5rse,
Forseche,
Pub dssere.
Pub ddrsi,
perhaps,
may be.
OF DOUBT,
Per acciddnte, perchance.
Per sdrte, „
Per avventura,
y>
AD\TflRBS.
175
OF COMPARISON.
SI, BO, thus.
Cost, „ „
Cdme, as.
Siccdme, so, as.
Piu, more.
Meno, less.
Assdi, much.
Viappiu, a great deal more.
Vieppiu, „ „ „ „
Viainm€no, a great deal less.
Viemm^no, „ „ „ „
A ginsa, like.
A mddo, „
Al pari, „
OF INTERROGATION.
Ove 9 where 1
Ddve? where'? whither 1
Ddmle 7 whence ?
Qudndo? when 7
Che?
Cdme?
Perche ?
Quanta ?
how ?
how?
why"?
how much ?
OF CHOICE.
Anzi, rather, sooner.
Prima,
»
Piuprdisto, rather, sooner.
Piuitdsto, „
I)
OF DEMONSTRATION.
Ecco, here o?* there is ; lo ! behold !
Eccoqui, here is, here are.
Eccoqua, „ „ „ „
there is, there are.
EccoTi,
Eccola,
Qudnd ecco, when, lo !
V. A list of the adjectives which are used in Italian as
adverbs : —
Fdrte,
Spesso,
Sddo,
Alto,
Certo,
Tnste,
Ddlce,
Cliidro,
S'hie'tto,
Piano,
Tarda,
Lenta,
Presto,
Prdnta,
Tdsto,
lldtto,
Tdnta,
very much.
often.
fast, hard.
softly.
certainly.
sadly.
sweetly.
clearly.
candidly.
low, softly.
late.
slowly.
soon.
readily.
speedily.
j>
so much.
Rdra,
rarely.
Sdlo,
only.
Tut.to,
aU.
Pdco,
little.
Mdlta,
much.
Trdppo,
too much.
Bella,
handsomely.
Budno,
very well.
M€ylio,
better.
P^gyio,
worse.
Aperto,
openly.
Suhito,
immediately
Sicura,
surely.
Dim€ssa,
lowly.
Sammdssa,
humbly.
Victno,
near.
Lontdno,
far.
In order to know when these words are adjectives, and
when adverbs, it is sufficient to observe, whether the^
no
ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR.
stand by themselves, or are added to or used for a noun :
for, in the former case, they are always adverbs; and, in
the latter, adjectives.
VI. Besides the above adverbs, there are some expres-
sions called adverbial phrases; chiefly the following : — ■
Di siihito,
li bdtto,
In un baleno,
In un hatter d' dcchio,
P6co fa,
Fra pdco,
Un pezzo fa,
De/le v6lte,
AW improvviso,
AW avvenire,
A minuto,
Di fresco,
Di budn grdclo,
Mio malgrddo,
Senza meno,
Qiidnto pr(ma,
A bello stiidio,
A bella pdsta,
A meno che,
Da per tutto,
Per dgni ddve.
Ad un trdtto,
suddenly,
presently,
in an instant,
in the twinkling
of an eye.
a little while ago.
in a short time,
some time ago.
at times,
miexpectedly.
in futm-e.
in detail,
newly,
willingly,
against my will,
positively,
very soon,
designedly.
miles s.
everywhere.
at once.
Di rddo,
Di rdro,
Infdtti,
Difdtti,
Di gran lunga,
A lungo anddre,
A pill pote're,
Di India vdglia,
A un di pre'sso,
D' alldra in qua,
D' dra inndnzi,
In quel me'ntre.
seldom, rarely.
j> »
in fact.
jj >>
by far.
in the long-run,
in time,
with all one's
might,
unwillingly,
almost.
since that time,
henceforth,
in or at that
time,
exactly,
point-blank.
Di punto in punto,
Di punto in bianco,
Di qudndo in qudndo, now and then.
Di trdtto in trdtto, ,, „ „
Di tdnto in tdnto, „ „ „
11 jnu, the utmost.
Per lo piu, for the most part,
generally.
READING LESSON.
La P6vera Cieca.
E brvina 1' aria — per le contrade,
A fiocche a fiocche la neve cade ;
E la in ginocchio presso la chiesa,
Geme una vecchia donna prostesa:
6rba degli occhi, la poveretta
Attende il pane, che a lei si getta .
Fate limosina, pietosa gente,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
Y6i non sapete die quella donna,
Macero il viso, lorda la g6nna,
De' suoi concenti coll' armonia
Di cento popoli 1' dime rapla ;
ADVERBS. 177
Oh quanta invldia ai fortunati
Che d' uii sorrlso rendea beati !
Fate limdsina, pietosa gente,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
Oh quante volte fuor de' teatri
L' immensa folia degl' idolatri
Fra mille plaiisi le fea codazzo
Fine alia porta del siio palazzo,
E riverente stendea il ginocchio
Perche scendesse dall' aureo cocchio I
Fate limosina, pietosa gente,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
Quante dovizie spandeva intorno
II suo magnifico vasto soggiorno !
Bronzi, colonne, vasi, cristalli,
Argento ed oro, cocchi e cavalli . . .
Di fiori e gemme da tiitte bande,
Sovra i suoi passi piovean ghirlande . . .
Fate limosina, pietosa gente,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
Ma un di fra 1' dnsie d' un duolo atroce
Perde la vista, perde la voce —
Ahi sventurata ! or per le strade
Va mendicando 1' altriii pietade,
Ella che un giorno per chi gemea
De' suoi tesori 1' arche schiudea !
Fate limosina, pietosa gente,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
Ma il freddo addoppia — gelida e sp^ssa
La n^ve cdpre la genufldssa,
Che, pur pregando, intirizzita
Stringe il Rosario fra le sue dita —
Perche la misera conf idi ancora
Nella pietade del ciel, che impldra,
Fate limdsina, pietdsa gdnte,
Fate limosina alia dolente !
A. FUSINATO.
178 ITALIAN GKAJVOIAR.
EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION.
1. A truly courageous man is he who has a knowledge of
danger. We often see men who neither fear nor are afraid
of death: yet we cannot call them courageous; because (being),
ignorant of danger, they rush forward foolishly.
2. Francis I., going out from the council which had determined
upon war with Italy, met his buffoon, who said to him, " Sire, it
seems to me that your councillors are fools." — "Why?" asked
the king. " Because," he replied, " they have been so long dis-
cussing what part of Italy they intend to enter, and have never
said a word about the part to go out. Therefore, 0 sire ! take
care not to go there at all." A month after this, Francis was a
prisoner in Pavia.
3. There are many people who think that they can learn the
Italian language in three months ; and (these people), after six
months' study, do not know how to say, " I have just written ;
the clock has just struck ten ; I sliould like to know it for cer-
tain."
VOCABULARY.
1. We see, si vedono ; they rush, spiiigono.
2. Going, uscendo ; met, incontrd ; have (been discussing)
discussed, hdnno discusso ; said, detto ; take care, avvertite.
3. Think, stimano ; do know, sdnno ; I should like, vorreu
CONVERSAZIONE.
Che cosa dimando egW^ II perche,
Che ora e ? Soiio appena hattute le diecL
I^erche non siete venuto ? Perche sono stdto alia villa.
E quella dunque la vostra aimca ? E hen lei.
Av'ete vino., pane^ forma g,gio, Non ho proprio nulla da ddr-
qualche cosa ? vi ?
JVon avete neppure una scodella Non ho 7iidla in verita,
di Idtte ?
E dunque un dnno e mezzo ch'' No, non sbno ancora qumdici
eUa e partita'^ mesi?
Dove dimora il suo Signbr pd- Dimora qui vicmo.
dre'^
Che effetto fa la medichia ? Guarisce talvolta e consbla spes-
so.
Qudndo condsce uno il valor e Qudndo e asciutto (dry) il poz-
deir dcqua ? zo.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
179
CHAPTER XXYin.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
MNEMONIC EXERCISE.
Vza, via ; meno cicirle !
Oime / che vedo men ?
Deh ! non lo fdte^
Oh bella ! son venuto per questo,
Qudnclo e cost, vddo via,
Cost dico ; ancor lo,
La CQsa ando pur cost,
JEM, quel giovine !
A.nimo, ammo hdsta cosi !
JEhi, quella giovine^
Mvviva, il n ostro Sempronio !
To ve V ho pur defto,
Non ha pure most r a to di conos-
cermi,
Oh! se potessi ridere, rider ei
pur di cuore,
Al can che fugge, ognun grida,
ddgli, dcigli,
Per Bdcco, piii ci penso, e
meno so comprendere il 7no-
tivo,
Questo partito e il migliore ;
d.nzi, il solo cui dehha appi-
glidrmi,
E cosi, che cdsa faccidmo ?
Addio, cdro : dove si va ?
Via, non lo sgriddte : povermo !
To m dmo, per che lo meritdte,
Come, come ; less talk !
Alas ! what do I see ? _
Do not do it, I beg of you.
Indeed ! I came on purpose.
Since it is so, I shall go.
I say so ; even I.
It certainly went off so.
Here, young man !
Courage ! that will do.
Well, miss.
Bravo, our Sempronio !
I have, however, told you.
He did not even appear to know
me.
Oh ! if I could laugh, I would
laugh willingly.
When a dog runs, people cry
after him, after him.
Truly, the more I think of it,
the less I understand the
motive.
Tliis part is the best ; nay, the
only one which I ought to
take.
Well, what are we going to
do?
Adieu, my dear: where are
vou ffoino;?
There, don't scold him : poor
boy!
I love you, because you deserve
it.
180
ITALIAN GRA]^IMAR.
CONJUNCTIONS IN COMMON USE.
E,
and.
Nonostdnte,
0, or, either.
Nondimeno,
Ne, nor, neither.
Nientedime'no,
Se, if, whether.
Con tulto cib.
still, nevertheless,
Ma, but.
Non per tdnto,
■ notwithstanding,
Perb,
Non per questo.
for all that.
Che, that.
Cib non ostdnte.
Pure, yet, nevertheless.
Cib non di meno,
Gm, yet, already.
Tuttavia,
Anzi, nay, rather, on the
Non gia.
not at all, not in-
contrary.
deed.
Anche, also, even.
Non sdlo, )
Non che,
not only, not mere-
Anco, „ „
ly-
Eziandio, „ „
Purche,
provided.
Altresi, „ „
-4 77ieno che.
unless.
Anc6ra, also, even, again.
Anzi che.
rather, sooner.
Eppiire, yet, nevertheless.
Anzi che no.
rather than not.
Ossia, or, either.
rather so thn,n
Ovve'ro, „ „
otherwise.
0/?/)M/-e, „ „
Si,
so, thus.
Nemmeno, neither, not even.
Cost,
>j j>
Nemmdnco, „ „ „
Cdme,
as, like.
Neppure, „ „ „
Siccdme,
» j>
Nednche, „ „ „
Sicche,
so, thus, wherefore.
Tampdco, „ „ „
Cost che.
>> >> »
Se mdi, if ever, if indeed.
Talche,^
so, so that.
Se pure, „ „
Giacche,
since.
Se perb, if however.
Cioe,
that is.
Se non, unless, except, but.
Cioe a dire.
that is to say.
Se non che, „ „ „
Vale a dire.
jj j>
Accib, 1
Ahn^no,
at least.
Acciocche,
in order that, to the
Ahndnco,
»
Affine,
end that.
Di pill.
moreover.
Affinche, J
Indltre,
besides,besides this.
Ancorche, even that.
Oltrecche,
i> yy y>
Contuttoche, „ „
Oltraccib,
)) }} )>
Che, for, why, because.
D' aUrdnde,
)) }) }>
Perche, „ „ „
Ddnque,
then, therefore.
Poiche, ) because, since, as.
Adiinque,
» )>
Posciache, J
Perocdte,
after.
dnde, )
Ladnde, >
wherefore, where-
Imperocche,
Ptrciocche,
hnperciocche.
because, whereas,
as, since.
Quindi, )
Percib,
upon.
therefore, for which
reason.
Conciosiacche, J
In sdmma, )
In fine, J
in short, in conclu-
Qnantjcnque, although.
sion.
Sebbe'ne, „
Sia che.
whether, or, either.
Benche, „
Vudi,
3) }■) >>
Comeche, „
Dei re'sto.
otherwise, besides.
Avvegnache,
1
Per ditto,
i> »»
CONJUNCTIONS.
181
Tdnto,
Qudnto,
Qudndo,
Qudnd' dnche,
In guisa die,
In mddo che,
In maniera che,
Di viddo che,
Di maniera che.
as.
}}
when,
even when.
so that, in such a
manner.
Intdnto, \
Frattdnto, )
Me'ntre,
Mentrecche,
Salvo,
Ecce'tto,
Trdnne,
Fuorche,
Fdrse,
6ra,
in the mean time, mean*
while, whilst,
whilst, whilst that.
j> >> >}
save, saving, except.
perhaps,
now.
»
I. JP{ire is often used In the sense of ancdra (even),
and s(^lo (only) .
II. Per che has four significations : 1. In an interroga-
tive phrase, it has the meaning of "why;" as. Per che
anddte via? why do you go away? 2. Followed by a
verb in the subjunctive, it signifies "in order that;" as,
JSfon vi ho dcito il dendro -perche lo spendidte suhito,
I did not give you the money that (in order that) you
should immediately spend it. 3. It is used for "though ;"
as in the phrase of Dante, JSfon lascidvam V anddr,
perche e' dicesse^ We did not cease walking, although he
spoke. 4. It also signifies "because;" as, Perche ri-
dete? Perche ho v6glia di rider e, Why do you laugh?
Because I wish to lauijh.
III. Anzi is sometimes used for "before;" as, Anzi
tempo, dnzi V 6ra, anzi la rtiia niSrte, before the time,
before the hour, before my death.
IV. Mentre, nel mentre che or mentre che, in tempo
che, signifies "whilst" or "whilst that;" as, Mintr' egli
cantdvcc, io balldva, whilst he sung, I danced.
V. Many conjunctions, as nondim^eno, cid non os-
tdnte, etc., contain in themselves a pronoun, a prepo-
sition, an adverb, etc. ; but, from their office of joining
sentences together, they are commonly reckoned amongst
conjunctions, though in fact they are but conjunctive
phrases,
16
182
ITALIAN GKAMMA.K.
mTERJECTIONS IN COMMON USE.
Ah!
Eh! e!
Ih!
Oh! o!
Uh!
Jhi!
Ehi!
6hi! di!
Uhi !
Deh!
Doh!
Ah, ah !
Eh, eh !
Oh, oh!
Poh!
Puh! pu!
Eia !
Ola!
Cost !
Si!
Gia!
Pure !
Cdme !
Su!^
Orsu !
Su, sii !
Via!
Via, via!
Eh via !
Verqdqna !
Oiho !
Animo !
Cordggio !
Fate cudre!
Bene !
Bravo !
Budno !
Viva !
Eh viva ! evviva !
Cdpperi !
Cdppita !
Poffdre!
Ohbdlla!
Ecco !
ah! ba! alas!
eh!
ih!
oh.! ho!
uh!
ah! alas! [there!
here ! ho hey ! ho
ah! oh!
ah ! alas !
ah ! alas ! pray !
prithee !
oh ! pshaw !
ah, ah !
eh, eh !
oh, oh !
poll!
pu ! pooh !
halloo !
holla ! ho there !
so ! thus !
yes, certainly !
yet!
how ! how then !
why ! why so !
up, up ! come !
come then!
away !
fie ! fie upon !
for shame !
oh, fie ! oh, fough !
courage! cheer up!
)> >)
)) >>
well!
bravo ! very well !
good !
long live !
huzza !
ay ! heyday ! mar-
ry!
fine !
lo! behold!
Ahime ! aime!
Ehime! eime!
Ohime! oime!
Ome !
Oite!
Oise !
Gudi !
A into !
0 Dio !
Ldsso !
Ldsso me!
Ahi ldsso !
Pdvero me !
Miser 0 me !
Meschino me !
Dolente me !
0 me bedto !
0 me felice !
Bedto me !
Felice me!
Alto!
Sta!
Ohe!
Gudrda !
Ldrgo !
Pidno,
alas (me) !
alas (thee) !
alas (him or her)!
woe !
help !
0 Heavens !
alas !
wretched that I
am ! unfortu-
nate that I am !
wretched me !
poor me
1
happy that I am 1
happy me !
halt!
Btop !
take care ! hare
, . care ! beware !
>, ) softly ! gently!
io, ) slowly !
Addgio
Zi! zUto!
Cheto !
Non piu!
Bdsta !
Silenzio !
Tacdte !
Anddte !
Baddte !
Air e'rta !
Stdte air drta !
Di grdzia !
Per carita !
Per amdr delcidlo
Merce, \
Misericdrdia, )
Possihile !
Appwito !
Pensdte !
siowiy :
whist! hush!
quiet ! stiU !
enough !
silence !
■ away !
mind ! have care !
beware !
pray!
for charity's sake !
.' for heaven's sake !
mercy ! mercy
ui)on us !
is it possible !
exactly ! just !
just think ! *
* It is important to observe, that, as some of these interjections are used to express
different and even contrary emotions or affections of the mind, their exact signification
can only be determined by the sense of the words which accompany them, or give rist> to
the exclamation.
INTERJECTIONS. 183
The interjections Idsso, pdvero, mzsei'o, meschino,
hedto {me I), are mere adjectives; and, when used by a
female, take the feminine termination, — Idssa, p(>vercf,
misera (??ie/), etc. ; and in the plural make Idssi, p6v-
eri (ndif), etc., for the masculine; and Jdsse, ^9(5've7'e
( 7i (^2*/), etc., for the feminine ; as, —
Ldssa 7ne / in che maV ora ndc- Alas ! in what evil hour was I
qui ? born ?
Miseri noi ! che sidm, se Iddio Miserable that we are ! what
ci Idscia ? becomes of us, if God for-
sakes us ?
Brdvo, zUto, che to, are also adjectives ; and when
used in speaking to a female, or to more than one male or
female, follow the same rule ; as, —
Brdva ! come qudndo ? Bravo ! as when ?
Zittij un po' I Hush, a little !
Brdvo is also used in its superlative, and makes
hravissimo^ bravissima, bravtssiini, bravissime, "bravis-
simo."
READING LESSON.
La Rondinella.
Rondinella pellegrina
Che ti posi in sul verdne
Ricantando ogni mattina
Quella flebile canzone,
Che vuoi dirmi in tua favella
Pelleo;rina rondinella ?
Sohtaria nell' oblio,
Dal tuo sposo abbandonata,
Piangi forse al pianto mio
Vedovella sconsolata ?
Piangi, piangi in tua favella,
Pellegrina rondinella.
Pur di me manco infelice
Tu alle penne almen t' affidi,
184 ITALIAN GRAJMMAR.
Scorri il lago e la pendice,
Empi r aria cle' tiioi gridi,
Tutto il giorno in tua favella,
Lui chiamando, o rondinella !
Oh, se ancli' io ! Ma lo contende
Questa bassa angusta volta,
Dove sole non risplende,
Dove r aria ancor m' e tolta,
D' onde a te la mia favella
Giunge appena, o rondinella !
H settembre innanzi viene,
E a lasciarmi ti pre pari :
Tu vedrai lontane arene, .
Nuovi monti, nuovi mari,
Salutando in tua favella,
Pellegrina rondinella.
■'&'
Ed io tutte le mattine
E.iaprendo gli occlii al pianto
Era le nevi e fra le brine
Credero d' udir quel canto,
Onde par che in tua favella
Mi compianga, o rondinella.
Una croce a prima vera
Troverai su questo suolo ;
Rondinella in su la sera
Sdvra a lei raccogli il volo :
Dille pace in tiia favella,
Pellegrina rondinella !
EXERCISE FOE, TRANSLATION.
1. Lycurgus prohibited those who returned from a feast taking
a light, in order that the fear of not being able to find their
homes might prevent their becoming intoxicated.
2. There is nothing meaner than to see hypocrites launching
their thunders against the weaknesses of humanity, whilst their
heart is the sink of every vice.
3. Vespasian incurred the danger of being condemned to death,
because he gaped while the fool Nero was singing on the stage
in Rome.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 1S5
4. During summer evenings, Dante was accustomed to sit
upon a stone, which is still religiously preserved in Florence.
One evening, a man unknown to him passed before him, and
said, " Sir, I have promised to give an answer, and know not
how to get myself out of the difficulty : you, who are so learned,
can suggest it to me. What is the best mouthful ? " Dante imme-
diately answered, " An egg." A year after, at the same hour,
Dante being seated on the same stone, the same man, whom he
bad not since seen, returned, and asked, " With what ? " Dante,
without hesitation, answered, " With salt."
VOCABULARY.
1. Prohibited, i^ze^o ; returned, torndvano ; might prevent, ^m-
pedisse ; intoxicated, uhhriacdte.
2. Launching thunders, scaglidre i fulmini ; sink, sentina.
3. Incurred (ran), corse; gaped, shadiglidva.
4. Was accustomed, soUva ; unknown, sconosciuto ; to get out,
etc., trdrmi d' affdre ; can suggest, potreste suggerire ; mouthful,
boccdne ; without hesitation, senza metier tempo in mezzo.
CONVERSAZIONE.
Qiidl fu it regdlo che fece tin Ujio scudo, credendo forse con
colonnello ad iino de sudi gra- cid di ricompen&ctrlo di tdnta
natieri che pugndndo valoro- perdita.
sissimamente aveva perdute
cmihe le hrdccia ?
Tdle meschinitd non eccito essa CertatJienfe, e con ragidne dtsse
lo sdegno del brdvo solddto ? al suo Colonnello — Credete
fdrse cJi' lo non dhhia perduto
che un pdio di gudnti ?
Qiidle fdma hdnno lascidta Lu- una tristissima fdma, perche
dovico XL e Ferdindndo d' fiirono entrdmhicrudelieper-
Arragona ? fidi.
Non si chiamdrono, il primo Si, e cid prdva che V dmhra del
cristianissimo e Z' cdtro cattd- trdno pud coprire immensi
lico ? delitti.
Che rispdse Ddnte a chi gli do- Tin ubvo con sale.
manddva qualfdsse il miglibr
boccdne ?
16*
186
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
^n^xlxKx-Q & txhB*
A.vere^ to have.
ESTFINITIVE
MOOD. — Ave're, to have.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PKESENT TENSE.
hoar d,
Mi or di,
haoT d (ace),
I hare,
thou hast,
he has.
abbidmo (avemo)^
avcte,
hdnno or anno,
we have,
j'ou have,
they have.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
to nveva or avea^
tu avevi,
igli aveva or avca,
I had.
thou hadst.
he had.
avevdmo,
avevdte,
avevano {avieno),
we had.
you had.
they had
PERFECT TENSE.
&>bi,
avestij
ebbe,
I had.
thou hadst.
he had.
ave?}itno,
avcste,
ebbero,
we had.
you had.
they had.
FUTURE TENSE.
•
avrdi
avrai,
avrdy
I shall have,
thou wilt have,
he -mU. have.
avremo,
avrete,
avrdnno,
we shall have.
you will have.
■ they will have.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
avrei (avna),
avrdsti,
avribbe (avria),
the 10 abbia,
che tu dbbia or ahbi,
che egli dbbia,
die w avessi,
die tu avessi,
die egli avesse,
abbl tu,
abbia egli,
I should have,
thou wouldst have,
he would have.
uvrcmmo, we could have.
avrcste, you should have.
avrcbbero (avriano), they would have.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
if I may have.
if thou mayst have.
if he may have.
die abbidmo,
che abbidte,
che dbbiano,
if we may have,
if you may have,
if they may have.
UrPERFECT TENSE.
if I might have.
if thou couldst have.
if he would have.
che avessimo,
che avcste,
che avessero {-ino),
have thou,
let him have.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
abbidmo ndi,
abbidte voi,
dbbiano cglino.
if we should have,
if you might have,
if they might havft
let us have.
have ye.
let them have.
GERUND.
avdndo, having.
PARTICIPLES.
having.
avente,
aviito,avuta (s.), \
aviiti, aviite (p.), |
avendo aviito,
had.
having had.
COMPOUND TENSES.
w ho aviito,
10 avcvn nviUo,
10 cbbi aviito,
io avro aviito,
to avrei aviito,
che 10 abbia aviito,
I have had.
I had had.
I had had.
I shal! have had.
I should have had.
if I may have had.
che io avessi aviito, if 1 might have had.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
IS"/
]£ssere^ to be.
INFINITIVE MOOD. — Asere, to be.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
to s6no^
seii or «e',
lam.
thou art.
he is.
sidmo (semo),
sicte (sale),
sono,
we are.
you are.
they are.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
to era,
I was.
thou wast,
he was.
eravuino (6ramo),
travdte,
crano,
we were,
you were,
they were.
PERFECT TENSE.
fosti,
fu (file).
I was.
thou wast,
he was.
fuynmo,
foste,
furono (funno),
we were.
30U were,
they were.
FUTURE TENSE.
sard (fin),
sardi,
sard (fia,fie),
I shall be.
thou \vilt be.
he will be.
saremo,
aarete,
sardnno (fiano).
we shall be.
you \sill be.
they will be
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
sarii (sar'ia, fira), I should be.
sarcsti, thou wouldst be.
sarebbe (saria,/6ra), he would be.
sarcTnmo.
sarcste,
sarebbero (sariano),
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
che 10 sm,
eke tu s'la, or sit,
die egli sia,
che 10 fissi {fiissi),
che tu fossi,
die egli fdsse,
t'za, or sU'tu,
a'la egli.
if I maybe.
if thou mayst be.
if lie may be.
che sidmo,
die sidte,
che s'latw, or s'leno,
we should be.
you should be.
they should be
if we may be.
if you may be.
if they may be.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
if I were, or should be
if thou Mert.
if he were.
che fossimo, if we were.
che foste, if you were.
chefossero (fossino), if they were.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
be thou,
let him be.
stamo noi,
sidte v6i,
siano, or sieno dglino,
let us be.
be ye.
let them be.
(ssindo,
GERUND.
*
being.
stdti, state' (■[).),
essendo stdto,
PARTICIPLES
I
been,
having been.
COMPOUND TENSES.
10 sono stdto,
20 era stdto,
10 sard stdto,
to sarci stdto,
che io s'la stdto,
che io fdssi stdto.
I have been.
T had been.
I shall have been.
I should have been.
if I ni.iy have been.
if 1 might have been.
* Tlie past participle of the verb dssere always agrees with the subject in gender and
number : thus we say, 10 s6no stdto. if the subject is masculine sin^^ular ; w sono stdta,
If feminine singular; noi sidmo stdti, if masculine plural; iioi s'lamo state, if feminine
plural ; and so on.
188
ITAI.IAK GRAMMAR.
^tgxxlixx W !^xhB.
VARIATION OF ACTIVE VERBS.
Active verbs, in the compound tenses, are varied with the
auxiliary verb avere, to have.
am'ure.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
A.7ndre, to love.
PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN dre,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
to love.
Present.
Present.
amr&ndo,
loving.
Past,
avere amato, to have loved.
GERUND.
Past,
avendo amalo^ having loved.
Present,
am-dnte (s.), am-dnti (p.),* losing.
PARTICIPLE.
Past.
ani-dto (m. s.), am-dti (p.), loved.
am-dia (f s.), a?«-d/e(p.),* loved.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
dm-o,
I love, or do love.
am-idmoy
•we love.
dm-i,
thou lovest.
am-dle,
you love.
dm-a,
he loves.
dm-anOf
they love.
Imperfect.
io am-dva^
I loved, or did love.
am-avdvio,
we loved.
am-dvi,
thou lovedst.
a??i-ai-dte,
you loved.
igli am-dva^
he loved.
a?n-dvano,
they loved.
Perfect.
am-di,
I loved, or did love.
am-dmmo,
we loved.
am-dsti.
tbou lovedst.
am-dste,
you loved.
am-o,
he loved.
am-drono (am
■dro), they loved.
Future.
am-ero,^
I shall or uill love.
am-ernno,
we shall or wull love.
am-erdi,
thou wilt love.
am^ercte.,
you will love.
arn-erd.
he will love.
a7T2-erdnno,
they will love.
I
* The present participle of active verbs, like that of avere, agrees with the subject of tho
proposition in gender and number. The past participle agrees^ sometimes, with the object
in gender and number.
t The verbs of this conjugation in the future and the conditional change the a of their
terminationH for e, and make lan-'id^ instead of ATW-aro, etc.
REGULAR VERBS.
189
ho amdto,
hdi at7idto,
ha amato,
I have Icved.
thou hast loved.
he, she, or it has loved
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect.
ahbiamo amdto,
avcte anidto^
hdnno amdto.
lo aveva amdto, I had loved.
PlujJerfect.
I avevdmo amdto,
we have loved,
you have loved,
they have loved.
we had loved.
Second Pluperfect,
ibbi amdto, I had loved.
Future Anterior,
avrd amdto, I shall have loved
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
che 10 dm-i (dw-e), that T love, or may love.
che tu dm-i, that thou lovest.
che cgli dm-i{dm-e\ that he loves.
che am-idmo,
che am-idte,
che dm-ino,
Imperfect.
che to am-dssi,
che tu a7)i-dssi,
eke egli am-dsse,
if I loved, or should love,
il thou lovedst.
if he loved.
che am-'lssimo,
che am-dste,
che am-dssero {-ino),
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect.
che to abbia amdto, that I have loved, or
may have loved.
Pluperfect,
the 10 avessi amdto.
that we love,
that you love,
that they love.
if Tve loved,
if you loved,
if they loved.
if I had loved.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
am'erei (am-er'ta), I should love.
am-eresti, thou wouldst love.
am-er6bbe{am-eria), he would love.
am-ercTumo, we should love.
am-ereste, you would love.
am-erebbero (amer'iano), they would love.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
avrei amdto, I should, would, or could have loved, or might have loved.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
dm.-a tu,
dm-i egli,
love thou,
let him love.
am-idmo ndi,
am-dte v6i,
dm-ino eglino.
let us love.
love ye.
let them love.
Besides the foregoing changes of termination, there are some verbs of the first
conjugation wliich undergo in some persons and tenses a change of orthography.
Verbs ending in cidre, (/tare, drop the ?', which follows c, (/, whenever cl, (/i,
precede e, i; as, Bacldre, to kiss; fref/idre, to adorn.
Verbs ending in idre, in Avhich ia form one syllable, drop the ^ whenever it is
followed by another i; as, Noidre^ to annoy.
Verbs ending in idre, in which ia form two syllables, drop the i only when it
would be followed by the vowels ia; as, Invldre, to send.
100
IT.VT.IAN GKAMM/\.Il.
Variation of the Verb Cerciire.
PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN cdre.
cerc-o,
cercH-if
cerc-a.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I search, or do search,
thou Bearchest.
he searches.
cercH-tamo,
cere-ate,
cerc-ano.
we search,
you search,
they search.
cercH-cro,
cercE-erdi,
cercH-erd,
Future.
1 siiall (;/ will search,
thou wilt search.
he will search.
cercn-eremo,
ceim-ercte,
cercR-erdnno,
we shall .search,
you will search,
they will search.
che 10 cercn-i (-«),
ehe tu cercu-ii
die cgli cercll-i (-e),
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I search,
that thou search,
that he search.
che cercn^dmo,
che cercn-idtey
che ccrcu-ino,
that we search,
that you search
that they search.
cercn-erei {-eria),
cercn-frcsti,
cercu-crcbbe,
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
I should .'?earch.
thou wouldst search,
he would search.
cercn-erdmmo,
ce.rcn-ercste,
cercH-erehbero,
we should search,
you would search,
they would search
cerc-a tu,
cercH-i egli,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
search thou,
let him search.
cercTi^idmo ndi,
cere-ate v6i,
cercH.-ino egliiio,
let us search.
search ye.
let them search.
Tenses conjugated like those of the regular verb are omitted.
REGULAR VERBS.
191
Variation of the Verb Pregdre.
PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN gdve.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
preg-o,
pregn-i,
pr^g-a, ■
I entreat, or do entreat,
thou entreatest.
he entreats.
pregn-idino,
preg-dte,
prcg-ano,
we entreat,
you entreat,
they entreat.
FuV
xre.
pregn-erd,
pregu-erdi,
pregB.-erdy
I shall or will entreat,
thou wilt entreat,
he will entreat.
pregn-erdmo,
pregn-ercte,
pregu-erdnno,
we shall entreat,
you will entreat
they will entreat
eke to pregH-i (-e),
c/i€ tu prcgH-i,
che dgli prcgu-i (-e),
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I entreat,
that thou entreat,
that he entreat.
che pregn-idmo,
eke pregH-idte,
che prcgu-ino,
that we entreat.
that you entreat,
that they entreat.
pregn-erei,
pregn-eresti,
pregu-erebbe,
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
I should entreat,
thou wouldst entreat.
he would entreat.
pregn-eremmo,
pregn-ereste^
pregn-erebbcro,
we should entreat,
you would entreat,
they would entreat
BIPERATIVE MOOD.
preg-a tu,
pregn-i igli^
entreat thou,
tet him entreat.
pregn-idmo ndi,
preg-dte v6i,
prcgn-tno cglinoy
let us entreat.
entreat ye.
let them entreat
192
ITALIAN GllAIVIMAR.
SECOND CONJUGATIOK -
The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided into two
classes, — those ending in ere (long), accented, and those ending
in ere (short), unaccented: both of tliese in the perfect have two
terminations, ei and etti, except a few which have the termination
ei only.
Variation of the Verb Tem^re.
PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN Ire (lONG), ACCENTED, ANr
OF THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN ti AND etU.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present
tem-dre, to fear
Past,
avere temuto, to have feared.
Present,
tem-indo^ fearing.
GERUND.
I Past.
I avendo temuto, having feared.
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
Um-6nte (s.), tem-enti (p.), fearing.
Past.
tem-uto (m. s.), temuti (p.), feared.
tem-iUa (f. s.), temiite (p.), feared.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SBIPLE TENSES.
Present.
tem-o^
tem-e.
I fear, or do fear,
thou fearest.
he fears.
te?n-idnio^
tem-ete,
tem-ono.
Imperfect.
to tem-eva or tem-6a, I feared, or did fear.
tem-evi, thou fearedst.
4gli tem-eva, he feared.
tetn-evdmo,
teni'evate,
tem-evano,
Perfect.
tem-m or few-liTTl, I feared, or did fear.
tem-esti, thou fearedst.
tem-ii or ^cw-rtte, he feared.
tem-emmo,
te7fj-este,
«e?n-ER0NO,
we fear,
you fear,
they fear.
we feared,
you feared,
they feared.
we feared,
you feared,
they feared.
KEGULAR VERBS.
193
tem-erd,
tem-erdi,
tem-erd,
Future.
I shall or will fear,
thou wilt fear.
he will fear.
tem-cremo^
tetn-erete,
terrt'erunno,
we shall or will fear,
you will fear,
they will fear.
ho temuto^
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect. )
I have ffeared. | abbiamo temuto,
we have fbared.
Pluperfect
io aveva temuto, I had feared, etc.
che io tem-a,
die tu tcm-a or -i,
che cgli tem-a,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
that I fear,
that thou Ibar
that he fear.
che tem-idmo,
che tem-idte,
che tem-ano,
that we fear,
that you fear,
that they fear.
che 10 tetn-essij
che tu tem-essi,
die dgli tem-esse,
Imperfect.
if I feared.
if thou fearedst.
if he feared.
che tem-essimo,
che tem-este^
che tem-essero,
if we feared,
if you feared,
if they feared.
Perfect,
die io abbia temuto, that I have feared
COMPOUND TENSES.
Pluperfect.
che io avessi temuto, if I had feared.
tem-erei (-ena),
iem-eresti,
tem-erebbe {-eria),
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
I should fear,
thou wouldst fear,
he would fear.
tem-eremmo,
tem-ercste,
tem-errbhero,
we should fear,
you would fear,
they would fear.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
avrei temuto, I should, would, or could have feared, or might have feared.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
tdm-i tu,
iem-a egli,
fear thou,
let him fear.
tem-idmo ndi,
tem-ete v6i,
titn-ano eglino.
let us fear.
fear ye
let them fear.
17
194
ITALIAN GKAMMAK.
Variation of the Verb Tessere.
PAHADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN hx (SHORT) , UNACCENTED j
AND OE THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN H ONI.Y.
rNEINITlVE MOOD.
Present,
tiss-ere, to weave.
Past
av&re tessuto, to have ■woven.
GERTJOT).
Present,
tess-endo, weaving.
Past,
avendo tessuto, having woven.
PARTICIPLE.
Present,
uss-ente {8.)ytess-enti (p.), weaving.
Past.
tessuto (m. s.), tess-uti (p.), woven.
tess-uta (f. s.), tess-ute (p.), woven.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present,
tiss-o, I weave, or do weave, or am weaving. | tess-idmo (tess-emo), we weave.
LnperJ'ect.
lo t€ss-6va or tess-ea^ I wove, or did weave, or was weaving.
Perfect.
tess-iilj I wove, or did weave.
tess-esti, thou wovest.
tess-i {tess-eo)f he wove.
tess-emmo, we wove.
tess-dste^ you wove.
fess-iiRONO, they wove.
Future,
tess-ero, I shall or will weave.
REGULAR VERBS. 195
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect. Pluperfect.
ho tessiito, I have ■woven to aveva tessiito^ I had woven, etc
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present. Imperfect.
the to tess-a^ that I weave. che lo tess-essi, that I wove.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
ehf to abhia tessuto, that I may have woven, che lo avessi tessuto, if I might have woven.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
P7'esent.
tess-erei {tess-er'ia), I should, would, or could weave, or might weave.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
avrH tessxito, I should, would, or could have woven, or might have woven.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
tess-i tUf weave thou.
Verbs ending in cere (long), accented, in order to preserve the soft sound of o
in all their inflections, take an i after that consonant, whenever it is followed by
o, 0, u ; as, Tacere, to be silent.
^ Verbs ending in iere drop the t whenever it is followed by another i; as
Empiere, to fill.
196
lT^y:.IAN GRMOIAR.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three classes,
— those which, in the present of the indicative, end in o ; those
wliich end in isco ; and those which have both of these termina-
tions.
Ya7Hatio7i of the Fer5 Sentire.
P^\JIADIGM OF THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, IN
THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, END IN 0 ONLY.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. I Past.
sent-irCf to hear. | avere sent'tto, to have heard.
■ Present.
sent-endOy hearing.
GERUND.
I Past.
I avendo sentito^ having heard.
Present.
PARTICIPLE.
sent-ente (s.), sent-enti (p.), hearing.
Past.
sent-'ito (m. s.), sent-'iti (p.), heard.
sent-'ita (f. s.), sent-'ite (p.), heard.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE
TENSES.
Present.
sent-o^
sent-j,
sent-iSj
I hear, or do hear,
thou hearest.
he hears.
sent-idr7io,
sent-ite,
sent-O'SO,
we hear
you hear,
they hear.
Imperfect.
•
ic sent-wa or sent-ia
tent-'ivi,
egli sent'iva or sent-ia
1 heard, or did hear,
thou heardst.
,, he heard.
sent-ivamo,
sent-ivate,
sent-ivano,
we heard,
you heard,
they heard
Perfect.
sent-ii,
sent-'isti,
sent-i (sent-io),
I heard, or did hear,
thou heardst.
he heard.
sent-itnmo,
sent-iste,
sent-irono,
we heard,
you heard,
they heard
REGULAR VERBS.
197
sent-ird,
sent-ir at,
sent-ird,
Future.
I shall or will hear,
thou wilt hear,
he will hear.
sent-iremo,
sent-ircte,
sent-irdnno.
we will hear,
you will hear,
they will hear.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect,
he sentito, I have heard.
Pluperfect.
10 aveva sent'ito. I had heard, etc.
che 10 sent-A,
che til sent-A or
che egli scnt-A,
che 10 sent-'issi,
che tu sent-'issi,
che sent-isse,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
that I hear,
that thou hear,
that he hear.
che seiit-ianiOy
che sent-idte,
che sent-A^O,
Imperfect.
that I heard,
that thou heardst.
that he heard.
che sent-'issimo,
che sent-'iste,
che sent-tsserOf
that we hear,
that you hear,
that they hear.
if we heard,
if you heard,
if they heard.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect,
io dbbia sent'ito^ that I may have heard.
Pluperfect.
10 avdssi sent'ito, if I had heard.
sent-irci {-iria),
sent-ircsti,
sent-ircbbe {-ir'ia),
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SBIPLE TENSE.
Present.
I should hear,
thou wouldst hear,
he would hear.
sent-iremmo,
sent-ircste,
sent-irebbero,
we should hear,
you would hear,
they would hear.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
avr6i sent'ito, I should, would, or could have heard, or might have heard.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
s6nt-i tu,
sent-A cgli.
hear thou,
let him hear.
sent^amo ndi,
sent-'ite v6i,
sent-Amo eglino,
17*
let us hear.
hear ye.
lot them hear.
198
ITALIAN GEAJVIMAR.
Variation of the Verb Esibire.
PARADIGM OF THOSE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH,
IN THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, HAVE THE
TERMINATION tSCO ONLY.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Esib-ire,
esib-dndoj
Present.
Past.
to offer.
avere esibito, to have offered
GEEUND. •
Present.
Past.
offering.
avendo esibitOj ha-ving offered.
PARTICIPLE.
Present,
esib-dnte (s.), esibdnti (p.), offering.
Past.
esib-ito {m. s.), esib-iti (p.), offered.
esib'ita {f. s.), esib-ite (p.), offered.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
esib-isCO,
esib-tsci,
cst6-lSCK,
I offer, or do offer,
thou offerest.
he offers.
esib-idmo,
esib-ite,
esib-tsCOTHOf
•we offer,
you offer,
they offer.
Imperfect.
to esib-iva or -la,
esib-ivi.,
esib-iva or -ia,
I offered, or did offer,
thou offeredst.
he offered.
esib-ivdmo,
esib-ivdte,
esib-ivano,
•we offered,
you offered,
they offered.
Perfect.
esib<i,
esib-isti,
esib-i {esib-to),
I offered, or did offer,
thou offeredst.
he offered.
esib-immo,
esib-iste,
esib-irono {esib-
we offered,
you offered.
iro), they offered.
Fviure.
esib^rd,
esib^rdi,
esib-ird.
I shall or -will offer,
thou wilt offer,
he -will offer.
esib-iremo,
esib-irete,
esib^rdnno,
•we will offer,
you will offer,
they •will offer
REGULAR VERBS.
199
COMPOUND TENSES.
ko esUntOf
Second Perfect.
I have oSered, etc.
Pluperfect.
10 aveva esii'ito^ I had o£fered, etc.
c/if to esib-isOA,
die tu esib-isCA,
die cgli esib-tsCAf
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
che esib'iamo^
che esib-idte,
che esib-tsOAmo,
that I offer,
that thou offer,
that he offer.
that we offer,
that you offer,
that they offer.
che to esib-'isst,
che tu esib-issi,
che cgli esib-issej
Imperfect.
if I offered.
if thou offeredst.
if he offered.
che esib-issimo,
che esib-iste,
che esib-'issero,
if we offered,
if you offered,
if they offered.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect,
che 10 abbia esibito^ that I have offered.
Pluperfect,
che 10 avessi esibito, if I had offered.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
esib-ir&i (««6-zna), I should offer.
esib-ircsti, thou wouldst offer.
esib4rcbbe {esib-dria\ he would offer.
esib-iremmo,
esib-ireste,
esib-irebberOf
we should offer,
you would offer,
they would offer.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
avrH esib'tlOf I should, would, or could have offered, or might have offered.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
esib-idmo,
»/6-fS0I,
*<fer thou.
esib-ite,
tib-tsOAf
I'it him offer.
esib-teOAHOf
let us offer.
offer ye.
let them offer.
200
ITALIAN QRi
Cucire, to sew.
Verbs ending in cire, in order to preserve the soft sound of the
c in all their inflections, take an i after that consonant, whenever
it is followed by a, o ; as, Gucire, to sew.
PAKADIGM OF THE VEEBS Ein)IKG IN cive.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
cticl-o,
I sew, or do sew.
cuc-iamo {-imo),
we gew.
cuc-iy
thou Bewest.
cuc-ite,
you sew.
CUC-Cf
he sews.
cucl-ono,
they sew.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
the io c«ci-a, that I sew or may sew.
che tu cuci-a or ciic-i, that thou sew.
cTu igli dci-a, that he sew.
che cuc-'idmo,
che cuc-'iate,
che cucl-ano,
that we sew.
that you sew.
that they sew.
IMPEEATIVE MOOD.
cuc'idmo-noi,
let us sew.
cAci tu,
sew thou.
cuc-ite voi,
sew ye.
cucia dgli.
let him sew
cuciano eglino,
let them sew.
REGULAR VERBS.
201
Ahhorrire^ to abhor.
PARADIGM OF THOSE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH,
IN TELE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, END BOTH
IN 0 AND ISCO.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
ahb6rr-0 orabborr-tsco, I abhor, or do abhor.
abbdrr-X or aborr-tsci, thou abhorrest.
abbdrr-^ or abborr-isc:E, he or she abhors.
abborr-idmo, we abhor.
abborr-'tte, you abhor.
abbdrr-o:so or -ISCONO, they abhor.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
the dbbdrr-A or -f SCA, that I abhor.
eAea66(5n--A,-i,or-fscA, that thou abhor.
che abborr-A or f SOA, that he abhor.
che abborr-idmo^
eke abborr-idte,
che abborr-A^O or -f S-
CANO,
that we abhor,
that you abhor,
that they abhor.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
abborr-l or abbdrr-tsci, abhor thou.
abbdrr-A or -f 80A, let him abhor.
ahborr-idmo^ let us abhor.
abborr-'ite, abhor ye.
abbdrr-ANO or -f SCANO, let them abhor.
202
ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR.
% Si)it0ptkal ^aW^
OF THE
VARIATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS,
Showing their different Terininations in their Simple Tenses.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
[Am-] dre.
SECOND CONJUGATION. THIKD CONJUGATION.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
[Tem-] ere. [Cred-] ere. [Abborr-] ire.
GERUND.
PRESENT.
[Am-] Indo.
[Tem-] endo.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.
[Abborr-] endo.
[Am-] dnte.
[Tem-] ente.
PAST.
[Abborr-] ente.
[Am-] dto, -a,
dti, -€.
[Tem-] lito, -a,
liti, -e.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
[Abborr-] ito, -a,
iti, -e.
[Am-] 0,
a;
iimo,
dte,
ano.
[Tem-] 0,
e;
idmo,
ete,
ono.
IMPERFECT.
[Abborr-] o, isco,
i, isci,
e, isce ; .
idmo,
ite,
ono, iscono.
[Am-] dva,
dvi,
dva;
avdmo,
avdte,
dvano.
[Tem] eva, ea (ia),
evi,
cTa, ea;
evdmo,
evdte,
evano, eano.
PERFECT DEFINITE.
[Abborr-] iva, ia,
iva, ia;
ivamo,
ivate,
ivano, iano
[Am-] di, [Tem-] ei, etti,
dsti, esti,
6 ; e, ette (eo) ;
Ammo, emmo,
dste, este,
drono (dro, dr). erono, ettero (ero).
[Abborr-] ii,
isti,
i (io);
immo,
iste,
irono.
VARIATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS.
203
FIRST CONJUGATION.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
FUTUHE INDEFINITE.
TUIKD CONJUGATION.
[Am-] eroj
erii,
eremo,
erete,
erinno.
[Tern-] ero,
[Abborr-] iro.
er&i,
irdi,
eri;
iri;
eremo,
iremo,
erete,
irete.
era.nno.
ir^nno.
COKDITIONAL MOOD.
lAm-] erei (eria),
eresti,
erebbe (eria) ;
eremmo,
ereste,
erebbero (eriano)
PRESENT.
[Tern-] erei (eria),
eresti,
erebbe (eria) ;
eremmo,
ereste,
erebbero (eriano).
[Abborr-] irei (iria),
iresti,
irebbe (iria) ;
iremmo,
ireste,
irebbero (iriano)
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
[Am-] a,
iimo,
^te,
inc.
[Tem-] i.
[Abborr-] i, isci.
a;
a, isca ;
iumo,
idmo,
ete,
ite.
ano.
ano, iscano
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
..Am-] i (e),
i'(e);
idmo,
lite,
Inc.
[Tem-] a,
a, i,
a;
iSxQO,
iite,
ano.
[Abborr
-]a,.
a, 1,
a,
isca,
isca, ischi,
isca ;
i&vao,
idte,
ano,
iscano.
IMPERFECT.
[AiJ-] 4ssi,
Assi,
4sso;
dssinlo,
dste,
^issero.
[Tem-] essi,
essi,
esse ;
essimo,
este,
4ssero.
[Abborr-] issi,
issi,
isse;
issimo,
istc,
issero.
204
ITALIAN GRAJtIMAR.
VARIATION OF PASSIVE VERBS.
Passive verbs are formed by joining the verb essere, to be, to
the past participle of active verbs. They are, therefore, through
all their tenses, varied with the auxiliary verb essere.
Variation of the Verb Essere amato.
PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VERBS.
INPINITIVE MOOD.
Present,
issere amdto (m. s.), amdti (p.), to be loved.
essere anictta (f. s.), amdte (p.), to be loved.
Past.
4ssere stato amdto (m. s.), stdti amdti * (p.), to have been loved.
essere stdta a7ndta ({. 8.), stdte amdte (p.), to have been loved.
PARTICIPLE.
Present,
esscndo amdto (m. s.), amdti (p.), being loved.
esscndo amdta (f. s.), atndte (p.), being loved.
Past,
essendo stdto amdto (m. s.), stdti amdti (p.), having been loved.
essendo stdta amdta (f. s.), stdte amdte (p ), having been loved.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SBIPLE TENSES.
Present.
5os(5noamdfo(m.),-a{f.), I am loved.
tei amdto, -a, thou art loved,
e oTndto, -a, he is loved.
to era amdto, -a,
eri amdto, -a,
era amdto, -a,
fid amdto, -a,
fosti amdto, -a,
fu amdto, -a,
sard amdto, -a,
sardi amdto, -a,
sard a7?idto, -a,
sidmo amdti (m.),-e {f.),vfe are loved.
sicte amdti, -e, you are loved.
cgliiio sono amdti, they are loved.
Imperfect.
I was loved,
thou -wast loved,
he was loved.
eravdmo amdti, -e,
eravdte a^ndti, -e,
erano amdti, -e,
Perfect.
I was loved,
thou wast loved
he was loved.
fdmmo amdti, -e,
foste amdti, -e,
fiirono amdti, -e.
Future.
I shall be loved,
thou wilt be loved,
he will be loved.
saremo ayndti, -e,
sarcte amdti, -e,
sardnno amdti, -e,
we were loved,
you were loved,
they were loved
we were loved,
you were loved,
they were loved.
we shall be loved.
3'ou will be loved,
they will be loved.
* The past participle of passive verbs, like that of essere, agrees with the subject of the
verb in gender and number.
PASSIVE VERBS.
205
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect.
to s6no stato amato, stdta amdta, I have been loved.
sidmo stdti amdti, stdte amdte, we have been loved.
Pluiierfect.
10 era stdto atnato, stdta anidta, I had been loved.
Future Anterior,
sard stdto amdtOy stdta amdta, I shall or will have been loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
io sm amato, -a,
tu s'la amuto, -a,
egli s'la a?ndto, -a,
iofossi amdto, -a,
tufossi amdto ^ -a,
fdsse amdto, -a,
that I be loved,
that thou be loved,
that he be loved.
sidmo amdti, -e,
sidte anidti, -e,
s'lano amdti, -e.
Imperfect.
if I were loved,
if ■'■jhou wert loved.
if he were loved.
fossimo amdti, -e,
foste amdti, -e,
fossero amdti, -e,
that we be loved,
that you be loved,
that they be loved.
if we were loved,
if you were loved,
if they were loved.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect.
10 *za stdto a?ndto, stdta amdta, that I have been loved.
Plui^erfect.
iofdssi stdto amdto, stdta amdta, if I had been loved.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
sarei amdto, -a,
saresti amdto, -a,
sarebbe ajndto, -a,
I should be loved,
thou wouldst be loved.
he would be loved.
saremmo amdti, -e,
sarcste amdti, -e,
sarebbero amdti, -e,
we should be loved,
you would beloved,
they would be loved
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past,
sarii stdto amdto, stdta amdta, I should, would, or could have been loved.
sii amato, amata,
s'la amdto, egli.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
be thou loved,
let him be loved.
sidmo amdti, amdte,
sidte am,dti, amdte,
s'lano amdti eglino,
let us be loved.
be ye loved.
let them be loved.
Many active verbs become passive by taking the particle si ,
as, Domanddr?>i, to be asked : but then they are used in the
tliird person only ; as, Si domdndA, it is asked : si e domanddto
it has been asked ; etc.
18
206
ITALIAN GRAJyOIAR.
VARIATION OF NEUTER VERBS.
Neuter verbs are generally varied with the auxiliary verb
essere, to be, according to the conjugation to which they belong.
Variation of the Verb Partire.
PARADIGM OF THE NEUTER VERBS.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present,
partire, to depart.
Past,
issere partita (m. s.), partiti (p.), partita (f s.), partite (p.),* to hare departed
Present,
partendo,
departing.
GERUND.
essendo partite
Past.
), having departed
PARTICIPLE.
partdnie (m. s.),
departing.
Present.
1 partenti{T^.),
departing.
partito (m. s.),
partita (f. s.),
departed,
departed.
Pi
ISt.
partiti (p.),
partite (p.),
departed,
departed.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
pdrto,
partti.
Present.
I depart.
Perfect.
I departed.
SIMPT<-R
TENSES.
10 partiva,
partird,
Impel feet.
I departed.
Future.
I shall or will depart
* The past participle of the neuter verbs that are varied with essere, agrees with tb«
subject of the verb in gender and number.
NEUTER VERBS. 207
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect. | Pluperfect.
io sdno partita, -a, I haye departed. | io era partita, -a, I had departed.
Second Pluperfect.
fHi partita, -a, I had departed.
Future Anterior,
sard partita, -a, I shall have departed
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present,
che io p&rta^ that I depart.
Imperfect,
che io partissi, if I departed.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect. I Pluperfect,
the io sia partita, -a, that I have departed. | che iafdssi partita, -a, if I had departed
CONDITIONAL MOOD.,
SIMPLE TENSE.
Past.
pcurtirH, I should, would, or could depart, or might depart.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Present.
sarii partita, I should, would, or could have departed, or might hare departed.
IMPEEATIVE MOOD.
p&rti tu, depart then.
208 ITALIAN GRAMaiAR.
VARIATION OF PRONOMINAL VERBS.
Pronominal verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere, to be,
according to the conjugation to which their termination belongs.
Variation of the Reflective Verb Pentirsi.
PAKADIGM OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present,
pentirsi, to repent one's self.
Past.
isser-si pent'itOf to have repented one's
self.
GERUND.
Present,
pentdndo-si, repenting one's self.
Past.
essendo-si pent'ito, having repented one's
self.
PARTICIPLE.
Present,
pentcnte-si (s.), repenting one's self.
Past.
pent'ito-si (m. s.), pentiti-si (p.), having repented one's self.
pent'ita-si (f. s.), pentite-si (p.), having repented one's self.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
io mi pdnto, I repent myself.
ti penti, thou repentest thyself.
si pente, he repents himself.
noi cipentidmo, we repent ourselves.
vipent'ite, you repent yourselves.
si pentono, they repent themselves.
Imperfect,
mi pentiva, I repented myself.
Perfect,
mi pen tii, I repented myself.
Future.
mi pentird, I shall repent myself.
PRONOMINAL VERBS. 209
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect.
mivdno pent'Uo, -a, I have repented my-
self.
Second Pluperfect,
mifiiipent'ito, -a, I had repented myself.
Pluperfect,
mi era pent'ito^ -a, I had repented myself.
Future Anterior.
mi sard pentito, -a, I shall or will have re-
pented myself.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SBIPLE TENSES.
Present. Imperfect.
che mi penta, that I repent myself. che mi pentissi, if I repented myselt
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect.
ehe mi s'lapent'ito^ -a, that I have repented
myself.
Pluperfect.
che mi fossi pent'i- if I had repented my
io, -a, self.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
mi pentirei, I should, would, or could repent myself.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
mi sarei pentito, -a, I should, would, or could have repented myself.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
penti-tt, repent thyself.
sipenta or penta-si, let him repent himself.
pentidm.o-ci^ let us repent ourselves.
pent'ite-vi, repent yourselves.
St pentano, or let them repent them-
pcntan-si, selves.
A great number of active and neuter verbs may become pro-
nominal by the addition of the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si,
&c., either in the objective or in the relation of attribution : and
then these verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere, to be ; as,
Loddre, to praise ; dare, to give ; tacere, to keep silent : —
mi sdno data un cdlpo, I have given [to] myself a blow.
ti sei ddto per vinto, thou hast given thyself up as conquered.
si e loddto, he has praised himself.
ci sidmo taciuti, we have kept ourselves silent.
Usage, however, in some instances, allows us also to employ
the auxiliary avere, to have : but then the conjunctive pronouns
mi, ti, si, are always in the relation of attribution ; as, —
m^/o sdno or ?»e/' ho goduio, I have enjoyed it.
telo se'i or tel' hai creduto, thou hast believed it.
set' e or seV ha bevuto, he has drunk it.
18*
210
IT^iLIAN GRAMMAR.
VAEIATION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS.
Unipersonal verbs are generally varied with the auxiliaij'
avere, to have, according to' the conjugation to which they belong.
Variation of the Verb Pi6vere.
PARADIGM OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERBS.
pidvere^
INEINITIVE MOOD.
Present. I Past.
to rain. 1 av6re piovuto, to have Huned.
GERUND.
piovindo,
Present.
raining.
Past,
avindo ptoviito, having rained.
•
PARTICIPLE.
Past,
piovuto, rained.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
fidve,
Present.
it raina.
piov^vOf
Imperfect.
it rained.
piovi^ jnovette^
Perfect.
it rained.
pioverd,
Future.
it will rain.
COMPOUND TENSES.
. Second Perfect. I Pluperfect.
ha piovuto, it has rained. . | avcva piovuto, it had rained.
Second Pluperfect.
Abe piovuto, it had rained.
Future Anterior,
avrd piovuto, it will have rained
UNIPERSONAL VERBS.
211
ehe pi6 va^
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SEVIPLE TENSES.
Present.
that it rains.
Imperfect,
che piovisse^ if it rained.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect.
the abbla piovuto, that it has rained. che avesse piovuto, if it had rained.
Plujierfect.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSE.
Present.
pioverebbe (piover'ia), it woiild or could rain, or might rain.
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past,
avrebbe piovuto, it would or could have rained, or might have rained.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
pidva, let it rain. .
The following are the uniperscnal verbs most in use : —
aycjiornare^
annottdre^
balendre,
lampeggidre,
tuondre,
nenicdre,
gramlindre,
tempestdre,
piovere,
diluvidrej
to be day.
geldre,
to freeze.
to grow night.
ghiaccidre,
»» 11
to lighten.
dighiaccidre,
to thaw.
» »?
farfrklxk)^
to be cold.
to thunder.
far chidro,
to be light.
to snow.
far buio,
to be dark.
to hail.
far cdldo,
to be hot.
?? 9?
far vento,
to be windy.
to rain.
far huon tempo,
to be good weather
to rain very hard,
far cattivo tempo,
to be bad weather.
to deluge.
jEssere, to be, is also used unipersonally, both in the singular and
plural, when it is joined to the particles ci or vi ; as, JEsserci or
esservi, to be here, or to be there. It is varied as follows : —
212 ITALIAN GRA^EVIAR.
Variation of the Verb Essere, unipersonally used.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present.
isser-ci or ^sser-vi, to be here, or to be there.
Past,
isser-ci or esser-vi stato (m. s.), (stati (p.), stdta (f. s.), state (p.), to have been there
GERUND.
Present,
essendo-ci, or essendo-vi, there being.
Past,
essdndo-ci or ess&ndo-vi stato (m. s.), stati (p.), stata (f. s.), state (p.), there having been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
s' i or V' if here is, or there is. | ci sdno or vi sdno, there are.
Imperfect.
c' ^o or ■»' ^a, there was. | c' erano or v^ erano, there were.
Perfect.
eifuotvifUf there was. | ci furono or vi ft'irono, there were.
Future.
d sard or vi sard, there shall be. | ci saranno or vi sardnno, there shall be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Second Perfect.
c' e or «' ^ s«d<o (m.), -a (f.), there has been.
ci s6no or vi sdno, stdti (m.), -e (f.), there have been.
Pluperfect.
c' era or ^•' era sJdZo, -a, there had been.
c^drano or v^ erano stdti -e, there had been.
Future Anterior.
ei sard or vi sard state, -a, there will have been.
ci sard7ino or vi sardnno stdti, -e, there will have been.
UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 213
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
the ci sia or vi sm, that there be or may be.
che ci siano, vi s'lano or ci s'leno, vi s'teno, that there he or may be.
Iinperfect.
ci fdsse or vi fosse, if there were or should be.
ci fdssero or vi fdssero, if there were or should be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
FerJ'ect.
ci s'la or vi s'la stdto, -a, that there has been.
ci s'lano or vi s'lano stdti, -e, that there have been or may have been.
Plu])erfect.
ci fdsse or vi fdsse stdto, -a, if there had been.
ci fdssero or vi fdssero stdti, -e, if there had been.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
SDIPLE TENSE.
Present.
ci sarcbbe or vi sarclbe, there should, would, or could be, or might be
ci sarebbero or vi sarcbbero, there should, would, or could be, or might be
COMPOUND TENSE.
Past.
ci sarebbe or vi sarcbbe stdto, -a, there should, would, or could have been.
d sarebbero or vi sarebbero sldti, -e, there should, would, or could have been.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
ci s'la, vi s'la, or s'm-ci, s'la-vi, let there be.
ci siano, vi s'leno, or s'lan-ci, s'len-vi, let there be.
The verb avere, to have, is often substituted for the verb essere
when unipersonally used, and then it is varied after the same
manner ; as, Averci or avervi, to be here or to be there ; ci ha or
vi ha, here is or there is ; ci hdnno or vi hcmno, there are ; etc.
The verb avere not only may be used with propriety for the
verb essere, but it is also elegantly used in the singular, although
the noun to which it is joined is in the plural ; as, Qiiante mujlia
ci HA? how many miles is it? ebbkvi molti uomini, there were
a great many men there ; etc.
To express in Italian " here or there is some of it," " here or
there are some of them," we join the particle ne, of it, of them,
to ci or vi, and say, essercene or esservene.
214
ITALIAN GRAjNOIAE.
f rr^gxtlar B txh^.
The irregularities of Italian Verbs are chiefly confined to the
perfect tense of the indicative mood, and to the past participle.
Some verbs, however, are also irregular in the present of the
indicative ; and then they are irregular likewise in the present of
the subjunctive and in the imperative.
When verbs are contracted in the infinitive mood, they are
contracted also in the future tense and in the conditional mood.
In those tenses in which verbs are irregular, the irregularity,
generally, does not extend to all the persons. Thus, with very
few exceptions, in the perfect of the indicative, the second person
singular, and the first and second persons plural ; and in the
present of the indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperative,
the first and second persons plural, — are regular.
In the variation of these verbs, we will give only those tenses
in which they depart from the paradigms already given, to which
we must refer for the formation of the other tenses. The per-
sons which are irregular are here printed in small capitals.
For the assistance of learners, we have added to each verb
the auxiliary with which it is varied in its compound tenses.
VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF
THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
There are but four simple verbs in the first conjugation, which
are not varied like amare ; viz. : —
anddre,
to go.
fare,
to do, or to make.
dare,
to give
stare.
to be, to dwell, to
stand, or to stay.
ERKEGULAR VERBS.
215
Anddre (varied with Essere).
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
anddre, to go.
GERUM).
anddndo, going.
PARTICIPLE.
anddto, gone.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
vo or VlDO,*
I go or am going.
andidmo,
we go.
vAi,
thou goest.
anddte,
you go.
VA.
he goes.
vAnno,
they go
Future,
andro (by contraction for andero)^ I shall or will go.
lo vAda,
tu vAt)A (t'drft),
egli vAda,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I go or may go.
that thou go.
that he go.
andidmo,
andiute,
vAdano,
that we go.
that you go.
that they go.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
andrdi {andria), by contraction for anderei (anderm), I should, would, or could go.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
VA (rd') tu,
vAda egli,
go thou,
let him go.
andidino ndi,
atiddte vdi,
vAdano cglino,
let us go.
go ye.
let them go.
Anddre is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pronouns
mi, ti, St., ci, vi, and the particle ne ; thus, me ne vo, I go hence ;
TE NE vdi, thou goest hence ; etc. Me, te, etc., are then mere
expletives.
JRianddre, signifying to examine, or to go over again ; and
trasanddre, to go beyond, — are regular and varied like amdre.
* Ajiddre is also a defective verb, and borrows these forms from the Latin verb vddere.
216
ITALIAN GRA3HMAR.
Ddre (varied with Avere),
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
dare, to give.
GERUND.
ddndo, giving.
PARTICIPLE.
ddto, given.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
do,
DAI,
dd.
I give or am giving,
thou givest.
he gives.
didmo,
date,
dAnno,
we give,
you give,
they give.
DisTTi or di:6di,
DlfcSTI,
d:&tte or de&de,
Per
I gave or did give,
thou gavest.
he gave.
fed.
d:emmo, we gave.
DESTE, you gave.
DETTERO or Di^DERO, they gave.
Future.
DARd, I shall or -will give
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io Df A,
tu Df A or Df I,
igli Df A,
that I give,
that thou give,
that he give.
diamo^
diate,
Df ANO or Df ENO,
that we give,
that you give,
that they give
ImjJerfect.
io d£ssi, if I gave or should give.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
•nA-R-fcT [daria), I should, woiild, or could give, or might give.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
dd (da'>) tu,
Df A egli,
give thou,
let him give.
diamo ndi,
date v6i,
DfANO,
let us give.
give ye.
let them give.
The compounds of ddre — as, riddre, to give again ; adddrsi,
to devote one's self ; etc. — have the same irregularities.
IKKEGULAR VEKBS.
217
fo (fdccio),
fAi ifdci),
fa {face),
Vkci ifei),
PACESTI (jcsti),
FJ&CE {fe\fco),
to fAcoia,
tu fIccia,
egli fAccIA,
Fare (^varied with Avdre).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
fAke {fdcere)^* to do, or to make.
GERUND.
facendo, doing.
PARTICIPLE.
fAtto, done.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I do or am doing,
thou doest.
he does.
facciAmo,
fate,
fAnno {fan),
Imperfect,
io faccva or facca {fea), I did or was doing
Perfect.
T did. ' facemmo {feinmo),
thou didst. faceste (feste),
he did. fecero {ferono),
Future.
FARo, I shall or will do.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that T do or may do.
that thou do.
that he do.
facciAmo,
facciAte,
fAcciano,
Imperfect.
10 facessi {fcssi), if I did or should do.
we do,
you do.
they do.
we did.
you did.
they did
that we do.
that you do.
that they do.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
FAR:6i {faria,fare''), I should, would, or could do, or might do.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
fa {fa?) tu,
fAccia pigli,
do thou,
let him do.
facciAmo,
fate,
fAcciano,
let us do
do ye.
let them do.
The compounds of fare — as, assuefdre, to accustom ; confdre,
to suit, to agree ; coritrajfdre, to mimic, to imitate ; disfdre, to
undo ; misfdre, to do wrong ; etc. — have the same irregularities.
Sodisfdre, or soddisfdre. to satisfy, is both regular and irregular.
* This verb belongs properly to the second conjugation ; it being but a contraction of
fdcere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms.
19
218
ITALIAN GRAMIMAK.
Stdre {varied with Essere).
INriNITIVE MOOD.
Present.
Stdre, to stand, to stay, to dwell, or to be.
GEKIIND.
stando, standing'.
PARTICIPLE.
stdto, stood.
IKDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
sto,
btAi,
StUf
I stand,
thou standest.
he stands.
stidmo.
state,
ST Anno,
■we stand,
you stand,
they stand
Perfect.
BTfiTTI (Stdi),
BTJ&STI,
BTJETTE {Sti),
I stood,
thou stoodst.
he stood.
STIJMMO,
STi:STE,
STETTERO (s«<*ro).
■we stood,
you stood,
they stood.
Future.
STAKo, I shall
or -will stand.
to STf A,
tu STf A or STf I,
4gH STf A,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I stand,
that thou stand,
that he stand.
stidmo, that we stand
stidte, that you stand
STf AND or STf END, that they stand
Imperfect.
h.0 BT^SSI, if I stood or should stand.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
BTAKfel {star\a), I should, -would, or could stand, or might stand.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
vta (5fd') <M,
BTf A cgli.
stand thou,
let him stand.
stiamo, let us stand.
state, stand ye.
STf AND or STf END egUno, let them stand.
jr
X
IRREGULAR VERBS.
219
Stare is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pronouns, mi,
ti, SI, etc., and the particle ne : thus, me ne sto, I remain here ;
TE NE stdi, thou remainest here ; etc. Me, te, etc., are then mere
expletives.
Gontrastare, signifying to deny, to dispute ; soprastdre or so-
i^rastdre, signifying to stand over, to threaten ; ostdre, to oppose ;
r( sfr-re., to remain, — are regular^ and are varied hke amdre.
The foregoing verbs, anddre, dare, fdre, and stdre, in all those
forms in wliich, when they are simple, they make but one sylla-
ble, have, in their compounds, the grave accent on the last
by liable ; as, vo, da, fe\ sta : Rivo, I go again ; rida, he gives
back again ; disfe\ he destroyed ; itistd, entreat thou ; etc.
VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Var{atio7i of the Irregulai^ Verbs hi ere (long).
The simple irregular verbs in ere (long) are the following,
VIZ. :
cad&e,
dissuad&e,
dol^re,
dov&e,
giac&e,
par&e,
persnad^re,
piac&e,
pot&e,
to fall.
rimanere,
to remain.
to dissuade.
sap€re,
to know.
to grieve.
sed&e,
to sit down.
to owe.
tac€re,
to be or keep silent.
to lie down.
tenere,
to hold.
to seem.
val€re,
to be worth.
to persuade.
vedere,
to see.
to please.
voUrCy
to wish, to will, or
to be able .
to be wilhng.
220
ITALIA:^ GRAJUMAil.
tado (cag^io),
tadi^
tdde,
Cadere {yai^ied with Essere).
INFmiTIVE MOOD.
I fall.
thou faUest
he falls.
cAddi {cadci,cad^tti), I fell.
cadesti, thou fellest
cAdde {cadeo), he fell.
cadere, to fall.
PARTICIPLE.
cadiito, fallen.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
cadiamo [caggidmv),
cadcte,
cddono {cdggiono).
Perfect.
cadcmmo,
cadcste,
cAdder© {cadero, cader), they fell.
Futwe.
cadero {cadro), I shall or will fall.
we fall,
you faU
they ML
we fell,
you fell.
lo cdda,
tu cdda,
4sli cdda,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I fall or may fall,
that thou fall,
that he fall.
cadiamo {caggidmo),
cadidte (caggidte),
cddano {cdggiano),
that we fall,
that you fall,
that they fall.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
^ Present.
caderei {cadrdi, cader'ia, cadr'ia), T should, would, or could fall, or exiight fJEill.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
. cadi tu, fall thou.
Dissuaddre (varied with either Av^re or Essere).
DissuAsi,
dissiindcsti,
dissttAse,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
dissuadere, to dissuade
PARTICIPLE.
DISSTjAso, dissuaded.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Perfect.
dissuadcmmo,
I dissuaded,
thou dissuadest
he dissuaded.
dissundcstei
DISSUASERO,
we dissuaded,
you dissuaded,
they dissuaded.
Dissuad'^re, properly speaking, is a compound of the Latin verb suad^re, as
well as persuadere, to persuade, which has the same irregularities.
IllREGULAli VERBS.
221
Dol^re {varied ^vith Essere, mid the Conjunctive Pro-
nouns, mi, ti, si, etc.).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
(loler-si, to grieve.
PARTICIPLE.
doluto-sif grieved.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
mi D(5lgo {ddglio)^ I grieve.
ti DU(3li, thou grievest.
si DU(3le {ddle), he grieves.
ci doqliAmo {dolemo), we grieve.
vi delete, you grieve.
si D(5lgono {ddgliono), they grieve.
mi d6lsi,
ti dolesti,
si D(3l.S£,
Perfect.
I grieved,
thou grievedst.
he grieved.
ci dolcmmo,
vi doleste,
si d6lsero,
we grieved,
you grieved,
they grieved.
Future,
dorrd (by contraction for dolerd *), I shall or will grieve.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
mi d6lga {ddgUa), that I grieve.
ti D(5lga (doglia), that thou grieve.
si DCiLGA {ddglia), that he grieve.
ci dogliAmo, that we grieve.
vi dogliAte, that you grieve
si D(5lgako (ddgliano), that they grieve.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
dorrH (dorr'ia), by contraction for dolerei (dolena),f I should, would, or could grieve.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Dv6l,l-ti, grieve thou.
si D(5lgA (ddglia), let him grieve.
dogliAmg-ci, let us grieve.
dolcte-vi, grieve ye.
si DOLGANO (ddgliano), let them grieve
The compounds of doUre — as, condoUre, to condole, etc. —
have the same irregularities.
* To distinguish it from dolerd, future of the verb doldre, to defraud,
t To distin,!,niish thum from dokrci (dolerm), forms of the couditioual of the verb
dolare^ to defraud.
222
IT.VLIAN GRAMMAR.
Dov^re (varied with Avere).
INEINITIVE MOOD.
dovere {devere *), to owe.
PARTICIPLE
dovutOf owed.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
aevo or D^BBO {dcggio), I owe.
dcvi {del), thou owest.
deve or DBBBE {dee de'), he owes.
dobbiAmo {debbidmo), we owe.
dovcte, you owe.
dcvono or debbono, they owe.
Perfect,
dovei or dovetti, I owed.
Future,
doverd or dovrd^ I shall or will owe.
io d:6bba {deggia),
tu DEBBA (deggia),
egli D£BBA {deggia),
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
that I owe.
that thou owe.
that he owe.
PreseHi.
dobbiAmo (deggiumo), that we owe.
dobbiAte {deggidte), that you owe.
debbano (deggiano), that they owe.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present,
doverei or dovrei {doveria or dovria), I should, would, or could owe, or might owe.
IMPERATIVE MOOD (wanting).
* The Latin debere, from which dovere derives some of its forms.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
223
Giac^re (varied with either Avere or Essere).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
giacere, to lie down.
PARTICIPLE.
giaciuto, lain down.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
GI.^OCIO,
I lie down.
giacciAmo,
we lie douTi.
giaci,
glare,
thou liest down,
he lies down.
giaccte,
GIACCIONO,
you lie down,
they lie down.
Perfect.
GlACQUI,
giaccsti,
GlACQUE,
I laj' down,
thou layest down
he lay down.
giachnmo,
giaccste,
GlACQUERO,
we lay down,
you lay down,
they lay down
10 GlACCIA,
tu GIACCIA,
egli GlAcciA,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I lie down,
that thou lie down,
that he he down.
giacciAmo,
giacctdte,
GlACCIANO,
that we lie down,
that you lie down,
that they he down.
giaci tu,
GiAcciA ^gli,
IMPEEATIVE MOOD.
He thon down,
let him lie down.
giacciAmo ndi,
giacete voi,
GlAcciANO eglino,
let us lie down.
lie ye down.
let them he down.
The compounds of giacere (as, soggiacere, to be subject, etc.),
as well as piacere and its compounds {compiacere^ to please ;
dispiacere^ to displease ; etc.), have the same irregularities.
Piacere^ and its compounds compiacere, etc., in the second per-
son plural of the t)resent of the subjunctive, and in the second
person plural of the imperative mood, make PiACCiiTt:, etc.
224
1T.\XIAK GliAJil^lAE.
pAio,
pan,
pare {par).
tAkvi (pdrsi)f
paresti,
pAkve {parse),
Parere (varied with Essere).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
parere, to seem.
PARTICIPLE.
paruto {pa so), seemed.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I seem,
thou seemest.
he seems.
I seemed,
thou seemedst.
he seemed.
pariamo,
parete,
pdrono, or pAiONO,
Perfect.
parcmmo,
pareste,
pArvero {pdrsero),
Tve seem,
you seem,
they seem.
we seemed,
you seemed,
they seemed.
Future.
parrd (by contraction for parero *), I shall or will seem.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io pAia,
that I seem.
pariamo,
that we seem.
tu pAia,
that thou seem
jmridte.
that you seem.
^li pAia,
that he seem.
pAiano,
that they seem.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present,
parrdi {parr'ia), by contraction for parerei {parerta\), I should, would, or could seem.
pari tu,
pAia egli.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
seem thou,
let him seem.
paridmo n6i,
parcte voi,
pAiano eglino,
Persuad^re.
{See " Dissuadere," p. 220.)
Piacere.
(See "Giacere," p. 223.)
let us seem.
seem je.
let them seem.
* To distinguish it from parero, future of the verb pardre, to parrj^, to adorn.
t To distinguish them from parerei {parer'ia), corresponding forms of the verb pardro
to parry,- etc.
IRREGULAPw VERBS. 225
Pot^re (varied with either Av^re or Essere)
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PoterCf to be able.
PARTICIPLE.
potiito, been able.
. INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
P(5fSO. I am able. I possiAmo, we are able.
PTJ(5l (piid''), thou art able. potcte, you are able.
-pvo {pu6te,pdte), he is able. | P(3ssoxo (p(5nno), they are able
Future,
potro (by contraction for poterd\* I shall or will be able.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
p6ssa, that I be able, or may be able.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
potrH (potr'ia)^ by contraction for poterei
{poter'ia,^ poria),
I should, would, or could be able, or might
be able.
IMPERATIVE MOOD (wanting).
* To disting\iish it from poterd, future of the verb potdre, to prune,
t To distinguish them from poterei {poter'ia), corresponding forms of the verb potare^
to prune.
22Q
IT^yLIAN GRAMMAR.
Riinan^re (^varied with Essere).
INEINITIVE MOOD.
rimanere, to remain.
PARTICIPLE.
KImAsto (ri7ndso), remained.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
rimAngo (rimdgno), I remain.
rimdni^ thou remainest.
rinidne, he remains.
rijnanidmo^
rimancte,
kimAagono,
Perfect.
rimAsi,
rimancsti^
rimAse.
I remained,
thou remainedst.
ho remained.
nmancmmo^
rimaiicste^
rimAseko,
we remain,
you remain,
they remain.
we remained,
you remained,
they remained
Future,
rimarro (by contraction for rimanerd)^ I shall or will remain.
SUEJUNCTIYE MOOD
Present.
to rimAnga {rimagna), that T remain.
tu rimAnga (rhndgna), that thou remain.
egli rimAnga, that he remain.
rttnaniamo,
rlmanidte.
rimAkgano,
that we remain,
that you remain,
that they remain.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
nniarrei {rimama), by contraction for ri-
manerei [nmanena),
I should, would, or could remain, or might
remain.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
rimdni tu,
rimAnga cgliy
remain thou,
let him remain.
rhnanidmo nOt, let us remain
rhnanrte v6i, remain ye.
rijiAngano c'g-Zmo, let them remain
IRREGULAR VERBS.
227
so,
sAi,
SA (sape),
sapesttf
Sap^re (^varied with Av^re).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
sapdre, to know.
PARTICIPLE.
saputo, known.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I know,
thou knowest.
he knows.
I knew,
thou knewest
he knew.
8APP1AMO,
saj/cle,
6 An NO,
Perfect.
sapcmmo,
sapcste,
8:£PPERO,
we know,
you know,
they know.
we knew,
you knew,
they knew.
Ftiture.
sapro (by contraction for sapero), I shall or will know.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present,
to sAppia, that I know, or may know.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
saprei (sapria), by contraction for saperci
(saperia),
I should, would, or could know, or miffht
know.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
pAppi tu,
bAppia egli,
know thou
let him know.
SAPPiA.'Nro nd/, let us know.
SAPPiAte voi, know ye.
sappiAno cglinoj let them know.
The compounds of sapere — as risapere, to learn, or to come
to know — follo^it' the same irrejxiilarities.
228
ITALIAN GKAMINLIR.
Seddre (^varied with Avere).
INEINITIVE MOOD.
sedere {seggere *), to sit down.
GERUND.
%edendo (seggcndo), sitting.
PARTICIPLE.
seduto, seated.
INDICATI\'E MOOD.
Present.
BIEDO or 8i:GGO,
8IEDI,
BIEDE {sede),
I sit.
thou sittest.
he sits.
sedidmo^
sedcte,
SIEDONO,
we sit.
you sit.
they sit.
Peiifect.
sedei or sedctti, I sat.
Future.
sedero {sedro), I shall or will sit.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io SIEDA or si&GGA, that I sit, or may sit.
tu 8IEDA or SEGGA, that thou sit.
^gli siEDAor sI:gga, that he sit.
sediamo or seggiAmo, that we sit.
sediute {seggidte), that you sit.
siEDAJfO or 8EGGANO, that they sit
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present,
sederei {sedrei, seder'ia), I should, would, or could sit, or might sit.
BIPERATIVE MOOD.
SIEDI tu, sit thou.
SIEDA or 8EGGA egli, let him sit.
sediamo or (seggidmo) noi, let us sit.
sedcte vol, sit ye.
SIEDAXO cglino, let them sit.
Sedere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, ti, si, etc.,
and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as, mi siedo, I sit (my-
self) ; ti set seduto, thou hast sat (thyself) ; etc.
The compounds of sedere — as, possedere, to possess ; risedere,
to reside ; soprassedere, to supersede — have the same irregulari-
ties.
* This verb, now become obsolete, is still used in many*of the forms of the modem
verb sedere.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
229
Tac^re {vanned with Av^re).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
tacere^ to be or keep silent.
PAETICIPLE.
taciuto, been silent.
rACQTJi,
tacesti,
tAcque,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pj^esent.
tacio (tdccio), I am silent.
Perfect.
I was silent,
thou wast silent,
he was silent.
taccmmo,
taccste,
tAcquero,
we were silent,
you were silent,
they were silent.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io tac'ia (tdccia), that I be silent or may be silent.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
tacereii I should, would, or could be silent.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
tad tu, be thou silent.
Tacere is sometimes varied with the pronouns, mi, ti, si, etc.,
and then it requires the auxiliary essere : mi tdcio, I keep silent ;
si e taciuto, he has kept silent ; &c.
The compound of tacere — ritacere, to become once more silent
— follows the same irregularities.
20
230
IT.iLIAN GRAMMAR.
TfiNGO (tcgno)j
TXENi (tegni),
TIKNE
t:6nni,
tenesti,
t:6nne,
Tenure (^varied with Avere).
INEINITIVE MOOD.
tenere, to hold.
PARTICIPLE.
tenuto, holden.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I hold,
thou boldest.
he holds.
I held,
thou heldest.
he held.
tenidmo (tegndmo),
tencte,
TEKGONO,
Perfect.
tenemmOj
tencste^
TEKNERO,
we hold,
you hold,
they hold.
•we held,
you held,
they held.
FutU7'e.
tend (by contraction for tenero)^ I shall or will hold.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
\o TifiNGA (tigna), that I hold.
tu TENGA, that thou hold.
^li TEKGA (tegna)^ that he hold.
tenidmo {tegndmo), that we hold.
tenidie {tegndte), that you hold.
t:&ngano {tegnano), that they hold.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
terr&i (tenia), by contraction for tenerei I I should, would, or could hold, or might
(teneria), \ hold.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
TIi&Nl (fe') tu. hold thou.
TENGA {tegna) cgU, let him hold.
tenidmo (tegndmo) ndi, let us hold.
tenete v6i, hold ye.
T:feNGANO cglino, let them hold.
Tenere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi, ti, si, etc.,
and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as, mi sono teniito, I
have holden or restrained myself; etc.
IIIREGULAR VERBS.
231
Val^re (varied icith either Avere or Essere).
vAlgo {vaglio),
vdli,
vale (vdl)f
vAlsi,
valesti^
vAlse,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
valere, to be worth or to avail.
PAETICIPLE.
valuta {vdlso), been worth.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pj-esent
I am worth,
thou art worth.
he is worth.
I was worth,
thou wast worth,
he was worth.
validrno^
valcte,
vAlgono,
Perfect.
valemmo,
valeste,
vAlsero,
we are worth,
you are worth,
they are worth
we were worth,
you were worth,
they were worth
Futwe.
varrd (by contraction for valero), I shall or will be worth.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
to vAlga or vIglia, that T be worth.
tu vAlga or vAglia, that thou be worth.
egli vALGAor vAglia, that he be worth.
validmo,
validte.
vAlgano.
that we be worth,
that you be worth,
that they be worth.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
varrdi {varria), by contraction for valerci
{Valeria).
I should, would, or could be worth, or
might be worth.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
vdli tu, be thou worth.
vAlga {vdglia) cgli, let him be worth.
validmo ndi, let us be worth
valcte voi, be ye worth.
vAlgano eglino, let them be worth.
232 ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
Ved^re (varied with Av^re).
INEINITIVE MOOD.
vedere, to see.
GERUND.
vedindo or VEGG:fiNDO, seeing.
PABTICIPLE.
veduto (v'lsto), seen.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
sest.
vcde, ' he sees
vMo, VJ&GOO, I see.
vedi (t»e'), thou seest.
vediamo or VEGGlAiro, we see.
vedete, you see.
vcdono or v:fiGGONO, they see.
Vf DI, I saw.
vedesti, thou sawest.
Perfect.
vedemmOy we saw.
vedeste, you saw.
vf DERO, (vider), they saw.
VfDE, he saw
Future,
vedrd (by contraction for vederd), I shall or will see
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
to v^da or v:feGOA, that I see or may see.
tu veda or V^GGA, that thou see.
6gli veda or vilGGA, that he see.
Present.
vediamo or veggiAmo, that we see.
vediate or veggiAte, that you see.
vcdano or VEGGANO, that they see.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
vedrdi {vedrm), by contraction for vederei
{vederia),
I should, would, or could see, or might
see.
t)6di («e') tu, see thou.
vida 01 y^GGA egli, let him see
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
vediamo ndi,
vedcte vol,
vcdano cglino, let them soo.
vediamo ndi, let us see.
vedcte t'oi, see ye.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 233
Voldre {varied with Avdre).
INTINITIVE MOOD.
voUre^ to wish, to will, or to be willing.
PARTICIPLE.
voluto, been willing.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
V(5glio or y(5', I am willing. I vogliAmo {volemo), we are willing.
VUOi (vu6U, vud^), thou art willing. volete, you are willing.
VU(5le (vdle), he is willing. | v(5gliono (vdnno), they are wilhng.
Peiifect.
V(5lli, I was willing. j volemmo, we were willing.
volesti, thou wast willing. I voleste, you were willing.
VCJllb, • he was willing. | ydLLEKO, they were willing.
Futur^e.
vorrd (by contraction for volero *), I shall or will be willing
SUBJinSTCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
to V(5glia, that I be willing or may be willing.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
vorrii [vorrta), by contraction for volerei
{Valeria t),
I should, would, or could be willing, or
might be willing.
IMPERATIVE MOOD (wanting).
The compounds of volere — as, disvolere, to desire the contrary
of what one has wished ; rivolere, to wish again, or to be once
more wilhng — have the same irregularities.
* To distinguish it from the future of the verb voldre, to fly.
t To distinguish them from the corresponding forms of voldre, to fly.
234
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
VAEIATIO:^r OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE
THIED CONJUGATION.
The following are the simple irregular verbs of the third
conjugation ; viz., —
dire,
mortre,
salire,
gcguire.
to say or to tell,
to die.
to ascend,
to follow.
udire,
uscire,
venire
to hear,
to go out.
to come.
Dire {varied with Avdre),
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Df RE, to say.
GERUND.
dicdndo, saying.
PARTICIPLE.
d:6tto (ditto), said.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
rfico,
did or Df ,'
rfice,
I say.
thou sayest.
he says.
dicidmo,
DfTK,
dicono,
•we say.
you say.
they say.
Imperfect.
io diccva or dicea, I said.
Perfect.
BfSSI,
dicestif
DfSSE,
I said,
thou saidst.
he said.
dicemmo,
diceste,
DfSSERO,
•we said,
you said,
they said.
Future.
DiBo (by contraction for dicero), I shall or ■will say.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
235
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io dica^ that I say or may say.
Imperfect,
io dicessi, if I said or should say.
CONDITIONAI. MOOD.
Present.
DIRiil (dirm),
(diceria)^
by
contraction for dicer di
I should, would,
say,
or could say; or might
IMPEEATIVE MOOD.
dica igli.
Bay thou,
let him say.
diciamo n6i,
Df TE v6i,
dicano cglino,
let us say.
say ye.
let them say.
The compounds of dtre — as, ridire, to say again ; contradire
or contraddire^ to contradict ; interdire^ to forbid ; hendire, to speak
well of; maldire, to speak ill of — have the same irregulari-
ties.
Benedire, to bless, and maledire, to curse, in the perfect, are
both regular and irregular, and make henedii or benedissi, I
blessed; maledii or maledissi, I cursed.
236
ITALIAN GRAMMAK.
mu6ro (m(5to),
m:u(5ri,
m;u(5ke (wM<Jr),
Morire {varied with Essere).'
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
monre^ to die.
PARTICIPLE.
M(3kto, dead.
INDICATIVE MOOD
Present.
morictmo.
I die.
thou diest.
he dies.
•we die.
mor'He, you die.
mu(5koko (mudiono), they die.
Fviiire.
morird or mono, I shall or will die
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io MU6rA [mdia), that I die or may die.
tu mu<5ra {vi6ra), that thou die.
egli mu(3ra (wdm), that he die.
moriamo.
that we die.
moridte, that you die.
mu6rano {mdrano), that they die.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present,
morird or morrH [moriria or viorna), I should, would, or could die, or might die.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Mu(5ri tu, die thou.
MU(5ra {m6ra) egli^ let him die.
moriamo n6i.
mor'ite v6i,
MU(5rano eglino,
let us die.
die ye.
let them die.
The compounds of morire — as, premorire, to die before, etc.
have the same irregularities.
* Morire may be varied also with avcre ; but it then takes the nature of an actiw
verb, and signifies " to kill," and not " to die. "
IRREGULAR VERBS.
237
Salire (varied ivith either Avere or Essere).
INEmiTIVE MOOD.
sal'ire {sagl'ire *), to ascend.
PARTICIPLE.
salilo^ ascended.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
sAlgO [saglio]^ I ascend.
sctli or saVisci {sdgli), thou ascendest.
sale or sal'isce (^sciglie), he ascends.
saliamo or sagliAmo, vie ascend.
sal'ite, you ascend.
sAlgono {sdgliono), they ascend.
sal'ii (salsi),
salisti,
sail {sdlse, sal'to),
Perfect.
I ascended,
thou ascendedst.
he ascended.
sal'immo,
snlistp^
salirotio (saliro, salir),
we ascended,
you ascended,
they ascended.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
to sAlga {saglia), that T ascend,
tu sAlga (sdlghi). that thou ascend.
cgli sAlqaot sal'isca, that he ascend.
snlirhno or SAG LI A MO, that we ascend
salldte or sagliAte, that j'ou ascen*
sAlgano (sdgliano), that they ascea
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
sdli or salisci tu, ascend thou.
bAlga or sal'isca egli, let him ascend.
salidmo ?i6i\
sal'ite vol,
sAlgano eglino,
let us ascend.
ascend ye.
let them ascend.
The compounds of scdire — a?, risaltre, to re-ascend ; assalire^
to assail; etc. — have tlie same irregularities.
* From this verb, now become obsolete, are derived many of the forms of the mjdern
verb sal'ire
238
ITALIAJ^ GRAI^OIAK.
Seguire (varied with either Avere or Essere)
INFINITIVE MOOD.
seguire, to follow.
PARTICIPLE.
seguito, followed.
srguo or SlfeGUO,
scgifi or SIKGUI,
segue or siegue,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I follow,
thou followest.
he follows.
seguidmo, we follow.
sf^nite, you follow.
scguono or SIEGUONO,' they follow.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io scgua or si:&GUA, that 1 follow.
tu scgua or sikgua, that thou followest.
igli segua or si^GUA, that he follow.
seguid}no,
seguidte,
scguano or siEGUANO,
that we follow,
that you follow,
that they follow.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
sigui or SIEGUI iw, follow thou.
aegua or sii:GUA cgU, let him follow.
seguiamo ndi,
segu'ite vdi,
seguano eglino
let us follow.
follow ye.
let them follo'jr.
The compounds of seguire have the same irregularities.
mKEGULAR VERBS. 239
Udire {varied ivith Avere).
LNEINITIVE MOOD,
ud'ire {od'ire), to hear.
PARTICIPLE.
zid'iio, heard.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
6do,
I hear.
udidmo,
■we hear.
<5di,
thou hearesfc.
udite,
you hear.
6VE.
he hears.
6dono,
they hear.
Future.
udird or udro^ I shall or will hear.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present
to <5da, that I hear or may hear.
tu 6da {6di)^ that thou hear.
^gli <5da, that he hear.
udiamo^ that we hear.
udidte, that you hear.
<5dano, that they hear.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
udrlHoTMrei {udir'ia or udria), I should, would, or could hear, or might hea»
«5di tu, hear thou.
(Sda ^gli, let him hear.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
udiamo n6i,
ud'ite v6i,
6dano dglino^ let them hear.
udiamo wdt, let us hear.
itd'ile v6i, hear ye.
The compounds of vcf^re — as, riudire, to hear again, etc. —
have the same irregularities.
Esaudire, to grant, is regular, and varied like esihire.
240
ITALIAN GR.i]VIMAK.
Uscire {varied with Essere).
INFINITIVE MOOD.
uscire {esc'ire), to go out.
PAETICIPLE.
uscito^ gone out.
INDICATIVE MOOD
Present.
fisoo,
I go out.
uscidmo,
■we go out.
£sci,
thou goest out.
usc'ite,
you go out.
JSSOB,
he goes out.
liSCONO,
they go out.
io l&SOA,
tu i;scA,
6gli :&80A,
fisoi tu,
ll^SOA dgli,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I go out or may go out.
that thou go out.
that he go out.
usciamo,
uscidte,
ilSCANO,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
go thou out.
let hun go out.
uscidmo ndi,
usc'ite vdi,
:&soANO 4glino,
that we go out.
that you go out.
that they go out.
let us go out.
go ye out.
let them go out.
The compound of uscire — riuscire, to succeed — has the
same irregularities.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
241
Venire (^varied with Essere) .
INFINITIVE MOOD.
venire, to come.
PARTICIPLE.
VENtlTOj come.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
VSlNGO (I'cg'Ho), I come.
VIKNI,
VIENE
VENN!,
ven'isti,
VENNE,
thou comest.
he comes.
I came,
thou camest,
he came.
venimno {vegnamo\
vtn'ile,
VENGONO (vegnono),
Perfect.
venimmo.
ven'isle,
VENNERO {veniro),
we come,
you come,
they come.
we came,
you came,
they came.
Future.
verrd (by contraction for i^enird], I shall or will come.
io V:fcNGA,
tU VENGA,"
egli VENGA,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I come or may come.
that thou come,
that he come.
venidmo [vegndmo), that we come.
venidte (vegndte). that you come.
VENGANO (^•cg'»^a?io), that they come.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
verrei [verr'ia), by contraction for venirei
(veniria),
I should, would, or could come, or might
come.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
VliiNI tU,
TfiNGA Cgli,
come thou,
let him come.
■veniamo not,
ven'ite v6i,
viiNGANO eglino,
let us come.
come ye.
let them come.
Ventre is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pronouns mi,
ti, si, etc., and tlio particle ne : thus, me ne vengo, I am coming
thence ; te ne vieni, thou art coming thence, etc. Me, te, etc.,
are then mere expletives.
The compounds of ven-ire — as, convenire, to agree ; divenire^
to become ; etc. — have the same irregularities.
21
242
ITALIAN GEAJMjNIAR.
TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
IITPIIOTIVE.
Accendere. to light
Accorgersi, to perceive
Addiirre, to allege
(Addiicere), to allege
Affliggere, to afflict
Aucidere, to kill
An dire, to go
Apparire, to appear
(Apparere), to appear
Appartenere, to belong
Applaudire, to applaud
(Applaiidere), to applaud
Aprire, to open
Ardere, to burn
Ascendere, to ascend
Ascondere, to conceal
Aspergere, to sprinkle
Assidere, \ . , ,
(Assedere), f '° ^'' ^°""^
Assistere, to assist
Assolvere, to absolve
Assorbire, to absorb
(Assorbere), to absorb
Assiimere, to assume
Astriugere, to compel
(Astrignere), to compel
Altendere, to icait
Avere, to have
Avvellere, to root up
Bevere, to drink
(Bere), to drink
Bollire, to boil
Cadere, to fall
Calere, to care for
Capere, to comprehend
(Capire), to co7nprehend
Cedere, to submit
Chiedere, to ask
Chiiidere, to shut
Cignere, to gird
(Cingere), to gird
Cogliere, )
(Corre), |
Compiere, to accomplish
(Compirej, to accojnplish
Concepire, to conceive
"oncepere), to conceive
i!nnettere, to connect
to gather
^Xidscere, to know
Consumire,* ? .
(Con?umere), S "
Coprire, to cover
consume
PRESENT.
PERFECT.
rUTURE.
PAETICrPLB.
accendo
accesi
accendero
acc6so
m' accorgo
m' accorsi
m' accorgero
accorto
adduco
addiissi
addurro
addotto
(adducero)
(addiitto)
affliggo
afaissi
affliggero
afflitto
ancido
ancisi
anciderd
anciso
vado (vo)
andai
andro
andAto
apparisco
apparii
appariro
apparito
(appiro)
appirvi
apparero
app4i-so
(appajo)
(apparsi)
(appariito)
appartengo
appartermi
apparterro
apparteniito
(apparteaetti)
apparteuero
applaudisco
applaudii
applaudiro
applaudito
applaudo
(applaiisi)
applaudero
(applaiiso)
4pro
aprii, apersi
apriro
aperto
4rdo
Arsi
ardero
cirso
ascendo
ascesi
asceadei
ascendetti
ascenderd
asceso
ascondo
ascosi
ascondero
ascoso, asc6sto
asp ergo
aspersi
aspergero
asperso
assido
aR,sisi
assidero
assise
assisto
assistei
assisterft
assistito
assolvo
assolvei
assolvero
assoluto
assorbisco
assorbii
assorbero
assorbito
(assorbo)
(assorsi?)
*
assume
assiinsi
assumero
assiinto
astringo
astrinsi
astriugei-6
astretto
(astriguo)
(astrignei-6)
atteudo
attesi
attendero
attento
ho
ebbi
avro
avuto
avvello
avvelsi
avvellero
avrelto
bero
bevvi, bevei
bevero. bevro
bevuto, beuto
(bibo), beo
(bebbi)
(bero) '
bollo
belli
boliro
bolito
cado (ciiggio)
caddi, cadei
cadero, cadro
cadiito
Cale
calse
caleri (carr.V)
caliito
capo
capei (capetti)
capero, capiro
cap u to, capito
(capisco)
capii
codo
cedei, cessi
cedero
ceduto, cesso
chiedo
chiesi
cliiedero
chiesto
chiiido
chiusi
chiudero
chiiiso
cingo
cinsi
cingero
cinto
(ciguo)
coglio, colgo
colsi
cogliero, corro
colto
compio
compiei
compii
compiero
compiiito
concepisco
concepii
concepero
concepito
(concipio)
(concepetti)
(concepero)
conceputo
counetto
connettei
conuettero
connesso
(connessi)
(connettuto)
conosco
conobbi
(conoscetti)
conoscero
conosciiito
consumo
consiinsi
consumero
consunto
copro
coprii,copersi
copriro
coperto
♦ This verb is regular.
TABLE OF IllllEGULAK VEllBS.
243
I^'F^^'ITIVK.
Correre, to riai
Costringei'e, to constrain
(Costrignere), to constrahi
Crescere, to grow
Cuocere, to cook
Dai'e, to give
Dccidcre, to decide
Duliidcre, to delude
Deprimere. to depress
Dil'endere, to defend
Dire, to say
Itirigere, to direct
Discendere, to descend
Dispergere, to disperse
Distiuguere, to distinguish
Divedere, to
Divellerc, to root out
Dolere, to grieve
Dovere, lo owe
(Devere), to owe
Eiuergere, to emerge
Erigere, ergere, to erect
P^sigere, to exact
Espellere, to expel
Esponere, to expose
(Esporre), to expose
Esprimere, to express
Essere, to be
Estendere, to extend
Estinguere, to extinguish
Facere or fire, to do
Eendere, to cleave
Figero or figgcre, tojix
Fiugere o?-fignero, to feign
Fondere, to melt
FrAugere, I ^ 7 ,
(Fragnere), } '° ^''^^^
Friggere, to fry
Gonuflettere. to kneel
Giaccre, to lie down
Giro, to go
Gii'ingcrc, to arrive
Giugiiere, to arrive
Godere (gaudere), to enjoy
Illudei-e, to delude
Inimergefe, to iminerge
Impellere, to impel
linprimere, I o print
lucidere, to grave
Incorrere, to incur
Tncrescere, to be sorry
Intendere, to understand
Intessere, to iveave
Tntridere, to temper
Intrudere, to intrude
Inv.'idere, to invade
Involgerc, to wrap up
Jnvolvere, to wrap up
fre, to go
Trridcrc, to deride
PKESEKT.
corro
co.stringo
costrigno
cresco
cuoco
do
decide
deludo
deprimo
difendo
dico
dirigo
disfeudo
dlspergo
distinguo
divedo
divello
dolgo, doglio
diibbo, devo
(deo)
em ergo
erigo, ergo
esigo
espello
espongo
(espouo)
esprimo
souo
esteudo
estinguo
fo (ficcio)
fendo
figo, figgo
fingo (figuo)
fondo
fringo
friggo
geuufletto
giaccio
giungo
godo
11 111 so
iuimergo
impello
imprimo
incido
incorro
incresco
intendo
intesso
intrido
intTLido
invado
involgo
involve
irrido
TERFECT.
corsi
costrinsi
crebbi
(ci'escetti)
cossl (cocei)
diedl, diei
decisl (?)
del lis!
depress!
dlfesi
dissi
diressi
disccsi
dispersi
distills!
(distlnguett!)
divid!
(divide!)
dlvels!
dols!
dovei, dovett!
(devei)
euiersi
eressi, ers!
esige!
espulsi
espos!
(espuos!)
es press!
estes!
(estendett!)
estins!
feci (fei)
fendei (fess!)
fiss! (fisi)
fins!
fi'isi (fonde!)
frans!
friss!
genuflessi
giacciu!
(giacett!)
gii
giiins!
godettl, gode!
illusi
immers!
impiils!
impress!
incis!
incorsi
increbb!
(increscetti)
intes!
intessei
intris!
iiitn'is!
invas!
ill vols!
irnsi
FUTURE.
correro
costringero
(costriguei'o)
crescero
cocero
daro
decidero
deliidero
deprimoro
difendero
diro
dirigero
discendero
dispergero
distinguero
divedro
divellero
(diverro)
dorro
dovro
(dovero)
emergero
erigero, ergero
esigero
espellero
esporro
(esponero)
esprlmero
saro
estendero
cstingnero
faro
fendero
figero, figgero
fingero
foudero
fi-aiigero
friggero
geuuflettero
giacero
giro
giungero
godero
illudero
immergero
impeilero
imprimero
incidero
incorrero
increscero
intcndero
intcssero
Intridero
iiitrudero
invadcro
involgcro
involvero
in')
irridero
PARTICIPLE.
corso
costretto
crescinto
cotto
duto
deciso
deluso
depresso
dlfesso
detto
diretto
disceso
disperse
distinto
diveduto
(diviso)
divelto
doluto (dolto)
doviito
emerso
eretto (erto)
esatto
espiilso
esposto
(esposito)
espresso
stAto
esteso
estinto
fatto
feSSO
fitto, flSSO, fiso
finto (fitto)
fiiso, fondiito
franto
fritto
genuflesso
giaciuto
(gito)
giiinto
god u to
illiiso
immerso
Impi'ilso
impresso
Inciso
incorso
increscliito
inteso, Intento
intcssuto
intriso
intn'iso
invaso
involiito
ito
irrisft
244
rNFINlTlVE.
Iscrivere, to inscribe
Istruire, to instruct
Ledere, to offend
Leggere, to read
Maledicere, \
Maledire, | to curse
(Maladire), )
Mergere, to dive
Mesceie, to mix
Mettere, to put
Molcere^ to assuage
Mordere, to bite
Morire. to die
to 7nilk
Mugnere, )
Wungere, j
Muovere, to move
Niscere, to be born
Nascondere, to conceal
Negligere, to Jieglect
Nuocere j /
(^ocere), j
Oifendere, to offend
Offerire, to offer
Offrirc, to offer
(Offerere), to offer
Opprimere, to oppress
Parere, to appear
Pascere, to feed
Percuotere, to strike
Perdere, to lose
Persuadere, to persuade
Piai^ere, to please
Piangere, ) .
•n- " ' } to toeep
Piagnere, ) ^
Pingere, pignere, to paint
Piovere, to rain
(Pouere) or porre, to put
Porgere, to offer
Potere, to be able
Precidere, to shorten
Preinere, to press
Prendei-e, to take
Presiiniere, to presume
Proteggere, to protect
Piingere, pugnere, toprick
R4dere, to shave
Recidere, to retrench
Redimere, to redeem.
Reggere, to govern
Rendere, to render
Repellere, to repel
Reprimere, to repress
Ridere. to laugh
Riliicere, to shine
Riuianere. to remain
Pv^olvere, to resolve
Rispondere, to answer
RistAre, to desist
Ristrignere; } ^° ''^^^'"'^'^
Rodere, to gnaw
italia:x
GRA^IMVr
L. •
PEESEKT.
PERFECT.
FUTURE.
PARTICIPLE.
iscrivo
iscrissi
iscrivero
iscritto
istruisco
istruii
istruiro
istriitto
ledo
(lesi) (ledei)
ledero
leso
leggo
lessi (leggei)
leggero
letto
lice, lece
(licito) lecito
maledico
maledessi
malediro
maledetto
mergo
rD6rsi
mergero
merso
mesco
mescei
mescero
(mesciuto)
metto
misi, (messi)
mettero
messo (misso^
2d pers. molci
(mulse)
3d pers. moke
mordo
morsi
mordero
morso
( muoro, moro
( muojo, mojo
morii
moriro, morrj
morto
muDgo
munsi
mugnero
munto
muovo
mossi (movei)
movero
mosso
nisco
nacqui
nascero
nito
na^coudo
nasco^i
nascondero
nascoso
negligo
uegligei
negligero
negletto
nuoce, noccio
nocqui
nocero
nosciiito
ofifendo
offessi
offendero
offeso
offerisco
offerii
offeriro.offriro
offero
oEfersi
(olTerro)
offerto
offro
opprimo
oppressi
opprimero
oppresso
pajo (piro)
parvi (p.'irsi)
par r6( pare ro)
paruto(p4r80)
pisco
pa?cei
pascero
pasciuto
percuoto
percossi
percuotero
percosso
perdo
perdei
perdero
perduto
persuado
persuAsi
pei-suadero
persuaso
(persuadei)
(persuadiito)
piiccio, piacio
piicqui
pLaccro
piaciuto
piango, piagno
piansi
piangero
pi4nto
piugo
pinsi
pingero
pinto (pitto)
piovo
pioTvi, piovei
piovero
piovuto
pongo (pono)
posi (puosi)
porro
posto
porgo
porsi
porgero
porto
posso
potei, potetti
potro (potero)
potiito
( posse tti)
(poro)
precido
precisi
precidero
precise
premo
premei
preniero
premiito
preudo
presi
prendero
preso
presiimo
presunsi
presumero
presiinto
proteggo
protessi(?)
proteggero
protetto
pungo
piinsi
pungero
punto
rAdo
rasi (radei)
radero
raso*
recido
recisi
recidero
reciso
redimo
redimei
redimero
redento
reggio
res si
reggero
retto
rendo
rendei
reudero
renduto (resoj
repello
repiilsi
repellero
repulso
reprimo
repress!
reprimero
represso
rido
risi (ridei)
ridero
riso
riliico
riliissi
rilucero
rimuDgo
iim4si
riniarro
rim&so
risolvo
risolsi, risolvei
risolvero
risolto
rispondo
lisposi
rispondero
risposto
risto
ristetti
ristaro
ristito
ristringo
ristrinsi
ristringero
ristretto
rodo
rosi
rodero
roso
I
TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
245
INFINITIVE.
PPvKSENT.
PERFECT.
FUTURE.
PARTICIPLE.
Romperc, to break
rompo
riippi (roppi)
rompcro
rotto
Salire, to ascend
sAlgo, salisco
salii (salsi)
saliro (sarro)
salito
Sapere, to know
so (8ippo)
seppi (sapei)
sapro (sapero)
saputo
Scegliei-e(seerre), to choose
scelgo, sceglio
sceisi
seegliei'6
seel to
Scundere, to descend
scendo
scesi (scendei)
scendero
sceso
Scindere, to cleave
sciudo
scinsi
scindero
scisso
^^Sk]"""'^'"
scigno, scingo
scinsi
scignero
scinto
sciS'r !""""'■"
scioglio
sciolsi .
scioglero
sciolto
Scoi-gere, to perceive
sciirgo
scorsi
scorgero
scorto
Scorrere, to lay waste
scorro
scorsi
scorrero
scorto
Scrjvere, to write
scrivo (.«cribo)
scrissi
scrivero
scritto
Scuotere, to shake
scuoto (scoto)
sccjssi (scotei)
scotero
seosso
Sedere, to sit down
siedo, seggo
sedei, sedetti
sedero (sedro)
sediito
Seguire, to follow
seguo, sieguo
seguii
seguiro
seguito
Scrpere, to creep
stirpo
Serpeva
serpeute
Soffrire, J , ^
(Sofferi^-e), } '" '"ff''
sofifro
sofErii
soffriro
sofiferto
Solere, to be ivont
S()glio
sono, solito
solito
iSdlvere, t.o solve
solvo
solvei
solvere
soliito
Soi-gere (siirgere), to arise
sorgo (surgo).
sorsi (siirsi)
sorgero
sorto (surtt )
Sospeudere, to suspend
sospendo
sospesi
sospendero
sospeso
Spindere. to pour out
span do
spandei
spandero
spanduto
Spirgere, to spread
spargo
spirsi
spargero
sparso
i^g":r«; }'»«•»=-"*
speugo
spensi
spegnero
spento
Spendere, to spend
spendo
spesi
spendero
speso
Spergei-e, to disperse
spergo
spersi
spergero
sperso
Spingere, ) ,
(Spignere),r°^'"^
spingo
spinsi
spingero
spinto
Stiire, to stand
sto
stetti (stei)
star 6 (stero)
state
Stendere, to extend
stendo
stesi (stendei)
stendero
steso
Stridere, to cry out
strido
stride!
stridero
Stigaere, 1 •
Stiugere, ) ^° ^^'^'^
stingo (stigno)
stinsi
(stignero)
stinto
Stringere, | . l- .1 ^ .
Striguere, r'' *"^^/«^^
stringo
strinsi
stringero
stretto
.Struggere, to dissolve
straggo,
striissi
struggero
striitto
Svelli'.re, ) ,
Q„. ,. ' > to root up
svello, svelgo
svelsi
svellero
svelto
Saggere, to suck
SliggO
Piiggei (sussi)
suggero
Tacere, to je silent
tacio (taccio)
tacqui (tacei)
tacero
taciiito
Tendere, to tend
teudo
tesi (tendiii)
tendero
teso
Teuere, to hold
teugo (tegno)
tenui (tenei)
terro (tenero)
tenia to
Tessere, to xveave
tesso
tessei
tessero
tessuto
Tignere, tingere, to dye
tingo (tigno)
tinsi
tignero
tinto
Togliere, ) , . 7
toglio, tolgo
tolsi
torro
tolto
Tondere, to shear
toudo
toudei
toudero
tondiito
Torcere, to tioist
torco
torsi
torcero
tdrto
Torpere, to 6? benumbed
torpo
torpento
Trarre, \
(TrAere), [ to draw
traggo (trao)
trlssi
trarro
tratto
(TrAggore), )
Uocid«re, to kill
uccido
uccisi
uccidero
ucciso
Udire, to hear
odo
udii
udiro (udro)
udito
Ugnere, lingere, to anoint
ungo (ligno)
linsi
ungero
linto
Use ire, to go out
esco
uscii (eseii)
usciro
uscito (escito)
Valere, to be loorth
ValgO (vilglio)
valsi (valoi)
varro (valero)
valato (Viilso)
Vedere, to see
vedo, veggo
vidi (vuddi)
vcdro
veduto (visto)
Venire, to com.e
Tengo
Tenni (vcuii)
verro (veniro)
venuto (vcnto)
Vinecre, to conquer
vinco
vinsi
vincero
vinto (vitto)
V.vere, to live
vivo
vissi (vivei)
vivero
vivuto
Volcre, to ivill
voglio, v6'
volli (volsi)
vorro
volli to
V61vere,_«o turn
volgo
volsi
volgero
volto
Volgere,' to turn
volvo
volvero
21*
24.6
ITALIAN GRAMMAK.
i^ii^tixbt ©'-erirs*
Defective Verbs ending in ere (long), accented.
calere,
co/ere or cdlere,
lece're and licere, 1
lecere and licere, )
to care for.
to adore.
to be lawful.
pavere,
silere,
sole're,
stupe're,
to fear.
to be or keep silent
to be wont.
to be astonished.
Defective Vei'hs ending in ere {sliort).
dlgere,
to be chill.
rie'dere,
to return.
dngere,
to afflict.
scrj>ere,
to creep.
arrdgere,
cdpere,
to add.
to contain.
soffdlcere, )
soffdlgere, )
to support.
cherere.
to ask.
tdnqere.
to touch.
coiwe'Here,
to convulse.
tdllere,
to take away.
fie'dere,
to wound.
tdrpere,
to be benumbed
Incere,
to shine.
lirgere,
to urge.
mdlcere,
to assuage.
vigere.
to be vigorous.
I
Defective Ver'bs eliding in ire.
ire, to go.
gire, to go._
o/tre, to smell.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 247
VARIATION OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
(These verbs are used only in the tenses and persons which are here given.)
Calere.
INFESriTIVE MOOD.
Present.
ealire, to care for.
Past,
essere caluto, to have cared for.
GERUND.
calaido, caring for.
PARTICIPLE.
cah'Uo, cared for.
INDICATIVE MOOD
Present,
edle or cdl, he cares for.
Imjjerfect.
caleva or calea, he cared for.
Pe7]fect.
cAlse, he cared for.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
cXglia, that he care for.
Imperfect.
caMsse, if he cared for.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
cAglia dglii let him care for.
Calere is generally used with the conjunctive pronouns mi, tiy
ct, VI, gli : thus, tni cak, I care for ; ci caleva, we cared for ;
etc.
248 ITALIAN GRAIUMAR.
Colere or Colere.
INEINITIVE MOOD.
colere or colere^ to adore.
INDICATR^ MOOD.
Present.
!e6lo\ I adore.
cdle), he adores.
Lec^re and Lic^re, or Lecere and Licere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
leeere and licere^ to be lawful. | essere lecito or I'lcito* to be lawfoL
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
Icce or lice, it is lawful.
Pav^re.
INEINITIVE MOOD.
pavere, to fear.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
pave, he fears.
Silere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
silere, to be or keep silent.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
$Ui, thou art or keepest silent.-
sile, he is or keeps silent.
• • •
* From this form are derived e Irdto, it is lawful ; era or fit lecito, it was lawful ;
sard lecito, it will be lawful ; etc., which are used to supply the tenses in which lecere Ls
defective.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
249
$ol6re,
BdGLIO,
bu(5li,
bu(3le (idle),
Soldre.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
to be wont. | essere solito^
GERUND.
solendo, being wont.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I am wont,
thou art wont.
he is wont.
sogliAmo (soldmo),
solete,
S(5gliono,
Imperfect.
\o soleva or solea, I was wont.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
io S(5glia, that I am wont or may be wont.
Imperfect.
ko solessi, if I were wont or should be wont.
Stupdre.
INEmiTIVE MOOD.
stupere, to be astonished.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
stupe, he is astonished.
Algere.
to be wont.
we are wont,
you are wont,
they are wont.
dlsi,
eUgdsttf
dlsCf
INFINITIVE MOOD.
algere, to be chill.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Perfect.
I was chill.
algemmo,
thou wast chill.
algcste,
he was chill.
dlsero,
we were chill,
you were chill,
they were chill.
250
ITALIiVN GEAjM]V£4R.
Angere.
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
angere, to afflict.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. j Imperfect,
ingCf it afflicts. j angeva, it afflicted.
Arrogere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
arrogere, to add.
arrdge.
ARU681,
arrogesti,
AIlli6SE,
GERUND.
arr agendo, adding.
PARTICIPLE.
AEr6to or arr6so, added.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
he adds.
arrogiamo,
arrogono,
Imperfect.
to arrogeva or arrogca, I added
Perfect.
I added,
thou addedst.
he added.
arrogemtno,
arrogeste,
AJiR(5SEKO,
we add.
they add.
we added,
you added,
they added.
Capere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
capere, to contain.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. I Iniperfect.
cape, it contains. | capcva, it contained
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
251
Chdrere.
chero,
chere.
rNTINITIVE MOOD.
chererey to ask,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I ask.
he asks.
Conv^llere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
convcllere, to convulse.
GEKUND.
convellendo, convulsing.
PARTICIPLE.
CONVtrLSO, convulsed.
conveUe.
eonveUcva or -/e'a,
eonvellerdy
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
he convulses. | convcllono, they convulse.
Imperfect.
he convulsed. ] convellevano or -Icano, they convulsed-
Future.
he shall convulse. | convellerdnno, they shall convulse
convellesse.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Imperfect.
I convelldsserOf
if he convulsed.
if they convulsed.
eonveUerebbe,
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
P^'esent.
he should convulse. | convellercbbero,
they should convulse.
252
ITALIAI^ GRAMMAS.
Jiedi,
fiide^
Fi^dere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Jicdere^ to wound.
GERUND.
Jiedendo^ wounding.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
I wound,
thou woundest.
he wounds.
fiedono,
Imperfect.
to fiedeva or fiedea^ I wounded.
Perfect,
fied&i^ I wounded.
they wound.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Preient.
\o fiida ifi^ggia)^ that I wound.
iglijiedia ifeggia), that he wound.
Jiddano,
Imperfect.
io fedessi, If I wounded.
that they wound.
DEFECTIVE VEEBS.
253
Lucere.
INEINITIVE MOOD
lucere^ to shine.
GEEIIND.
lucendo, shining.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
• •
• • • •
lucidme.
•we shine.
w«,
thou shinest.
Incite,
you shine.
Uiu,
he shines.
« • •
• • • •
Imperfect.
io luceva, I shone.
Perfect.
• • •
lucemmoy
we shone.
luUsti^
thou shinest. luceste,
Future.
you shone
lucerd, I shal
[ or will shtne.
igH (/tfca),
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that he shine.
luc'idmo,
luc'idte,
(lucano),
that we shine,
that you shine,
that they shine.
Imperfect.
io lucissi, if I shone or should shine.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present
lueer&i {J,ucer\,a\ if I should, would, or could shine, or might shine.
M6lcere.
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
mdlcere, to assuage.
mdlci,
tndlce.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
thou assuagest.
he assuages.
Imperfect.
io molcdva, I assuaged.
molcevi, thou assuagedst.
dgli molcdva^ ho assuaged.
22
254
ITALIAN GEAJyilHAIl.
Kinder e.
ESTFINITIVE MOOD.
riedere, to return.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
P?'esen<.
riedo,
riedi,
riede.
I return,
thou retumest.
he returns.
• « •
riedono.
Imperfect.
io riedeva or nedia^
riedevi,
egli riedevaj
I returned,
thou returnedst.
he returned.
• • « •
• ■ • •
riedevano,
io riida,
tu rieda,
igli rieda^
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Preserit.
that I return,
that thou return,
that he return.
riedano,
they return.
they returned.
• •
that they return.
S^rpere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
sirpere, to creep.
GERUND.
serpendo, creeping.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
serpo,
Scrpi,
serpe,
I creep,
thou creepest.
he creeps.
• • •
• • •
serpono^
m •
• •
they ci
Imperfect.
to serp6va,
serpevi,
egli serpiva,
I crept,
thou creptest.
he crept.
• • • •
• « • •
serpevano,
• • •
• •
they 01
U> serpa,
tu sirpa,
igli serpa,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
that I creep,
that thou creep,
that he creep.
serpano,
that they creep.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 255
SofFolcere or Soffolgere.
IKFINITIVE MOOD.
soffdlcere or soffolgere-, to support.
PARTICIPLE.
soffolto, supported.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. . Perfect,
toffdlce or soffdlge^ he supports. 1 soffdlse, he supported.
Tdngere.
INPINITIVE MOOD.
tdngere, to touch.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
tange, he touches.
T6Uere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
tdllere, to take away.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
tdUi, thou takest away.
tdllcy he takes away.
• •
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
tu tdlla, that thou take away. I • • • . •
igli tdlla. that he take away. | ....• ••!.•
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
tdlla egli, let him take away.
Estdlhre (to lift), compound of tdllere, is defective only in the participle,
and in all the persons of the perfect of the indicative.
256 ITAI.IAN GRAMMAE.
T(5rpere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
t6rpere, to become numb.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
tdrpo, I become numb. '
tdrpcj he becomes numb.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present,
to tdrpa, that I become numb.
tu tdrpa, that thou become numb.
igli tdrpa^ that he become numb.
IJrgere.
INEINITIVE MOOD.
^rgere, to urge.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
urge, he urges.
Imperfect.
igli urgiva or urgia, he urged. | urg&vano, they urged.
Vlgere.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Vlgere, to be vigorous.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
v'tge, he is vigorous.
Future,
vtgerd, it will be vigorouB.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 257
Gire.
rNTINITIVE MOOD.
g-irg, to go.
PARTICIPLE.
gito, gone.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
'.'.'.'.'.
giamo,
gitey
• • •
we go.
you go. *
• * «
Imperfect. •
giva or gia, I went.
Perfect.
io git, I went.
Future.
giro, I shall or will go.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
•
Present.
• • • •
• « •
• • •
g'iamOj
gidte,
• • m
that we go or may go.
that you go.
Imperfect.
io gissi, if I went or should go.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
girdt, gtria, I should, would, or could go, or might go.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
g'iamOj let us go.
gite, go ye.
22*
258
ITALIAN GRAMaiAR.
Ire.
INTINITIVE MOOD.
ire, to go.
PARTICIPLE.
ito, gone.
to im^
igli ivUf
isiif
I went
he went.
thou wentest.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present,
ite, you go.
Imperfect.
ivano,
Perfect.
(iro, Ir),
Future.
tremo,
ircte,
ircino.
we went
they went.
we shall or will go
you will go.
they will go.
CONDITIONAL MOOD,
(triano), they should, would, or oould go, or might go.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
tte, go ye.
Olfre.
io oViva,
I smelled.
olivi,
thou smelledst
igli oliva,
he smelled.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
olire, to smell.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Imperfect.
ol'ivano,
th«y smelled.
PROVERBS.
259
PEOYERBS.
A word to the wise is enough,
All tliat is fair must fade,
A ragged coat finds little credit.
good
Any thing for a quiet life,
A great liar has need of a
memory,
An old horse for a young soldier,
A buttered Tuoutli cannot say no,
A good appetite needs no sauce,
A good beginning makes a good
ending,
A barking dog does not bite,
A vokmtaiy burden is no burden,
A gold key opens every door,
A fat kitclien, a lean testament,
A new broom sweeps clean,
Aught is better than naught.
All is not gold that glitters,
A sin confessed is half forgiven,
A little spark kindles a great fire,
A rolling stone gathers no moss,
A little gall makes a great deal of
honey bitter.
As you would have a daughter,
choose a wife,
Anger increases love,
All's well that ends well,
A married man is a caged bird,
An ounce of discretion is worth
more than a pound of knowl-
edge,
A lasting stomach has no ears,
After the horse is stolen, shut the
barn-door,
A bird in the hand is worth two in
the bush,
T5end the tree while it is young.
Better late than never,
Better a happy heart than a full
purse.
Better bend than break.
Better give the wool than the sheep,
Big head and little wit,
A buon intenditdr pdche parole.
Bella cdsa tdsto e rapita.
A veste logorata pdca fdde vien pres-
tata.
Alia pace si puo sacrificar tiitto.
A un gran bugiardo ci vudl budna
memuria.
A gidvane soldato ve'cchio cavallo.
Bocca unta non puo dir di no.
Budn appetito non vudl salsa.
Budn principio fa buon fine.
Can che abbaia non mdrde.
Carica volontiiria non carica.
Chiave d'dro apre ogni porta.
Grassa cucina, magro testamento.
Granata nudva spazza ben la casa.
Meglio e pdco che nie'nte.
Oro non e tutto quel che risplende.
Peccato confessato e mezzo perdo-
nato.
Piccdla favilla accende gran fudco.
Pietra mdssa non fa mvischio.
Pdco fiele fa amaro mdlto miele.
Qual figlia viioi, tal mdglie piglia.
Sdegno aumenta amdre.
Tutto e bene die riesce bene.
Udmo ammogliato, uccello in gabbia.
Val pill un' dncia di discrezidne che
una libbra di sapere,
Ventre digiiino non ode nessiino.
Ddpo die i cavalli sdno presi, serrar
la stalla.
E meglio un uccello in gabbia die
ce'nto fudri.
Picga I'albero quando e gidvane.
Meglio tardi che mai.
E meglio il cudr fehce che la bdrsa
plena,
E meglio piegare che rdmpere.
E meglio dar la lana che la pecora.
Capo grasso, cervello magro.
260
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
Bad news travels fast,
Counsel is nothing against love,
Comparisons are odious,
Christmas comes but once in a
year,
Do what you ought, come what
may.
Do not count your chickens before
they are hatched,
Delays are dangerous.
Different times, different manners.
Drop by drop wears away a stone,
Do not look a gift horse in the
mouth,
Every thing is good in its season.
Every dog is a lion at home,
Every truth is not good to be told.
Every body knows where his shoe
pinches.
Every one for himself, and God for
us all,
Every body praises his own saint.
Every body 's friend, nobody 's friend.
Every one thinks his own cross the
heaviest,
Extreme ills, extreme remedies,
Friends in need are friends indeed.
For a web begun, God sends thread.
Fair words, but look to your purse,
Four eyes see more than two,
Fortune comes to him who seeks
her.
Forbidden fruit is sweet.
Father Modest never was a prior,
From those I trust, God guard me ;
from those I mistrust, I will
guard myself,
God helps him who helps himself,
Give to him that has.
Give time, time,
God sends meat, and the devil sends
cooks,
Great griefs are mute.
Great smoke, little fire.
Gold does not buy every thing,
Good wine makes good blood.
He who succeeds is reputed wise,
He who knows nothing, knows
enough if he knows how to be
silent.
He is blind who cannot see the sun.
He who sings drives away sorrow,
Le cattive nuove volano.
Cdntro amore non e consiglio.
I paragdni son tiltti odidsi.
Natale non viene die una vdlta I'an-
no.
Fa quel che devi, n' arrivi cib che
potra.
Non far cdnto dell' udvo non ancdr
nato.
L' indugiare e pericdloso.
Altri tempi, alti'i costumi.
A g(jccia a gdccia si trafdra la pietra.
A caval donato, non guardar in bdc-
ca.
Da stagidne tiitto e budno.
6gni cane e ledne a casa sua.
6gni vero non e budno a dire.
Ognuno sa dove la scarpa lo stringe.
Ognun per se, e Dio per tiitti.
Ognuno Idda il prdprio santo.
Amico d' ognuno, amico di nessiino.
Ad ognuno par piii grave la crdv.'e
siia.
Ai mali estremi, estremi rimedi.
A bisdgni si condscon gli amici.
A tela ordita Dio raanda il filo.
Belle pardle, ma guarda la bdrsa.
Veddn pill quattr' dcchi che due.
Vien la fortiina a chi la procura.
I frutti proibiti sdno ddlci.
Fra modesto non fu mai pridre.
Da chi mi f ido, mi guardi Iddio ; da
chi non mi f ido mi guardero io.
Chi s'aiiita, Dio I'aiuta.
Da del tiio a chi ha del siio.
Da te'mpo al te'mpo.
Dio ci manda la carne, ma il diavolo
1 cudclii.
I gran doldri sdno muti.
Gran fumo, pdco arrdsto.
L'dro non cdmpra tiitto.
Budn vino fa budn sangue.
A chi la riesce bene, e teniito pe*
savio.
Assai sa, chi non sa, se tacer sa.
Ben e cieco chi non vede il sdle
Chi canta, i sudi mali spaventa
PROVERBS.
261
He who buys in time, buys cheap,
He lauglis well who laughs last.
Hear, see, and say nothing, if you
would live in peace,
He is master of another man's hfe
who is indifterent to his own.
He gives twice who gives in a trice.
He who stands may tali,
He that reckons without his host
must reckon again.
Hell is full of good intentions,
Habit is a second nature.
In at one ear, and out at the other,
HI weeds grow apace.
Look before you leap.
Like master, like man,
Live, and let live.
Love me, love my dog.
Love rules without law,
Love me little, and love me long,
Love knows not labor.
Let him who is well oflf stay where
he is.
Long tongue, short hand.
Marry in haste, repent at leisure.
Many a true word spoken in jest,
Much smoke and little fire.
Make me a prophet, and I will make
you rich.
Nothing venture, nothing have.
Nothing is difficult to a willing mind,
Near the church, far from God.
Old reckonings, new disputes,
One enemy is too many, and a hun-
dred friends are too few,
One hand waslies the other, and
both hands wash the face.
One word brings another,
One swallow does not make a sum-
mer.
One man warned is as good as two,
Out of sight, out of mind,
Poor as a church mouse.
Poverty has no kin.
Physician, heal th^^self,
Pluck tlie rose and leave the thorns,
Rather hat in liand than hand in
purse,
Roses grow among thorns,
Chi cdmpra a tempo, cdmpra a budn
mercato.
Ride bene chi ride I'ultimo.
6di, ve'di e taci se vudi viver in
pace.
E padrone della vita altriii chi la sua
sprezza.
Chi da presto, del il ddppio.
Chi e ritto puo cadere.
Chi fa il cdnto senza I'dste, gli con-
vie'n farlo due vdlte.
Di budna volonta e pieno I'inferno.
L' abito e lina secdnda natura.
De'ntro da un orecchio e fudri dall'
altro.
La mal erba cresce presto.
Guarda innanzi che tu salti.
Tal padrone, tal servitdre.
Vivi, e lascia vivere.
Chi ama me, ama il mio cane.
Amdr re'gge senza legge.
Amami pdco, ma continua.
Amdr non condsce travaglio.
Chi sta bene non si mudva.
Lunga lingua, cdrta mano.
Chi si marita in fre'tta, stenta adagio.
Quel che pare burla, ben sovente h
vero.
Mdlto fumo e pdco fudco.
Fammi indovino, e ti faro ricco.
Chi non s'arrischi non guadagna.
A chi vudle, non e cdsa difficile.
Vicino alia chie'sa lontan di Di'o.
A cdnti vecchi, contese nudve.
E trdppo un nemico, e cento amici
non bastano.
tJna mano lava I'altra e tutt' e due
lavano il viso.
Una pardla tira I'altra.
Un fidre non fa Primavera.
Un avvertito ne val due.
Lontano dagli dcchi, lontano del
cudre.
Povero cdme un tdpo in chiesa.
Poverta non ha parenti.
Medico, ciira te stesso.
Cdgli la rdsa, e lascia le spine.
Piutt()sto cappello in mano, che
mano alia bdrsa.
Anco tra le spine nascono le rdse.
2G2
ITALIAN GEAMMAE.
Saying is one thing, and doing is
another,
Silence gives consent,
Strike wliile the iron is hot,
See Naples, and then die.
Savings are the first gain,
Seeing is beheving,
Second thoughts are best.
The full belly does not believe in
hunger,
To pay one in his own coin.
Think much, speak little, and write
less,
Translators, traitors.
The weakest goes to the wall,
They say, is a liar.
The people's voice, God's voice,
To fall out of the frying-pan into
the fire,
The biter is sometimes bit.
The world is governed with little
brains,
True love never grows old.
The liar is not believed when he
speaks the truth,
The workman is known by his
work.
There is always a calm before a
storm.
The beard does not make the phi-
losopher,
There is no love without jealousy.
There is no smoke without fire.
The steed is starving whilst the
grass is growing,
The devil is not so ugly as he is
painted.
The best is the cheapest,
Teacliing we learn.
To cast pearls before swine.
The earth covers the errors of the
physician,
There is no disputing about tastes,
The doctor seldom takes medicine,
The world was not made in one day,
'J ell me the company you keep, and
I will tell you what you are,
Whoever brings, finds the door open
for him,
Where there is a will, there's a
way.
Well begun is half done,
Altra cdsa e il dire, altra il fare.
Chi face, acconsente.
Batti il ferro quand' e caldo.
Vedi Napoli e poi muori.
Lo sparagno e il prirao guadagno.
Chi con I'dcchio vede, di cudr credo.
II secdndo pensie'ro e il miglidre.
Cdrpo satdllo uon crede al digiiino.
Pagar uno della sua prdpria moneta.
Pensa mdlto, parla pdco, scrivi meno.
Traduttdri, traditdri.
Se'mpre ha tdrto il piu debole.
Si dice, e mentitdre.
Vdce di pdpolo, voce di Die.
Cader della padella nelle bragie.
Chi burla, vien burlato.
Con pdco cervello si governa il
mdndo.
Amdr vero non diventa canuto.
Al bugiardo non si crede la verita.
All dpera si condsce il maestro.
La bonaccia burrasca minaccia.
La barba non fa il fildsofo.
Non c'e amdr senza gelosiia.
Non c'e f urn o senza fudco.
Me'ntre I'e'rba cre'sce il cavallo mucJre
di fame.
II diavolo non e cdsi brutto come si
dipinge.
II miglidre e men caro.
Lisegnando s'impara.
Gettar le margherite ai pdrci.
Gli errdri del me'dico gli cdpre la
terra.
Dei giisti non se ne disputa.
Di rado il medico piglia medicina.
In un gidrno non si fe' Rdma.
Dimmi con chi tratti, e ti dir6 chi seL
Aperta ha la pdrta chiunque appdrta.
A chi vudle, non mancano mddi.
Budn principio e la meta dell' dpra.
IDIOMS.
263
Wlio does too much often does little,
Who knows most believes least,
Who comes seldom is welcome.
While there is lite, there is hope,
Who knows nothing never doubts,
What's done can't be undone,
What costs little is little valued.
Who judges others condemns him-
self,
Spesso chi trdppo fa, pdco fa.
Chi pill sa, mena crede.
Chi raro viene, vien bene.
Finche v'e fisito, v'e speranza.
Chi niente sa, di niente dubita.
Quel che e fatto non si pub disfare.
Que'llo che cdsta pdco, si stima pdco.
Chi altri giildica se condanna.
IDIOMS.
Non vale un dcca,
A beir agio,
Mangiar carne d' allddola,
Fare alto e basso,
Amico da bonaccia,
E air articolo di mdrte,
Dar la bdia,
Da bdsto e sella,
In un batter d' dcchio,
Dirizzare il becco agli sparvieri,
Andare di bene in raeglio,
Un udmo da bene,
Dir del be'ne,
Mi convien berla,
Teller 1' anima co' denti,
Dal de'tto al fatto v' e un gran tratto,
Chi ddrme non pi'glia pe'sci,
Questa cdsa non m' e'ntra,
Non e e'rba del vdstro drto,
Mangiarsi 1' e'rba sdtto,
Ascdnder 1' amo nell' ^sca,
Le cdse sdno in budn essere,
Kssere all' estremo della vita,
Stare all' erta,
Esser di budna bocca,
Favellare con le inani,
Non nverjieie,
Yax fildre lino,
Pagar '\\fio,
Dare ad uno carta bianca.
Fia tre gidrni.
It is not worth a pin.
Leisurely.
To take pleasure in being praised.
To do as one pleases.
A table friend.
He is at the point of death.
To laugh at.
Fit for any thing.
In an instant.
To attempt impossibilities.
To grow better and better.
A good honest man.
To speak well of a person.
I must bear it.
To be almost dead.
To say and to do are two diflferent
things.
Idleness begets poverty.
I do not comprehend this.
This is not of your own making.
To spend what one has.
To deceive one under the color of
friendship.
Things are in a good way. *
To be at the point of death.
To be upon one's guard.
To be a great eater.
To strike.
To be good-natured.
To make one do what you please.
To pay dear for.
To give one full power.
In three days.
264
ITALIAN GKAMMAR.
Dolersi di gdmha sana,
Darla a gdmbe,
Vincere ta gdra,
Con bel gdrbo,
Fare la gdtta morta,
Come m^glio vi aggrdda,
Imbarcdrsi senza biscdtto,
i!i impost at 0 di vizj,
Vendere all' incdnto,
Dar r incenso a' mdrti,
11 tiio inchidstro ndn tigne,
Mostrare altrui lucciole per lanteme,
In casa sua v' e il Idtte di gaUina,
Uno mano Idva V altra,
Legdrsela al dito,
Tenere in Zt&ra,
Dare in luce,
Venire mdnco,
Uscir del mdnico,
Far un viarrdne,
Mettere alia vela,
Mirdre con la coda ^ell' dcchio,
Ti faro mdrdere le unghie,
Mutdr verso,
Dar r ultima mano,
Fudr di mano,
Essere alia mano,
Avere la mano,
]\Ietter mano ad una cdsa,
Imbottar nd)bia,
Testa di pollastra.
Fare il becco all' dca,
(5cchio mio.
In un batter d' dcchio,
A quattr' dcchi,
Va in budn dra,
Far orecchie di mercante,
Tutto' 1 mdndo e jm^se,
Col tempo e cdlla pdglia maturano
le nespole,
Star si ne' prdpii pdnni,
Cavar le penne maestre,
La vdstra opinidne non mi quddra,
Qiidsto e il qudnto,
Di qudndo in quando,
Dar nella ragnatela,
Menar tutti a rastrdllo,
Render I'anima,
Ridere agli angeli.
Ha pdco sdle in zucca,
: f-c u
To complain without reason.
To run away.
To carry the prize.
In a civil manner.
To dissemble.
As you think fit.
To undertake a thing without
means.
He is very vicious.
To sell by auction.
To make almanacs for the last year.
Your credit is not good.
To make one believe that the moon
is made of green cheese.
In his house they always eat of the
best.
To help one another.
To owe one a spite.
To keep in suspense.
To pubUsh.
To faint.
To be extravagant.
To make a mistake.
To set sail. n f A
To cast sheeps' eyes. 6c^/<:»J,«^<'^r**^
I'U make you repent it. ^^a-^A"
To alter the course of one's life. 9^^ '
To finish. ^
Out of the way.
To be ready.
To have the advantage.
To begin a thing.
To lose time.
Giddy brained.
To finish any work.
My darling.
In an instant.
Face to face.
God speed you.
To give no ear.
One may live everywhere.
Time brings every thing to matu-
rity.
To be contented with what one has.
To take away the best one has.
I am not of your opinion.
This is the point.
Now and then.
To fall into a snare.
To use all ahke.
To give up the ghost.
To laugh at nothing.
He has not a great deal of judgment.
IDIOMS.
265
J a gallina che canta e quella che ha
fatto I'udvo,
Venir la schhima alia bocca,
Levarsi all' alba de' tafani,
Chi tdrdi arriva male allijggia,
Ten&e il piede in due stafFe,
Piglidr gli ucceUiui,
Ucc€l da valle,
Ugner le mani,
Far venir I'acqua all' ugola,
Vedere il pel nell' u6vo,
Dar le vele a' venti,
A vela e remo,
Venflemmia mentra hai tempo,
La candela e al v&de,
La verita sta sempre a gala,
I miei afFari hanno preso budna
piega,
Nascer vestito,
Zdra a chi tdcca,
Far d'una lancia un zipolo,
Cantare ad lino la zdlfa,
The man who is too earnest in jus-
tifying himself is guilty.
To be in a great passion.
To rise late.
Those who come too late must kiss
the cook.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To play the fool.
A sly man.
To bribe one with money.
To make the mouth water.
To be clear-sighted.
To set sail.
With all speed.
Get money while you can. «
The candle is almost out.
Truth always prevails at last.
My affairs are going on successfully.
To be born lucky.
Let every one care for himself.
To make a little out of a great deal
To chide.
266
ITALIAN GRAMMAK.
I
ITALIAN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Ahhdglio, mistake.
accdnto, aside.
dcqua, water.
adddsso, on, upon.
off anno, grief.
affdtto, entirely.
afft'lto, good-will, kind-
~~" ness.
dgo, needle.
alba, dawn.
dlhero, tree.
alldra, then.
alldro, laurel.
dlma, soul.
nJmdno, at least.
al par, equal, alike.
alte'ro, proud.
ditro, other.
amardzza, bitterness.
diaho, both.
amicizia, friendship.
amico, friend.
amistdde, friendship.
dmo, fish-hook.
amdre, iove.
ancdlla, waiting-maid.
andlito, panting.
anello, a ring.
dnima, soul.
dnimo, courage, mind.
aiimnti, panting.
antico, ancient.
apertvra, hole, gap.
dqidla, eagle.
ardtro, plough.
arcdno, secret.
ardente, hot, burning.
arena, sand, gravel.
arc/enfo, silver.
ascdso, hidden.
aspetto, aspect.
assenndto, sensible.
astdnte, by-stander.
astro, star.
augeJIetto, small bird.
dura, gale, breeze.
aveilo, grave, tomb.
avvendnza, comeliness.
avvemre, future.
avvertenza, precaution.
avviso, advice.
Bdcio, a kiss.
halena, whale.
bdllo, ball.
bambino, child, infant.
bandito, an outlaw.
beUezza, beauty.
belta, beauty.
benche, although.
5/ccA/^/'e,drinking-glass.
bde, anger, passion.
bidndo, fair, light.
birbdnte, vagabond.
bisdgno, need, want.
bizzdrro, whimsical.
bdrgo, suburb.
bdrsa, a purse, bag.
bdsco, a wood.
bottdga, shop.
brdccio, an arm.
brdndo, sword.
brezza, cold, breeze.
brina, frost.
bruno, brown, dark.
brutto, ugly.
bugia, a lie.
budi, oxen.
burrdsca, tempest.
burro, butter.
Cdccia, hunting.
cdgna, dog.
cdlca, confusion.
calvezza, baldness.
cdlvo, bald.
cdlza, stocking.
cambiavalute, broker.
cammino, way, road.
cdinpo, field
canto, song.
canzdne, song.
capdnna, cottage.
capelli, pan.
cdro, dear.
cdrne, meat.
carabina, carbine.
carezza, caress.
carnejice, executioner,
cdrta, paper.
cascdta, cascade.
cdso, case.
catena, chain.
cdttedrale, cathedral.
caftivo, bad.
cdido, wary, cautious.
cdvo, hollow.
ce'na, supper.
cdnere, ashes, cinders.
ce'ppo, stump, log.
cdra, wax.
ce'rto, certain, sure.
cetra, cithem.
cervdlo, brain.
c.he'io, quiet, still.
chidro, clear, fair.
chidve, key.
chiardre, brightness,
clearness.
china, declivity.
chiddo, nail.
chitdn-a, guitar.
ciabbaftmo, cobbler.
cibo, food.
cieco, blind,
cie1o, sky, heaven.
cima, top, summit.
cinghidle, a wild boar.
cittadino, citizen.
cdda, tail.
cognizidne, knowledge.
cogndto, brother in-law.
colazidne, br(iakfast.
cdJle, hill.
cd/lera, anger.
ITALIAN iVND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
267
Tohivatdre, farmer.
cuucorre'nza, competi-
tion.
coniadino, peasant.
(•onto, account.
contrdda, country.
roncito, banquet, feast.
ccippa, cup.
vartuui, curtain.
ajstilme, custom, man-
ner.
cniccio, anguish.
cHcina, kitchen.
culla, cradle.
cadre, lieart.
citpidigia, covetousness.
ciipo, deep.
Dahbene, good, honest.
ddndro, money.
dditto, crime.
dc'l'ole, weak.
defto, word.
iti, day.
dife'tto, fault.
disgrdzia, misfortune.
ddrjlia, grief, pain.
dSlce, sweet.
dolcezza, sweetness.
ddno, gift.
donzkda, damsel.
ddtto, skilful, learned.
droghiere, druggist.
dnfto, right, straight.
diio/o, grief, pain.
Ehbre'zza, drunkenness.
e'lmo, helmet.
e'lsa, the hilt of a sword.
entrduihi, both.
erdrio, the treasury.
erba, grass.
erbdso, grassy.
e7-('de, the heir.
e7-de, hero.
etrdnte, wandering.
e'lio, steep, ascent.
estdte, summer season.
eta, age.
etdde, age.
ct&ee, ethereal.
Fdccia, face.
/dice, scythe.
fdilo, fault.
fdme, hunger.
farfdlla, butterfly.
fata, fairy.
fatica, fatigue.
fato, fate, destiny.
Javella, discourse,
speech.
f<fde, faith.
ferro, iron.
Jidinma, flame.
Jidnco, side.
Jidto, breath.
fico, fig.
Jiddnza, trust, hope,
ficjura, figure, shape.
Jiyliuolo, son.
Jie'ro, cruel, savage.
Jieuole, feeble, weak.
Jidre, flower.
Jidcco, tassel, flake of
snow.
JiscJu'dta, whistling.
Jidrido, flowery.
fdlla, crowd.
fdrte, strong.
frettoldso, hasty.
fuhjido, bright.
fumo, smoke.
fune, a rope.
ftidco, fire.
faribdndo, like a mad-
man.
GdlJo, a cock.
(jelo, ice.
geiido, frozen.
geiiu'to, groan.
gemcbdndo, groaning,
genere, gender, kind.
genitdre, father.
g€nte, people.
gindcchio, a knee.
gidja, joy, a jewel.
gidvno, day.
gidvane, young,
gioventu, youth.
giuhilo, rejoicing.
giitbild/tte, merry-mak-
ing.
giiidfzio, judgment.
giurame'nto, oath.
giustizia, justice.
gdbbo, hunch-backed.
gdla, the throat.
gdta, clieek.
graddsso, a boaster.
gragnudki, hail.
grdsso, fat.
gi-dta, grate, an iron
grate.
grido, cry.
grifdgno, rapacious.
gudi, woe.
gudncia, cheek.
gudrdo, look, sight.
gudsto, spoiled, havoc.
gueiriero, warrior.
guiderddne, reward.
Igndto, unknown.
imbandigidne, setting of
dishes on the table
at a feast.
ingdiiuo, deceit, fraud.
indovina, fortune-teller.
inge'gno, wit, art, skill.
intdrno, about.
inverno, winter.
invidia, envy.
La, there.
Idbbro, lip,
Idcrima, a tear.
Iddro, thief.
laggiu, below.
larva, ghost.
Idto, side.
lavdro, work.
li'gge, law.
legume, pulse.
le'nto, slow.
lettdre, reader.
le've, light.
libbra, pound.
lido, bank, shore.
lie'to, merry, cheerful.
Ue've, lightly.
lingua, tongue, lan-
guage.
lite, strife.
Idgoro, worn out.
Idrdo, dirty.
luccnte, shining.
lume, light.
268
ITALIAN GRA3IMAR.
liingo, long.
ludgo, place.
lusinyhiero, flattering.
liistro, lustre.
Macilente, tliin.
magia, magic.
vidglia, mail, armor, a
net.
mdgro, lean.
male, ill.
vialattia, sickness.
tnalo'ri, ills.
vialdra, ruin.
mdnto, cloak.
vwre, sea.
marito, husband.
viariudlo, a clieat.
masceUa, jaw-bone.
7nasndda, a crowd of
soldiers.
mciio, less.
me'nte, mind.
ine'nsa, table.
mentre, whilst.
mercanzia, goods.
merlettl, lace.
viesdiinello, poor.
mestizia, melancholy.
mdsto, sad.
vieta, moiety.
mezzo, middle, midst.
miglidia, thousands.
mlnestra, soup.
viiserki, misery.
mddo, manner.
mdglie, wife.
mdlle, tender.
mone'ta, money.
mdndo, world.
mdrso, bit.
monidgna, mountain.
md7ie, death.
77tdlo, motion.
motteggiatdre, a jester.
mulino, mill.
Ndno, a dwarf.
ndso, nose.
nutdle, nativity.
ndto, son, child.
nave, ship.
ne, of it, of them.
iiebhia, mist, fog.
nemico, enemy.
nequizia, wickedness.
ndve, snow.
niente, nothing.
ndja, weariness.
ndce, walnut-tree.
ndtte, night.
ndzze, marriage.
niibe, cloud.
nuvda, cloud.
Occulto, hidden.
olezzo, odor.
dltre, besides.
dmbra, shadow.
diida, wave.
dra, an hour, now, at
present.
orgdglio, haughtiness.
drdine, order.
orie'ide, east.
dnna, track, trace.
oriudlo, watch.
dro, gold.
drso, bear.
oscuro, obscure, dark.
dsso, bone.
ostello, tavern.
Pace, peace.
jxtese, country.
paldgio, palace.
pdhna, palm.
palude, marsh.
pd7ica. bench.
paragdne, comparison,
pnre're, opinion.
pd7'i, equal.
pardla, word.
pdrroco, pastor.
pdsco, pasture.
pdsqxia, easter, pass-
over.
passcggio, a walk.
pdsto, food.
pdtto, bargain.
pazzia, folly.
pdzzo, mad.
peggio, worse.
pd>m, punishment.
pendso, painful.
pensie'ro, thought.
pe'ntola, pot.
perche, why, because.
pericolo, danger.
perdnne, perennial.
pesce, fish.
pe'ssimo, worst.
petto, breast.
pezzo, piece.
pio, pious.
piano, plain.
pidnto, tears.
piazza, square.
piccino, little one.
pie'tra, stone.
pigidne, house-rent.
pidggia, rain.
pittdi'e, painter.
piihnn, down, feathers.
pdco, little.
podagra, the gout.
podere, farm, power.
podesta, power, domin-
ion.
pdggio, hill.
pdi, then.
poiche, since.
pdlvere, dust.
po7iierididne, post-meri*
dian.
pdrco, hog.
pdrpora, purple.
portame'/ito, carriage.
pote'nza, power.
pote're, power.
poltrd7ie, poltroon.
pdzzo, a well.
prdto, meadow.
pre'dica, sermon.
premio, recompense.
pre7)mra, importance.
p7-esciutto, ham.
pi^esso, near.
p7'e7ice, prince.
pri7naveia, spring.
progetto, project.
prodezza,ipTowess,ya.\oT
p7'dp7-io, proper.
piigTidle, poniard.
pTire, yet.
Qua, here.
quaggiu, down here.
qudlche, some.
ITALIAN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
269
qualunqne, whoever.
qiiaresinia, lent.
quasi, almost.
quassu, here above.
Rddo, rare, scarce.
rd(/t/io, beam, ray.
ra(//dne, reason, faculty.
rumo, branch.
rdme, copper.
7'e, king.
red/lie, kingdom.
r^dina, rein of a bridle.
regdlo, present, gift.
regina, queen.
re'gola, rule, regimen.
ricchezza, riches.
ride''}te, smiling.
rii,r inbrdnza, remem-
i) ranee.
rfij, crook, wicked.
ripieno, full.
riso, laughter.
ritrdfto, portrait.
riva, shore.
r6zzo, rough.
romita, hermitess.
rugidda, dew.
ruggine, rust.
Sdggio, sage, wise.
sd!a, a hall.
sal dine, sftusage.
sdlice, willow-tree.
sdngae, blood.
saj)u'nte, learned.
sdsso, stone.
scd'c, stairs.
scdpolo, not married.
scdr/ia, a shoe.
scdrso, rare.
sceinpio, simple.
sche'nio, raillery.
schidffo, a box or cutf
on the ear.
schicra, a troop.
sconfitta, defeat.
scop^rta, discovery.
sciido, a sliield.
scuro, dark.
sdegno, anger.
$h, himself, herself.
se'colo, a century.
secco, dry.
sega, saw.
segno, sign.
segrAo, secret.
selva, wood.
seinbidnza, face, look.
seinprc, always.
se'iino, judgment.
senso, sense.
sentiero, path.
seta, silk.
simile, equal.
sito, situ;ition, seat.
scdve, sweet, agreeable.
sdgno, a dream.
sdlito, accustomed.
sdmmo, top, height.
sdnno, sleep.
sdrcio, a mouse.
sorriso, smile.
sdrte, destiny.
sospiro, a sigh.
sdtto, under.
spdda, a sword.
spdsso, amusement.
specie, sort.
spe'ine, hope.
sperdnza, hope.
spe'sso, often.
spina, a thorn.
sp&jlia, clothes.
spdnda, shore.
spdrco, dirty.
squall dre, paleness.
stancltezza, weariness.
Stella, star.
stivdie, boot.
strep ito, noise.
Strega, witch.
subito, quick.
succo, juice, sap.
sudlo, earth, grovmd.
sudno, sound, noise.
Tale, such, like.
tdrdi, late.
tdzza, a cup.
tedffsco, a German.
te'nia, fear.
te'nebre, darkness.
terra, earth.
te'sta, the head.
tdro, bull.
23*
tdrtora, a turtle-dove.
tdsto, quick.
tra, between.
tr^cce, tress of hair.
tribolo, sorrow, a tliistle.
trdno, throne.
tutto, all.
Uccdlo, bird.
uffizio, office.
udmini, men.
usdo, passage.
Vdcca, cow.
vdgo, fine, handsome.
vdmpo, a flame, flush.
vdno, vain, empty.
vdso, vessel, pot.
v^cchio, an old man.
ve'ce, (in), instead.
vdo, veil.
veitro, a grayhound.
ve'nto, wind.
Ventura, fortune, luck.
vergdgna, shame.
ve'rno, winter.
ve'ro, truth.
verdne, gallery, balcony.
vestito, clothes.
vezzo, pastime, pleasure
via, way, road.
vicino, near.
villdggio, village.
vilta, cowardice.
vinte, vanquished, per-
suaded.
vista, sight.
viso, face.
vita, life.
vittdria, victory.
vivdnda, victuals.
vdglia, mind, desire.
vdio, flight.
vdlpe, fox.
volpino, cunning.
vdlta, turn, revolution,
vdlto, face.
Zingara, gypsy.
zimbeilo, allurement.
zifto, hush, silence.
zdlla, clod, lump.
zdppo, lame.
270
ITALIAN GKA3IMAR.
ENGLISH AND ITALIAN VOCABULARY.
Accident, accid^nte.
acquaintance, conosc^-
za.
fict (action), dtto.
ai nil irable, ammirdbile.
ailvantage, vantdggio.
adversity, avversita.
advocate, avvocdto.
age, eta, secolo.
ago, a while ago, long
ago, qxidlche tempo fa,
iiidlto tempo fa.
agreeable, piace'vole.
ainiiglity, onnipot^nte.
aioud, fdrte.
although, benche.
always, sempre.
ambition, ambizidne.
ancient, anzidno.
anger, sd^gno.
answer, rispdsta.
apjiearance, appar€nza,
fdccia.
apple, pdmo or inela.
architect, archite'tto.
army, ese'rcito.
art, arte.
assiduous, assiduo.
astonishment, stiipdre.
auditors, ascoltatdri.
author, autdre.
away, via.
Back, ddsso.
baker, forndio-
lialdness, calvdzza.
\ mWooxi, palldne.
! anker, banchiere.
bargain, contrdtto.
base, vile.
battle, battdglia.
beard, bdrba.
beautiful, bdlo.
beauty, belta.
because, perche.
bed, iMo.
beggar, mendicdnte.
behind, per di die'tro.
behold, dcco.
bell, campdna.
benefit, beneficio.
better, miglidi'e.
birth, nativita.
bishop, vdscovo.
black, 7i(fro.
body, cdrpo.
bold, ardito.
bouquet, mdzso di fidri.
breakfast, coluzidne.
broth, brddo.
burst (of laughter),
scoppidre d^le risa.
business, affdre.
Cabbage, cdvolo.
cabinet-maker, ebanista.
calm, cdhna.
candle, candela.
caricature, caricatura.
carriage, carrdzza.
cause, cdusa.
certainly, ce'rto.
chance, ventiirn.
change, matazidne.
charming, ajfafscindnte.
chimney, cammino.
chair, se'dia.
character, cardttere.
charitable, cnritatdvole.
child, fanciuUo.
chin, me'nto.
circle, circolo.
civil, civile.
clear, chid.ro.
clever, dbile.
climate, clima.
cloak, manteilo.
coast, cdsta.
coat, vestito.
conducive, profttevole.
confessor, confessdre.
consequence, consegu^-
za.
contrary, contrdrio.
conquest, conquista.
copper, rdme.
correct, corretto.
country, pae'se or pdtric.
coward, poltrdne.
crazy, pdzzo.
crime, delitto.
crowd, turba.
cruel, crudeie.
cup, cdppa, tdzza.
cupidity, cupidigia.
custom, costume.
Dangerous, pericoldsa
day, gidrno.
debt, debito.
decay, declinazidne.
decent, decdnte.
defeat, sconfitta.
defiance, disfida.
desire, desiddrio.
despite, di^spe'tto.
despotic, dispdtico.
diflerence, differe'nza.
difficult, difficile.
discovery, scope'rta
disease, malattia.
distance, distdnza.
doctor, dottdre.
dress, gdnna.
dry, secco.
Early, mattutino.
eclipse, ecclissi.
effect, effe'tto.
eloquence, eloqudnza.
employment, iinpiego.
empire, impe'ro.
end, fine.
endurance, sofferdnza.
enemy, nemico.
ENGLISH AND IT^y:.IAN VOCABULAEY.
271
ensuing, segu€nte.
enterprise, intraprisa.
entirely, inieraviente.
envy, invidia.
a-ternal, ete'rno.
ev idently , palpahilmente.
ever, senipre, tuttdvia.
executioner, carnefice.
eye, dcchio.
eyebrows, ciglia.
eyelids, palpebre.
Face, fdccia.
tiilse, fd/so.
falsehood, menzdgna.
tiincy, fantasia.
farmer, fattdre.
tat, (jrdsso.
tault, fdllo.
favor, favdre.
fear, timdre.
feather, piuma.
feature, faUezza.
tellow, ugudle, compdgno.
fellow-citizen, concitta-
dino.
few, pdco.
fine, fino,
finger, dito,
fire, fudco.
firebrand, tizzdne.
fleet, fldtta.
flock, gregge.
flower, Jidre.
fog, nehbia.
hhA, motto.
forehead, frdnte.
foreigner, forestiero.
folk, fdrca.
tox, vdlpe.
fruit, frutto.
fury, fur [a.
Oeneral, generdle.
genius, g^nio.
j^entle, gentile.
•.'entleman, gentiludmo.
girl, fanciuUa.
glass, vetro.
glory, gldria.
gloves, gudnti.
goodness, JKntta
grandchild, nipotino.
grandfather, ivo or
ndnno.
grandmother, dva or
ndnna.
grain, grdno.
grateful, grdto.
grief, doldre.
grocer, droghi&e, botte-
gdjo.
gross, grdsso.
guide, guida.
guilty, colpe'vole.
guinea, ghinea.
Hail, gragnudla.
hair, cope'Uo.
happiness, felicita.
hare, lep-e.
haste, premura.
head, te'sta, capo.
heaven, cie'lo.
health, salute.
heart, cudre or cdre.
heavy, pesdnte.
heel, calcdgno.
here, qua, qui.
hero, erde.
high, dlto.
hip, dnca.
historian, istdrico or
star ICO.
hither, qui o qua.
\\oxne, dimdra.
homely, rdzzo.
hope, sperdnza.
how, cdme.
human, xandno.
humble, livnle.
hunger, fame.
Idea, idea.
idle, pigro.
ill, mule.
immediate, immcdidto.
indolence, indolenza.
infinite, infinita.
influence, influenza.
ingenious, ingegndso.
inhabitant, abitdnte.
inheritor, ere'de.
injury, tdrto.
inn, a I her go.
inquisitive, curidso.
instrument, istrum€nto.
Joke, burla.
journey, vidggio.
joy, gidia.
judge, giudice.
judgment, giudizio.
just, giiisto.
Key, chidve.
kingdom, r^gno.
kitchen, cucina.
knife, colte'llo.
knowledge, cognizidne.
Labor, lavdro.
lace, merletto.
lame, zdppo.
language, lingua.
large, grdnde*
laughter, riso.
law, legge.
lawyer, legista.
leaf, fdglia.
least, minimo.
leg, gdmba.
lie, menzdgna.
life, vita.
hght, lume.
lightning, Idmpo.
lion, ledrie.
lip, Idbbro.
lock-maker, chiavajudlo
loss, perdita.
loud, dlto.
love, amdre.
Maid, fanciulla.
majesty, maesta.
manner, maniera.
marriage, sposalizio.
marvelous, maravigli-
oso.
mask, mdschera.
master, maestro.
meal, farina.
meat, cdme.
medicine, medicina.
merriment, allegria.
midst, viezzo.
mind, spirito, m€nte.
mindful, diligente.
minister, ministro.
272
ITALIAN GRAM^VIAR.
miserable, miserdbile.
miser, avdro.
misery, vus€ria.
misfortune, sventura.
mistake, en'dre.
money, dendro.
motion, mdto.
mouthful, una boccdta.
moon, lu)ia.
much, mdlto.
Nail, chiddo.
name, 7idine.
napkin, salvi€tta.
natural, naturdle.
naughty, cattiveilo.
navigator, navigatdre.
near, vicino.
necessary, necessdrio.
neck, cdllo.
need, hisdgno.
neighbor, vicino.
neither, ne.
new, nudvo.
next, seguente,
night, ndtte.
no, no, non.
noble, nobile.
north, settentridne.
nose, ndso.
notice, notizia.
Oats, av€na.
object, ogg€lto.
obstinate, ostindto.
occupation, occupazidne.
odd, impdri.
often, spe'sso.
opinion, opinidne.
order, drdine.
ostrich, struzzo.
overseer, soprainten-
de'nte.
Page, pdggio.
panegyric, panegirico.
painter, pittdre.
patriarch, patridrca.
paper, carta.
paradox, paraddsso.
parrot, pappagdllo.
peace, pdce.
perfidious, p^rjido.
perhaps, fdrse.
person, persdna.
picture, pittura.
piece, pe'zzo.
pike, picca.
pity, piefa.
plate, pidtto.
pleasure, piacere.
plenty, abbonddnte.
portrait, ritrdtto.
poverty, poverta.
power, potenza.
precipitately, precipita-
tatnente.
pretty, leggiddro.
price, valdre.
pride, orgdglio.
prisoner, prigioni&o.
prompt, prdnto.
promise, promessa.
purple, pdrpora. •
purse, bdrsa.
Quarrel, quer€la.
queer, strdno.
quick, VIVO.
quite, tutt' affdtto.
Eemembrance, memd-
ria*
rich, ricco.
Secret, segrdo,
signal, s^gno.
sink, sentina.
sleeve, mdnica.
sleepiness, 9<fnno.
smile, riso.
soil, sudlo.
soldier, solddto.
solidity, solidezza.
spectacles, occhidli.
step, pdsso.
strife, lite.
superstitious, supersti'
zidso.
surprise, maraviglia.
Tear, Idgrima,
thief, lddi-o.
thirst, sde.
title, titolo.
treasury, erdrio.
truth, verita.
tyrant, tirdnno.
Umbrella, ombrdlo.
Vase, vdso.
vice, vizio.
victory, vittdria.
Walk, pass^ggio.
weariness, stanch€zza.
wit, ingegiio.
witness, testimdnio, mo-
numento.
work, dpera.
word, pardla, d^o.
wound, cicatrice
INDEX.
INDEX.
THS NUMBERB REFEK TO THB FAGBS.
A, 22, 4k\ 44, 91, 123, 163.
Accent, t^rave, 3, 2\), 219.
Active verbs, 188 ; variation of, 188 ; agree-
ment of participles of, 188 ; change in
tenses of, 188 ; become passive, 20-3 ; be-
come pronominal, 209. (See *' Verbs.")
Ndjectives, 61 ; remarks on, 64 ; agreement
of, 32, 64, 69, 84 ; termination of, 61 ;
plural of, 32, 61 ; number, gender,
etc., of, 32, 61 ; used a.s nouns, 19, 62 ;
nouns used as, 62 ; invariable, 62, 70 ;
signification of, altered, (M ; suppression
of syllables in, 63 ; elision of, 64 : place of,
64 ; comparatives of, 67 ; superlatives
of, 73 ; formation of superlatives, 73 ; of
quantity, 62; numeral, 82; possessive
pronouns, 97 ; demonstrative pronouns,
103; indefinite pronouns, 109, 115;
past participles and. 73: adverbs and
(see "Adverbs'") interjections and. 183.
Wverbs, 171 ; formation of, 123, 172 ; the
comparisons of, 172 ; termination in
mcnt"^ 73 ; of time, 172 ; place, 173 ;
order, quantity, quality, affirmation,
negation, doubt, 174; compaiist.n, in-
terrogation, choice, demonstration, 175;
adjectives and, 172. 175 ; adjectives ussd
as. 175 ; article and, 20 ; elision of, 172.
Adverbial phrases, 12o, 321, 176.
"All,'- 111, 112; ur-^ -.i.s adverb, 112.
Alphabet, Italian. 1.
Alqnanto^ 63.
AUrn, 110, 111 ; allrai^ 116 ;
noun, 116.
altri^ as a
its passive
AmiiTt^ conjugation of, 188 ;
form, 204. (See " Verbs.")
Aii'ldre, IGO, 166; its compounds. 166;
Italianisms with, 167 ; conjugation of.
215 ; conjunctive pronouns and, 215.
(See "Verbs.")
Apostrophe, 3.
Article, 16 ; agreement of. 18 ; indefinite,
16, 43, 83 ; definite, 17 ; variations of
definite, 17 ; use of, 18, 19, 20 ; omission
of, 18, 19 ; elision of, 17, 18 ; exercise
upon, 20; union with i>r('i)ositions, '21,
41, 126; suppression of, 74; partitive,
41-43 ; numerals and, 83, 86 ; possessive
pronouns and, 20, 98, 99 ; transposition
of, 106 ; preposition in and, 131 ; verbs
and, 20 : adverbs and, 20.
As . . . a5, 69, 175.
Augmentatives, 76, 81 ; formation of, 76 ;
double, 79 ; irregular 79 ; frequent use
of, 81.
Auxiliary verbs, 141, 186. (See " Verbs.")
Ai-cre, 98, 141, 161, 209, 213; conjugation
of, 186; used idiomatically, 143. (See
" Verbs.")
B.
" Be," auxiliary verb. (See " J&sserc")
Bcllo, 63.
" Better," as adjective and adverb, 67.
Bisoandrey 148.
" Both," 85, 86.
Buojio, 63.
c.
Cardinal numbers, 82.
Cases, 15, 16 ; of nouns, 40 ; governed by
prepositions, 121.
Cnr. 68, 90-93. 110. 162; interrogative, 91,
92; the subj-.mctive and, 93, 155; con-
nection with other words, 93 ; the present
particijile and, 162.
Chi. 90-93, 110, 116.
a, r/, etc., 48, 61, 56, 100, 118, 142, 148,
149, 162, 211, 213, 215, 247.
Od, 104.
Cd?)ifi, 69, 70.
Ccmparison of adjectives, 67 ; of adverba,
172.
Compound sounds, 3.
Con (with article, 22. 24). 129, "l-SO, 1(>4.
Conjugation of verbs. (See "Verbs.")
Conjunctions, 179; in common u.'^e, 180;
phrases, 181 ; the subjunctive mood aad,
156.
Conjunctive pronouns, 48, 55, 57, 97, 209;
with fuidare, 215 ; Stdre^ 219 ; ifolcre,
221 • scdrre, 228 ; taccre, 229 ; te77iere
230^; calcre. 247.
[2761
276
INDEX.
Consonants, sounds of, 2 ; double, 4 ; when
doubled, 58.
Contraction of lo, gli, etc., 22 (see " Union
of Articles and Prepositions," 22) ; of
participles, 161-
Conversazione, 21, 26, 31, 39, 46, 54, 60,
66, 71, 76, 81, 88, 95, 103, l08, 114, 120,
128, 134, 140, 145, 151, 158, 165, 170,
178, 185. _
Costiii, cohii, 106.
Cosi, 69, 70.
Cotdle. (See "TdZe.")
Cotdnto. (See 'Tdnio.")
Cotcsto, 104.
Oil, 90, 91, 162 ; the article and, 92
D.
Da, 22, 40-44, 121-126, 136, 147.
Dare, 166; conjugation of, 216; its com-
pounds, 166, 216. (See " Verbs.")
Days of the week, 39.
Declension, 15 ; of articles, 22-24 ; of
nouns, 22-24, 41 ; of possessive pro-
nouns, 98.
Defective verbs, 246 ; list of, 246 ; variation
of, 247. (See " Verbs.")
Definite article. (See "Article." )
Demonstrative adjective pronouns, 103 ;
added to possessive, 105.
Di, 22, 40-44, 121-126, 163; when used
for " than," 68. DU 28.
Diminutives, 76 ; formation of, 77 ; irregu-
lar, 79; added to verbs, 79; frequent
use of, 81.
Diphthongs, 8.
Disjunctive possessive pronouns, 97.
Dovere, 148, 149, 222.
E.
E, sounds of, 2.
Elision, 3 ; of articles, 17, 18, 22, 23, 85 ;
of pronouns. 52, 56 ; of adjectives, 64 ;
of adverbs, 172 ; of verbs, 189, 195.
£Ua, use of, 56 ; its inflections, 11, 56-
Elliptical phrases, 42.
Epochs, 86.
EquaUty, comparative of, 69.
P^ssere, 141, 142, 161 ; conjugation of, 187 ;
its own auxiliary, 142 ; its formation of
the passive, 142, 204 ; past participle,
187 ; used impersonally, 142, 147, 212 ;
infinitive and, 161 ; neuter verbs and,
206; pronominal verbs and, 208. (See
"Verbs.")
Etymology, 1, 15.
Euphonv, 17, 26, 33, 43, 49, 52, 55, 57, 64,
118, 125.
Exercises, mnemonic, 16, 21, 26, 32, 40,
46. 47, 48, 55, 61, 67, 72, 79, 82. 89, 96,
103, 109, 115, 121, 129, 135, 141, 146, 153,
159, 166, 171, 179
Exercise in pronunciation, 4, 5-15.
Exercises for translation, 20, 25. 31, 38, 45,
53, 59, 65, 71, 75, 87,, 94, 102, 107, 113,
119, 127, 133, 139, 144, 151, 157, 164,
169, 178, 184.
Expletives, 149.
F.
Fare, 166; conjugation of, 217; its com-
pounds, 217 ; Italianisms with, 168.
(See "yerbs.")
Filo, 34.
First conjugation, 147, 166, 188 ; irregular
verbs, 166, 214. (See " Verbs.")
Future tense, 155, 188 ; contraction of, 214.
G.
Gender, 15, 18 ; of nouns, 27, of adjectives,
32, 61; of augmentatives, etc., 76; of
possessive pronouns, 97 ; of demonstra-
tive pronouns, 104 ; participles, 161.
Gerund, 159, 162. (See "Verbs ").
G/?, as article, 17 ; elision of, 18 ; contrac-
tion of, 22 ; as pronoun, 48, 51, 55, 100,
162, 247 ; joined to lo, etc., 56.
Gli, adverb. 173.
Gliclo, etc., 56.
Grammar, Italian, 1. ^
H.
H used with c before e and i, 2, 73, 150 ;
in the formation of plurals, 33, 34.
" Have," auxiliary verb. (See ".k-uere.")
I (the sign of plural), 28, 32 ; exceptions,
33 ; elision of, 18, 189, 195 ; addition of,
200. (See " JL")
Idioms, Italian, 263.
II, i, 17 ; contraction of, 23 ; as pronouns,
55, 98, 162 ; suppression of, 74 ; used for
prepositions, 42.
Imperative mood, 160, 214 ; pronouns after,
51 ; irregular verbs and, 214.
Imperfect tense, 150. 156.
Impersonal verbs, 147, 155, 210, 212 ; how
varied, 210 ; list of, l47, 211 ; essere and,
147, 212 ; pronouns and, 49, 148. (See
"Verbs.")
In, 129, 136, 163 ; where placed, 130 ; union
with article, 22, 131 ; becomes we, 22.
Indefinite adjective pronouns, 109, 115.
(See "Pronouns.")
Indefinite article. (See "Article.")
Indicative mood, 154, 156, 162, 196, 198,
201 ; irregular verbs and, 214.
Inferiority, comparative of. 68.
Infinitive mood, 1.59 ; article and, 20, 147 ;
pronouns and, 57 ; terminations of, 147 ;
used as a noun, 147, 160 ; as third per-
son, 160; present participle and, 163;
essere and, 161 ; lui, Ui, and, 160 ; ira«
perative and, 160 ; contraction of, 214.
INDEX.
277
Interjections, 182 ; in common use, 182 ;
derivation of some, 183 ; agreement of,
183.
Interrogative pronouns, 50, 91 ; phrases,
50,91.
Irregular plurals, 36.
Irregular verbs, 166, 214 ; how varied, 214 ;
jfirst conjugation, 214 ; second, 219-233 ;
third, 234-241; table of, 242. (See
" Verbs.")
Issimo, 73, 74.
Italian alphabet, 1 ; grammar, 1 ; idioms,
263; proverbs, 259.
Italianisms, with possessive pronouns, 100 ;
with tutto, etc., 112 ; with anddre, dare,
167 ; stare, fare, 168.
L.
JLa, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 23 ;
as pronoun, 55, 162 ; as inflection of
ilia, 11, 56 ; before verbs, 56 ; its place,
57 ; before numerals, 83 ; elision of, 18,
56, Ld, adverb, 173.
Le, 17, 18; contraction of, 23; as pronoun,
48, 51, 55, 162; before verbs, 56; its
place, 57 ; before numerals, 83 ; eUsion
of, 18.
Letters, 1 ; sounds of, 1.
Li, article, 17 ; as pronoun, 55 ; before
verbs, 56; its place, 57. Li, adverb,
173.
Lo, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 22
as pronoun, 55, 162 ; before verbs, 56
its place, 57 ; used for preposition, 42
elision of, 17, 22, 56.
Ldro, 48, 52, 97.
M.
Mdno, 125.
Meco, teco, scco, etc., 51.
Mcno or mdnco, 17, 68, 70, 74, 172, 174.
Mezzo, 63.
Monosyllables, union of, 55, 57.
Months of the year, 39.
N.
Names, proper, 19, 35, 41, 65.
Ne, 51, 55, 118, 142, 149, 162, 213, 215,219.
(See "Jn.")
Neuter verbs, 206 ; how varied, 208 ; be-
come pronominal, 209. (See "Verbs.")
Non, 56, 58, 117. 149, 160. 171.
" Nothing," 93, 110, 116, 117, 174.
Kouns, 26; general remarks on, 29; gen-
der of, 27 ; plural of, 32 ; double plu-
rals, 37 ; irregular plurals, 36 ; cases of,
40 ; terminations of, 27-36 ; proper, 19,
35, 41, 65 ; abstract, 19 ; invariable, 33 ;
relation expressed by di, a, da, 40 ; vari-
ation of nouns, 41 ; words used as, 19 ;
possessive pronouns used as, 98 ; infini-
tive used as, 20, 147, 160 ; numeral
adjectives and, 83; nouns used as ad-
jectives, 62; suppression of the noun
after imo, 85 ; exercise upon the noun,
38.
Number, 15 ; of articles, 17 ; of nouns, 32;
of adjectives, 32, 61 ; pronouns, 36, 97.
Numeral adjectives, 82 ; how divided, 82 ;
cardinal numbers, 82 ; ordinal, 84 ;
fractional and collective, 84.
0.
O, sounds of, 2.
Objective, repetition of, 66.
"Of," rendered by il or lo, 42.
Ogni, 109-111 ; og7iidi, 109.
Onde, 93 ; donde, 173, 175.
Ora. 83, 172 ; ogndra, 109, 172.
Ordinal numbers, 84.
Orthoepy, 1.
Orthography, 1.
0550, 34.
P.
Paradigms of verbs. (See " Verbs.")
Pari, 62.
Participles, 161 ; agreement of, 161 ; place
of 64. Present, 162 ; how expressed,
162 ; of active verbs, 188 ; prepositions
and, 163; infinitive and, 163; che and,
162. Past, 161; of active verbs, 188;
of passive, 204 ; of neuter, 206 ; avere,
161; cssere, 142, 161, 187. Pronouns
and, 58, 162 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ;
as qualificative adjectives, 73 ; contrac-
tion of, 161.
Particles, 41, 43, 211 ; expletive, 149.
Parts of speech, 15.
Passive verbs, 147, 204 ; much used, 147 ;
formation of, 142, 204 ; how active verbs
become passive, 147, 205 ; past participle
of, 204.
Per, with the article, 24; contraction of,
24 ; as preposition, 122, 129, 131.
PercM, 175, 181.
Perfect definite, 150, 192, 194, 214.
Personal pronouns. (See " Pronouns.")
Phrases, adverbial, 123, 124, 176; con-
junctive, 181 ; idiomatical, 143, 263 ; in-
terrogative, 50, 91.
Pin, 17, 67, 70, 74, 172, 174.
Plural of articles, 17 ; nouns and adjec-
tives, 32, 61 ; pronouns, 36, 97 ; irregu-
lar, 36.
Poetical pieces, 176, 183.
Possessive pronouns. (See " Pronouns.")
Prepositions, 121, 129, 135 ; in commoD
use, 122 ; union of articles and, 22, 41,
125 ; use of various, 137 ; after persona/
pronouns, 137 ; present participles and,
163 ; repetition of prepositions, 85.
Pronominal verbs, 208 ; variation of, 208
(see " Verbs ") ; pronouns and, 51.
Pronouns, 46; place of, 49, 57; suppres-
sion of, 49 ; transposition of, 58 ; appo-
sition of, 49 ; elision of, 52, .56 ; imper
sonal verbs and, 49 ; pronominal verbs
and, 61; infinitive and, 57; past parti
24
278
INDEX.
ciples and, 58 ; euphonic rules, 57 ;
doubling of consonants, 58. Personal
pronouns in the nominative, 46, 49 ; in
the objective, 47, 50, 55 ; verbs and,
148 ; past participles and, 162 ; preposi-
tions and, 137. Possessive adjective, 20,
97; plural of, 36, 97; division of, 97;
Tariation of, 98 ; agreement of, 98 ; per-
sonal pronouns and, 99 ; as nouns, 98 ;
as Italianisms, 100 ; as expletives, 149 ;
use of, with article, 20, 98, 99 ; demon-
stratives added to, 105. Indefinite, 109,
115 ; used in singular, 109 , in plural,
110. Relative, 89, 97. Demonstrative,
103 ; added to possijssive, 105. Interrog-
ative, 50, 91. Conjunctive, 48, 55, 97,
209, 215, 219. Disjunctive, 97. Reflec-
tive, 51.
Pronunciation, 1 ; exercise in, 4 ; reading-
exercise in, 5-15.
Proprio, 98.
Prosody, 1.
Proverbs, Italian, 259.
Ptire, 181.
Q.
Quale, 36, 90, 116, 155, 162 ; use of, 91.
Qudnto, 62, 69, 70.
Quello, 104.
Questo, 104-106.
E.
Reading-lessons, 5, 20, 25, 30, 87, 44, 52,
59, 65, 70, 74, 86, 94, 100, 106, 113, 118,
126, 132, 138, 143, 150, 156, 164, 169,
176, 183.
Reflective verbs, 208. (See " Pronominal
Verbs.")
Regular verbs, 188 ; synoptical table of the
variations of, 202. (See " Verbs.")
Relative pronouns, 89, 97.
s.
Se* 47, 50, 51, 118.
Second conjugation, 192 ; division of, 192 ;
first class, 192 ; second class, 194 ; irreg-
ular verbs, 219-233. (See " Verbs.")
" Self," 49.
Si, 51, 57. 100, 117. 147, 149. 162, 205, 209,
219, 221, 228, 229. 230, 247.
Signdre, Signdra, etc. y 19 , 56, 99; elision
of, 19.
" Some." 43, 110, 112.
Sdmyno, 73.
Sopra, used for su, 24.
Sounds of vowels, 2 ; of consonants, 2 ; of
e, 2 ; of 0, 2 ; compound, 3.
Speech, parts of, 15.
Sia, abbreviation of questa, 105.
Stare, 160, 166; conjugation of, 218; its
compounds, 166, 219 ; Italianisms with,
167 ; conjunctive pronouns and, 219.
Stra, as particle, 73.
Su, with article, 22, 24 ; contraction of, 24 ;
preposition, 122 ; sopra used for, 24.
Subjunctive mood, 153 ; when used, 154 ;
tenses of, 156 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ;
conjunctions and, 156.
Substantives. (See "Nouns.")
'• Such," 62, 106, 110, 112.
Superiority, comparative of, 67.
Superlatives of adjectives, 73 ; of adverbs,
172 ; of interjections, 183.
Syllables, 4 ; termination of, 4 ; exceptions,
4 ; union of, 55, 57 ; suppression of, 63.
Synoptical table of regular verbs, 202.
Syntax, 1 ; of verbs, 146.
Table, synoptical, of regular verbs, 202;
of irregular verbs, 242. (See " Verbs ")
Tale, 36, 62, 106, 110, 112.
Tdnto, 69, 110.
Tenses of dependent verbs in a compound
sentence, 155.
" Than," rendered by di and che, etc., 68;
by come and cosi, 69.
Third conjugation, 196 ; division into three
classes, 196 ; first class, 196 ; second,
198; third, 201; irregular verbs, 234-
241 ; list of, 234.
Titles, 19, 56, 99.
" To be hungry," " thirsty," etc., 143.
Tt'ttlo. 110, 149 ; its agreement with the
noun. 111 ; as an Italianism, 112.
u.
Uomini, 36.
TJnipersonal verbs, 210. (See " Impersonal
Verbs.")
tino, un, una, 16, 43, 85, 110; when sup-
pressed, 85 ; elision of, 85.
Usc'ire, 42, 125 ; conjugation of, 240
V.
Variations of regular verbs, 202.
Venire, 125, 142, 148, 160 ; conjugation of,
241.
Verbs, 141 ; syntax of, 146 ; general rules,
147 ; irregularities of, 214 ; moods of
(sec "Infinitive," "Indicative," "Im-
perative," and " Subjunctive Moods");
tenses of (see "Imperfect," "Perfect
Definite," and " Future Tenses "); par-
ticiples of ( see " Participles " ). Place
of the verb, 149, 160 ; terminations of,
147 Article and verbs, 20, 147. Noun<»
* Se (himself) was formerly written with an accent, — se.
INDEX.
279
and verbs, 20, 147, 159, 160. Pro-
nouns and verbs, 49, 51, 57, 91, 148.
Union with diminutives, 79. Auxiliary
verbs, 141, 186 ; conjugation of avcre,
186 (see "^rere"); of cssere, 187 (see
JEssere " ). Regular verbs. 188. Active
verbs, 188 (see " Active Verbs " ). First
conjugation, 188 ; conjugation of amdre,
188 ; of cercdrey 190 ; of prepare, 191.
Second conjugation, 192 ; conjugation of
temere, 192 ; of tdssere, 194. Third con-
jugation, 196 ; conjugation of .sent'tre,
196; of esib'ire, 198; of cudre, 200; of
abborr'ire, 201. Synopsis of the varia-
tions of regular verbs, 202. Passive
verbs, 204 (see *' Passive Verbs ") ; con-
jugation of essere amdto, 204. Neuter
verbs, 206 (see "Neuter Verbs"); con-
jugation of partire, 206. Pronominal or
rellective verbs, 208 (see " Pronominal
Verbs) ; conjugation of pent'irsi, 208.
Unipersonal verbs, 210 (see " Imperson-
al Verbs) ; conjugation of pidvere, 210 ;
of essere (unipersonally used), 212. Ir-
regular verbs, 214 (see " Irregular
Verbs "). First conjugation, 214 ; con-
jugation of anddrCy 215 ; of dare, 216 ;
of fare, 217; otstdre, 218 (see "ylnf/dre,"
^'Ddre,^^ "Fare," "<S/dre"). Second con-
jugation, 219 ; conjugation of cadth-e, 220;
of cZwswade're, 220 ; of c/o^cre, 221; ofdo-
vere, 222 (see '■^Dovcre^''); of giacrre,
223 ; oiparere, persuadcre, piacere, 224 ;
of potere, 225 ; of rimancre, 226 ; of
sapere, 227 ; of sedere, 228 ; of taccre,
229 ; of fen^e, 230 ; of valere, 231 ; of
vedire, 232 ; of voUre ( see " Yolere " ),
233. Third conjugation, 234; conjuga-
tion of dtre, 234; of mor'ire, 236; of
salire, 237 ; of segmre, 238 ; of ud'ire.
239 ; of uscire (see " Vscirs "), 240 ; of
venire (see " Venire "), 241. Table of
irregular verbs, 242. Defective verbs,
246 ; conjugation of calcre, 2A7 ; of
colere or colere^ leccre and licere or Iccere
and licere^ pavcre, silere, 248 ; of soicrCy
Stupere, dlgere, 249 ; of anger e, arrogere,
capers, 250; of cherere, conrellcre, 251;
of Jicdere, 252; of Ulcere , molcere, 253;
of ricdere, serpere, 254 ; of snffdlcere or
soffolgerey tdngere, toller e, 255 ; of tor-
perey urgerCy v'lgere, 256 ; of g'lre, 257 ;
of ire and ol'ire, 258.
"Very," before participles, 73.
Vi,ci. (See"yi-.")
Via, 85, 147, 149.
Vocabulary, Italian-English, 266 ; English-
Italian, 270 ; of exercises, 45, 54, 60, 66,
71, 75, 88, 95, 102, 108, 114, 120, 128,
131, 139, 144, 151, 157, 165, 170, 178,
185.
Yolere, 148; with ci and vi, 148; conjuga-
gation of, 233.
Vosigndria, 56.
Vowels, 1, 4 ; sounds of, 2.
w.
"Who." " which," " what," etc., 90, 91
Words, union of, 21, 65, 67.
EXERCISES
ADAPTED TO
CUORE'S ITALIAN COURSE,
AND OTHER GRAMMARS.
BOSTON:
S. R. URBINO, 14 BRGMFIELD STREET.
NEW YORK:
LEYPOLDT & HOLT ; F. W. CHRISTERN.
1870.
\
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
Exercise I.
T}ie Article.
The father and mother. The uncle and his son. The brother
has the pens. I have the books. Who has the house ? What
has he ? He has the wine. She has not the book. The servant
has the apples. What has the shoemaker ? The shoemaker has
the shoes. Hast thou the penknife? Which seal has she?
Who has the peach ? I have not the peach. I have the bread
and the meat. He has the herbs. The man has a fio". The
scholar has a book. Thou hast a pear. Have I a mirror ?
Who has a house ? Has he a record ? She has a guide. The
tailor has money. What has the domestic ? The domestic has
the linen. Who has a friend ? My uncle has a friend. The
mistress has no time.
1. There are seven primitive colors, — red, orange, yellow,
green, blue, indigo, and violet. 2. See the churches, the palaces,
the amphitheatres, and the arches, which have outlived so many
generations of men ! 3. Annina looked at her weeping sister, at
her dear old father, and then expired. 4. Vasco di Gama pre-
S(;nted to the King of Malabar the gifts, and the letters written,
one in Arabic, and the other in Portuguese. 5. The ant is the
emblem of industry. 6. Exercise and temperance strengthen
the constitution. 7. Iron and steel are more useful than gold
and silver. 8. Secrecy is the key of prudence. 9. Avarice
is despicable. 10. The end crowns the work. 11. Walking
1* [5]
6 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
increases the appetite. 12. The gentle answer appeases ^nger.
13. Errors and wickednesses draw ridicule upon us. 14. Na-
tions ought to love peace, and avoid war. 15. Employ your
time well ; cultivate your mind ; love order. 1 6. Reading forms
the heart, and enlightens the mind. 17. Health is the first
condition of a happy life. 18. Gratitude produces all the other
virtues. 19. At the age of eighteen, Romulus laid the founda-
tion of a city which gave laws to the world.
Exercise XL
Union of the Articles and Prepositions.
The gardens of the brother. We are in the room. The knife
is upon the table. The friends are in the garden. I have the
handkerchiefs in ray pocket. You are his friend. The voice of
the man. The shoes are in the room. The wine is upon the
table. I am not in the house. They are not in the city. The
girl has no spectacles. She has no gold. Who is in the street?
Has he the neighbor's book (the book of the neighbor) ? Who
has the father's stick ? Is she in the house ? No ; she is in the
garden, under a tree. Has the tailor my brother's horse? Who
has your mother's pocket-handkerchief? I have it in the packet
of my coat. Is the key in the door, or under the table ? Tlie
man has bread and wine for his dinner. In the streets of
the city. He has the roses from his friend. He writes with
a pen.
1. Give me some bread, wine, butter, cheese, boiled meat,
mutton, veal, pie, mustard, and salt. 2. The power of speech is
a faculty peculiar to man. 3. The bird is known by his song.
4. Flowers are the ornament of gardens. 5. Riches are oft(?n
the tarifF of esteem. 6. They say that our honor is in the opin-
ion of others. 7. The eyes are the mirror of the soul. 8. The
value of things is founded upon wants. 9. Climate influences
the character of men. 10. We prove gold and silver with the
touchstone, and the heart of men with gold and silver. 11. The
EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 7
law of necessity is always the first law. 12. The miser allows
himself to die of hunger in the lap of plenty. 13. Poverty and
misfortune bring about equality. 14. Best is the enemy of
good. 15. Fortune has the first place in the things of the world.
16. Abundance of words is not always an (the) indication of the
perfection of language. 17. History is the picture of times and
of men. 18. The lamb and the dove are the emblems of meek-
ness and humility. 19. True merit is always accompanied by
modesty. 20. Clouds and fogs are formed by the vapors which
come out of the earth. 21. He who opens his heart to ambition
shuts it to repose. 22. The wise man prefers the useful to the
agreeable, and the necessary to the useful. 23. Poverty and
ignorance are the followers of negligence and slotli. 24. The
road from virtue to vice is much shorter than from vice to virtue.
25. Health is the daughter of exercise and temperance. 26. A
salutation, a word of love to the unhappy, is a great kindness.
Exercise III.
TJie Noun.
My brother is a dentist. Your father is my neighbor. My
mother is your neighbor. We have a horse and a mare. They
have a peach-tree and an apple-tree in their garden. This
woman has flowers in her garden. Have you seen the king?
Is the soup cold ? This is a hare. Is study a pleasure ? They
have seen the Pope of Rome. I have an apple in my hand.
Have you a fig and an orange ? Give some fruit to my brother.
The man has a cow and an ox. Iron is a metal. Silver is
also a metal. We are in the path. My uncle has a crane.
Is this your daughter ? Am I your friend (f) ? Who is a
philosopher? Is your neighbor poor or rich? Who has gold?
This man has gold ; but he has no heart. The cathedral of this
city is rich ; but the people are poor. I am a neighbor to a poor
woman. The frog is in the hedge. In the morning. The
basket of fruit is on the table. Eggs are good for breakfast.
8 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
Give me some bread and butter with my good eggs. M^
brother has a basket of good fruit. The cat is in the yard.
Is the meat in the kitchen? The child has a dove. This
woman has some currants.
1. Paper, pencils, inkstand, ink, slate, chalk, sand, &c., are
used in school. 2. The bench, chair, desk, stool, cupboard, and
sofa, are articles of furniture. 3. Among instruments, we have
the hammer, the awl, the axe, the mallet, the saw, the needle,
the file, and the gimlet. 4. For table-ware, there are the table-
cloth, the napkin, the carving-knife, the plate, the salt-cellar, the
porringer, the knife, the fork, the fruit-dish, &c. 5. The mason,
the smith, the tailor, the shoemaker, the weaver, the baker, the
carpenter, the farrier, the knife-grinder, the barber, the butcher,
the hatter, are all artisans. 6. Affected behavior is the mask
of ignorance. 7. We should never judge of the good or bad
character of persons by the expression of their face. 8. The rose
without thorns only grows on the highest Alps. 9. Tobacco is an
American plant. 10. A good conscience is a good pillow.
11. The moth which flies about the lamp finally burns his wings.
12. We obtain love and friendship by modesty and humility.
13. The eye delights in the verdure of the earth and the beauty
of the sky. 14. In that valley, I saw a little village, an old
castle in ruins, and a convent.
Exercise. IV.
The Plural of Nouns and Adjectives.
The good sisters. Celebrated men. Gray coats. The men
are good, and the women are good. The girl has handsome
hands. My shoes are narrow. The kings are in the city.
You are not unhappy. The tailor has a pair of boots. Her
sleeves are narrow. This baker has good bread. Give me some
of his bread and cheese. Is the king in his palace. I have a
cow and two oxen. The physicians are in a hotel. We have
asparagus upon the table. I have seen mice upon the tabh\
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 9
She has rings on her fingers. Give me two bushels of oranges.
Who has two wives ? The Romans have good oxen. We have
good horses and cows. Children are not fools. Your sisters
have no sweetmeats for supper. I have seen the bones and the
claws of the crane. Has your sister seen the beautiful houses
of the rich ladies ? No ; but she has seen their beautiful lakes
and woods.
1. The merchants sell tea and chocolate. 2. The shoemaker
makes boots and shoes. 3. There are many ancient temples in
Italy. 4. The scholars have neither ink, writing-paper, nor
pens. 5. The stone urns in the garden came from Naples.
6. I have sent a dozen handkerchiefs to the w^asherwoman.
7. The tailor makes cloaks and overcoats. 8. Oxen and horses
are useful animals. 9. There are birds upon the flowers and
upon the trees. 10. The strangers have bought coats. 11. There
are diamonds, pearls, emeralds, and other precious stones.
12. The streets of B. are narrow. 13. The country bakers are
not friends of the city bakers. 14. All workmen and work-
women are employed at this season. 15. God is the father of
man, and the preserver of all creatures. 16. The inhabitants
of Gadara honored poverty with a peculiar worship ; they consid-
ered it as the mother of industry and the arts. 17. The man
who does not see good in others is not good himself. 18. Misers
resemble the horses who carry wine and drink water, and the
asses who carry gold and eat thistles. 19. The rivers of
Nigrizia and Guinea do not flow through plains and valleys, but
rush from cataract to cataract. 20. It has been said, that a fine
city without monuments is like a beautiful woman without a
soul. 21. Ribbons, flowers, and lights make incredible meta-
morphosis. 22. The variety of trees and precious shrubs of
landscape gardening were things unknown to the ancients.
23. The verdant, rich, and luxurious plains which are found in
Piedmont are the best-cultivated lands of all Europe. 24. The
order and beauty of the world are manifest proofs of the exist-
ence of a Supreme Being. 25. We know good fountains in dry
^
10 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
weather, and friends in adversity. 26. The gi^ss grows to the
height of twelve feet in the vast plains of Africa ; and, under this
gigantic grass, wander panthers, lions, and the enormous reptile
boa. 27. When Orpheus was playing on the lyre, tigers, bears,
and lions came to fawn upon him and lick his feet. 28. The
muses were goddesses of science and art. 29. Men kill oxen,
sheep, deer, and even birds and fish, to feed upon them.
Exercise. V.
Cases of Nouns.
I have no good letter-paper. I wish to write letters to Pans.
Have you a pocket-dictionary ? Is it not time to dine ? Give
me the silver spoons. My brother has a cask of good wine.
The children are in the yard. Have you not seen the flowers
on the walls ? Here are your father's books. We see with
our eyes, and hear with our ears. The cows are in the water.
The eggs are in the nests of the birds. My father has a saddle-
horse and two hunting-dogs. Have you my brother's pens?
Who gave me this book? Have you seen the gunpowder?
Have you dined to-day ? Yes ; I have dined with some rela-
tions. What have you for breakfast ? I have bread alone for
breakfast. What does he sell? He sells tobacco and gun-
powder. Let us go to buy some ink. Send Luigi to the post.
Whose hat is this ? It is not my friend's hat. To whom do
you write ? Write to your sister. I write to my friends.
Whom do you see ? I see some girls in the street. Have you
money ? No ; but I have good friends. Is this a hunting-dog ?
1. In the city, there are tailors for men and women, and shoe-
makers for men and women. 2. The sun shines by day, and the
moon by night. 3. No one is sheltered from calumny. 4. The
language of a modest man gives lustre to truth. 5. A babbler
is troublesome to society. 6. A foolish man doubts nothing.
7. Abundance of riches do not make us happy. 8. Adonis was
a youth of extreme beauty. 9. Hope leads us by an agreeable
EXEliCISES FOR TKANSLATIOX. 11
road to the end of life. 10. The goods which the merchant
consif>:ned to his sons have arrived. 11. The soldiers have
come from Georgia. 12. The rules of this Grammar are easy.
13. Patriarchs are monarchs of the Church. 14. Mr. A. has
received the catalogues from the bookseller. 15. Success is for
him who seizes upon it. 16. Fanaticism is, to superstition,
what excitement is to fever; what rage is to anger. 17. Woe
to the man whose only ambition is to please mean men ! 18. The
religious fanaticism of the Puritans was the promoter and the
support of the revolution in England.
Exercise VI and VII.
Pronoims.
Who are you ? I am your friend. What do you wish of me ?
Have you money ? I have need of money. He has written a
letter. What have you said to me? A daughter is born to
him. Does it rain ? No ; it snows. They are with her in my
father's house. Tell him and her that I love them. I wrote a
letter to her. They are 'writing to you. I shall go to the post
myself. Do you think of me ? I think of you. Give me a
good stick. Think no more of them. What has he said to you
of them? Let him do it. I do not wish to do as you do.
Wlio is there ? It is I. It is he. He speaks of us. I give
you this ring because I love you. Will you send this letter
to him ? He loves his friend. I love you, and you love
me. I will go with you. She speaks of you. Think no more
of him. Go with them. I wish to see you. She can speak to
him of it. Do not ask it of her. Behold him. Behold her.
Behold us. He gives it to us. We lend them to you. He will
give the flowers to her. I will give them to him. She does
not deny it. Give it to her. She gives it to her neighbor.
I do not wish to see them. Tell them so (it).
1. Silvio Pellico says, " We read, or meditate in silence, a great
part of the day." 2. " I wrote the tragedy of * Leoniero da
12 EXERCISES FOR TEANSLATIOK.
Dertona/ and many other things." 3. " From my heart, 1 pardon
my enemies." 4. " Although Mr. M. was in a deplorable state,
he sang, he conversed, and did every thing to conceal a part of
his sufferings from me." 5. If you do not embrace fortune when
she presents herself, you may hope for her in vain when she has
turned her shoulders upon you. 6. Do not disturb opinions
which render a man happy, unless you can give him better ones.
7. If we wish to know what any one says of us when we are
absent, let us only observe what they say of others in our pres-
ence. 8. Some one asked Diogenes what was the best method
of revenging himself on his enemy. " You will succeed," .-^aid
Diogenes, " by showing yourself an honest man." 9. A vag-
abond dog went into a forest, and, finding a lion, he said to him,
'' You go wandering through the woods ; you suffer from hunger
and the inclemencies of the season. See me : I live, and enjoy
much, without any trouble. Does my life please you ? Will you
come with me ? You know it will be for your good." The
proud and generous lion answered, " You eat ; you are sheltered ;
you take pleasure, and have no trouble, it is true : but you are a
servant, and I am free, and will never serve upon any terms."
10. It is not the abundance of riches we possess which can
make us happy, but the use we make of them. 1 1 . Behold ! it
is Rome which presents herself to your view ; it is Rome, the
eternal city, the city of wonders. 12. Misfortunes shake hands;
they seldom come alone. 13. The joys of friendship make us
almost forget our misfortunes. 14. The prisoner said to the
chief keeper, "What is your name?" To which he answered.
" Fortune, sir, made fun of me, giving me the name of a greaJ
man. My name is Schiller." 15. All the most amiable gifts oi
mind and heart are united in Raphael to render him dear to me
16. Every one complains of his memory, and no one of his
judgment. 17. The soul of Bice was worthy of the heaven
which now possesses it ; and her example sustains me in the
fear which often oppresses me since her death. 18. I heard
Ellen praying ; and, kneeling down without interrupting her, I
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 13
followed her words, with my eyes filled with tears. 19. A bad
poet had a satire printed against Benedict XIV. The pontiff
examined, corrected, and returned it to the author ; assuring
him, that it would sell better thus corrected. 20. Great men
recognize, fraternize, and embrace each other, through the lapse
of ages. 21. A crow dressed himself with the fallen feathers of
a peacock, and, despising his companions, went among the pea-
cocks, who, recognizing him, stripped him of his false plumes, and
drove him away. Then he returned in confusion to his com-
panions, seeking to unite with them again ; but they made fun of
and refused to receive him. Let the misfortune of the crow be
a lesson to us.
Exercise VIII.
Adjectives.
The honest man. The diligent scholar. A sweet apple.
Good books. Are you idle ? She is generous. They are obe-
dient. We are merry. Who are weak? He is not strong.
I am tired. Life is short. Who is ready ? That boy is a good
scholar. The little girl has a new dress. We are poor. Mrs.
S. is modest and amiable. Your friend (f ) is generous. I am
not strong. Give him half a bottle of good wine. Have you
seen the beautiful flowers in the king's garden ? Those strangers
are not innocent of the great crime. We are in a small house.
There are beautiful trees in this garden. Tiiat lady has fine
eyes. I have many apples and few pears. Have you many
friends ? Is he deaf, or is he dumb ? My dog is faithful.
Tlie poor woman was lame. Your coat is not blue ; it is black.
Her hat is white, and mine is yellow. That girl is not ill ; she
is obstinate and ungrateful. Who is that proud young mtin?
The lady is very polite. The streets of Boston are not large.
What useless work! Is she inquisitive? This writing-paper is
not good. They are imprudent. The men who are in that
large white house are honest and wise.
2
11 EXERCISES rOK TRANSLATION.
1. Milton's "Paradise Lost" is a fine poem. 2. The Queen
of England is a kind lady ; she loves the good and industrious.
3. The German lady is very generous ; she always thinks of the
poor, and takes care of many orphans. 4. There are large
forests in France and Germany. 5. A constant, sincere, and
disinterested friend is rare. 6. The short dress, the close black-
velvet waist, and the coarse red handkerchief which partly covered
her face, clearly showed her to be an Alpine girl (to have come
from, the Alps). 7. Doctor S. had great love for justice, great
tolerance, great faith in human virtue and in the help of Provi-
dence, and a vivid sentiment of the beautiful in art. 8. All
social posts can be occupied by honest men. 9. The moral and
political vicissitudes of nations transform a people of heroes into
a horde of slaves. 10. Why are there upon the earth so much
beauty and so many imperfections ? why, in man, so much gran-
deur and so much misery? 11. Aosta, a Roman city, is full of
beautiful ruins of the time of Augustus. 12. Columbus said,
" My thoughts are such as please few (persons) : they are, as I
think, wise, certain, reasonable, meditative ; but yet, to most
men, they would appear vain, foolish, adventufous, and frivo-
lous." 13. I love Torino : I love its beautiful squares, its large
and clean streets ; and I love, more than all, its slow, but indus-
trious, silent, and progressive life. 14. Crescenzio, of illustrious
birth and fine person, was rich, and brave in arms. 15. The
Dutch are generally a patient, laborious, neat, sober, frugal, and
industrious people. 16. Death spares neither rich nor poor.
17. The diligent hand conquers want ; and prosperity and suc-
cess accompany the industrious. 18. The tongue is a little
member; but it says great things. 19. A mild, polite, and
affable person is esteemed by everybody.
EXEUCISES FOll TRANSLATION. 15
Exercise IX.
Adjectives in the Comparative.
Charles is more inquisitive than his sister. Maria is hand-
somer than her mother. These pears are sweet ; but the plums
are sweeter. The dog is more faithful than the cat. We are
more tired than unhappy. He is happier than his brothers.
You are more wicked than I. He is as dexterous as generous.
You are happy ; but we are happier. Mr. L. is richer than his
neighbor. In summer the days are longer than in winter. Gold
is more valuable than silver. Tlie girls are more discreet than
the boys. Rafaello is handsomer than his brothers. Her
cheeks are red as roses. White as milk.
1. The richer man is, the more avaricious he is. 2. The
more Napoleon conquered, the more he wished to conquer.
3. The term of life is short; that of beauty is still shorter.
4. The stork has a longer neck than the goose. 5. In summer
the days are longer than they are in winter. 6. Brass is more
useful than lead. 7. The General was less successful than
skilful. 8. Charles fell into an indifference, which was worse than
doubt. 9. There is more true glory in forgiveness than in re-
venge. 10. Antonio was perhaps as great a man as Augustus ;
but he was less fortunate. 11. The Savoyards have more active
blood than we have : they have more of the impetuous temper
of the French ; we, more of the blessed " far niente " of the Ital-
ians. 12. Nothing is so contagious as example. 13. Generally,
the ,more populous a country, the richer it is. 14. Few peo-
ple liave a more celebrated, and, at the same time, a more mis-
erable country. 15. It is in thy own power, O man! to be less
unhappy. Arm thyself with firmness against present ills, and
forget the happier days which are passed. 16. Women ])roduce
much stronger sentiments in the heart of man by their wit than
by their beauty. 17. A philosopher said, that it was better to
consult women than learned men in doubts concerning language ;
IG EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
because the latter do not speak so well or so easily as the
former, who study less. 18. There are as many kinds of hypoc-
risy as there are virtues. 19. Alphonso, King of Spain, said,
" I am more afraid of the tears of my people, than the strength
of my enemies."
Exercise X.
Adjectives : their Superlatives.
How do you feel to-day ? I feel very well ; I have no pain
m my head ; I am very strong. They have little bread, and less
meat. Your liouse is convenient, ours is more so ; but that of
Mrs. S. is the most convenient of all. That is the finest tree in
the country. We have the best water in town. Your well is
the deepest I ever saw. Her hat is more fashionable than hand-
some, and very large. It is better to have too much than too little.
Maria is more industrious than Sarah ; she is the most industrious
person in the house.
1. The Campidoglio was the most celebrated edifice of Rome.
2. Nestor was the oldest and the wisest of all the Greeks who
were at the siege of Troy. 3. It is a most bitter thing to be
forever separated from our friends. 4. There are very valiant
men upon the American battle-field. 5. Princes are often more
unhappy than the greatest part of their subjects. 6. Self-love
is the most cunning of all flatterers. 7. The most pernicious of all
sins is calumny : it very often ruins the reputation of the most
honest people, makes discord among the most intimate friends ;
in fact, it is the most abominable sin in the world. 8. The most
ngreeable quality that a man can have, is to be civil and courteous.
0. He who is difficult in selectins^, often chooses the worst.
10. A philosopher says, that the grandest object in the world is
a good man struggling against adversity. 11. Intemperance
and idleness are our most dangerous enemies. 12. It is said
that there was a very happy and a very rare exuberance of loy-
alty in C. Balbo, Avhich commanded love and respect. 13. " The
Life of Dante" is a work about which history and literai^u^e
EXERCISES FOR TRxVNSLATION. 17
dispute, as to which shall enumerate it among the best in their
respective categories. 14. Naples and Florence are among the
most ancient and most beautiful cities. 15. We call that medium
distance, which holds the middle place between the longest and
the shortest. 16. The most noted States are not those which
possess the most fertile country, but those which give themselves
up with the greatest activity to arts and trade. 17. The dis-
covery by Columbus was the fruit of a most vivid intellect,
exalted by a very warm imagination, and sustained by an iron
and indomitable nature. 18. Fidelity, which comprehends in
itself almost all virtues, has no merit, is almost no virtue, when
it can be inculcated by fear ; but it is one of the sublimest vir-
tues when it is inspired by love.
Exercise XL
Numerals.
My sister has five books, and I have but two. Your brother
has a new cane. The farmer has 54 apple and 10 pear-trees in
his little orchard. I have two horses, three cows, one dog, and
50 hens. There are four weeks in a month. February has 28
days. A year has 12 months, 52 weeks, or 365 days. He is 25
years old ; he was born in the year 1840. Is your father 60 years
old? No, he was born in 1810. I have bought three bottles of
wine, and six bottles of cider. Give me 22 rolls for 20 cents.
In Boston there are 104 churches, 19,500 houses, and nearly
185,000 inhabitants. How much is 5 times 25? 9 times 72?
40 and 50 make 90. 65 and 70 make 135. We sailed for
Europe on 1st of June, 1820, and returned Oct. 17, 1827.
The first day of the week. The third month of the year.
We have had sixteen bottles of wine, and this is the seventeenth.
My son is three years and a half old. Lula is the third in lier
class. Give me five different kinds of fruit. We are in the
nineteenth century. This is the sixth bird I have seen to-day.
He has spent three dollars and three-quarters for trifles. Tell
2*
18 -EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
us what o'clock it is. It is a quarter past five, And almost
time for supper. Fifteen gentlemen and ten ladies. Twenty
boys and three girls. Twenty-one dollars and seventy-five cents.
The poor old woman said she was eighty-one years old.
1. In our times, it is not rare to see decrepit people of twenty-
five years. 2. Caesar conquered more than eight hundred cities
in less than ten years. 3. Sophocles and Euripides, two famous
tragedians, were both Athenians. 4. The exhibition which
Titus gave to the Roman people, at one time, cost him eighty
millions. 5. Lewis Fourteenth was said to be one of the greatest
kings in the world. 6. Where do we see men of the stamp of
those depicted by Dante in the fifteenth and sixteenth canto
of his Paradise ? 7. Herodotus relates of the ancient Persians,
that, from the age of five years to twenty, they taught their chil-
dren only three things, — to manage a horse, to use the bow, and
to tell the truth. 8. About the year one thousand, St. Bernard,
a Savoyard, founded the useful and famous monastery on one of
the highest summits of the Alps, which still flourishes. 9. A fool-
ish young man asked an old lady how old she was. " I do not
know exactly," she replied ; " but I have always heard, that an
ass is older at twenty years than a woman at seventy." 10. Ma-
sinissa. King of Numidia, died at the age of ninety-seven years,
leaving forty -four children ; he had been an ally of Rome
nearly seventy years. 11. Hospitality is one of the first duties
of man. 12. The Venetians imposed a singular tribute upon the
Patriarch of Aquila, in the year one thousand one hundred and
seventy-three : every year, on Shrove-Tuesday, he was obliged
to send a bull and a dozen pigs to Venice ; they represented the
Patriarch and his twelve canons. They were led through the
city in pomp, and then killed. 13. Henry Dandolo, whose eyes
had been put out by order of the Emperor Manuel Comnene,
was, however, elected Doge of Venice, in the year one thousand
one hundred ninety-two, at the age of eighty-four years. Soon
after, he took command of the Venetian fleet of five hundred
vessels, and succeeded in taking possession of Constantinople in
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 19
the year one thousand two hundred and four. After this con-
quest, he added to his other titles that of Lord of the Fourth and
Eighth of the Roman Empire. 14. The activity of the Savoyards
is shown on both sides of the Alps : it not only sends street-
sweeps and servants into France, but soldiers also, fifteen or
eighteen Savoyard generals having been in the French army.
15. Count Caesar Balbo expired on the evening of the third of
June, one thousand eight hundred and fifty-three, after a few
days of acute suffering.
Exercise XII.
Relative Pronouns.
Who are you? What is that? Which is it? What have
you for me ? To whom did you give the chocolate ? Whose
coat is that ? What does he say ? Whose children are they ?
Which of these oranges is the sweetest ? A man eats what he
likes. He will give this book to her whom he likes best. The
shoes which you bought are not good. Which flowers are the
handsomest? Of whom have you bought this linen? What
have you given for it ? To whom does she write ? For what
do you study ? What is good for you ? What have you seen ?
Tiiat is the lady of whom I spoke. He who is rich is not always
happy. Upon what does he live ? What a beautiful tree !
What beautiful flowers ! He who is speaking is the teacher.
The lady for whom she works has much business. Which of
these two pears do you wish? What is the (f) domestic doing?
Who is going with you ? The boy whom you have seen with
me. Whose horse is that? It is mine; I bought it of your
father's friend. What is the use of appetite without food ?
That of which you think the least is to amuse yourself.
1. Cleopatra wore two pearls in her ears, each of which cost
more than a million. 2. Tell me whose company you keep, and
I will tell you who you are. 3. There are faces in which the
character of goodness is well expressed. 4. He who acts con-
scientiously may err ; but he is pure in the sight of God. 5. What
20 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
is learned in youth is easily impressed upon the mind. 6. Happy
are those who can content themselves with the necessaries of
life. 7. He who does not love his brother does not deserve to
live. 8. Modesty is to merit what a gauze veil is to beauty : it
diminishes its splendor, but augments its value. 9. That which
is most delicate in a work is lost by translating it into another
language. 10. There is a certain art in conversation whicli
gives grace to the simplest thing. 11. Contact with other men
is necessary for him who has to write history. 12. The cocoa-
nut-tree is of medium size ; the leaves of which fall and shoot
forth alternately, so that it is always covered with foliage.
13. Venice is a city unique in the world by its situation; it is
precisely like an immense ship, which tranquilly reposes upon the
water, and which no one can reach, but by means of boats.
14. There is nothing, however mean it may be, that is not useful
for something. 15. Charles Bonnet, who was almost perfect in
heart and mind, tells us that after death all the species mount
one round of the ladder which leads to perfection. IG. At the
commencement of a feast, the Romans used to present a list of
the viands which were to appear upon the table to the guests,
in order that each one might reserve his appetite for that which
most pleased him. 17. A preacher had annoyed all his audience
preaching upon the beatitudes. After the sermon, a lady told
him that he had forgotten one. " Which ? " asked the preacher.
" That," answered the lady, " blessed is he who did not hear
your sermon;" 18. Listlessness is a disease, the only remedy
for which is labor. 19. That which is called Eldorado is only
a sandy desert, which will not offer you a drop of water if you
are thirsty, nor the shade of a tree if you are weary.
Exercise XHI.
Possessive Adjective Pronouns.
Is this your bi-other's pen ? No, it is mine. All that I have
is hers. His book is very good. Our relations are not poor.
EXERCISES FOR TRAJS\SLATION. 21
The daughter loves her father and mother. The son loves his
mother and sister. I love you and your children. Do not speak
against my relations. It is one of my sisters. She is in the
kitchen with her aunt. To-day she will put on her best white
hat, and her new shoes. Go in her stead. He spoke continually
of his father, mother, and sister. Their female friends are not
in the city. Is that your glove? No, it is not mine ; it is yours.
Their good dog is not in our yard. Look at your watch. Give
me my property. Go to his store. These are your apples, his
pears, and my cherries. Who has her nice ribbons ? Where is
my lace ? Give my aunt her money. My dear friend, I have
nothing to give him. They were her people. Her neighbor
was left to guard her house and her cows. She and her mother.
My dear children. Put it in your pocket. She put it upon her
head. He did it with his hands.
1. England owes her wealth to the protection which she
accords to her commerce. 2. Oh, what a longing a prisoner
has to see his fellow-creatures ! o. There is no doubt, that
every human condition has its peculiar duties. 4. Nothing
serves better to confound our enemies, than not to notice their
offence. 5. Every condition has its pleasures and its pains.
6. The great wisdom of man consists in knowing his folly.
7. Our friends foi'sake us when fortune ceases to favor us.
8. A wise man often doubts : a foolish man never ; he knows
every thing but his own ignorance. 9. Euripides complained to
one of his friends, that he had been three days making a few
verses. 10. Conscience is a just judge of our actions. 11. A
sick man almost always says to his physician, My head and all
my body pains me. 12. Hannibal distinguished himself from his
equals not by the magnificence of his dress, but by the beauty of
his horse and his arms. 13. Self-love is our prime mover.
14. "And he also, when he saw me, arose, and, throwing his
•arms about my neck, embraced me." 15. A sim[)leton joked a
man of wit about his large ears. " I acknowledge having them
too large for a man," he answered ; " but you must at the same
22 EXERCISES FOR TRiVNSLATION.
time agree, that yours are too small for an ass." 16. If you at-
tempt to enter into conversation with an Englishman who does
not know you, he will certainly take you for a knave. He will
button up his vest, put his handkerchief well into his pocket, see
that his watch is safe, and look crabbedly at you. Notice his
face : it says to you, " Leave me alone." Yet this same person
is perhaps the most friendly of mortals ; he only wishes to protect
his own independence. 17. A fox seeing a crow, which had a
piece of cheese in her beak, upon a tree, began to praise her
very much. " What fine feathers ! " he said ; " what a beautiful
body ! If you knew how to sing, upon my word there could bo
no finer bird." The foolish bird, to allow her voice to be heard,
opened her beak, and let the cheese fall ; and the fox, seizing it,
carried it away. But the fox soon paid for his fraud ; for the
shepherd came, and killed him for his skin.
Exercise XIV.
Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns.
This is my penknife ; that is yours. These are her pens.
Is that ink good ? Who is he ? Who is she ? Who are they ?
This house no longer belongs to me. What have you in that
trunk ? Who are those men ? What did your father buy to
day ? AVho has given me this beautiful bouquet ? What is in
that closet ? She will do what the master tells her. We shall
go and take a little walk this evening. In the meantime you
can go to our neighbors. Take this inkstand, and give me that.
That is the lady of whom I was speaking. This rich man is
sick. Those poor women are well. That poor child is hand-
some and good. Give those gloves to that man. To this or to
that? This man was learned, that was ignorant. That axe
was lost. I have found this gold axe. Is this your axe, sir?
This morning I worked in the garden. He planted those seeds
which you gave him. This book is incorrect. That grammar
is much used. He loves those dear children. Where have 1
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 23
seen those faces? To whom have you given those plums ^
Have you written to that lady? What did she say to that
news ? I prefer this table to that. This hat is very becoming
to your daughter. She likes these red ribbons, not those yellow
ones. Give me that small piece of cheese.
1. Happy are those who love to read. 2. We love those
who admire us ; but we do not always love those whom we
admire. 3. Those who believe that happiness consists in riches
deceive themselves. 4. We often forgive those who annoy us,
but rarely those whom we annoy. 5. Ariosto is the poet of the
ima";ination, Tasso that of the intellect. 6. James I. was one
of those men who are discontented with their condition, and
envious of others' glory. 7. Plato banished music from his
republic. 8. All the works of nature merit our admiration. 9.
The words of a sincere man are the thoughts of his heart. 10.
" His eyes were closed by his physician, his friend from infancy,
and a man all religion and charity." 11. "I have never known
a more noble spirit than his, and few similar to his." 12. True
grief weeps little ; the tear of the soul is much more bitter than
that shed from the eye. 13. Those who flatter the great, ruin
them. 14. We must do what God sets us to do, and take what he
sends us. 15. There are human beings to whom nature shows
herself a real step-mother ; poor Joanne was one of these
unhappy creatures. 16. The hour of twilight exercises a
mysterious influence upon gentle spirits ; that light and those
shadows which seem to meet only to take leave of each other
(to give an adieu) awaken a thousand delicate and affectionate
thoughts. 17. From time to time, conscience wars against
pride, and attempts to conquer its bad reasonings (the bad
reasonings of this) by bearing witness to the truth. 18. That
sky, that country, that distant motion of creatures in the valley,
those voices of the country girls, those laughs, those songs, ex-
hilarated us very much. 19. The wounds of the body are
nothing in comparison to those of the mind.
24 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
Exercise XV.
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
They have spoken of nobody. She gave it to somebody. I
had nothins: for dinner. The children love each other. One
goes, and another comes. Both are in the city. Give him all
you have. Tell me all you know. The woman knows every-
body. The good man loves everybody. Has any one been
here ? It is said that Celia will go to France. No one is with-
out faults. Some are good, others are bad. I hear somebody's
voice. They are not going into Washington Street. They sny
it was a long procession. Is there any thing new to-day ?
1. Every man is exposed to criticism. 2. All men are
subject to death. 3. Every one has his faults. 4. Take those
books, and put them each in its place. 5. Justice includes all
other virtues. 6. Scipio displayed grandeur in all his actions.
7. All nations appear to desire to obtain merit from the
splendor of their origin. 8. We must have patience, and every
thing will come right in time. 9. People judge others' things
in a different manner from that in which they would judge their
own. 10. People drink good wine in France, and eat good
meat in England. 11. Every period of life has pleasures
proper and natural to it. 12. Whatever reasons one may have
for being absent from his country, there can be none sufficiently
strong to make him forget it. 13. Vice disunites men, keeping
them on guard, one against the other. 14. That which thou
desirest others to keep silent, keep thou silent. 15. Other
times, other customs. 16. It is foolish not to wish to know
any thing. 17. No language is perfect in itself. 18. It is
easier to be wise for others than for ourselves. 16. Every
body seeks happiness, few find it. 20. A preacher, who had
not been invited to dine with any one through Lent, said, in his
last sermon,, that he had preached against all sins except that of
gluttony, because it had not appeared to him that such a vice
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 2o
ruled in the country. 21. Some one asked an American, why
there had not been a monument erected to Christopher Colum-
bus. 22. Every beginning is difficult.
Exercise XVI.
Iridejinite Adjective Pronouns Continued.
What is the best news? What is the talk about town?
Tliere is no news. I have read no paper to-day. Do they still
speak of war? No, they speak only of peace. Every flower
has its beauty. Every man has his virtues. Our friends will
remain in France some weeks. She spends her time in some
useful occupation. They have some good books. One sees that
he is only a child. No servant was ever more faithful. We
shall remain in the city all summer. He goes somewhere every
season. Every one is her friend, because she is good. One can
do much. Every little helps. It is not well to do nothing.
Some make money, others lose it. The girls were jealous of
j one another. One has a fine face, the other a handsome hand.
Both mother and child were here.
1. Any loss is more honorable than to lie. 5. All the
laws and the prophets, all the collection of sacred books, is
reduced to the precept of loving God and man. 3. The pleas-
ure derived from things, in appearance almost nothing, when we
wish well to some one, is indescribable. 4. Speaking with one
and another is a pleasant recreation for every one. 5. No
friendship, however intimate it may be, can authorize the vio-
lation of a secret. 6. God knows how much more pleasant the
name of Naples, the city of my fathers, is to me than that of any
other name of Italian country. 7. Nothing is durable here
below. 8. Every thing has its time; and the usages of war,
perhaps, more than any other thing. 9. In plains we wish for
hills, and on hills we naturally wish to walk on plains. 10.
There is almost no great capital in Europe where they do not
9(5 JiXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
seek servants from some remote, hidden province, and for the
most part from the mountains.
Exercise XVII.
Prepositions di, a, da.
Have you come to find me ? Do not go near the bed. That
boy has fallen from the tree. Give the boy milk to drink, and
some bread to eat. Have you good writing-paper ? My sister
ha>s a good saddlehorse to sell. They say that our enemy is out
of danger. Whilst the child is starving at home, the mother
goes to church to pray. Give that man something to do. Do
not say it in jest. That domestic is not fit for many things.
The little boy plays the teacher, and the little girl the mistress
of the house. He lives out of the town, and keeps arms for
defence in his house. Why have you not something to do ? I
have been sick since last year. Those girls depend upon their
aunt. Have you learned your lesson by heart ?
1. We must be careful not to expose ourselves to danger. 2.
Caesar said to some one who was reading in his presence, " Are
you reading, or are you singing ? If you are singing, you sing
very badly." 3. When the gods love princes, says an ancient
philosopher, they pour a mixture of good and evil into their cup
of fate, so that they may never forget that they are men. 4.
There is no true friendship without virtue. 5. Riches and
poverty have great influence upon men. 6. The city of Florence
enjoyed tranquillity and abundance under the government of the
Medici. 7. Have three things open to your friend, — your face,
your purse, and your heart. 8. Charlemagne sealed treaties
with the hilt of his sword. 9. " Dying, we find an asylum against
the misfortunes of life," said Seneca. 10. We ought to learn
more from observation than from books. 11. "The eternal God
has poured out happiness ; and I, I alone, am without help, with-
out friends, without company." 12. God save you from living
alone, by force (being forced to live alone) ! 13. It was ordered
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 27
by Providence, that, when man is struck with calamity, woman
shall be his support and consolation. 14. The last of the Vallesa
was one of the best and most noble — noble in actions — among
the ministers of our good and popular king. 15. It is not pos-
sible not to find some enchantment in the presence, in the looks,
and in the conversation, of a good, vivacious, and affectionate old
lady. 16. It is said that the suffering of man upon earth is for
the good of mankind.
Exercise XVIII.
Prepositions in, con, per.
From this time forward. From that time forward. My house
is in one of the principal streets of the city. Are you angry ?
Where is the bunch of grapes which your uncle had for me?
Go to the tailor's for your father's coat. With whom do you study
music? We study with the schoolmaster. Are you going to
Mrs. G.'s to-day ? How did the boys go into the church ? They
went four-by-four. The lady saw a little girl pass over (through)
the meadow with a faggot of wood upon her head. I only wish
to speak with you. We earn our bread by labor. Money is to
pay the house- rent. What do you do to earn your food ? Will
you come with me ? The hostess led us into a clean room. The
father returned with the clothes which he had bought in the
village. A dog was sleeping at his ease in a manger full of hay.
An ox came to the manger to eat. The envious dog barked, and
would not allow the ox to approach the hay. The poor hungry
animal was angry at such an overbearing act, and said to the
ribald dog, " May God reward you according to your deserts,
uncharitable villain ! You do not eat the hay yourself, nor per-
mit others to enjoy it. Make use of the good things given you
by Heaven, and permit others to enjoy theirs."
28 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
Exercise XIX.
Prepositions.
She will be here in ten days. It is said there is nothing new
under the sun. We will go together after dinner. They praise
her to the skies. Until now I have been your friend. He is
beloved even by his enemies. Do not hesitate. I shall have
finished this book shortly. He has been in France nearly three
years. There are nearly one thousand souls in this town. I
can do nothing without you. Poor w^omen ! They appear to be
friendless. The good man cannot see my husband without
speaking to him. There is no entrance for any one. Mary set
out for the city with her mamma. She had a little bed at the
side of the lady's bed.
1. Before pubHshing his poem, Tasso wished to submit it to
the criticisms of the bravest men of his times. 2. The poet was
presented to the king by the generous duke. 3. To that unfor-
tunate woman, Rome alone appeared to be a secure asylum.
4. The soldier has every proof of esteem from the most cele-
brated men who live here. 5. Mrs. U. presents her compli-
ments to Mr. M. She cannot have the pleasure of seeing him
to-day, and begs him to excuse her. 6. Mrs. U. presents her
compliments to Mrs. M., and requests the favor of her company
on Tuesday evening next. 7. If you do not call upon me in the
morning, I shall certainly wait on you in the evening. 8. The
country is submerged from time to time, and once Charles was
up to his head in water. 9. Who lives according to the laws of
nature, in this city ? 10. Caroline has found some strawberries
between the two stones at the side of the wall. 11. Mr. L. was
silent ; and sadly he fixed his eyes upon Peter, who cast his
down to the earth. 12. Captain S. yields to civil orders, is a
sincere lover of peace, and aspires to no other dignity than that
of being able to be useful to his beloved country. 13. The cap-
tain was named Schiller ; he was a Swiss, of a peasant family ;
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION". 29
he had served asrainst the Turks under General Landon in the
times of Joseph 11. ; then in all the wars of Austria against
France, until the fall of Napoleon. 14. The hospitality of the
French is the most complete in the actual state of society.
15. Among the Sybarites, women invited to feasts and public
dinners were notified a year previous, that they might have time
to appear with all the pomp of beauty and dress.
Exercise XX.
The Verbs essere and avere.
We are poor and sick. Are you not rich enough? Were
they all here ? Have you had time to go to Rome ? I shall be
at home next week. There is no time to lose. Why are you in
such a hurry ? Be quiet, and you shall have some figs. Be so
kind as to to give that old man a glass of wine. There are
many people who do not love to work. We have no meat for
dinner. I am ill, and have no appetite. The physician is
charmed with the progress of his patient. They have a cold.
The parents of those children have been too indulgent. He has
been to the tailor's ; but the coat was not finished. I shall be
happy to see her in my new house. They have been very polite
to us. She is about to marry. I will come to your house
to-morrow. It may be that I shall not be at home. Her things
are all in a good way now. I look upon thee as a good friend.
There is no hope left. Mr. R. is a rich man, or a man of great
wealth. The rich are not always happy. Good health is bet-
ter than wealth. What is the matter with you ? I am no
longer hungry. That would be useless. Is his bird tame?
Have they green worsted ? Give her needle, thread, and cotton.
1. The city of Briinn is the capital of Moravia. 2. To be a
slave to the judgment of others, when you are persuaded that it
is false is the height of baseness. 3. Happy are those who hate
violent pleasures, and know how to be contented with an innocent
life. 4. Whoever is capable of lying, is unworthy of being enu-
3*
30 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION".
merated among men. 5. It was a sweet pleasure to hear those
songs and the organ which accompanied them. 6. It is easy to
give advice, but very difficult to follow it. 7. Albert R. had
changed his hope of being one of the great of Europe, into that
of being one of the first of his own little province. 8. Arduino,
Marquis of Ivrea, was the last Italian king of Italy. 9. It is
curious that Piedmont, one of the most picturesque countries
perhaps in the world, was nevertheless one of the last to admit
picturesque gardening. 10. The city of Tyre is refreshed by the
north wind which comes from the sea. 11. The greater the
number of men there are in a country, provided they are indus-
trious, the more abundance they enjoy. 12. The ambition and
avarice of men are the sole origin of all their misfortunes.
13. The most unhappy of all men is he who believes himself
to be so. 14. The most free of all men, is he who can be free
even in slavery. 15. Misfortune is the school of great intellects.
16. Friendship and religion are two inestimable advantages
(goods). 17. Not to remember happy days is a great diminu-
tion of misery, particularly when we are young. 18. General
B. said, " I have always believed that the education of war is the
best education that a man can have."
Exercise XXI.
The Verbs aiid their ■ Syntax,
Have you seen the violets ? There are beautiful tulips in
your cousin's garden. How fresh every thing looks ! Every
thing looks alive. The rain has done a great deal of good.
This is the warmest summer I can remember. I think we shall
have more rain. I have a little business to do. I have had a
very pleasant journey. You never will do like others. You
wait for nobody. I will not stay a moment longer. I wish for
a steel pen and a sheet of paper. Tell me to whom you write.
I write to the dear friend whom you have seen at my house.
What noise do I hear ? You said it. I thought you were mis-
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 31
taken. Come home before it grows dark. Take away those
things. Never speak without thinking. They say that he has
never enjoyed a moment's happiness. Do not go out ; it rains.
She was about writing a letter when you entered. It is Henry's
turn to go to the city. To-morrow I shall play the cook : will
you come to dine with me? We shall have maccaroni with
cheese for dinner. Now they ring the bell for supper, and we
are not all ready to go. Let us wait a little. See, my suit of
clothes is finished. How well he plays the violin ! it is a pleas-
ure to hear him.
1. The music of Bellini says sadly, as he who hopes for noth-
ing here below, " Weep and pray." 2. Let us remember that
suffering is the common heritage of the sons of man ; that earth
without heaven would be too hard an exile ; and that life without
God is an insoluble enigma ! 3. " Heaven be thanked, that I
can remember my good mother without the least remorse ! "
said R. 4. The will of God be done. 5. It is a shame to the
human race, that war is inevitable at certain times, or on certain
occasions. 6. Labor and cares do not frighten the wise man ;
they are the exercise of his mind, which they keep in vigor and
health. 7. Those disasters which cast down, discourage, and
mortify the spirits of a man, seem to rouse up the energies of
the softer sex. 8. We should foresee danger, and fear it ; but,
when it comes upon us, we have only to despise it. 9. In war,
fortune is capricious and inconstant. 10. Men wish to have every
thing, and make themselves miserable with the desire for super-
fluity. 11. Great conquerors, like those rivers which overflow
their banks, appear majestic, but lay waste all those fertile coun-
tries-which they should only water. 12. Everybody says what
comes into his mind. 13. When the heart of a man is exercised
and strengthened in virtue, he ought easily to console himself for
the wrinkles which come upon his face. 14. Justice, modera-
tion, and good faith are the securest defence of a State. 15. Mis-
fortune fraternizes souls, stifles bad passions, and binds around
us ties of love. 16. St. Cecilia is a popular institution which
32 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
appears to be transmitted from the middle ages. 17. Letters !
are they not the children of heaven, descended to earth to
console us in grief? 18. Ah! there is much comfort in the
alternations of care and hope for a person who is all that is left
to us. 19. Who, in the noise of our streets, with railways, the
smoke of the engines, and the monotonous rolling of the omni-
buses, would not sometimes sigh for the quiet of a country life ?
Exercise XXII.
Subjunctive Mood.
The mistress of the house ordered her to go. I fear that you
will be late to school. Tell her that she cannot do as she likes.
He does not know if he ought to buy it of him. If he knew it,
he would not tell it to me. We are assured that your friend (f )
has come. If you had studied, you would be more learned. It
seems that she will not give the cake to her son. It is possible
that she may give it to him to-morrow. I want to be home in
good time. I am afraid the roads are very dusty. I think we
shall have some rain. Do you not think that it is very warm
for the season ? I want something good to eat. Here is a piece
of toast, which I think will please you. Make yourself at home.
What fruit do you like best? It does not appear to me that
there is much difference. You say so, that you may not blame
me. She seems to be growing homelier. The master asked me
who I was, and where I went to school. What does he think
that I know ? I wish to give her the flowers which please her.
She appeared to me more beautiful than ever. More beautiful
than any other lady in Boston. If I had such a house. He
wishes to know who she is. I wish that yor would write to my
mother. Let me feel your pulse. Is there any thing I can do
for you ? It seems to me to be very late. Now I must see
your flower-garden and your kitchen-garden. Although it is
difficult, I will do it. If he knew how much he was beloved !
I must go. I am afraid that I shall not be able to go tliere. I
EXERCISES Foil TRANSLATION. 33
cannot believe any such thing. What is it to you if he comes
or not?
1. The preacher said to his hearers, "If I offered you only
promises, you would be excused for not believing me ; but I
offer you certain and present things." 2 " Let us see if you now
have the courage to do better, and to allow yourself to be humil-
iated by the truth which condemns your weakness." 3. Do not
say things which are not true. 4. Do not go in search of perils,
when necessity does not require it. 5. We must found public
schools, where we can teach our youth to prefer honor to pleas-
ure. 6. Very soon James and Charles had the same confidence
as if they had passed their lives together, athough they had
never seen each other before. 7. People generally pray that
God would reward them for every good action. 8. If we do
not flatter ourselves, the flattery of others will never hurt us.
9. " Alas ! " cried Mrs. P., " I fear that my son is dead ; and I
know not what I shall do." 10. Whatever may have been
Louisa's intentions, she has not done as well as she might.
11. The larger a kingdom is, the more ofiicers are required to
do what the chief magistrate could not accomplish by himself.
12. What a shame it is, that the most elevated men make their
grandeur consist in their money-bags. 13. Who has not need
of a friend who loves the truth only, and who will tell you the
truth in spite of yourself? 14. The statue of Zenobia was in so
life like a posture, that one could almost believe that she would
walk. 15. How many exiles have exclaimed, " Would to God
that I had never left my country!" 16. When a good general
is killed, all the camp is like a disconsolate family which has
lost the father, who was the cherished hope of his tender little
ones. 17. It was only with the good parent, that the discreet
child did not use circumspection in manifesting all the secrets of
his heart.
34 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
Exercise XXm.
Infinitive and Participles.
"We are beloved by all our friends. I have been out of town
all winter. They have arrived in England. "When he arrived
at the church door, he found it shut. She is very acute at rail-
lery. They have not found the dog which was lost. I have
seen a orreeu worm on the rose-bush. It is not all in commenc-
ing. The fire is spread throughout the city. Do not fear that
I go away ; your manners please me too much. She has had
time to repent of it. "Who can say much in few words ? Seeing
her going away. It seemed to him that he saw his lady. "When
I had said thus. "Who can have done that ? She must go very
soon. I have always loved good old people. He has been very
kind to us. She has given two dresses to her servant. Having
rested his weary body, he got up. On his departure, he gave
each child a dollar. I believe that you are all asleep. "Who has
told all these things to our father ? Where has he bought that
fine horse ? I have paid more for my feathers than they are
worth. If I could have some pretty ribbon to trim my dress.
That man has gained much money. Your son has spent more
than you can ever earn. He has not rendered an exact ac-
count of every thing. Never speak at random. "When the
night was spent. He is oppressed by cares. To be master of a
thing. He has been the Lord Mayor of London. They have
spent about twenty crowns. I walked about ten miles. To
condemn one without hearing. My friend is about to marry a rich
woman. Have you fed that little white dog of yours ? Mr. S.
has brought you a gold ring from the city. I have eaten so
much that I cannot go. "Who would have believed it? How
can that be ? It looks so very nice. "Will you have the good-
ness to ring the bell ? My brother has taken three cups of tea,
and asks for more.
\. The providence of God keeps us from perishing ; the power
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 35
of God prevents us doing those things which displease him ; and
the goodness of God preserves us from auffering. 2. There are
but few people who are satisfied with their lot. 3. It is easy
to give advice, but difficult to follow it. 4. Signor Domenico,
believing himself a learned and wise man, but not knowing
what to with his knowledge, made a physician of himself,
without ever having studied medicine. 5. Even in prison, there
are persons afflicted to console, sick to cure, weak to comfort,
and strono- to confirm. 6. We are oblio;ed to confess that our
soul, mind, heart, and all our affections, have too restricted limits,
7. Many cities have desired to become the capital of a great
empire. 8. The lack of maritime power is a great injury to a
nation. 9. We are machines moved by habit. 10. Let us write
from the dictation of our heart, provided it is free and uncorrupt.
11. We see ruined churches, castles, and convents of the middle
ages throughout all Europe ; the surface of Italy is covered with
them. 12. "I stood at that window palpitating, shuddering, and
staring about until morning, when I descended oppressed with a
mortal sadness, and imagining myself much more injured than I
really was." 13. It is always sad to be obliged to leave one's
country through misfortune ; but to leave it in chains, and be
carried into horrible climates, is so afflicting that no terms can
express it! 14. Saint Nilo, moved to pity by the cruel treat-
ment inflicted on his countryman Filigato, went to the young
emperor Otto, and, supplicating and weeping, demanded mercy
for the prisoner. 15. The twins Romulus and Remus, being
exposed by order of the king, were found and secretly educated
by a shepherd named Faustolo.
Exercise XXIV.
The Verbs andare, fare, stare, and dare.
The sun sets. I have much to do. Three months ago. I
have never harmed any one. He will go at daybreak. He did
his best. He will set sail at three o'clock. We live a regular
36 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
life. He did not know how to wish a happy new year. He has
just published my new work. That parrot has disturbed me
very much. She pretended not to hear what the beggar said.
I beg you to come to live with us. We are accustomed to take
breakfast at seven o'clock. Can you not keep still ? Tell her,
that I say she may do as she likes. How she stands like a
marble statue ! How is it that this man is your husband ? Go
for the doctor. Mr. Lewis has given me a beautiful white hen.
I am on the point of leaving for Europe. Where do you live ?
How do you do ? How is your mother ? Are your sisters well ?
When I was standing at the window, I saw the soldiers pass by.
Be quiet, child ! This is the question. Stay as long as you
please. Where does she live ? This city stands in a plain.
He is obliofed to live on bread and water. These clothes cost
me twenty crowns. Why are you so thoughtful ? I am read-
ing. I love to live friendly with everybody. When the worst
comes to the worst, he will sell the house. You must welcome
him. Give me good fruit, bread, and wine, and I shall be
satisfied.
1. True dignity is not in pride. 2. So goes the world.
3. Minerva gave the olive, fruit of a tree planted by her, to the
inhabitants of proud Athens. 4. Wild beasts are not so cruel as
men : lions do not wage war upon lions, nor tigers upon tigers :
yet man alone, despite his reason, does that which animals without
reason never do. 5. Is there not land enough to give to all men
more than they can cultivate ? 6. If we eat more food than is
necessary, it poisons instead of nourishing us. 7. Hasten, O
young man ! to go where destiny calls : go unhesitatingly to the
field of battle. 8. As represented, the frightful Pluto was seated
upon a throne of ebony. 9. Virtue is the greatest gift which
the good God can give us. 10. We must not take the life of one
man into account, when the safety of the nation is at stake.
11. " Go, good mother, go to heaven, and find your child."
12. When misfortunes commence in a house, it often happens
that even indifferent people fear for themselves. 13. " Then I
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 37
saw how things came, how they went, and how they would go."
14. "This silence is not to my taste," said the captain; "it pre-
sages no good." 15. The country of Phcenecia is at the foot of
the Lebanon Mountains, whose tops pierce the clouds, and go to
touch the stars. , 16. The unhappy father does not know where
he is, what he is doing, or what he ought to do, and goes calling
his lost son. 17. True praise is that which is given in the
absence of the person praised. 18. Whilst we are in the midst
of delights, we do not wish to see or hear any thing which can
interrupt their enjoyment.
Exercise XXV.
Adverbs.
Where are you going? Where is your stick? They are
often unhappy. My aunt is seldom satisfied. Henceforth I
shall do nothing for that family. They have treated me most
ungenerously. Bravo my friend ! you have spoken very well. I
am afraid it will be too late to do good. We will go directly.
Have you finished already? You read newspapers continually.
I shall finish in the twinkling of an eye. The young man came
unexpectedly. We seldom go out. I am always in a hurry.
How quickly he moves ! They must go very soon. I heard of
it a short time ago. They were seen near the house. The men
whom you wish to see are not here. The good general is wel-
come everywhere. I am better to-day than I was yesterday.
Now-a-days she is seldom at home. They are constantly coming
here. I am almost asleep. I have waited a long time, and she
does not come. In general, he is very proud to his inferiors.
When he leaves, I shall leave also. You are advised to go
immediately. At what o'clock does the packet start? Let us
walk faster. Write to me immediately. Without fail. They
can sleep here. Your rooms are ready. How much are we
indebted to you ? It is very disagreeable to travel alone. T
4
38 EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
have travelled this way several times. With best wishes, yours
truly. Do not vrait longer.
1. Sextus v., when he was cardinal, pretended to be extenu-
ated by years and infirmities, and went very stooping. 2. It
often happens that men reap more advantage from their mistakes,
than from the good deeds they have done. 3. Happy are those
who have never wandered from the straight road of virtue !
4. People are continually talking of virtue and of merit, without
knowing what they are. 5. The wise man loves truth, and never
tells a lie. 6. We seldom repent of speaking too little, but often
of speaking too much. 7. Cato the censor never ceased to repre-
sent to the Senate the sad consequences of luxury. 8. Perhaps
there is no greater absurdity than that so often repeated, of the
peace of mind of the just. 9. At any rate. Napoleon was cer-
tainly, in a military point of view, greater than Charlemagne, or
any other ; and particularly so in the conception of the wonderful
campaign of 1800. 10. Good-luck, like ill-luck, never comes
alone. 11. Behold me, then, in a sort of society, when 1 was
prepared for a greater soUtude than before. 12. The secretary
was very humane, and spoke of religion with affection and dignity.
13. In Germany, priests are accustomed to dress like laymen.
14. True dignity consists in being ashamed only of mean actions.
Exercise XXVI.
Promiscuous Exercises.
Go ! what nonsense (childishness) ! And so ! What is it ?
Speak, then. The man is never satisfied. Will you never have
done ? The sky is as fine now as it ever was. He was near his
end. Oh, how happy I am ! He is so-so. Such like. Whilst
you read, I write. Come with me, and show me where I may
go. He goes so well. I am very well. It would go ill with
me if I had nothing else to live upon.
1. Alas, how full of contradictions is man ! 2. Oh, how
pleasant is the sympathy of our fellow-creatures ! 3. Oh, how
EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION. . 39
unjust are men, judging by appearances, and according to their
owu superb prejudices ! 4. O Italy, Italy ! when shall I have
the pleasure of seeing you again ? 5. Oh ! if I could do it,
I would do it willingly. 6. He loves me because I merit it.
7. Oh, so ! let us speak of something else. 8. There is no honor-
able retreat for a gotH|;id wise man, except in company of the
Muses. 9. We should never be prejudiced against a man
because he has a fierce aspect. 10. The rich, who have never
experienced want nor the necessity of considering or paying for
the comforts of life, know nothing of the pleasure of economy.
11. Have you made all your preparations for departure?
12. Every thing is ready. 13. Send for a porter to carry my
luggage. 14. I shall take the railway omnibus, and start in five
minutes. 15. It seems to me to be very late. 16. How soon
shall we be at the terminus? 17. I am afraid of being too late
for the nine o'clock train. 18. Here we are at the terminus : we
are never too late. 19. The train will start in five minutes.
20. Make haste and take your ticket. 21. What luggage have
you ? 22. I have two trunks, three carpet-bags, and one hat-box.
23. Here is the locomotive engine that is to draw us. 24. Have
we two engines ? 25. It requires a very great force to draw a
train of twenty-five carriages. 26. What is the power of those
engines ? 27. They are each of twenty-horse power. 28. Are
you going by the express train? 29. No, this is the accommo-
dation train. 30. At what o'clock does the baorsrao-e train start ?
3 1 . There are two a day : one starts at ten o'clock in the morn-
ing, and the other at three in the afternoon. 32. Does your
father come with us? 33. No: he goes in the express train.
34. Make haste : the train is just going to start. 35. That is the
signal for starting. We are off. 36. We are already far from
the terminus. 37. We have already gone four or five leagues.
38. We have gone just six miles. 39. We went the last mile
in two minutes. 40. We go a mile and a half in a minute.
41. This is quick travelling. 42. But for your assistance, I
Bliould have lost all. 43. Should you have undertaken it, if you
40 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
had thought it so difficult ? 44. Persevere, and you will succeed.
45. I heard them firinf]j all the mornino;. 46. I felt her hand
trembling in mine. 47. He saw his dog torn in pieces at his
feet. 48. It would be necessary for him to see her. 49. I
want some sealing-wax. 50. Do you want any thing else?
51. We often lose more time in idly J(|?etting an evil than
would be necessary to remedy it. 52. I would certainly do it,
if it were necessary. 53. You might have broken your neck.
54. You might have forwarded your letter by his servant.
55. He would answer though he had been advised not to speak.
56. It must not be told to any one. 57. I would not liave acted
thus. 58. They would have neither roast beef nor pie. 59. His
sister is ill : he must go and see her. 60. The fact must
have taken place an hour after nightfall. 61. He owes me
now a thousand pounds ; last year he owed me twelve hundred.
62. Always carry an umbrella when it is fine. 63. Is not
friendship the greatest of earthly blessings? 64. Have you
not been to see the crater of Mount Vesuvius ? 65. Did you
not go as far as Turin by the railroad ? QQ. Is your uncle's
agent yet arrived ? 67. Should you be displeased, if I gave you
any more examples ? 68. Do you write to her sister to-day ?
69. He is so silly and so tiresome that I cannot bear him.
70. He has so much wealth that he does not know what to do
with it. 71. I like neither his person, his family, nor his
fortune. 72. In the sweat of thy brow shalt thou eat bread till
thou return to the ground from whence thou wast taken ; for
dust thou art, and to dust thou shalt return. 73. You shall not
speak English : you shall speak Italian, nothing but Italian, with
your teacher. 74. Do not go into the current : you will be
drowned, as you cannot swim. 75. I shall die in a land of
strangers, and not a tear will be shed upon my grave. 76. Yes ;
and your death will be just as much felt in the world as that of
a worm or a fly. 77. True ; but it will not be the less a matter
of infinite moment to me. 78. Speak well of your friend; of
your enemy, neither well nor ill. 79. The truly virtuous man
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 41
fears neither poverty, afflictions, nor death. 80. The poor man
has neither relatives, acquaintances, nor friends. 81. Either say
nothing of the absent, or speak like a friend. 82. The good man
possesses a happiness which the world can neither give nor take
away. 83. On the fifteenth of next month, when I have won
tlie capital prize. 84. Chaucer, the father of English poetry, was
horn in thirteen hundred and twenty-eight, and died in fourteen
hundred, in the seventy-second year of his age. He had thus
lived in the reigns of Edward the Third, Richard the Second,
and Henry the Fourth. 85. Swans are an ornament to lakes
and rivers. The swans of Australia are black. 86. Knowledge
is the eye of youth, and the staff of age. 87. I flatter my-
self you will be satisfied with your daughter's pronunciation.
88. One should avail one's self of every opportunity to acquire
knowledge. 89. Mr. B. thinks himself a great man ; but he
deceives himself 90. The horseman and horse that fell down
the precipice are both dead. 91. Is this the lady from whom
you received the letter which you mentioned? 92. That is the
goldsmith by whom this ring was made. 93. The fruit of that
forbidden tree, whose mortal taste brought death into the world.
94. The lishtnina: has blasted that beautiful tree, the fruit of
which was so delicious. 95. Never defer till to-morrow what
you can do to-day. 96. Shun poverty: whatever be your in-
come, spend less. 97. This is bad ; that is worse : these are so-so ;
those are the worst of all. 98. There is but one lasting afflic-
tion, — that which is caused by the loss of self-esteem. 99. Share
this melon with your play-fellows; give each of them a slice.
1 00, My brothers are both returned from college; each has
obtained a prize. 101. All fools are not knaves ; but all knaves
are fools. 102. Mr. A. has failed: shall you lose the money he
owes you? 103. I shall have published the second edition of
my Dictionary before the end of the year. 104. When you have
studied Italian two years, you will understand what you read.
105. He will have spent half his fortune before inheriting it.
lOG. He who listens through a hole may hear what will not
42 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
please him. 107. " Doctor, may ma eat oysters for. supper?"
" Yes : she may eat shells and all, if she likes." 108. My brother
might have made a fortune by his trade. 109. Before you say
or do any thing, reflect what the consequences may be. 110. If
I went by the steamer, I should be sea-sick. 111. You would
arrive sooner if you went by the mail. 112. While you are
passing through the Tunnel under the Thames, hundreds of large
ships are sailing over your head. 113. Since habit is a second
nature, let us early form good ones. 114. The universe is com-
posed of two things only, — mind and matter. 115. In educating
the mind, we should not forget to educate the heart. 116. In
Italy the eye sees much, but the memory more. 117. Victoria
the First, Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Ireland, is the grand-daughter of George the Third, and the
neice of King William the Fourth. 118. The Arabs call the
camel the ship of the desert. 119. Egypt was the cradle of
arts and sciences. 120. There are, in your exercise, as many
errors as words. 121. The prospect brightens as you ascend.
122. Beauty is potent, but money is omnipotent. 123. Though
I had written the letter, I had not forwarded it. 124. He is still
rich, notwithstanding his losses. 125. He has acted an unworthy
part: nevertheless I will assist him. 126. I forgive him, on con-
dition that I never see him more. 127. Tell the truth: other-
wise you will be despised by every one. 128. She was both
young and lovely, and rich also. 129. The earth is divided into
five parts; namely, Europe, Asia, etc. 130. You might learn a
great many things: as, for instance, music, painting, etc. 131. It
has happened just as I expected. 132. Whence comes it that
you are so melancholy? 133. You are young and inexperi-
enced : therefore you ought to be guided by the advice of your
elders. 134. You have promised: then you must perform.
135. Since she has written to you, you must reply.
i
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 43
The pagan gods chose various trees. The oak pleased Jupiter ;
the ash, IMars ; the pine, Cybele ; the poplar-tree, Hercules ; and
the laurel, Apollo. Minerva and Pallas asked why they took
unfruitful trees. Jupiter replied, " On account of the honor."
" Say what you will," added Pallas, '' I like the olive on account
of its fruit." " You are right, dear daughter," replied Jupiter ;
and immediately they all called her the Goddess of Wisdom,
because, if what we do is useless, the honor is vain.
The celebrated Venetian painter, Titian, let his pencil fall
whilst painting the Emperor Charles V. The emperor picked
it up immediately, saying, " A Titian merits to be served by an
emperor." There are few fine galleries where pictures of
Titian and CoiTeggio are not to be found.
Aspasia of Miletus was celebrated in Athens for her wit and
her beauty. She was so skilful in eloquence and politics, that
Socrates himself took lessons of her. She was the teacher and
wife of Pericles, and lived 428 years before the Christian era.
Count Mansfield, one of the greatest captains of the age, had
certain proofs that an apothecary had received a considerable
sum to poison him. He sent for him ; and, when he appeared
before him, he said, " My friend, I cannot believe that a person
whom I have never injured should wish to take my life. If
necessity induces you to commit such a crime, here is money : be
honest."
Whilst a countryman was sowing his field, a young man
passed by, who, trying to be witty, said with rather an insolent
air, " Good man, you have to sow, and ive reap the fruits of your
labors." To which the countryman replied, " It is very prob-
able, sir; for I am sowing hemp."
44 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.
A young man of distinction, having just returned from mak-
ing the tour of Europe, and using the privilege of travellers
to embellish things with the flowers of invention, was telling an
officer, one day, of the magnificent presents which he had
received from different reigning princes ; among others, he men-
tioned a very superb bridle, which had been given to him by the
King of France. " It is so elegantly ornamented with gold and
precious stones," said he, " that I cannot persuade myself to put
it into my horse's mouth ; what can I do with it ? " — " Put it into
your own " (mouth), replied the officer with whom the traveller
was speaking.
Printed by John Wilson & Son.
I
TESTIMONIALS.
New York, February, J 866.
I have used " Otto's French Grammar " since its publication, and
consider it the best book on the subject. It is based on the most
modern grammars pubHshed in Paris ; it is thorough, and full of
idiomatical expressions that can be found in no other work.
LUCIEN OUDIN, A.M.
Instructor of the French Langitage, N. Y, Free Academy.
I have used " Otto's German Grammar." I consider it a very
good book ; its abundant vocabularies, and its fulness in idioms,
are especially useful. The appendix, also, is very valuable, con-
taining, as it does, some of the most popular and characteristic
German poems, which may be turned to many uses.
Feb. 1, 1865. ADOLPH WERNER,
Professor of German, New -York Free Acade7ny.
Washington University St. Louis, Jan. 2, 1865.
Mr. S. R. Urbino,
Dear Sir, — It gives me great pleasure to inform you that I
have introduced your edition of "Otto's German Grammar" in
my classes in this University, and that I regard it as the very best
German grammar, for school purposes, that has thus far come to
my notice. Your Grerman editions of the "Immensee," " Vergiss-
meinnicht," and " Irrlichter," are great favorites among my pupils ;
»nd your " College Series of Modern French Plays," edited by
Mr. Ferdinand Bocher of Harvard College, I regard as very useful
for the recitation-room, and for private reading.
Yours very truly,
B. L. TAFEL, Ph. D.
*rofe$sor of Modern Languages and Comparative Philology in Washingtom
University.
I use " Otto's French and German Grammar " at our College
and the Collegiate School, and can confidently recommend it to all
similar institutions.
October, 1864. H. STIEFELHAGEN,
Frofessor Modern Languages at Eing^s College, Windsor^ Nova Scotia.
1 have examined many works designed for pupils studying the
French Language, and among them consider " Otto's French Con-
Tersation Grammar," revised by Bocher, superior to any other.
I use it in my classes, and take pleasure in recommending it as
admirably adapted for the purpose.
A. WERTHEIM,
Fro/essor of Modern Languages at the University ^ Louisville, Kentucky.
Among many works designed for pupils studying the German
language, I consider " Otto's German Conversation Grammar "
superior to any other. I use it in my classes, and take great
pleasure in recommending it as the best work which has yet been
pubHshed for the use of schools.
A. WERTHEIM,
I^o/essor of Modem Languages, Louisville, Ky.
Boston, March, 1865.
Mr. Uebino, Boston.
My dear Sir, — " Otto's French Grammar " revised by Prof.
F. Bocher, is the best Instructor ever pubUshed ; at present, it sur-
passes Fasquelle and the Ollendorf System, by its simphcity. It
has the advantage of teUing, in one page, what the others require
three or four to express. The rules for the pronunciation do honor
to the reviser ; besides, the lessons are so well placed, and so pro-
gressive, that they bring the student into the difficulties of our
language with very little exertion. At last, permit me to thank
you for taking, by this pubhcation, the most tedious part of our
labor as teacher. It is so clear, tliat any one could teach the
Vrench Language without difficulty.
I remain, Sir, yours,
P. J. BORIS,
Professor of French Language,
ld« Boylston Place, Boston.
Marlbobo', Mass , April 9, 1866
S. R. Urbino, Esq.
Dear Sir, — I used Otto's Grammar in two classes at Edgar-
town High School, — one class quite advanced. The testimonial
of Mr. Hunt and others expresses my sentiments, and you may
use my name if you choose.
Yours truly,
A. H. WENZEL,
I^rincipal qf Marlboro'' High School, late Principal of
Edgarlovm High School.
WoBURN, April 12, 1866.
Mr. Uebino.
Dear Sir, — The opinion of Messrs. Hunt and others with
respect to the merits of Otto's French Grammar, I indorse in
fiiU.
Yours truly,
THOMAS EMERSON.
Master of Woburn High School.
^. R. Urbino, Esq.
My Dear Sir, — I am now using Otto's French Grammar,
revised by Prof. Bocher ; and, so far as we have advanced, I am
better pleased with it than with any other work of the kind which
I have previously used.
Yours truly,
GEORGE N. BIGELOW,
Principat.
State Nor>iAl School, Framinoham,
April 16, 1866.
Boston, April 16.
Mr. Urbino.
Dear Sir, — I have used Otto's French Grammar for several
years in all my schools, -and find it much superior to all those which
I have as yet seen, for the simplicity and clearness with wliich the
rules are explained.
I am happy to say, also, that your series of French Comedies
and your other French books can be highly recommended for school
and private reading : they are well selected.
Yours truly,
O. BESSAU.
Kew Haven, Conn., April, 1866
S. R. Urbino, Esq.
Dear Sir, — I thank yotl for the specimens of your French
and German series, which you have been kind enougli to send me
from time to time. You are doing, as it appears to me, a leal
service to the study of these two languages, especially of thp
German, in our country, by putting at reasonable prices so excel-
lent editions of classical and unexceptionable texts witliin the easy
reach of teachers and scholars. I have used several of them in
my classes, and can heartily recommend them to instructors of
pupils of every grade.
I am, sir, very respectfully,
Your obedient servant,
WILLIAM D. WHITNEY,
Prqf, of Sanscrit and Instructor in Modern Languages at Yale College.
Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdi-
nand Bocher. Boston : S. R. Urbino.
It is with great pleasure that we direct the attention of all lovers
of the French language to this pubUcation. ... It is particularly
fit for a text-book in our schools, for the following reasons : 1, It
is short, without being superficial. 2, It is logically arranged.
3, Its course of instruction is a progress, in a natural gradation,
from the easy to the diflBcult. 4, Theory and practice go hand in
hand. 5, Its outside appearance does credit to the publishers. —
Michigan Teacher, May, 1866.
Bates College, June 9, 1866.
S. R. Urbino, Esq.
Dear Sir, — Will you allow me to thank you for calling my
attention to Otto's French Grammar, edited by Prof Boclier'?
We have used it thus far this year with entire satisfaction. It
will be but simple justice to award it the first place as a text-book
for mature students, at least among all with which I am acquainted,
whether published in this country or in Europe. Its chapter on
Pronunciation is surpassingly complete and practical.
Gratefully yours,
B. F. HAYES.
Enolish High School,
Boston, March 31, 1866.
Mr. Ubbino.
Dear Sir, — After a six months* trial, we conclude that Otto's
French Grammar, revised by Bocher, is superior in all respects
to any other of which we have knowledge.
Very respectfully yours,
E. HUNT,
WILLIAM NICHOLS, Jr.,
ROBERT EDWARD BABSON,
THOMAS SHERWIN, Jr.,
Teachers in Enylish High School.
I fully and emphatically indorse the above opinion respecting
Otto's Erench Grammar.
JOHN D. PHILBRICK,
Superintendent of Public Schools
State Normal School.
Salem, Mass, April 3, 1866.
S. R. Urbino, Esq.
My Dear Sir, — We are using in our school several of your
publications with much satisfaction. This is especially the case
with Otto's French Grammar. As a class text-book, this grammar
is, in my opinion, the best in the market.
For the excellence of your school-books, both as to matter and
typographical beauty, you richly merit the gratitude of teachers
and pupils.
Yours truly,
D. B. HAGAR.
Cambridge, April 6, 1866.
Mr. S. R. Urbino.
Dear Sir, — Otto's French Grammar, revised by Bocher, which
we have been trying with a class in our "shorter course of study,"
has been adopted for all our French classes, in place of Fasquelle's
book. We can heartily indorse the testimonial from the teachers
in t^e Boston High School.
Yours truly,
W. J. ROLFE,
Mailer of iMmbridtje High SchooL
Vassar Female College,
PouGHKEEPSiE, N.Y., April 19, 1866.
Mr Urrino.
Dear Sir, — I am now using many of your publications in
this college, of which I am particulariy pleased with the German
and Italian Grammars, and with Bocher's College Series of French
Plays. Otto's German Grammar, I regard as a model of scholarly
thoroughness and practical utility ; and the other works of your
list, as far as I have examined them, recommend themselves, not
only by the beauty of their mechanical execution, but also by the
intrinsic merit of their redaction.
Very truly yours,
W. I. KNAPP,
Professor of Ancient and Modern Languages and Literature.
State University of Michigaw,
April 20, 1866.
I have adopted Otto's German Conversation Grammar as a text-
book in this University, and have no hesitation in recommending it
as by far the best grammar of the German language published in
this country. No other work with which I am acquainted pre-
sents such a happy combination of what are called the Analytic
and Synthetic methods of instruction. The statement of princi-
ples is clear and philosophical ; and the examples which illustrate
the niceties of their application are all that could be desired.
The French Grammar, by the same author, is similar in plan, and
possesses equal excellences.
I have examined the standard educational works for the study of
foreign languages, published by S. R. Urbino, and take pleasure in
recommending them to all students of the languages and litera-
tures of Europe. They are well selected, amply elucidated by
English notes, and, in convenience of form and excellence of
typographTj are all that could be desired.
E. P. EVAl^S,
Professor of Modern Languages and Literature.
S. R. URBINO, Publisher,
14 Bromfidd Street, Boston-
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of California Library
or to the
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
BIdg. 400, Richnnond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
2-month loans may be renewed by calling
5"/ 6^^642-6753
1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books
to NRLF
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days
prior to due date
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
nCT 1 5 1992
I
YB 41889
U. C. BERK
EL
EY
LIBRARIES
CDbim3DDM
r
7 7 V^/-^
/
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
%
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11